UC-NRLF 


$B    bD'     f^^-^i 


J.  Henry  Senger 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/easygermancomposOOwhitrich 


EASY 
GERMAN  COMPOSITION 


WITH  AN 
ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


BY 

MARIAN    P.    WHITNEY,    Ph.D.    (Yale) 

Professor  of  German  in  Vassar  College 


LILIAN    L.    STROEBE,  Ph.D.    (Heidelberg) 

Associate  Professor  of  German  in  Vassar  College 


NEW  YORK 

HENRY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY 

1912 


Copyright,  1912, 

BY 

HENRY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY 


INTRODUCTION 

This  book  is  intended  to  give  a  complete  review  of  all 
important  German  forms  and  constructions,  in  connection 
with  practice  in  writing  simple  prose  and  the  systematic 
building  up  of  a  good  vocabulary.  It  is  suited  for  use  in 
schools  in  the  second  or  third  year  of  the  study  of  German, 
and  in  colleges  in  the  second  year. 

The  first  part  consists  of  exercises,  each  of  which  is  a 
connected  piece  of  prose  based  on  a  German  model  and 
illustrating  a  particular  point  of  grammar.  Each  treats, 
in  the  form  of  simple  narrative,  conversation  or  letter, 
some  phase  of  daily  life,  the  whole  series  affording  a 
carefully  selected  and  logically  developed  vocabulary  of 
practical,  every-day  German. 

The  book  can  be  used  equally  well  in  teaching  either 
by  the  old  or  the  new  method.  Teachers  who  prefer  to 
have  no  translation  made  from  English  into  German  can 
attain  the  same  results  by  a  careful  study  of  the  German 
model  exercises  with  the  help  of  the  questions  and  by 
exercises  in  "Freie  Reproduktion,''  suggestions  for  which 
may  be  found  in  Part  II.  These  may,  of  course,  be  end- 
lessly varied  and  added  to  by  the  teacher,  who  will  find 
in  Parts  III  and  IV  further  valuable  material  for  repro- 
duction. On  the  other  hand,  those  who  desire  more 
material  for  translation,  will  find  in  Part  V  longer  con- 
nected prose  passages  based  on  the  vocabulary  of  the 
exercises. 

Teachers  are  strongly  advised,  before  allowing  the 
English  exercise  to  be  translated  into  German,  to  have 

ill 

926709 


IV  INTRODUCTION 

the  German  model  carefully  studied  and  discussed  in 
class  with  the  help  of  the  questions,  thus  discouraging  as 
far  as  possible  the  use  of  the  vocabulary. 

An  Abstract  of  German  Grammar  has  been  appended, 
which  gives  in  succinct  form  all  of  both  accidence  and 
syntax  that  it  is  really  necessary  for  the  pupil  to  know. 
It  will  prove  valuable  for  reference  and  for  review  and  it 
is  hoped  that  its  brevity  and  simplicity  will  commend  it 
to  both  pupil  and  teacher.  It  is  our  belief  —  the  result 
of  long  experience  both  in  school  and  college  —  that  too 
much  study  of  difficult  rules  and  exceptions  and  too  little 
practice  in  the  use  of  the  common  forms  is  the  greatest 
fault  of  modern  language  teaching. 

The  material  of  this  book,  privately  printed,  has  been 
tested  by  two  years  of  class-room  work  in  Vassar  and 
Mount  Holyoke  colleges  as  well  as  in  two  good  secondary 
schools,  and  has  had  the  benefit  of  the  criticism  of  excel- 
lent teachers,  both  German  and  American,  to  all  of  whom 
we  here  express  our  gratitude.  Special  thanks  are  due 
to  the  other  members  of  the  Department  of  German  at 
Vassar  College,  also  to  Professor  Davidson  of  Cornell 
University  and  Fraulein  Krause  of  the  Westover  School, 
who  have  read  the  German  carefully  from  the  point  of 
view  of  style  and  idiom. 

The  table  of  declensional  endings  used  in  the  grammar 
is  the  work  of  a  former  colleague,  Mr.  E.  Taylor,  to  whom 
we  here  express  our  gratitude.  We  are  also  under  obliga- 
tions to  Professor  R.  M.  Corwin  of  Yale  University, 
whose  classification  of  the  modal  auxiliaries  we  have 
found  most  useful  in  our  own  work  and  have  therefore 
incorporated  in  this  book. 

M.  P.  W. 

August,  1912.  ^  ^*  ^'  ^' 


CONTENTS 

I.    GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

PAGB 

1.  Strong  Declension,  Class  I.  —  S)er  58efud^  bcl  bcm  ®ro6* 

Dater 1 

2.  Strong  Declension,  Class  II.  —  !5)cr  ^lu^fluQ  int  ^crbft.    .  2 

3.  Strong  Declension,  Class  III.  —  !5)er  ^arj 4 

4.  Weak  Declension,  Class  IV.  —  ^n  ber  grentbenpenfton  .    .  6 

5.  Mixed  Declension.  —  (Sine  Unterl^altunfi  bettn  Sriiftftiirf  .    .  8 

6.  Review.    Exercises  1-6 9 

7.  Commoner  Prepositions.  —  (Sin  ®ang  burd^  Berlin     ...  10 

8.  Adjectives  as  Substantives.  —  3^Tn  X^tattv  in  Hamburg   .  12 

9.  Comparison  of  Adjectives.  —  ^er  ©tnfauf  im  Saben  ...  14 

10.  Numerals  and  Proper  Names.  —  S)cutfc§(anb 16 

11.  Numerals.    Time.  —  ^w  $oteI 17 

12.  Review.    Exercises  7-12 19 

13.  At  —  By.  —  (Sine  UnterlialtunQ  auf  ber  <Stra6e 20 

14.  Personal  Pronouns.  —  3n  ber  ©ci^ulc 22 

15.  PossEssivES.  —  ^in  (SrfunbifiungSbrief 24 

16.  Relatives.  —  ^ie  beutfd^e  <Stunbe 26 

17.  Demonstratives.  —  3)er  Slu^flug 27 

18.  Review.    Exercises  13-18 29 

19.  Interrogatives.  —  !Dcr  Sln^flug  (gortfe^ung) 30 

20.  Indefinite  Pronouns.  —  ^er  SluSftug  (©d^Iufe) 32 

21.  To  — Of  — On.  — Sin  S3rief  au«  Suropa 34 

22.  Passive  Voice.  —  ^ie  (Sinlabung     36 

23.  About  —  For  —  In.  —  !Der  ^ang  in  bie  (^taht 38 

24.  Review.    Exercises  19-24 40 

25.  Separable  Prefixes.  —  SBeint  Hufftejen 41 

26.  Inseparable  Prefixes.  —  ^ei  Zi\(i) 43 

27.  Prefixes  Separable  or  Inseparable.  —  ^ie  ©rbfd^aft     .  45 

V 


VI  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

28.  Subjunctive  Mood.  —  !DaS  X'i^taUt 46 

29.  Subjunctive  in  Indirect  Statement.  —  ^tc  53itd^]^anblun9  48 

30.  Review.     Exercises  25-30 50 

31.  Reflexive  and  Impersonal  Verbs.  —  3)cr  S3cfud^    ...  51 

32.  biirfcn,  fBnncn,  tnBgcn.  —  ^n  ber  ^eiptbliotl^cf 53 

33.  miiffctt,  fotten,  toottcn.  —  !Der  ntifelungene  ^lan 55 

34.  Modal  Auxiliaries.  —  !Dte  Xafd^cnufir 57 

35.  Review.     Exercises  31-35 59 

36.  The  Article.  —  !Dic  3eitung 60 

37.  Genitive  and  Accusative.  —  !5)er  alte  <Sd&ulfrcunb     ...  62 

38.  The  Dative.  —  !^er  ©port 64 

39.  The  Infinitive.  —  !Der  UnfaH 66 

40.  Dependent  Clauses.  —  !Dic  gatnilic 68 

41.  Attributive  Phrases.  —  !Der  ©otte^bicnft     . 70 

42.  Review.     Exercises  36-42 71 

43.  General  Review  I,  letter 73 

44.  General  Review  II,  conversation 73 

45.  General  Review  III,  letter 74 

46.  General  Review  IV,  conversation 75 

47.  General  Review  V,  narrative 75 

48.  General  Review  VI,  narrative 77 

II.    ^retc  Hcprobu!tton 

A.  3WiinbU(§c  utib  fd^riftlicgc  ftbungen  sur  SStcbcrl^oIung  .....  79 

B.  ^ufantmenl^iinGcnbc   (Srgiil^Iunfi,   milnblid^   unb  fd^riftlid^,  ilber 

cificnc  (Srlebniffe 79 

III.    Deutfd?Ianb 

1.  ®eofirap]^tf(5 81 

2.  W^m 82 

3.  ^iftorifd^ 84 

IV.    TlntfboUn 

3uTn  tnttnblld&cn  unb  fc^rtftlid^cn  ®cbrau(5 S6 


CONTENTS  Vll 

V.    A  SUMMER  IN  GERMANY 

For  translation  into  German  page 

1.  Letter  op  Inquiry 89 

2.  Answer 90 

3.  Arrival  in  Berlin,  conversation 91 

4.  Letter  from  Mrs.  Muller  to  her  Sister 93 

5.  A  Trip  to  the  Black  Forest,  narrative      95 


VI.    ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

1.  Capitals 99 

2.  Punctuation  and  Division  into  Syllables 99 

3.  Gender  and  Case 99 

4.  German  Declensional  Endings 100 

5.  Adjectives 102 

6.  Numerals 103 

7.  Personal  Pronouns 104 

8.  possessives 105 

9.  Demonstratives 106 

10.  Interrogatives 106 

11.  Relatives 107 

12.  Indefinite  Pronouns 108 

13.  Conjugation  of  Verbs 109 

14.  Tense  Endings 110 

15.  Passive  Voice Ill 

16.  Compound  Verbs 112 

17.  Reflexive  Conjugation 113 

18.  Impersonal  Verbs 113 

19.  Modal  Auxiliaries 113 

20.  Use  of  the  Articles 116 

21.  The  Genitive 117 

22.  The  Dative 117 

23.  The  Accusative 117 

24.  The  Indicative 118 


Vlll  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

25.  The  Subjunctive 118 

26.  The  Infinitive 119 

27.  The  Participles 120 

28.  Order  of  the  Sentence 120 

29.  &n  AND  §cr 121 

30.  Forms  of  Address 121 

31.  Prepositions 122 

Classified  List  of  Old  (or  Strong)  and  Irregular  Verbs  123 
Alphabetical  List  of  Old  (or  Strong)  and  Irregular 

Verbs 125 

List  of  Abbreviations 132 

German-English  Vocabulary 133 

English-German  Vocabulary 155 


I.   German  and  English.  Exercises 

1.  S)er  SBefudft  6ci  bcm  ©rafebatcr  —  The  Visit  to 
Grandfather 

Nouns  of  the  Strong  Declension,  Class  I 
Grammar,  4,  set  VI,  1,  and  28 

o)  Sefeten  ©onttner  toax  id^  bet  meinem  ©rofebater  gu  SBefu^ 
ber  in  bent  grofeett  ©ebttube  ttt  ber  S^di^e  be^  ^lofter^  tDol&ttt.  @r 
tft  ber  3Sater  tneitter  9Kutter  uttb  ein  befattttter  ©d^rtftfteller* 
(Sitter  ber  Sriiber  tttettter  SWutter  tcol^ttt  aud^  f)ter  uttb  ttteitte 
attberett  Otttel  mol^ttett  itt  bettt  tta(|ftett  S)orfc§ett*  ®te  toavm  5 
Slrbetter  uttb  ftnb  jefet  93eftfeer  etne^  grogen  Saben^  bort*  Se^ten 
©otntner  l^atte  tnetn  ®ro6t)ater  Sefud^  bon  itod  SItnerifanem,  btc 
itt  ben  bret  t)orberen  3tntntem  n^ol^nten,  S5on  bort  \)at  man  einen 
fel^r  fd^onen  ^M  auf  bie  nal^en  ^tigel  unb  ba^  feme  ©ebirge^ 
©erabe  unter  bent  genfter  ift  ber  fd^one,  alte  S)orfbrunnen,  beffen  10 
3Baffer  ttjir  alle  fef)r  geme  trinfen.  ®er  eine  ber  §lntertfaner  l^atte 
feine  betben  Jod^ter  bei  ftd^,  bie  fef)r  geme  ^pfel  in  bent  ©arten 
a^en*  Sie  Slnterifaner  gingen  jeben  Jag  p  einetn  8ef)rer,  unt 
beutfd^  gu  lemen,  unb  n)aren  fel^r  fleifeige  ©driller,  @ie  tt)aren 
aud^  beibe  gute  3ager  unb  fannten  alle  SJogeL  9^eben  un^  iDol^nte  15 
ein  alter  9KaIer,  ein  SngKnber,  ntit  bent  bie  sn)ei  2Kdbd§en  oft 
fpajieren  fiingen^ 

b)  h  SBo  maren  ©ie  lefeten  ©ontnter?    2.  93efd^reiben  ©ie 
ba^  ©au^  3f)re^  ©ro^bater^.    3.  Sefd^reiben  ©ie  bie  2tnk  in 
bent  ©orfd^en*    4.  SBa^  taten  bie  Slnterifaner?    5,  SBa^  taten  20 
bie  Jod^ter  be^  Slnterifaner^?    6*  Sefd^reiben  ©ie  S^xm  "ifla^^ 
hoxxt* 

1 


2        GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

c)  My  brother  is  a  painter  and  in  summer  he  always  lives 
in  an  old  monastery  in  the  mountains.  Many  hunters 
and  painters  live  there  in  summer,  because  the  hills  and 
moimtaiiis  are'Bo  beautiful.  The  buildings  of  the  mon- 
5  astery  are  ifi  a  little  village  and  from  the  front  windows 
of  his  room  my  brother  has  a  beautiful  view  of  the  distant 
mountains.  He  can  also  see  the  village  fountain  and  the 
pretty  girls  who  come  to  get  water  there.  He  likes  to 
paint  the  pretty  village  girls  and  the  workmen  and  -the 

lo  old  teacher  with  his  little  pupils,  or  the  great  garden 
behind  the  monastery  and  the  beautiful  hills  near  by. 
His  little  daughters  like  to  sit  in  this  garden,  or  to  visit 
the  little  shop,  whose  owner  gives  them  very  good  apples 
to  eat.     The  Englishmen  who  Uve  in  the  front  rooms  of 

IS  the  monastery  are  hunters  and  go  into  the  mountains  to 
shoot  birds,  but  the  American  who  lives  in  the  rooms 
under  them  is  an  author.^  He  has  come  here^  to  learn 
German  and  is  very  industrious.  He  goes  every  day  to 
the  old  teacher,  and  he  also  often  visits  the  owner  of  these 

20  buildings  and  talks  with  him  and  his  old  father  and  mother. 
He  talks  with  the  workmen  in  the  httle  shops  and  with 
the  girls  at  the  fountain,  and  he  knows  all  the  painters 
and  hunters  and  often  goes  to  walk  with  them. 

2.  ^er  Slu^ffug  tm  ^crfift  —  An  Autumn  Excursion 

Nouns  of  the  Strong  Declension,  Class  II 
Grammar,  4,  set  VI,  2 

a)  SSor  alDci  SWonaten  Gineen  mir  auf  einiGC  Ta^t  in  bie  93crgc, 
25  (S^  tt)ar  tin  tt)unbcrf(^oner  §erbft,  unb  bie  Sautnc  leud^tcten  in 
ben  bunteften  garben.    2lm  2:age  wax  bie  Suft  nod^  n)arm,  aber 
1  Gram.  20,  II.  2  Gram.  29. 


NOUNS  OF  THE  STRONG  DECLENSION       3 

bic  31'd^it  n3urben  fd^on  fe^r  lui)l  3n  bem  §oteI,  tt)o  mir  njo^n^ 
ten,  tDarcn  fei^r  t)iele  ©iifte,  unb  fialb  fanb  i(5  einige  greunbe* 
aWeinc  yia(i)bavn  iDaren  gmei  ©ol^tie  eine^  Offi^ier^,  bie  ic^  fel&r 
unterfialtenb  fanb,  ®ie  seigten  mir  alle^,  bie  ^uf)e  unb  'iPferbe  im 
(StaUe,  bie  §unbe  im  §of  unb  bie  fd^onen  33(iume  im  Obftgarten.  5 
3m  'iParf  gab  e^  bie  fd^onften  *ipia^e  mit  Jifd^en,  S3anfen  unb 
©tiil^Ien;  ba  fafeen  mir  im  S)uft  ber  Jannenbciume  unb  t)on  bort 
fonnten  tt)ir  auf  ben  glu^  mit  feinen  ©d^iffen  unb  f  al^nen  fiinab^^ 
fef)en,  @^  tat  mir  fefir  leib,  ba^  inir  fo  balb  abreifen  mugtem 
^um  abfc^ieb  fd^iittelten  tDir  un^  l^er^lid^  bie  §(inbe,  unb  lange  10 
nod^  minften  meine  greunbe  un^  au^  ber  geme  mit  if)ren  §iiten 
unb  ©todfen  gu.  2Iuf  ber  §eimreife  befud^ten  tijir  nod^  einige 
©tabte  unb  ate  id&  nad^  §aufe  lam,  fanb  id&  bort  fd^on  itod 
93riefe  bon  meinen  neuen  greunben, 

b)  h  93efd^reiben  ©ie  ben  ^erbft  in  ben  SBergen,    2.  S5e*  15 
fd^reiben  ©ie  bie  Seute  in  bem  §oteL    3,  SBol^in  fiil^rten  ©ie 
3^re  greunbe?    4.  Sefd^reiben  ©ie  ben  'iparf.    5.  SBarum  tat 
e^  ^l^nen  leib,  absureifen?    6.  33efd^reiben  ©ie  bie  §eimreife. 

c)  Every  autumn  I  go  with  my  brother  and  spend  two 
months  with  my  grandfather  and  grandmother,  who  live  20 
in  a  little  town  in  the  mountains.    As  they  are  very  old 
and  as  my  uncle  and  his  two  sons  live  with  them,  we  gen- 
erally stay  at  a  hotel  near  by.    There  are  many  guests 
in  the  hotel,  but  we  know  them  all  and  they  are  our  friends. 
Behind  the  hotel  is  a  large  park;  under  the  trees  stand  25 
tables,  benches  and  chairs,  and  when  the  days  are  warm 
we  can  always  find  a  cool  place  there.    From  this  park 
we  can  look  down  at  the  river  and  wave  our  hats  or  our 
hands  to  the  big  boats.     It  is  amusing  to  go  to  my  grand- 
father's stables  and  to  see  his  horses  and  cows  and  to  play  30 
with  the  big  dogs  in  the  courtyard.     We  like  to  shake 
the  trees  in  the  orchard  and  to  eat  the  big  red  apples. 


4        GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

This  year  we  shall  visit  some  cities  which  I  have  never 
seen  before,  for  letters  have  come  from  two  of  my  micle's 
friends^  who  are  officers  and  who  want  to  take  the  journey 
home  with  us.  We  must  set  out  at  once,  for  soon  the 
5  days  will  be  very  short  and  the  nights  very  cool  and  then 
it  is  not  so  beautiful  in  the  mountains.  I  am  sorry  that 
I  shall  not  see  you  again  before  we  start.  We  must  shake 
hands  and  take  leave  of  one  another.  I  will  write  you  a 
letter  from  every  town  we  visit  on  the  journey. 


3.  S)cr  ^ars  —  The  Harz  Mountains 

Nouns  of  the  Strong  Declension,  Class  III 
Grammar,  4,  set  VI,  3 

lo  a)  @^  gibt  nid^t^  ©d^oncrc^  ate  frembe  ?anbcr  fcnncn  gu  lemcn 
unb  burd^  33erg  utib  Jal  unb  SBalb  unb  gelb  p  atcl^en.  Scfete^ 
3al)x  ntad^ten  mir  eincn  Slu^flug  mit  unfercn  %at)vvabexn  in  bie 
fd^oncn  ^erge  unb  Jaler  be^  §ar^e^.  ®  triar  fptit  im  §erbft; 
bie  2B(iIber  fitxQen  fd^on  an,  if)V  2anb  p  berltercn,  unb  ber  S3obcn 

15  toar  mit  roten  unb  gclben  S3Iattem  behtdt  3)cr  §ars  ift  fein 
rcid^e^  ?anb.  ®te  gelber  fd^tenen  unfrud^tbar,  h)ir  faf)en  arm- 
lid^c  3)orfer,  Heine  ^aufer  mit  niebrigen  Sad^em.  ©ie  @in^ 
tnof)ner  l^atten  !etne  9?eid&tumer  gefammelt;  bie  ^inber  liefen 
barfufe  umfier  unb  l^atten  grofee  ?od^er  in  ben  ^leibem,  troijbem 

2o  fangen  fie  frol^Itd^e  ?ieber.  2Iud^  einige  ©d^Ioffer  fallen  n)ir,  bie 
toit  Slefter  an  ben  gelfen  l^ingen,  unb  im  SKonbenfd^ein  glaubten 
mir  bie  ©etfter  ber  toten  3titter  i^re  ©d^merter  fd^mingen  ^u  fel^en. 
SBir  ilbemad^teten  in  ber  9l(il^e  ber  ©d^Ioffer  in  einem  2Birt^=^ 
f)an^,  ba^  in  unferen  SReifelianbbiid^em  empfof)Ien  h)ar.    Sort 

25  a^en  mir  gier,  gleifd^  unb  S3rot  unb  leerten  unfere  ©Ittfer  auf 

»  Gram.  21e. 


NOUNS   OF  THE   STRONG  DECLENSION  5 

ha^  SBol^I  unferer  greunbc  in  ber  §etmat,  bcnen  tDir  ami)  einige 
^oftfarten  unb  S3ilber  fanbten^ 

b)  L  93efd^retben  ©ie  ben  §ar^  unb  feine  S3cn)of)ncr.    2.  2Bo 
ilbcmad^tcten  ©te?    3»  3Bo  lag  ba^  SBirt^l^au^  unb  mol^er 
tou^ten  ©ie  etma^  barliber?    4,  SBomit  befd^cifttgten  ©ie  ftd^  in   5 
bent  SBirt^f)au^?    5,  S3efd^reiben  ©ie  bie  ©d^Ioffer,  h)eld^e  ©ie 
gefel^en  f)aben» 

c)  In  the  larger  cities  of  Germany  and  of  all  the  countries 
of  Europe  one  sees  many  Englishmen  and  Americans  with 
their  guide  books.  But  when  I  take  a  journey  in  summer  lo 
I  want  to  see  mountains  and  valleys  and  forests.  I  go  to 
the  Harz  Mountains  or  to  the  Black  Forest  and  travel 
alone  on  foot  or  on  my  wheel,  and  I  spend  the  nights  in 
the  httle  villages.  There  I  find  very  good  inns,  although 
they  are  not  recommended  in  the  guide  books.  After  I  is 
have  eaten  my  fresh  eggs  and  good  bread  and  drunk  a 
glass  of  milk,^  I  sit  on  the  bench  outside  the  door  and  talk 
with  the  landlady,  while  she  mends  the  holes  in  her  chil- 
drens'  clothes.  Before  the  low  houses,  with  their  great 
roofs  and  little  windows,  the  men  and  women  sit  and  talk  20 
or  sing  their  old  songs  and  the  children  play  merrily. 
Sometimes  they  tell  me  stories  of  the  old  castles  which 
still  stand  in  the  valleys,  or  hang  like  nests  on  the  cliffs, 
and  of  the  knights  who  once  lived  in  them,  and  the  children 
still  believe  that  they  can  see  the  ghosts  of  those  old  25 
knights  by  moonlight  and  even  hear  their  swords  rattle. 
Though  the  inhabitants  have  not  gathered  great  riches, 
they  are  not  poor,  and  on  Sundays  the  men,  women  and 
children  all  wear  gay  clothes  with  silver  buttons. 

1  Gram.  6,  116. 


b        GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

*•  Stt  ber  fJrcmbctHJCtifitm  —  In  a  Boarding-House 

Nouns  of  the  Weak  Declension 
Grammar,  4,  set  VI,  4 

a)  SKarburg  an  ber  ?al^n, 

SBil^elmftrafee  m\  12,  II  i, 
3)en  t)ierten  2«ai,  1910. 
?icbcr  J^rcunb! 
5     ©onntag  bin  id^  l^ter  angefomnten,  nnb  nun  tt)Ul  i^  S)tr  glcid^ 
don  nteinen  Srfal^runQcn  crgal^Ien*    ©^  gibt  fel^r  biele  nette  ga== 
mtlien  f)ier,  tDcId^e  ^enfionen  l^alten,  unb  burd^  bie  B^itung  fanb 
id^  balb,  tt)a^  id^  fud^te.    3d^  iDofine  bier  S^reppen  l^od^  mit  2lu^^ 
ftd^t  auf  bie  ^al^nbriidfe*    Sie  53eftfeerin,  bie  ©d^mefter  eine^ 

lo  Uniberfitat^profeffor^,  ift  bie  SBitme  eine^  Slbbofaten,  ber  aud^ 
^rftftbent  einer  Slftiengefellfd^aft  gemefen  toax.  ^ur^  t)or  feinem 
2:obe  berloren  fie  all  i^r  ®elb,  !Der  filtefte  ©ol^n  bient  gerabe 
bei  ben  ©olbaten  unb  ift  ber  §elb  einer  ?iebe^gefd§id^te,  inobon 
td&  fd^on  atlerlei  gel^ort  f)abe,    2)ie  beiben  S:od^ter  finb  fe^r  nette 

IS  !Danten,  Seibe  finb  ?ef)rerinnen.  S)ie  Sitefte  f)at  eine  gute 
©timme  unb  gibt  9Kufifftunben.  35ie  st^eite  2^od§ter  ift  ®prad^= 
lei&rerin*  3^  nef)me  brei  ©tunben  bie  3Bod^e  bei  il^r  unb  l^abe 
fet)r  biele  ^au^arbeiten  gu  madden,  benn  fie  gibt  mir  fotDol^I  nttlnb= 
lid^e  ate  aud^  fd^riftlid^e  Slufgaben.    ©ie  smei  jiingften  ©ol&ne  finb 

2o  nette  ^naben  Don  fieben  unb  neun  3al^ren.  (S^  leben  nod^  eine 
aWenge  SWenfd^en  im  §au^,  Sl^riften  unb  3uben,  aud^  gmei  anbere 
©tubenten  unb  jtDei  ©tubentinnen,  ntit  benen  id^  taglid^  93orIe^ 
fungen  an  ber  Uniberfitttt  ^5re,  6^  gefclHt  mir  mirftid^  fel^r  gut 
l&ier.    3d)  l^abe  fd^on  lange  teine  9?ad)rid^ten  bon  ®ir  befonxnten, 

25  aber  id^  l^offe,  S)u  n)irft  Seine  Slbfid^t,  mid^  gu  befud^en,  balb 

augfUl^ren* 

©rttfee  bie  S)einigen  f)erslid^! 

©tet^  J)ein  treuer  ®arL 
i?lc«:  ^nmmtx  ghjfilf,  jtociter  ©tocf. 


NOUNS   OF   THE   WEAK   DECLENSION  7 

b)  1.  28a^  miffen  ©ie  iiber  bte  ©tabt  SWarburg?  2.  SBarutn 
fitng  3f)t^  greunb  nad^  2)Zarburg?  3.  33efci^reiben  ©ie  bie  ^en* 
fion,  tDo  er  tDo^inte?  4.  SBa^  iDiffen  ©ie  ilber  bie  gatnilie? 
5«  SBa^  tut  ^\)v  greunb,  um  t)iel  beutfd^  ju  lernen? 

c)  Frankfort  on  the  Oder,  5 

27  Charles  Street, 

..     ,       ....     -r.  Jan.  6, 1908. 

My  dear  Miss  B., 

I  am  glad  that  you  are  going  to  carry  out  your  intention 
of  spending  a  summer  in  Marburg.  I  had  very  pleasant  lo 
experiences  there  last  year  and  I  have  many  friends  there 
among  the  students  and  professors.  You  cannot  live  in 
the  boarding-house  where  I  lived,  for  its  owner  was  a 
widow  and  she  has  now  married  a  very  rich  man,  a  Jew, 
who  is  president  of  a  great  joint  stock  company.  I  never  is 
saw  the  hero  of  this  love  story,  but  one  of  my  friends 
among  the  students  (/.)  sent  me  news  of  it.  I  can  recom- 
mend to  you  a  family  boarding-house  in  Williams  Street,^ 
which  my  two  teachers  (/.)  own.  It  is  in  the  third  story 
of  a  nice  new  house,  and  very  near  the  University.  The  20 
beautiful  view  of  the  old  castle  and  of  the  two  bridges 
over  the  Lahn  will  certainly  please  you.  As  you  have  a 
beautiful  voice,  you  will  certainly  take  music  lessons  and 
there  are  many  good  music  teachers  in  Marburg.  You 
must  also  take  several  German  lessons  a  week,  do  a  great  25 
deal  of  oral  and  written  work,  go  to  lectures  at  the  Uni- 
versity, talk  German  with  the  students,  visit  the  families 
of  the  professors  and  read  the  papers  daily.  Then  you 
will  learn  a  great  deal  of  German  in  six  weeks. 

Remember  me  to  your  mother  and  to  your  brother,  the  30 
lawyer,  whom  I  saw  last  year  in  New  York. 

Yours  as  ever,  Mary. 
*  Gram.  20,  Ic. 


8        GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

5.  @inc  UntcrliaWung  6cint  fjru^ftudf  —  A  Conversation 
at  the  Breakfast  Table 

Nouns  of  the  Mixed  Declension 
Grammar,  4  note  ^  and  30 

a)  21,  —  ©uten  SWorgen,  §err  ^rofeffor,  n)ic  l^aben  ©tc 
fiefd^Iafen?  23.  —  3)anfe  fe^r,  Qnabige  grau,  nid^t  fe^r  gut* 
3d^  I)abe  f(|Imtme  ^opffd^mersen.  Sl»  —  2(d^,  ba^  tut  mir  fel^r 
leib.    ©ie  {)aben  getDife  3f)re  Slugen  au  fel^r  mit  3f)ren  ©tubien 

5  angeftrengt.  S.  —  23ieIIeid^t,  id^  mar  fel^r  fleifeig  geftem;  mor^ 
gen^  ging  id^  in  ^tDci  2)?ufeen,  tnittag^  faf)  id^  mir  bte  ?a6oratorten 
an,  unb  abenb^  la^  td^  nod^  im  23ett  ^iDci  furge  ©ranten  unb  fing 
an,  ein  23ud^  iiber  ba^  Seben  be^  beutfd^en  23auer^  ^u  ftubieren, 
?i  —  S)a^  ift  geiDife  ^n  Diel  fiir  einen  Jag.    Srinnern  ©ie  fid^ 

lo  nid)t  be^  ^err^n,  ben  ©ie  geftem  bei  mir  fa^en?  @r  ift  einer 
nnferer  yiad^bavn,  §err  ©oftor  ©df^mibt.  Sr  ift  ein  fef)r  guter 
?Iugen=  unb  Otjxmaxit  ©ie  foHten  ^u  if)m  gef)en.  @r  h)irb  ge^ 
h)i6  eth)a6  filr  ©ie  tun  tonnen.  23.  —  §aben  ©ie  nid^t  einen 
23etter  biefe^  9^amen^,  gnabige  gran?    31.  —  ©emife,  er  ift 

IS  ^rofeffor  an  nnferer  Uniberfitat,  aber  er  ift  gerabe  in  ben  2$er= 
einigten  ©taaten  mit  gh)ei  anberen  §erren  t)on  l^ier.  S^  tioax 
immer  ber  SBunfd^  feine^  ^er^en^  gemefen,  j[ene^  ?anb  fennen  gu 
lemen.  23.  —  Sa6  ift  gemig  fef)r  intereffant  fiir  i^n.  3d^ 
tDerbe  Q\)vtm  $Kate  folgen  unb  gleid^  gu  ^erm  ©oftor  ©d^mibt 

2o  gef)en.  21.  —  ®a^  ift  gut.  3d&  Mnfd&e  ^l^nen  Don  ^er^en 
gute  23effemng!    ©uten  SD?orgen. 

b)  1.  23efd^reiben  ©ie  ben  §erm  unb  bie  J)ame,  meld^e  fid& 
unterf)atten.  2,  SBa^  tat  §err  ^rofeffor  geftern?  3.  SBeld^en 
9iat  gibt  il^m  bie  3)ame  be^  §aufe^?    4.  SBarum  fd^idtt  fie  i^n 

25  nid^t  gu  il^rem  2Setter?    5.  2Bo  mol^nt  ber  2lr3t? 

c)  A.  —  Good  morning,  Mr.  Smith.  B.  —  Good  morn- 
ing, madam.    Can  you  recommend  a  good  oculist  to  me? 


REVIEW  9 

I  have  a  great  deal  of  pain  in  my  eyes  and,  as  I  come  from 
the  United  States,  I  do  not  know  the  names  of  any  doctors 
here.  A.  —  I  am  sorry  that  you  have  strained  your  eyes, 
but  you  certainly  read  and  study  too  much.  Mornings 
you  work  in  the  laboratories,  afternoons  you  visit  the  5 
museums  and  every  evening  you  go  to  the  theater.  No 
oculist  can  help  you,  if  you  use  your  eyes  so  much.  B,  — 
Perhaps  I  work  too  much,  but  it  has  always  been  the  wish 
of  my  heart  to  study  in  a  German  university.  And  I 
want  also  to  know  the  best  German  plays  and  pictures,  10 
so  I  must  go  to  the  museums  and  to  the  theaters.  A.  —  I 
advise  you  to  study  less  and  not  to  read  in  bed.  Go  to 
walk  with  the  two  gentlemen  who  visit  you  so  often.  Are 
they  not  your  cousins?  B,  —  No,  they  are  neighbors  of 
mine^  and  professors  at  the  university  where  I  began  15 
my  studies.  I  will  follow  yotir  advice  and  make  an  excur- 
sion with  them  next  week.  I  want  to  become  acquainted 
with  the  German  mountains  and  the  German  peasants. 
A.  —  That  will  be  very  interesting  for  you.  I  am  glad 
that  you  are  going  away  and  I  wish  with  all  my  heart  20 
that  you  may  get  better.  B,  —  Thank  you,  madam;  I 
will  remember  your  good  advice. 

6.  Review 

Based  on  Exercises  1-6 

Last  spring  I  became  acquainted  with  two  of  the  stu- 
dents (/.)  at  the  university  here.     They  told  me  much 
about  the  professors,  the  lectures  and  the  work  in  the  25 
laboratories.     They  are  the  daughters  of  a  well-known 
oculist  and  they  are  going  to  be  teachers.     They  live  in  a 

1  Gram.  8,  lid. 


10  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

beautiful  house  and  they  have  a  large  garden  with  big 
fir-trees  and  an  interesting  old  well.  From  the  front 
windows  of  their  house  one  has  a  lovely  view  of  the  distant 
mountains  and  of  the  river  with  its  bridges.  Yesterday 
5  we  made  an  excursion  together  to  an  old  castle  where 
their  brother,  a  famous  author,  lives.  He  told  us  stories 
about  the  old  heroes  and  showed  us  several  old  swords. 
He  had  two  young  visitors  from  the  United  States,  one  is 
the  son  of  a  lawyer  and  the  other  the  son  of  the  president 

lo  of  a  joint  stock  company,  who  is  very  rich.  It  has  always 
been  the  wish  of  their  hearts  to  see  Germany  and  they 
like  it  very  much  here.  They  are  both  hunters  and  they 
already  know  all  the  birds  in  our  mountains.  Behind 
the  castle  are  the  stables,  where  we  saw  the  dogs  and  the 

15  beautiful  horses.  We  took  our  supper  in  the  park,  where 
we  could  look  down  on  the  river.  We  ate  eggs,  meat  and 
bread  and  drank  several  glasses  of  milk.  On  our  way 
home  we  saw  two  little  villages  and  we  met  many  peasants 
who  wore  gay  clothes  with  silver  buttons.     One  of  my 

20  friends  has  a  very  good  voice  and  she  sang  us  some  beauti- 
ful songs.  It  was  a  perfect  autumn  evening  and  not  at 
all  cold,  although  the  trees  had  begun  to  lose  their  leaves. 
I  shall  always  remember  this  excursion  with  great  pleasure. 

7.  @in  &anq  imd}  SBcrlin  —  A  Walk  in  Berlin 

The  Commoner  Prepositions 
Grammar,  31 

a)  SWein  {unger,  beutfd^er  greunb  fiatte  un^  t)erfprod^en,  mdj 

25  bcr  ©d^ule  mit  un^  gu  gefien  unb  un^  Berlin  gu  geigen.    SSir 

n)o]^nen  ienfeit^  be^  Jtergarten^  nid^t  meit  t)on  einer  grofeen  ^a^ 

feme,  tDO  iDtr  oft  bie  Offi^iere  in  roten  dtodm  iiber  bag  gelb  in 


THE   COMMONER   PREPOSITIONS  11 

ben  SBalb  j^inein  auf  bie  ^agb  reiteti  fe^en,  SBir  fuf)ren  ici^t  mit 
ber  eleftrifd^en  ©trafeenbalfin  mitten  burd^  ben  $arf  bi^  gum 
SSranbenburger  2^or,  tr)o  tt)tr  au^ftiegen*  93on  tDeitent  fallen  tt)ir 
bie  ©iege^atlee,  eine  breite  ©trafee,  bie  anf  beiben  ©eiten  mit 
einer  langen  9teif)e  t)on  aWarmorgmppen  fiefd^mildt  ift»  S)ann  s 
gingen  tt)ir  bie  beru()mtefte  ©trafee  SSerlin^  „Unter  ben  ?inben" 
entlang,  an  ber  Uniberfitcit  unb  an  bem  ©enfmal  griebrid)6  be^ 
©rofeen  borbei*  2lm  oftlid^en  (Snbe  biefer  ©trafee  liegt  ba^  St'6- 
nigli($e  ©d^lofe,  ein  fe{)r  einfad^e^  ©ebdnbe,  an  einem  3lrm  ber 
©pree*  Sang^  be6  glnffe^  liegt  ber  ciltefte  Jeil  be6  ©d)Ioffe^,  lo 
ber  iiber  500  3al)re  alt  ift»  SBir  gingen  iiber  bie  33rn(f e  anf  einen 
^lafe  mit  einem  fc^onen  ©pringbmnnen;  in  einiger  ©ntfemnng 
l^inter  nn^  faljen  mir  bie  3:nrme  be^  ncnen  ®ome^.  3)a  fing  e6 
plo^Iid)  an,  fef)r  ^n  regnen,  nnb  n)ir  fliid^teten  nn^  in  eine  ^on- 
bitorei,  bie  tDir  bort  in  ber  9ial)e  fanben,  15 

b)  L  SBo  tnol^nen  ©ie  in  S3erlin?  2.  SBie  fommen  ©ie  t)on 
Ql^rer  SBo^nnng  pm  Sranbenbnrger  Xov?  3*  S3e[d^reiben  ©ie 
bie  bern{)mtefte  ©trafee  S3erlin^,  4.  SBa^  ift  bie  ©iege^atlce? 
5.  SBo  liegt  ba^  ^oniglid^e  ©d^Io^?  6*  SBamm  gingen  ©ie  in 
eine  ^onbitorei?  20 

c)  Berlin,  October  16,  1909, 

12  Bismarck  Street,  second  story. 
My  dear  Charles, 

I  have  not  forgotten  my  promise  to  write  to  you  and 
tell  you  what  we  are  seeing  and  doing  in  Berlin.  We  live  25 
at  the  western  end  of  the  city,  not  far  from  the  old  palace. 
Our  school  is  on  a  small  street;  in  order  to  get  there  we 
have  to  go  along  an  arm  of  the  Spree  and  past  the  Royal 
Palace  and  the  new  cathedral.  Beyond  the  school  are 
some  large  barracks  and  we  often  see  the  soldiers  drilling  30 
on  the  square  behind  the  barracks  or  the  officers  in  their 
gay  uniforms  riding  across  the  fields.     Every  afternoon 


12       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

after  school  we  take  a  walk  with  our  teacher  and  he  shows 
us  the  interesting  buildings  and  monuments  which  adorn 
Berlin.  Sometimes  we  ride  in  the  electric  cars  right 
through  the  city  to  the  '-Tiergarten/'  a  beautiful  park 
S  which  Ues  beyond  the  Brandenburg  Gate.  There  we  get 
out  and  walk  along  the  Avenue  of  Victory,  past  the  long 
rows  of  marble  statues  and  then  along  the  little  river  into 
the  beautiful  woods.  Sometimes  we  walk  through  the 
finest  street  in  Berlin,   '*  Under  the  Lindens.''    On  one 

lo  side  is  the  university,  on  the  other  the  simple  palace  of 
the  old  Emperor  William  and  between  them  the  famous 
monument  of  Frederick  the  Great.  We  often  go  into  a 
little  confectioner's  shop  near  by  and  drink  coffee  and  eat 
cake.    Last  week  we  went  into  the  Royal  Palace.    While 

15  we  were  there  it  began  to  rain  and  we  had  to  run  across  the 
big  square  and  take  refuge  in  the  cathedral,  for  one  cannot 
stay  in  the  palace  after  five  o'clock. 
Remember  me  kindly  to  your  family. 

Yours  ever, 

20  Henry. 

8.  Sm  Zfitattt  in  Hamburg  —  At  the  Theater  in  Hamburg 

Adjectives  used  as  Substantives 
Grammar,  6,  I,  II. 

a)  (S^  toot  cin  unt)erGc6Iid&cr  Slnblid  fiir  §crm  Sromn,  ate 
ber  grofec  Ogcanbampfer  langfaTtt  au6  betn  9lelD  2)orfer  §afcn 
f)erau^fu{)r.  S^ad^  neuntagigcr,  fd^oncr  JReife  lanbcte  ba^  (Sd^iff 
in  ^ambnrg.  2lrm  nnb  didd),  ©rofe  nnb  ^lein  tnar  braufeen  an 
25  bent  Sanbnnfi^pla^  ber  §antbnr9=2lnierifa  ?tnie,  nnt  bic  SInfunft 
be^  S)ampfer6  Sn  fef)en.  §crr  Sroinn  n)oIlte  siinad^ft  etnigc 
Jagc  in  ^antburg  bicibcn,  um  alle^  ©d^onc  bort  an^nfe^en* 
©liicflid^crtocifc  l^atte  cr  greunbe  unb  SSerlDanbte  unter  ben 


ADJECTIVES   USED   AS   SUBSTANTIVES  13 

^ambursem.  S)en  erften  Slbenb  tooUU  er  ttma^  ^'ntereffanteg 
fef)en,  fo  ging  er  mit  einem  feiner  S3efannten  in  ba^  Jlieater* 
$D?an  gab  ein  neue^  realiftifd^e^  3)rama,  ba^  in  ganj  ©eutfd^Ianb 
grofee^  2luffe{)en  erregt  l^atte,  §alb  Hamburg  tDar  im  2:f)eater* 
@6  maren  aud^  Diele  gremben  ba,  unb  §err  Sromn  fa^  einige  ber  5 
SKeifenben,  bie  er  auf  ber  Uberfaf)rt  {)atte  fennen  lemen*  S)a^ 
©tild  gefiel  i{)m  nid^t  befonber^;  feine  SSermanbten  fanben  siDar, 
c^  ent^alte  t)iel  5Reue6  unb  2Baf)re^,  aber  §err  S3rolDn  ermiberte 
mie  ?efftng,  bafe  ba^  9leue  nid^t  mal^r  unb  ba^  2Baf)re  nid^t  neu  fei: 
feiner  Slnfid^t  nad^  follte  ein  ©id^ter  ba^  §of)e  unb  ®ble  unb  10 
nidjt  ba^  ©emeine  unb  Sltttttglid^e  barftetlen, 

b)  L  SBeld^e  9?eife  ^atte  §err  53ron)n  gemad^t?  2,  SBarum 
ging  er  nad^  Hamburg?  3.  2Ba^  tat  er  bort  am  erften  Slbenb? 
4.  SBa^  fagte  er  ilber  ba^  Srama?  5*  SBa^  fagten  feine  S3er^ 
iDanbten  bariiber?  15 

c)  Last  week  my  relations  who  live  in  the  United  States 
arrived  in  Hamburg  to  visit  us.  Our  whole  family  was 
out  on  the  landing-place,  for  old  and  young  wanted  to 
see  the  great  ocean  steamer  sail  into  the  harbor.  For  my 
father  it  was  a  never-to-be-forgotten  moment  when  he  20 
saw  his  brother  again  after  twenty  years'  separation.  He 
recognized  him  at  once  among  the  many  strangers.  We 
and  our  friends  and  acquaintances  were  happy  to  meet 
him  and  his  family,  and  especially  the  younger  ones 
pleased  us  very  much.  As  we  know  Hamburg  very  well  25 
and  have  many  friends  and  relations  among  the  Hamburg 
people,  we  were  able  to  show  these  foreigners  everji^hing 
interesting  in  the  town.  They  liked  what  was  old  much 
better  than  what  was  new,  and  what  is  common  and 
every-day  often  seemed  to  them  especially  interesting.  30 
The  evening  after  their  arrival  we  went  to  the  theater, 
for  we  wanted  to  show  the  travelers  something  beautiful. 


14  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

Fortunately  the  play  was  by  our  great  poet  Schiller,  and 
contained  so  much  that  was  noble  and  true  that  it  aroused 
great  interest  in  all.  All  Germany  still  loves  Schiller's 
dramas;  they  are  often  acted  and  they  still  please  old  and 
5  young,  rich  and  poor,  Germans  and  foreigners.  An  ac- 
quaintance of  ours  who  was  with  us  said  that  such  plays 
are,  in  his  opinion,  much  better  than  the  modem  realistic 
dramas,  which  represent  so  much  that  is  common  and 
every-day.    What  is  new  is  not  always  what  is  best. 

9.  2)cr  @inf  auf  in  Saben  —  A  Shopping  Expedition 

Comparison  of  Adjectives 
Grammar,  6,  IV 

lo  a)  (g^  ift  tntr  itntner  l^od^ft  intereffant,  in  einer  fremben  ®tabt 
©infaufe  p  mad)en,  after  id^  ftnbe,  bafe  bic  ^aufleute  in  biefer 
©tabt  bte  fd^Ied^tefte  Stu^t^al^I  l^aben,  unb  ber  teuerfte  Saben  ift 
l^ier  ingUdd)  ber  allerfd^Iec^tefte*  ©eftem  gtng  id)  in  ba^  ncid^ftc 
®ef(^(xft,  um  etma^  §ubfd^e^  fixr  meine  iiingfte  ©d^tDefter  p 

15  faufen.  ^d)  motlte  am  Itebften  ©toff  jn  einenx  feibenen  ^leibe 
f)aben»  S)er  Saufmann  setgte  ntir  SJJel^rere^;  am  beften  geftel  mtr 
ein  blangrilner  ©etbenftoff ;  btefe  garbe  ftef)t  aud^  meiner  ©c^n^efter 
anf^  befte.  Slber  ba§  SKeter  foftete  4  SWarf  50  pfennig  unb 
biefer  ^ret^  voav  mir  gu  I)od&.    3d^  f)abe  ttberf)aupt  bte  buntleren 

2o  garben  fef)r  gem,  obex  meine  ©d^mefter  t)at  bie  f)eKeren  lieber,  td& 
glaube,  am  Itebften  f)at  fie  ba^  allerf)ellfte  33Iau*  2)?eine  greun^^ 
bin  fagte,  e^  to'dxt  beffer,  in  ein  grofeere^  ©efd^ftft  in  ber  §aupt^ 
ftra^e  p  ge{)en,  tneil  bie  ©ad^en  bort  am  btlltgften  feten.  Slber  e^ 
tnar  bort  ebenfo  teuer  tote  {)ier,  unb  toxx  fanben  ntd^t^  93effere§. 

25  ©d^Iie^Itd^  loaren  mir  im  f)od^ften  ©rabe  ermilbet,  aber  mir  be^ 
fd^Ioffen,  morgen  toieber  in  bie  ©tabt  gu  gef)en,  ba  e§  un§  betben 
bie  grfigte  greube  mad^t,  ©efd^enfe  au^aufud^en* 


COMPARISON   OF   ADJECTIVES  15 

b)  1.  SBa^  bcnfen  ©ie  ilber  bie  ^aufleute  in  biefer  ©tabt? 
2»  SBeld^en  dtat  erl()ielteti  ©ie  Don  Q^vcv  greunbin?  3,  ^ax^ 
urn  Ji3ar  e^  fd^n)er,  ein  ©efd^enf  fiir  Q\)vt  ©d^mefter  au^pfu^ 
(i)m?   4.  SBarum  fauften  ©ie  Gcftem  nid^t^  filr  S^xt  greunbin? 

5.  SBa^  befd^Ioffen  ©ie  be^^alb?  S 

c)  Mary  had  decided  not  to  buy  anything  in  Germany 
until  she  reached  Berlin,  for  she  had  always  heard  that 
the  best  shops  are  in  the  largest  cities.  She  wanted  to 
buy  presents  for  her  family  and,  as  she  could  not  pay  very 
much,  she  wanted  to  find  the  stores  where  everything  lo 
was  cheapest  and  best.  At  first  she  thought  that  the 
smaller  shops  would  be  cheaper,  but  she  soon  found  that 
the  larger  shops  had  the  best  assortment  and  that  their 
prices  were  just  as  cheap  as  those  of  the  smaller  ones. 
For  her  youngest  sister,  who  hkes  pretty  dresses  better  15 
than  anything  else  (construe:  likes  .  .  .  best),  Mary 
bought  the  prettiest  blue  silk  dress  she  could  find,  as  the 
brightest  colors  suit  her  best.  For  her  eldest  sister  she 
wanted  something  different  and,  as  Clara  loves  reading 
better  than  anything,  she  bought  her  the  newest  and  most  20 
interesting  German  books,  bound  in  the  brightest  colors. 
But  it  gave  her  the  greatest  pleasure  to  pick  out  for  her 
elder  brother  pictures  of  the  most  interesting  things  ^  she 
had  seen  on  the  journey.     She  found  the  best  assortment 

in  a  large  shop  on  the  main  street  and  it  was  in  the  highest  25 
degree  interesting  and  at  the  same  time  very  difficult  to 
pick  out  the  most  beautiful  ones,  for  all  pleased  her  ex- 
tremely. She  would  have  liked  [best]  to  buy  all  that  the 
merchant  showed  her.  When  she  had  finally  made  all  her 
purchases,  she  was  too  weary  to  do  anything  else,  but  she  30 
said  it  had  been  the  most  interesting  day  of  her  journey. 

iGram.  11,  IlcandlV. 


16       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

10.  2)cutf(^lanb  —  Germany 

Numerals  and  Proper  Names 
Grammar  6,  I 

a)  ©eutfd^Ianb  f)at  einen  glad^enmfialt  t)on  545000  qkm 
(lie^:  Ouabratfitometer),  gleid^  208830  englifd^en  Ouabrat:^ 
meilen*  @6  tft  ungefafir  fo  grofe  tx)ie  ber  ©taat  Xtica^,  ber  tin 
gilnfsefintel  be^  glac^eninl)alt^  ber  SSeretmgten  ©taaten  t)on 

5  Slmerifa  eitimmmt,  ©eutfc^Ianb  \)at  65  2)?itItonen  @tntt)of)tier, 
faft  16mal  fo  t)iel  tnie  Xcica^.  3^^t  ©rittel  ber  SeDoIferutiQ 
ftnb  et)angelifd^,  ein  Srittel  ift  fatl^olifd^.  ®a6  neue  Seutfd^e 
9teid&  iDurbe  erft  itn  3al)re  1871  gegrilnbet.  25  berfd^iebene 
©taaten  tt)(if)Iten  SBil^elm  ben  grften,  ben  ^ontg  t)on  "ipreufeen, 

lo  p  i^rem  Oberf)aupt»  @r  naf)m  ben  Jitel  „®entfd^er  ^atfer'' 
an  unb  tDnrbe  im  ©d^Ioffe  in  S3erfaiIIe6  am  ad^t^efinten  ^t^nnar 
1871  gefront,  ®er  iefetge  ^aifer  tft  SBiIf)eIm  ber  B^^ite,  ein 
gnfel  2SitI)eIm^  be^  grften.  @r  tDurbe  ant  27ften  ^anuar  1859 
in  ber  ©tabt  ^ot^bant  geboren  unb  ift  feit  1881  ntit  Slugufta 

15  33ictoria,  ber  Jod^ter  be§  §ersoQ6  griebrid^  in  ©d^Ie^lDiQ^^^oI^ 
ftein^^Sonberburg^SluQuftenburg,  t)ermaf)It* 

6)   1.  SBie  grofe  ift  35eutfd)Ianb?    2,  2Bie  grog  ift  2)eutfd^- 

lanb  tjerglid^en  ntit  ben  33ereinigten  ©taaten  don  Slnterifa? 

3^  SBa^  miffen  ©ie  ilber  bie  ©rilnbung  be^  neuen  ©cutfd^en 

20  gjeid^e^?    4.  SBa^  toiffen  ©ie  iiber  ben  jefeigen  beutfd^en  ^aifer? 

c)  Germany  has  only  about  a  fifteenth  part  of  the  super- 
ficial area  of  the  United  States  of  America.  But  although 
all  Germany  is  only  about  as  large  as  the  state  of  Texas, 
the  latter  has  only  about  four  million  inhabitants,  while 
25  Germany  has  a  population  of  more  than  fifty-six  millions. 
The  new  German  Empire  is  not  as  old  as  the  United  States. 
The  latter  were  founded  on  the  Fourth  of  July,  1776,  but 


NUMERALS.      TIME  17 

the  former  was  not  founded  until  1871.  The  first  Em- 
peror of  Germany  was  King  William  of  Prussia  and  he 
only  assumed  the  title  of  German  Emperor  when  he  was 
chosen  on  January  8th,  1871,  by  the  rulers  of  twenty- 
four  German  states  as  chief  ruler  of  the  whole  country.  5 
He  was  the  grandfather  of  the  present  Emperor,  William 
the  Second.  William  the  Second  is  the  third  Emperor  of 
Germany  and  has  reigned^  since  the  death  of  his  father, 
Emperor  Frederick,  who  died  on  June  15th,  1888,  in  the 
city  of  Beriin.  Frederick  was  married  on  January  25th,  10 
1858,  to  an  Enghsh  princess,  Louisa  Victoria,  a  daughter 
of  the  famous  Queen  Victoria.  He  reigned  only  three 
months.  Prussia  is  the  largest  state  in  Germany.  It  has 
an  area  of  134,000  square  miles,  about  three-fourths  of 
the  total  area  of  Germany,  and  has  more  than  thirty-four  15 
million  inhabitants,  of  whom^  about  two-thirds  are  Pro- 
testants. 

11.  Sm  ^otel  —  At  the  Hotel 

Numerals.     Time 
Grammar,  6,  II 

a)  21*  —  ®uten  9}Jorgen,  §err  SKe^er!  Tlan  f)at  l^eutc 
morgcn  s^eitnal  an  ©tc  tetepl^omert,  gulefet  Dor  einer  S3iertel^ 
ftunbe,  unb  man  toirb  f)ente  S^ad^ntittag  nm  sh)et  U{)r  tt)ieber  nad^  20 
Sff)nen  fragen*  33»  —  ®ut»  ^d)  erlDarte  meinen  53mber  fientc 
Slbenb,  fann  er  ein  3i^^^^  ^ter  befommen?  Sr  mill  bi^  sunt 
ftcbten  3unt  bletben.  21.  —  ©etDife,  er  fann  ein  gute^  ^t^nnter 
tnt  jtt)eiten  ©tod  gu  ad^t  Wlavl  bef ontmen.  S3.  —  Urn  iDiebiel 
Uf)r  (ober:  su  toeld^er  3^it)  fontntt  ber  ©d^neltpg  Don  33erltn  an?  25 
21.  —  (Sr  fommt  6  ]Xf)v  20  9Winuten  an,  aber  ^^x  §err  SSruber^ 

1  Gram.  246.  2  ^jq^;  bcnen.  3  30(i. 


18  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

faun  erft  ein  Siertel  naS)  fieben  f)icr  fein,  benn  ba^  §otcI  ift  brci 
kilometer  t)on  bem  Sal^nfiof  entfemt.  33*  —  3Sann  iDirb  gu 
9Wittag  QegeffenP^  2l»  —  3n  etner  l^alben  ©tunbe*  S,  —  !Da^ 
ift  gu  fpat  fiir  Tntd^»    ^ellner,  reid^en  ©ie  mir  bie  ©peifefarte* 

s  3d^  h)ill  gleid^  ein  tDarme^  ©erid^t  beftellen.  33ringen  ©ie  mir 
fofort  eitte  Jaffe  ^affee  mil  Srot,  Sutter  unb  gmeierlei  ^ftfe^ 
§eute  Jtac^mittag  mod^te  td^  eine  Slu^fal^rt  madden*  S3itte,  be= 
ftetlen  ©ie  mir  einen  SBagen  auf  gmei  ©tunben,  3d^  merbe  um 
l^alb  brei  Ui^r  fortfatiren  unb  ettDa  um  l^alb  flinf  U^x  aurudEfom= 

lo  men,  S3itte,  bringen  ©ie  mir  aud^  bie  SKed^nung  unb  ein  f)albe^ 
©ui^enb  Slnfid^t^poftfarten, 

6)   1,  SBeld^e   ?tad^rid^t   qah   ber   f  ellner   §erm   9We^er? 

2.  aSeld^en  SBunfd^  {)atte  §err  9Wet)er?    3,  SSann  unb  iDofier 

mirb  fein  Sruber  fommen?    4,  3Ba^  n)irb  §err  9Ket)er  l^eute 

15  5Rad^mittag  tun?    5.  SBa^  beftellt  §err  9We^er  bei  bem  ,8)eHner 

nod^? 

c)  A,  —  Where  is  your  brother  this  summer?  I  have 
not  seen  him  since  the  end  of  April.  B,  —  He  has  been 
ever  since  the  seventh  of  May  at  a  very  good  hotel  about 

2o  eighteen  kilometers  from  here  and  he  will  stay  there  until 
the  tenth  of  October.  He  has  invited  me  there  ^  twice 
already  and  has  sent  me  half  a  dozen  beautiful  picture 
postal  cards,  and  half  an  hour  ago  I  telephoned  him  and 
said  that  I  would  visit  him  to-day.    Cannot  you  go  with 

25  me?  I  am  going  at  eleven  o'clock.  A.  —  Thank  you.  I 
should  Hke  to  go,  but  I  cannot  start  until  half  past  eleven. 
When  does  the  train  go?  B.  —  The  train  goes  at  quarter 
before  eleven,  but  I  will  telephone  and  engage  a  carriage. 
We  can  drive  out  in  two  hours.     I  will  engage  the  carriage 

30  for  the  whole  day,  so  that  we  can  take  a  drive  in  the  after- 
noon.   At  the  hotel  they  dine  at  half  past  one,  so  we  will 

1  Gram.  15,  Ha  and  18c.  2  Gram.  29. 


REVIEW  19 

eat  something  before  we  go.  Please  order  two  cups  of 
coffee  and  some  bread  and  butter.  A.  —  They  have 
brought  two  kinds  of  cake,  but  the  waiter  says  that  we 
cannot  get  anything  hot  for  ^  half  an  hour.  B,  —  My 
brother  expects  us  before  three  o'clock,  so  we  must  start  5 
(drive)  in  ten  minutes.  He  wants  us  to  stay^  until  to- 
morrow and  has  engaged  two  rooms  for  us  on  the  third 
floor  at  six  marks  each.  We  can  come  back  by  the  express 
train  to-morrow,  which  arrives  at  the  station  at  twenty 
minutes  past  nine.  10 

13.  Review 

Based  on  Exercises  7-12 

Last  summer  I  went  to  Germany  with  my  youngest 
sister.  After  a  trip  of  nine  days  we  landed  at  Hamburg, 
which  is  one  of  the  most  beautiful  towns  in  all  Germany. 
As  we  arrived  there  at  half  past  six  in  the  morning  and 
left  by  the  fast  train  for  BerUn  at  a  quarter  before  eleven,  15 
we  spent  a  whole  day  in  the  town,  where  we  saw  many 
interesting  things.  I  Uke  what  is  old  better  than  what 
is  new,  so  I  enjoyed  very  much  walking  along  the  oldest 
and  narrowest  streets  in  the  eastern  part  of  the  city,  but 
my  sister  preferred  to  look  at  the  beautiful  shops.  We  20 
stayed  in  Berlin  from  the  11th  of  June  until  the  24th  of 
July.  I  liked  it  very  much  there.  We  lived  in  a  very 
expensive  hotel,  not  far  from  the  station,  which  my  cousin 
had  recommended  to  us.  We  had  two  large  rooms  on  the 
fourth  floor  at  20  marks  a  day  each.  From  the  windows  25 
we  had  a  beautiful  view  over  the  city.  Every  day  we  took 
long  walks  and  we  very  often  saw  the  German  Emperor, 

1  Dor  (dat).  2  Gram.  26,  V. 


20       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

William  the  Second,  in  his  gay  uniform  riding  down  the 
street.  He  is  a  grandson  of  William  the  First,  who  was 
crowned  on  January  18th,  1871.  We  soon  found  the  stores 
where  things  were  cheapest  and  best.     We  bought  many 

5  things  there  for  our  friends  and  relations  in  the  United 

States.     For  my  mother  I  bought  a  beautiful  dress  of  the 

very  lightest  gray  silk,  but  it  did  not  please  my  sister  very 

much;  she  would  have  preferred  something  different. 

One  day  an  acquaintance  of  ours  came  to  see  me,  but  I 

lo  had  left  the  house  a  quarter  of  an  hour  before.  She  had 
telephoned  twice  to  me  but  the  waiter  had  forgotten  to 
tell  me  [it].  I  was  very  sorry  not  to  see  her,  because  I 
like  her  and  I  had  hoped  to  meet  her  during  my  stay  in 
Germany. 


13.  @ine  Unterl^altung  auf  bcr  ©trafee  —  A  Conversation 
in  the  Street 

At  —  By 

15  a)  31*  —  ©eftem  traf  id^  §erm  ©.  auf  bem  S3af)n{)of,  bcr  tnir 
ergaf)Ite,  bafe  ©ie  nad^  Suropa  reifen  tDotten.  S3*  —  Sa,  meirt 
Sampfer  fcilirt  ©onner^tag  bet  Jage^anbrud^  ab.  ^d)  gel^e  su 
®d^iff  nac^  ©ibraltar  unb  bann  metier  gu  Sattb  nttt  ber  Stfettbal^n 
iiber  SWabrtb  uttb  ^art^  ttad^  S3erlttt,    31.  —  ^d)  f)abe  etttetx 

2o  gutett  greunb  ttt  Serlttt,  ber  ^rofeffor  ber  ©efd^td&te  art  ber  UTtt:= 
Derfttdt  ift.  SBtr  maren  gufammen  in  ber  ©d^ule  uttb  l^aben 
au(^  jufatntnen  auf  ber  Untt)erfttat  ^etbelberg  ftubtert.  2BoHeu 
©ie  tl^n  ntd^t  befuci^en?  gr  miirbe  ftc^  gemife  fefir  barttber  freuen. 
S3*  —  ©ebr  geme,  ^abe  id)  nid^t  btefen  §erm  le^te^  3af)r  mit 

25  3?bnen  in  ber  Dper  ober  tm  Xf)eaiex  gefeben?  21.  —  ©emife,  er 
mar  bet  un^  gu  S3efud^  unb  flagte  febr  liber  bte  §tfee  bter.  3n 
btefent  Slugenblidt  faun  id^  mid^  nid)t  genau  an  feine  Slbreffe  er* 


AT  —  BY  21 

\ 

tnnem,  3d^  merbe  fie  3^f)nen  burti^  bie  ^oft  fd^itfen.  9?un  guten 
SKorgcn!  S<i)  tnufe  mid^  beeilen*  9JJetne  gatnilie  ift  gelDtfe  fd^on 
bei  2:ifd^;  tDtr  effen  urn  f)alb  slDci  Uf)r,  93.  —  9tad^  meiner  U^v 
ift  e^  erft  ein  Uijv.  21.  —  ^a,  aber  td^  btxbe  nod&  etne  95eforgung 
auf  bem  Wflavtt  unb  auf  ber  ^oft  gu  madden  unb  id^  indd^tc  jur  5 
red^ten  3^it  gu  §aufe  fein.  ?eben  ©ie  tDoI)!!  3d^  l^of[e,  ©ie 
nod^  etnmal  t)or  3I)rer  Slbreife  su  fel^eti,  aber  auf  aKe  gcitte  tDiinfd^c 
id^  3f)nen  iefet  fd^on  eine  QliidEKd^e  Sfeife. 

b)  h  aSa^  fiir  eine  9{eifc  mirb  §err  93.  madden?    2.  2Ba^ 
iDiffen  ©ie  iiber  ben  greunb  t)on  ^erm  SI.  in  93erlin?    3.  933ie  lo 
fatn  e^,  ba^  §err  93.  biefen  greunb  fannte?    4.  9Bie  mirb  er 
feinc  Slbreffe  erfaf)ren?    5.  SBarum  fprad^en  bie  §erren  nid^t 
Ittnger  gufammen?    6.  SBeld^en  SBunfd^  fprid)t  §err  21.  au^? 

c)  A.  —  Did  I  not  see  you  at  the  railway  station  yes- 
terday? B,  —  Yes.  I  was  there  at  daybreak  to  meet  15 
my  sister,  who  has  just  come  to  make  us  a  visit.  A,  —  Did 
she  come  by  land  or  by  water?  B.  —  She  came  by  boat 
to  Hamburg  and  then  by  train  by  way  of  Hannover  to 
BerHn.  A,  —  Will  she  stay  with  you  long?  B,  —  Yes. 
She  will  stay  at  our  house  two  or  three  months.  Her  hus-  20 
band  is  professor  at  the  University  of  Oxford,  but  her 
daughter  is  here  at  school  and  her  son  is  at  the  University 
of  Leipzig.    A,  —  I  wanted  to  go  to  see  you  to-day  after 

I  had  done  my  errands  at  market,  but  thought  it  was  too 
late.  It  was  half  past  eleven  o'clock  by  my  watch.  25 
B,  —  Can  we  not  all  meet  at  the  theater  to-morrow? 
A.  —  I  am  delighted  with  the  plan.  Shall  we  meet  you 
at  your  house  or  at  the  theater?  We  will  try  to  be  there 
at  the  right  time.  B.  —  I  will  send  you  [a]  word  by  mail, 
but  at  all  events  we  will  be  together  there.  Good-by  30 
now.  I  must  hurry,  if  I  want  to  be  at  home  at  the  right 
time.     It  is  half  past  one  and  we  dine  at  two  o'clock. 


22  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

The  family  will  alF  be  at  table.  Your  husband  will  come 
with  you  to-morrow,  I  hope.  A.  —  I  do  not  know  whether 
he  will  be  at  home  to-morrow.  He  went  yesterday  to  visit 
a  friend  in  the  country,  and  the  boat  by  which  he  returns 
5  does  not  leave  until  four  o'clock.  He  will  be  pleased  at 
your  invitation,  but  I  fear  that  he  cannot  accept  it. 
B,  —  Will  you  not  send  him  the  invitation  by  mail  and 
tell  him  to  come  back  at  once  by  train?  A.  —  I  shall 
find  a  letter  from  him  at  the  post-office;  then  I  shall  know 
lo  when  he  will  be  at  home. 

14.  Sn  bet  Sd^ule  —  In  School 

Personal  Pronouns 
Grammar,  7 

a)  ?cf)rer:  §ter  tft  S)etnc  flberfel^ung,  x^  bin  gar  ntd^t  bamit 
gufrieben,  befonber^  ber  le^te  Seil  berfelben  ift  fel)r  fd^Ied^t.  @^ 
ftnb  p  t)iele  gel)ler  barin  unb  etnige  berfelben  finb  fe{)r  fd^Iinxm. 

—  ©driller:  S)a^  tut  mir  [el^r  letb;  aber  \6)  fonnte  nid^t  fel^r  btel 
15  cS^it  barauf  t)ertr)enben.  — !?.:  3a,  0en)of)nltd^  btft  S)u  fleifeig, 

tDarunt  btft  S)u  e§  biefe^  9KaI  ntd^t  getDefen?  —  ©d^.:  35ie 
Slugen  taten  mir  tt)ef);  id^  f)atte  metne  33rtHe  berloren  unb  fonnte 
biefelbe  ntrgenb^  ftnben.  ©eftem  ?lbenb  l^atte  id^  fie  auf  ben 
%x\^  gelegt,  aber  fieute  friil^  lag  fie  ntd^t  mebr  barauf.    ®ie  tt)ar 

2o  unter  bie  3^itungen  gefontmen;  t)or()in  fanb  td^  fie  barunter.  — 
?.:  Sibm,  ba§  nad^fte  9WaI  ntugt  ©u  baran  benfen,  fie  an  einen 
ftd^eren  Ort  p  legen.  —  ©d^.:  3d&  mod[)te  ©ie  nod^  einige^  liber 
bie  gebler  fragen.  Sinige  bat)on  finb  mir  nid^t  ganj  Har.  —  ?.: 
3:efet  l^aben  Xm  teine  3^it  mef)r  bap,  ©u  fannft  morgen  gragen 

25  barllber  ftellen.    SBer  l^at  biefe^  §eft  auf  ba^  ^ult  gelegt? 

—  ©d^.:  3d^  tDar  e^.    3d^  l^abe  meinen  Sluffafe  abgefd^rieben; 

*  Construe :  T/ie  whole  family  will. 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS  23 

tDoMen  ©ic  it)n  anfel^en?  ®ie  mollten  nod^  einmal  mit  mir 
barliber  fpred^en,  —  2.:  ®ut,  id&  t^erbe  e^  nad^I)er  tun* 

6)   1,  SBarum  mar  ber  Sel^rcr  nid^t  mit  ber  UfierfefeutiQ  p= 
fricbcn?    2.  SBarum  tt)ar  ber  ©driller  nid^t  fleifetGer  Qemefen? 
3*  SBcId^en  9fat  gibt  i{)Tn  ber  Sel^rer  tDegen  ber  Sritle?    4,  SBar^^   S 
um  l^atte  ber  ©d^liler  etn  §eft  auf  ba^  ^ult  gelegt?    5,  SBa^ 
fagte  ber  ?ef)rer  barilber? 

c)  A.  —  Was  the  teacher  satisfied  with  you  to-day? 
B,  —  No,  he  was  not.    My  essay  was  good,  especially 
the  first  part  of  it,  but  it  was  not  copied  well.     He  found  lo 
several  bad  mistakes  in  it  and  I  shall  have  to  copy  it  again. 

A.  —  I  am  sorry  you  were  not  industrious  this  time,  for 
you  generally  are.  Last  time  your  essay  was  very  good. 
Did  you  not  spend  time  enough  upon  it  last  evening? 

B,  —  I  could  not  copy  it  yesterday  evening,  because  I  is 
had  lost  my  spectacles  and  my  eyes  hurt  me,  and  this 
morning  I  did  not  think  of  doing  it,^  because  I  had  to  do 
my  translation.    A.  —  Bring  your  essay  to  me;  I  want 
to  look  at  it  and  ask  you  some  questions  about  it.    B,  —  I 
cannot  find  my  note-book  anywhere.     I  laid  it  on  the  20 
desk  with  my  books  a  little  while  ago,  but  it  is  not  among 
them  any  longer.    A.  —  If  you  would  think  next  time  of 
putting  your  note-book  in  a  safe  place,  you  would  not 
lose  it.    But  where  is  the  newspaper?     I  saw  it  on  the 
table  a  little  while  ago,  but  it  is  not  there  now.     Who  has  25 
taken  it?    B,  —  I  have.     I  wanted  to  read  something  in 
it.    A,  —  You  have  no  time  for  that  now.     You  must  do 
your  translation  and  show  it  to  me.     Do  you  know  all  the 
words  in  it  this  time?    B.  —  Some  of  them  are  quite  new 
to  me,  but  I  will  ask  the  teacher  about  them  to-morrow.  30 
I  shall  have  time  to  do  something  more  then.    A,  —  Very 

1  Gram.  26,  IV6. 


24  GERMAN  AND   ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

well.  Now  lay  your  books  on  the  table  and  think  no  more 
about  them.  You  have  spent  time  enough  on  them  for 
to-day. 

15.  ©in  @tftittbioung^6rief  —  A  Letter  of  Inquiry 

Possessives 
Grammar,  8 

a)  SBeimar,  ben  7.  3unt,  1910. 

5         ©el^r  Qccfirter  §crr  'iprofeffor! 

SSor  einigen  Jagen  befam  id)  etncn  S3rtef  t)on  ctncm  3f)rer 
frilf)eren  ©dottier,  bcr  l^ierlierfommen  utib  fid^  um  eine  ©tellung 
an  ber  I)ieftgen  ©d^ule  betuerben  tdiU.  Um  fetnetmillen  unb  um 
unferer  ©Item  tDiHen,  bie  fel^r  befreunbet  ^aren,  tDttl  id)  gem  ba^ 
lo  9Ketmge  tun,  um  tl)m  su  {)elfen,  3d^  f)abe  fd^on  berfd^iebene 
Seute  um  ii)x  Urteil  liber  iiin  gefragt,  aber  ba^  S^xe  ift  mtr  be== 
fonber^  tDid^tig,  unb  td^  mare  3f)nen  \tf)x  banfbar,  menu  ©ie  mir 
tttoa^  ©enauere^  liber  tf)n  fd^retben  rt)otIten,  ba  td^  ibn  felbft  faft 
gar  ntd^t  fenne  unb  aud^  an  ben  SSortetl  unferer  ©d^ule  benfen 
IS  mufe-  @r  l^at  etne  fef)r  tlid^ttge,  gebilbete  grau,  unb  id^  fenne  bie 
SItem  ber  iBetben;  fetn  33ater  tDar  Slr^t,  ber  if)re  ^farrer;  feine 
©tern  tDaren  ntd^t  fo  arm  tt)te  bie  tbrigen,  aber  t)or  eiritgen  ^abren 
t)erIoren  bie  (Sr[teren  all  ibr  ®elb  unb  je^t  ift  e^  febr  fd^tDer  flir 
bie  gamilie,  ibren  Unterbalt  su  finben,  fo  ba§  ber  ©obn  feine 
2o  gltem  unterftiilKn  mufe.  Unfere  ©d^ule  bejablt  ibren  ?ebrern 
ein  bobe^  ®ebalt  unb  e^  tDttre  ein  grofee^  ©liidf  flir  ibn  unb  bie 
©einen,  bi^tberpfommen. 

3m  t)orau^  beften  S)an!  fur  3bre  Slu^funft.    ©^  tat  mir  febr 
leib  in  boren,  bafe  3i^x  fleiner  ©obn  fid^  ben  Slrm  gebrod^en  bat 
25  unb  id^  boffe,  bag  e^  ibm  mieber  gut  gebt. 

2)?it  befter  ©npfeblung  an  ©ie  unb  bie  ^b^iQ^n 

3\)x  febr  ergebener 

S.  aWeier. 


POSSESSIVES  25 

b)  !♦  SBarutn  fd^rteb  §err  SKeier  einen  S3rief  an  ben  §erm 
^rofeffor?  2.  SBarum  tDoIIte  er  ettDa^  liber  btn  frul)eren 
©driller  iniffen?  3,  SBa^  miffen  ©ie  iiber  bie  gamilie  btefe^ 
©d^iller^?  4. 3[Banim  mollte  biefer  fel^r  geme  bie  ©tellung  l^aben? 

5.  SBa^  miffen  ©te  iiber  ben  ©of)n  t)on  §erm  "iprofeffor?  5 

c)  My  dear  Mr.  Miller, 

I  have  just  received  a  letter  from  Prof.  S.  who  wishes  to 
obtain  for  one  of  his  former  pupils  a  place  in  the  school 
here.  The  young  man  apphes  for  the  position  here, 
because  our  school  pays  a  higher  salary  than  his.  I  10 
should  like  to  do  my  best  to  help  a  friend  of  Professor  S., 
for  his  parents  and  mine  were  very  intimate.  But  I  must 
know  something  more  definite  about  this  Mr.  P.  before 
giving^  him  the  place.  I  have  asked  our  doctor  for  his 
opinion  of  him  and  now  I  want  to  know  yours.  You  can  15 
give  me  information  about  him  and  his  family  and,  for 
his  sake  and  mine,  I  beg  you  to  tell  me  all  you  know  about 
him.  I  hear  that  he  is  a  cultivated  man  and  a  good 
teacher  and  that  he  has  a  nice  wife.  I  know  that  his 
father  was  a  clergyman;  who  was  hers?  Is  he  rich  enough  20 
to  assist  his  daughter  and  her  family?  If  Mr.  P.  is  obliged 
to  support  his  wife^s  parents  and  his,  the  salary  here  will 
not  be  large  enough  for  him.  It  would  be  a  misfortune 
for  him  to  lose  the  position  here  after  he  has  given  up 
his,  but  we  must  think  not  only  of  his  advantage  but  of  25 
ours.  Several  people  have  written  me  their  opinion  of 
him,  but  yours  will  have  mOre  weight  with  me  than  theirs. 

I  shall  be  very  grateful  to  you  for  your  information  and 
thank  you  in  advance  for  it. 

With  kindest  regards  to  you  and  your  family,  30 

Yours  sincerely, 

1  Gram.  27,  Ic. 


26  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

16.  2)ie  bcutf^e  ®t«nbe  —  The  German  Lesson 

Relatives 
Grammar,  11 

a)  S)tc  Sel&rerin,  bcren  Unterrid^t  id)  be\ud)t,  ift  eine  ©eutfd^c. 
©ie  f)at  t)tele  ©driller  unb  ©d^iilerinnen  in  ber  Piaffe,  t)on  benen 
l^cutc  abcr  jmet  abtDcfenb  ^aren,  namlid^  ^arl  Wfl.,  beffen  33atcr 
ficftcm  Qeftorbcn  ift,  unb  Slnna  ^.,  meld^c  franf  tt)ar,  n)e^l^alb  fie 

5  gu  §aufe  bleiben  mufete*  §eute  la^  bie  Sctirerin  ein  beutfd^c6 
©cbtd^t  t)or,  liber  beffen  3nf)alt  fie  un^  nad^^er  fragte*  Seiber 
fonnte  id^  nid^t  aHe^  t)erftef)en,  ft)a^  mid^  fef)r  argerte*  ®ann 
befprad^  fie  bie  Slnefbote,  inotion  tt)ix  in  ber  le^ten  ©tunbe  ge^ 
fprod^en  flatten  unb  nDorttber  tnir  auf  f)eute  einen  fleinen  beutfd^en 

lo  Sluffa^  fd^reiben  ntufeten.  3)ann  Kefe  fie  beutfd^e  ©dfee  an  bie 
Xafel  fd^reiben  unb  bieienigen,  bie  id^  nid^t  berftanben  l^atte,  er^^ 
flttrte  fie  mir^  ®ie  2lrt,  inie  fie  e^  erflcirt,  ift  fef)r  intereffant. 
©ie  ift  eine  ?ef)rerin,  lt)ie  id^  fie  liebe.  ©ie  ift  fefir  gered^t,  iDeld^er 
(Sigenfd^aft  fie  ifire  SSeliebtl^eit  Derbanft^    ©ie  bebanbelt  atte 

IS  ©d^iiler  gleid^,  tDer  fie  aud^  fein  mogen*  SBer  feine  Slufgaben 
lemt;  b<Jt  e^  fel^r  gut  bei  il^r,  benn  fie  ift  bie  greunbin  berer,  bie 
fleifeig  finb,  aber  fie  ift  fel^r  ftreng  gegen  jene,  an  beren  gleife  fie 
an)eifelt* 

b)  h  SBarum  tDaren  f)eute  stt)ei  ©driller  abtDefenb?    2.  SBel^ 
2o  d^e  Slufgabe  f)atten  ©ie  fiir  bie  l^eutige  ©tunbe?    3.  SBa^  taten 

©ie  fieute  in  ber  ©tunbe?    4,  SBarunt  bciben  ©ie  bie  gebrerin 
gem?    5,  SBie  bel^anbelt  fie  il^re  Piaffe? 

c)  The  school  which  I  attend  in  Berlin  has  several  teach- 
ers (men  and  women),  of  whom  two  are  especially  beloved. 

25  Mr.  B.,  whose  father  is  a  famous  professor,  is  just  such  a 
man  as  I  like.  He  is  very  learned  and  very  severe,  for 
which  reason  the  pupils  who  do  not  learn  their  lessons  do 


DEMONSTRATIVES  27 

not  love  him.  But  he  is  the  friend  of  those  who  are  indus- 
trious. He  has  the  pupils  write  essays  in  which  they  give 
the  contents  of  the  books  they  have  read  in  class,  and  the 
way  in  which  he  talks  over  the  essays  with  them  is  very 
interesting.  To-day  one  of  the  boys,  of  whose  industry  5 
I  have  my  doubts,  had  forgotten  to  learn  the  poem  which 
we  had  talked  about  in  the  last  lesson,  which  vexed  Mr. 
B.  very  much.  He  was  very  severe  with  him  and  had 
him  read  the  poem  aloud  and  write  the  contents  of  it  on 
the  blackboard.  But  he  is  very  friendly  to  every  pupil  10 
who  is  industrious,  whoever  he  may  be.  Miss  X.,  in 
whose  class  I  am,  owes  her  popularity  to  the  way  in  which 
she  treats  her  pupils.  She  is  kind  and  just  to  all  those  who 
are  under  her  instruction  (who  visit  her  .  .  .).  Whoever 
is  in  her  class  is  well  off.  Yesterday  one  of  the  girls,  whose  15 
father  was  very  ill,  had  to  be  absent  and  had  not  read  the 
book  about  the  contents  of  which  Miss  B.  was  question- 
ing us.  While  the  other  girls  were  writing  sentences  on 
the  board,  the  teacher  talked  over  the  book  with  her 
and  explained  to  her  everything  she  did  not  understand.  20 
This  is  a  girl  who  always  learns  her  lessons  well  and  of 
whose  industry  Miss  B.  has  no  doubts;  but  she  is  some- 
times severe  to  those  who  are  not  industrious. 

17.  J)er  2lU)^Pu8  —  The  Excursion 

Demonstratives 
Grammar,  9 

a)  „@oId^  cinen  fd^oncn  STag  mug  man  beniifeen/'  fagtc  §err 
3)WiMer  in  fcinem  ©of)n  §an^,  „tDVC  tooHen  un^  ba^  neue  §oteI  25 
bet  93  ♦  ♦  ♦  anfef)en*''    2)er  lefetere  toax  bamit  einberftanben  unb 
ber  erftere  lub  nod^  feme  ©d&iDagerin,  beren  53ruber  unb  einen 


28       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

greunb  berfelben  cin*  fetter  njar  ctti  alter  greunb  ber  gamilic, 
biefcn  l^attc  man  erft  fiirglid^  fetinen  gelemt*  3lIIe  bteienigen, 
h^eld^e  cingelaben  maren,  fatnen  faft  gur  felben  3^it  auf  betn  S3a{)n^ 
I)of  an,  nur  ^arl  fant  im  lefeten  Slugenblicf,  „®er  fommt  ge* 
5  H)oI)nIid^  sii  fptit,"  lac^te  §err  aWiilter*  ©ic  n)oIIten  gerabe  cin== 
ftcigen,  ba  rief  ber  ©djaffner:  „®a6  tft  ein  ©d^netl^ug!  9[)?it  bent 
Ii)nnen  ®ie  nic^t  fal^ren,  benn  er  {)dlt  nid^t  an  ber  nad)ften  ©tation* 
SBarten  ©te  anf  ben  "iperfonengng!"  %xau  Wftixlkv  ^atte  im  SBarte* 
faal  Qen^artet,  tDctfirenb  §err  Wflulkv  an  ber  galirfartenan^gabe 

lo  ga^rfarten  ^tdtittv  Piaffe  fanfte,  @r  gab  jebem  bie  feine,  nnr 
feine  eigene  unb  bie  feiner  gran  ftedte  er  in  bie  Jafd^e*  211^ 
ber  Sm  fi^  ii^  SSeiDegnng  gefefet  f)atte,  fagte  §an^:  „3In  ber 
nad)ften  ©tation  mitffcn  h)ir  nmfteigen."  „5)at)on  \k\)t  nid^t^ 
im  ga^rplan/'  antmortete  ber  S3ater,  „fragen  mir  ben  ©d^aff^ 

15  ner/'  ©iefer  Demeinte,  benn  nnr  bie,  tneldfje  nad&  §  ♦  ♦  ♦  fal^^ 
ren,  fteigen  f)kv  nm»  „SBir  follten  eine  ?anbtarte  !)aben;  in 
S3  .  ♦  ♦  gibt  c^  einen  fleinen  ?aben,  njo  man  iJi^I^f^bem,  Jinte, 
papier  nnb  bergleid[}en  t)erfauft;  gelnife  fonnen  rtiir  fie  bort  be^ 
lommen/'  fagte  §err  9WnIIer. 

2o  b)  1.  SSefc^reiben  ©ie  bie  2eutt,  lt)eld)e  biefen  2ln^flng  ma^ 
d^en»  2,  SBamm  fonnten  fie  nid^t  mit  bem  ©d^nelljng  fal)ren? 
3,  SBa^  tat  §err  SWiitler,  el^e  er  einftieg?  4,  S3efd^reibeix  ©ie 
einen  33al&n]^of .  5.  SBa^  follte  man  mitnef)men,  n)enn  man  einen 
Sln^flng  mad^t? 

25  c)  A.  —  How  fortunate  that  we  have  such  a  fine  day 
for  our  excursion.  Have  all  those  who  were  invited 
arrived?  B.  —  All  are  at  the  station  except  my  sister, 
her  sister-in-law  and  a  cousin  of  hers.  The  latter  wanted 
to  buy  a  map,  but  he  will  soon  be  here.    A.  —  I  know 

30  Am,  he  always  comes  at  the  last  moment.  But  where  is 
Karl?    B.  —  He  is  at  the  ticket  office  buying^  the  tickets 

1  Gram.  27,  Id. 


REVIEW  29 

and  the  others  are  in  the  waiting-room  waiting  for  the 
train.  A,  —  Here  he  comes.  Have  you  bought  my  ticket 
and  my  sister's?  C.  —  Yes,  I  have  put  them  all  in  my 
pocket.  Let  us  get  in  at  once,  for  the  train  is  just  going 
to  start. ^  A.  —  No,  that  is  the  express  train  and  we  are  5 
going  by  the  accommodation;  otherwise  we  shall  have  to 
change  at  the  next  station.  C  —  Who  told  you  that? 
B,  —  The  conductor  told  me  to  go  by  the  accommodation, 
because  the  express  does  not  stop  at  X.  and  the  time-table 
says  the  same  thing  (the  same  stands  in  .  .  .).  C  —  I  10 
understand  nothing  of  maps,  time-tables  and  such  things, 
but  I  took  (made)  the  same  trip  only  a  short  time  ago  and 
I  know  that  we  went  by  the  express.  B,  —  Those  who 
take  the  express  train  must  have  first  class  tickets.  C  — 
Oh!  I  knew  nothing  about  that.  If  we  are  to  wait  for  15 
the  accommodation  train,  I  will  make  use  of  the  time  to 
write  a  letter;  can  you  lend  me  a  fountain  pen?  A,  —  No, 
but  there  is  a  shop  near  by  where  you  can  get  paper,  pens 
and  such  things.  B,  —  There  is  no  time  for  that  now. 
That  you  can  do  in  Erfurt.  Our  train  is  just  going  to  20 
start  and  whoever  wants  to  go  must  get  in  at  once. 

18.  Review 

Based  on  Exercises  13-18 

This  morning  I  met  Miss  Miiller  and  her  sister  Anna  at 
the  station.  The  former  is  an  old  friend  of  ours,  the 
latter  I  have  only  recently  become  acquainted  with. 
Miss  Miiller  is  the  teacher,  whose  German  classes  I  25 
attend.  She  is  the  daughter  of  a  professor  at  the  Uni- 
versity of  Berlin  and  she  herself  studied  several  years  at 
that  university.    For  her  sake  and  for  her  father's  sake 

1  Future. 


30  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

we  are  very  much  interested  in  her  work.  She  gives  me 
German  lessons.  After  the  last  lesson  I  carried  her  book 
away  with  me  instead  of  mine,  but  I  sent  it  back  by  mail 
and  to-day  she  thanlced  me  for  it.     I  am  doing  my  best 

5  to  learn  the  German  language  and  I  am  sorry  that  I  can- 
not spend  more  time  on  it.  I  could  not  study  much  last 
week  because  my  eyes  hurt  me.  I  had  lost  my  spectacles 
and  for  two  days  I  could  not  find  them  anywhere.  Now  I 
cannot  find  the  book  I  need.     Last  evening  I  laid  it  on  the 

lo  table  in  the  front  room,  but  this  morning  it  was  no  longer 
there  (lying  on  it).  I  asked  my  sister  about  it,  but  she 
had  never  seen  the  book  I  was  talking  about.  We  are 
reading  now  a  most  interesting  story  about  which  I  am 
to  write  a  German  composition  for  the  next  lesson.     Last 

15  week  I  wrote  a  translation,  but  Miss  Mtiller  was  not  quite 
satisfied  with  it;  there  were  too  many  mistakes  in  it.  As 
some  of  them  were  not  clear  to  me,  she  explained  them, 
but  I  want  to  ask  her  some  more  questions  about  them. 
Later  on  we  are  going  to  read  the  poems  of  Goethe,  whose 

20  works  she  prefers  to  those  of  Schiller.  She  tells  us  many 
interesting  things  about  Weimar,  a  Httle  city  in  Thuringia, 
where  both  poets  Hved.  Sometimes  she  reads  us  German 
poems,  the  substance  of  which  we  have  to  write  out 
afterwards. 

19.  2)er  9lui^fiug  (gortfe^ung)  —  The  Excursion  (Continua- 

tion) 

Interrogatives 
Grammar,  10 

25  a)  9?ac^bem  fie  au^gcftiegen  mareit,  rcbetc  §an^  cincn  S3cam* 
ten  auf  bem  S3a{)nf)of  an:  „3)arf  id&  fragen,  meld^e^ber  befte  9Beg 
nad&  bem  §oteI  anf  bem  Serge  x\i?*    M^W^  melnen  ©ie/' 


INTERROGATIVES  31 

anttDortete  biefer,  ^bagjenige,  meld^e^  gerabe  bei  ber  Surg  \tef)t, 
ober  ba^  neue  f)inter  ber  33urg?"  „®a^  neue/'  eriDiberte  §err  9K» 
„®e]^en  ©ie  gerabe  au^  auf  ber  Sanbftrafee  unb  bann  ben  erften 
fleinen  SBalbmeg  linf^  ben  33erg  f)tnauf»''  Unterbeffen  fam  aud^ 
grau  mutkv  ^cxbcL  „2Beffen  ©elbbeutel  ift  bie^?''  rief  fie,  5 
„id^  fatib  i[;n  auf  ber  ©trage,"  „3Bie  gliidlic^!  er  ge^drt  tnir!'' 
rief  §ang.  „28a^  fiir  eine  ^errlid^e  ^u^fid^t!"  rief  grau  mixlkv 
au^,  ,,unb  tddd)  tin  ^ilbfd^e^  S)orf!  SSie  t)iele  gintDof)ner  l^at 
e^?"  —  „g6  ift  fe^r  flein,  nur  dm  300.^'  —  „3Bo^in  fiifirt  jener 
3Beg?"  —  „S)er  fuf)rt  nad^  bent  Jurm  bort  oben.''  —  „2Bosu  bient  10 
benn  biefer  Surm?''  —  „3efet  f)at  er  feinen  S^^^  tnel^t:;  e6  ift  eitt 
alter  SBad^tturm  au^  ber  ^Kdmergeit*'' —  „3Barum  fteigen  n)ir 
nid^t  su  bent  Jurm  ^inauf?  SBer  gef)t  mit?'  — ^SBa^  benfft 
®u!''  lad^te  §err  aKiiller,  „ba6  ift  biel  m  fteil  fiir  ©id^!"  — 
„3Ba^  fiir  ein  SSeg  fiif)rt  benn  nadf)  bem  §otel?"  —  „£),  ber  ift  15 
fel^r  bequenx  unb  fteigt  nur  langfanx*'' 

b)  h  SBarunt  rebete  §an^  einen  Seamten  an?    2.  SBeld^e^ 
n)ar  ber  befte  SBeg  nad^  bem  neuen  ^otel?    3,  SBa^  badjte  grau 
ayjiitter  iiber  bie  ©egenb?    4.  SBarunt  mollte  ^err  Wixlkx  nid)t 
Su  bent  3:umte  I)inauffteigen?    5.  SBarunt  iDur  §an^   fe^r  20 
gliidflid^? 

c)  What  a  slow  train!  cried  Mrs.  Miller,  as  they  got 
out  at  the  station.  Where  shall  we  go  now?  Which  is 
the  best  way  to  the  hotel?  —  That  I  do  not  know,  an- 
swered her  husband,  but  I  will  ask  this  gentleman  which  25 
way  to  take  (we  are  to  go)  and  meantime  you  can  buy  a 
map  in  that  Kttle  shop.  —  How  shall  I  pay  for  it?  You 
know  I  have  lost  my  purse.  —  How  much  money  was  in 
it?  —  Only  about  five  marks.  —  May  I  ask,  which  road 
leads  to  the  hotel?  —  Which  hotel  do  you  mean,  the  one  30 
in  the  village  or  the  big  one  on  the  mountain?  —  I  did  not 
know  that  there  were  two  hotels.     How  many  rooms  has 


32       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

the  big  one  and  who  is  the  owner  of  it?  Which  road  must 
we  take  to  get  there?  — You  can  go  straight  along  the  high 
road,  but  the  little  wood  road  to  the  left  is  prettier,  if  it  is 
not  too  steep  for  you.  —  What  sort  of  a  castle  stands  on 
5  the  mountain  behind  the  hotel  and  to  whom  does  it  belong? 
—  That  is  only  a  tower  which  the  owner  of  the  hotel  has 
built.  —  What  use  is  it?  —  There  is  a  very  fine  view  from 
the  top.  Who  wants  to  chmb  up  to  that  tower?  —  That 
is  too  steep,  let  us  take  the  easy  way.  What  a  pretty  wood 
lo  path!    Where  does  it  go  to? 

30.  2)er  5lUigfIug  (©d^Iufe)  —  The  Excursion 
(Conclusion) 

Indefinite  Pronouns 
Grammar,  12 

a)  S^  n)ar  rcd^t  l^etg  unb  ftaufiig,  abcr  trofe  aHebetn  mad^te  ftd^ 
iebcrmann  tjergniigt  auf  ben  SBcg,  unb  in  meniger  aU  brei  ©tunben 
mar  man  oben*  Slber  fetn  SD?enf(^  mar  bet  bem  ^otel  p  fallen, 
unb  atte^  mar  pgefd^Ioffen,    ®od^  fanb  man  balb  ircjenbmo  in 

IS  bet  9laf)e  due  tieine  SBirtfd^aft.  „^onnen  mir  f)ter  etma6  gu  effen 
befommen?  ^c^  f)offe,  ©ie  I)aben  ettoa^  &nU^\"  fagte  §err  2)?. 
,,3=d^  i^abe  nid^t  t)icl/'  fagtc  ber  SBirt,  „aber  ba6  menige,  ma^  id^ 
I)abc,  miti  id^  3f)nen  gem  geben*"  Sr  brad^te  aKerlei  au  effen 
unb  an  trinfen,  unb  einer  nad^  bem  anbem  fe^te  ftd^  an  ben  SBirt^^^ 

2o  {)augtifd^  nieber.  „5^ef)men  ©te  nod^  citna^  Srot  unb  einige 
^irfd)en!"  fagte  §err  Tt.  p  feinem  greunbe.  „3)anfe,  id^  f)abe 
nod^  meld^e,  aber  td^  module  geme  nod^  etn  ®Ia^  Tlild)  f)ab^n" 
„Unb  ©ie?  5Rod&  etma^  Obft?"  „©anfe,  nid&t^  rml)x,  id^  bin 
fatt."    ^SBann  mirb  ba^  gro^e  §oteI  ge5ffnetr  fragte  §err 

25  9JJ.  ben  aSirt.  „5^iemanb  mei^  e^  beftimmt*  ©o  t)iel  id)  gel^ort 
l^abe,  am  erften  9}Jat;  aber  t)or  ein  paar  Jagen  fal^  meine  grau  bm 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS  33 

Seft^er,  ber  ifir  fagte,  ba^  nod^  mand^e^  J^erQcrid^tet  n)erbcn  mu^, 
@g  bringt  einem  ntd^t^  etn,  ein  §oteI  p  friil^  im  ©omtner  ^u 
offnen/' 

6)   1*  Sefd^rctbcn  ©te,  lt)ie  bte  gamtlie  gu  bent  ^otel  fam? 
2.  SBarunt  mar  ba6  ^rofee  §oteI  nod^  nid^t  geoffnet?    3*  SBa^    5 
iDiffett  ©ie  iiber  ba^  fletne  §oteI?    4.  SBa^  befam  man  bort  ^u 
effen?  5.  SBa^  fragte  §err  9?^  ben  SBirt?  6»  ©d^reiben  ©ie  einen 
Srief  an  ^firen  grennb,  in  bem  ©ie  biefen  Sln^flng  befd&reiben^ 

c)    '^We  must  find  an  inn  somewhere,  where  we  can  get 
something  to  eat  and  drink  before  we  start/'  said  Mr.  10 
Miller.     '*I  will  ask  the  owner  of  this  little  house  whether 
he  can  give  us  something  good  to  eat."    The  owner  of  the 
house  brought  out  the  little  that  he  had.     He  gave  them 
some  apples  and  some  good  ripe  cherries  and  some  milk, 
that  was  all  he  had.     But  everything  was  very  good  and  15 
one  after  another  ordered  a  few  more  cherries  and  another 
glass  of  milk.    The  landlord  told  them  that  his  inn  brought 
him  in  very  little  in  summer,  because  every  one  went  to 
the  big  hotel  on  the  mountain.    '^Is  the  hotel  open  now?'' 
asked  Mr.  Miller,  '^no  one  can  tell  me  exactly."     "As  far  20 
as  I  know,  it  was  opened  a  couple  of  days  ago,"  answered 
the  landlord.    Then  they  all  started  off,  and  although  it 
was  hot  and  dusty,  they  arrived  on  top,  cheerful  but 
hungry,  in  less  than  two  hours.     The  big  hotel  on  top  was 
not  yet  opened  for  the  summer,  for  much  was  not  yet  in  25 
order,  but  a  couple  of  rooms  had  been  put  in  order  and 
they  all  seated  themselves  at  the  table  and  ate  all  sorts 
of  things.     After  all  were  satisfied  and  could  eat  no  more, 
they  asked  whether  there  was  not  something  interesting 
to  be  seen  somewhere  near  by.     '^Not  much,"  said  the  30 
waiter,  "but  people  generally  visit  the  old  castle.     They 
say  there  is  something  to  be  seen  there." 


34  GERMAN  AND   ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

21.  @itt  Srtcf  au^  (Smopa  —  A  Letter  from  Eixrope 

To  — Of  — On 

a)  SSergl^aufen,  bei  granffurt  am  9Kain, 

Sen  14ten  3ult,  1910, 

SWein  licber  33ettcr! 

3d^  \)abe  oft  an  S)i(|  gebad^t  unb  tt)oHte  an  ©id&  fd^reiben,  abcr 

5  au^  aWangel  an  3^it  fommc  id)  erft  ie^t  bap,    S)u  tDeifet,  bag 

n)ir  ant  ftebten  3nni  nad^  @nropa  abfnbren,    Tlcin  S3ater  n)ar 

feit  SBoc^en  am  gieber  erfranft,    3)a  er  bad^te,  ba^  e^  biefem 

Sanbc  an  gnten  Sr^ten  fe{)Ie,  befc^Io^  er,  nad^  ©entfd^Ianb  sn  reifen, 

Sroi^bem  tDir  atle  gnrd^t  dor  ber  9?eife  Iiatten  nnb  am  (Srfolg  toir^ 

lo  lid^  s^eifelten,  ging  bod^  atle^  gnt,    2luf  ber  $Reife  toar  e^  fef)r 

fd^on,    S)te  Sage  t)on  9^eh)  §)orf  am  §nbfon  nnb  am  9Weere  ge* 

faKt  mir  fe^r,  unb  e^  gtbt  nid^t^  ©d^onere^  anf  Srben  al^  bie  Sln^- 

fal&rt  an^  bem  9leto  gorfer  §afen,    Sefete  2[Bod)e  gingen  mir  anf 

ba6  8anb,    S^  gef)t  meinem  SSater  t)iel  beffer,  unb  er  ift  aud^  in 

IS  befferer  ©timmung,    @r  ift  freunblid^  gegen  aHe  unb  nid^t  met)r 

eiferfild^tig  anf  mi^,  loeil  id^  frifd^  unb  gefunb  bin.    SBir  madden 

fd^one  Slu^flilge  gu  gug  unb  gu  SBagen.    Site  mir  geftem  gerabe 

im  33egriff  maren  au^^i^gefien,  befud^te  un^  ©ein  alter  greunb 

§einrid^,    33ei  biefer  ©elegenl^eit  l^orte  id^  t)on  Seinem  Srfolg  in 

2o  5)einer  neuen  ©tellung,  toosu  id^  Sir  l^ergtid^  gratuliere, 

Unter  ber  Sebingung,  bafe  3)u  mir  aud^  fd^reiben  miHft,  \)tx^ 
fpred^e  id^,  S)ir  balb  mieber  9tad^rid^t  t)on  mir  gu  geben, 
2)Kt  l^er^Iid^ftem  ®ru6  an  S)id^  unb  ©einen  Smber, 

SDein  treuer 
25  §an«. 

6)  1.  9Bamm  moUte  ber  SSater  if)re^  greunbe^  nad^  Suropa 
reifen?  2.  Sefd^reiben  ®ie  bie  ^Reife,  3.  SBa^  tut  3^r  greunb 
unb  fein  SSater  jefet?    4,  S33a^  fd^reibt  3^r  greunb  ieijt  ilber  ba^ 


TO  —  OF  —  ON  35 

SSefinben  feinc^  93ater^?    5.  SBelc^e  5iad^rid^ten  Iiefam  §an^ 
Don  su  §aufe? 

c)  Niederwald,  near  Bingen  on  the  Rhine, 

July  25,  1909. 
My  dear  Mr.  B.,  5 

When  I  received  your  letter,  I  was  on  the  point  of  com- 
ing to  Europe  and  did  not  write  to  you  for  lack  of  time. 
I  had  been  sick  with  rheumatism  for  weeks;  all  my  friends 
were  very  doubtful  of  the  success  of  this  journey  and  I 
myself  had  some  fear  of  it.  But  the  doctor  told  me  I  lo 
could  do  nothing  better,  on  condition  that  my  sister  would 
come  with  me.  On  the  trip  I  was  very  ill  and  when  we 
arrived  in  Hamburg  on  the  tenth  of  May  I  had  to  go  im- 
mediately to  the  country.  At  first  we  were  in  a  little 
hotel  on  the  sea[shore],  now  we  have  been  for  three  weeks  is 
on  the  Rhine.  The  situation  of  this  hotel  on  the  river 
pleases  us  very  much,  and  there  is  certainly  nothing  more 
beautiful  on  earth  than  the  Rhine  with  its  old  castles  and 
villages.  There  is  no  lack  of  interesting  places  in  the 
neighborhood.  At  first  we  made  excursions  in  a  carriage,  20 
but  now  I  am  much  better  and  we  generally  go  on  foot  or 
on  horse[back].  Last  week  we  visited  the  beautiful  city 
of  Frankfort^  on  the  Main  and  on  that  occasion  we  met 
your  old  friend  Mr.  Smith.  He  was  very  kind  to  me  and 
my  sister  and  gave  us  news  of  you,  but  we  were  jealous  of  25 
him,  because  you  write  to  him  and  not  to  us.  I  congratu- 
late you  on  the  success  of  your  new  book,  of  which  Mr. 
Smith  told  us.  I  have  been  trying  for  weeks  to  get  it, 
but  I  only  succeeded  in  doing  so  yesterday. 

As  I  am  now  quite  well  and  strong,  we  have  decided  to  30 
go  to  France  next  week.     If  everything  goes  well,  I  shall 

1  Gram.  21/. 


36       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

write  you  from  Paris  next  week  and  I  hope  soon  to  have 
news  of  you  again. 

With  warmest  greetings  to  you  and  your  family, 

Faithfully  yours, 
5  Mary  G. 


22.  ^ic  ©ittlabung  —  The  Invitation 

The  Passive  Voice 
Grammar,  15 

a)  ©eftem  abenb  tt)urbe  tnir  t)on  bem  ©iener  etne  SinlabuuG 
iibetQeben,  bte  Don  bet  ©raftn  S3.  Qefd^rieben  t\)av.  9}?e]&rere 
?eute  ftnb  bon  il^r  auf  ©onner^tag  ^n  einer  Slbenbgefefifd^aft  ge^ 
beten  tDorben*    ©eiDife  tDerbcn  bie  ©inlabungen  atle  angenommen 

lo  tt)erben,  benn  e^  ift  p  ermarten,  ba^  man  in  il^rent  §anfe  fel^r 
gut  nnterf)alten  tntrb.  Qd)  benfe,  e^  tDtrb  getangt  tDerben,  unb  id^ 
bin  fef)r  frol^,  bag  td^  nttr  t)or  i)ier^ef)n  lagen  ein  nene^  S3atl= 
fleib  madden  liefe*  Seiber  f)at  fxd^  nxein  t)erIorene^  ©iamantenarm^ 
banb,  ba^  id^  gcme  tragen  mod^te,  nod^  ntd^t  h)ieber  gefnnben, 

15  SJJein  S3ater  fagt,  bafe  tt)ir  nid^t  p  fpttt  nad^  §anfe  fontmen  bur= 
fen,  fonft  merben  mir  bie  §an^tiire  berfd^Ioffen  finben.  ©ie 
tDerben  immer  nm  elf  Uf)r  gefd^Ioffen.  §ente  iOJittag  murbe  id) 
anf  ber  ©trafee  don  einer  greunbin  angefialten,  bie  and^  eingelabeu 
iDorben  )Poax.    ?eiber  n)irb  bie  Sinlabnng  t)on  ibr  abgelebnt  it)er^ 

2o  ben  miiffen,  benn  bei  biefem  falten  SBetter  ift  e^  ibr  nidjt  erianbt, 
abenb^  au^sngeben,  unb  ba^  Icifet  fid^  leid^t  derfteben,  benn  fie  bcit 
etne  febr  garte  ©efunbbeit* 

h)   1,  S33aruni  nebnten  ©te  geme  bie  Sinlabung  gu  ber  ©rcifin 

S3,  an?    2.  SBarunt  fann  Q^vt  greunbin  biefelbe  ntd^t  anneb^ 

25  men?    3.  SBarum  biirfen  ©ie  nid^t  febr  fpdt  nad^  §aufe  fom= 

men?    4.  S3efd^reiben  ©te  ha^  ^kib,  tod(i)c^  ©ie  tragen  toerben^ 


THE   PASSIVE   VOICE  37 

5,  ©ebcn  ®ie  in  bircfter  $Kebe  eine  Unterl^altunG,  toeld^e  ©ie  6et 
biefer  Slbenbgefellfd^aft  mit  ber  ©rdfin  fii^ren. 

c)   A,  —  Are  you  invited  to  the  evening  party  which  is 
to  be  given  by  Countess  X.  next  week?    J5.  —  Yes;  I  am 
invited  for  next  Wednesday;  the  invitation  was  given  me    s 
by  her  servant  this  noon.    A,  —  I  have  been  invited  to 
her  house  several  times  and  I  have  always  been  very  well 
entertained.     I  hear  that  there  will  be  dancing  and  that 
all  the  invitations  have  been  accepted.     B,  —  The  last 
time^  I  was  invited  there  was  dancing  and  I  got  home  so  lo 
late  that  our  house-door  was  locked.     It  is  always  locked 
before  eleven.    As  my  key  had  been  lost,  I  had  to  wait 
until  it  was  opened  by  my  father,  and  since  then  I  have 
not  been  allowed  to  go  out  in  the  evening.    A,  —  Do  you 
know  why  the  Countess'  invitation  was  refused  by  your  15 
friend  Miss  L.?    B, — That  is  easily  explained.     She  is 
having  a  new  ball-dress  made,  and  as  it  cannot  be  finished 
before  Thursday,  she  has  had  to  refuse  this  invitation. 
She  has  only  a  velvet  dress  and  that  cannot  be  (does  not 
let  itself  be)  worn  in  this  hot  weather.    A,  —  Was  not  a  20 
very  handsome  bracelet  lost  by  Miss  L.  a  couple  of  weeks 
ago?    Has  it  been  found?    B,  —  It  had  been  looked  for 
everywhere  and  was  nowhere  to  be  found,  but  two  days 
ago  she  was  stopped  on  the  street  by  a  man,  who  handed 
it  to  her.     He  would  not  tell  where  or  by  whom  it  had  25 
been  found.    A.  —  Was  there  not  singing  at  the  party 
last  evening?    B,  —  No;  Mr.  X.  had  been  asked  to  sing, 
but  unfortunately  he  was  not  allowed  to  go  out,  because 
it  was  raining.     It  is  not  to  be  expected  that  a  person 
whose  health  is  so  delicate  (who  has  such  .  .  .  health)  30 
should  go  out  in  such  weather. 

1  Gram.  11,  116. 


38  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

23.  ^er  ©atig  in  bie  Stabt  —  A  Walk  Down  Town 
About  —  For  —  In 

a)  2l»  —  (g^  tft  fe{)r  fd^onc^  SBetter  l^eute  sum  fpaaieren  gel^ien. 
SBillft  bu  nic^t  auf  etne  ©tunbe  mit  mir  gel^cn?  S3, — Seiber  l^abc 
id^  feme  3^tt,  pm  SSergnuQen  l^erumsulaufen,  betm  id)  mu§  ettva^ 
fiir  meinen  Sruber  sum  ©eburt^tag  faufen,  SI,  —  9?un,  id) 
s  h)erbe  mitgel^en  unb  t)or  bem  Saben  auf  3)td^  iDarten,  SBo  ift 
beiu  S3ruber?  3c^  ^ctbe  betue  ©d^tDefter  geftem  nad)  tl^m  Qefragt, 
aber  fie  I)atte  feme  3^tt,  mir  ettDa^  iiber  il^n  gu  ersctl^Ien,  S3,  — 
@r  ift  feit  st^ei  Jagen  in  ben  SSergen  unb  foil  einen  SJJonat  bleiben, 
aber  e^  regnet  beftanbig,    2Bir  alle  f)offen  auf  gute^  SBetter; 

lo  meiner  Slnfid^t  nad^  mirb  er  nid^t  auf  bie  S)auer  bei  biefem  fd^Ied^^ 
ten  SBetter  auf  bem  ?anbe  bleiben  fonnen,  §1,  —  SBarum  ging 
cr  fort?  S3,  —  @r  I)atte  fd^on  sum  s^Deiten  SWale  biefen  SBinter 
eine  fel^r  fd^Iimme  Srfditung,  SBir  fanbten  nad^  bem  3trste, 
unb  biefer  fd^idte  il^n  au6  ber  ©tabt  fort,  benn  nur  auf  biefe  SBeife 

IS  f)at  er  bie  JRul^e,  nad^  ber  er  fid^  fef)nt,  SI,  —  SBirflid^!  "iflnn 
h)oHen  loir  gef)en,  §aft  bu  ®elb  bei  bir?  33,  —  3ct,  ungefftl^r 
20  Tlaxt,  ba^  toirb  flir^  erfte  geniigen,  Sd)  rtierbe  meinen  SSater 
morgen  um  mel^r  bitten,  (Sr  ift  fd^on  barauf  gefafet,  bcnn  er  l^at 
gar  fein  SSertrauen  auf  meine  ©parfamfeit, 

2o  6)  1,  SBarum  fonnte  S'l^re  greunbin  nid^t  mit  Sf)mn  fpa* 
Sieren  gel)en?  2,  SBarum  ift  ber  S3ruber  auf  bem  Sanbe? 
3,  2Sie  lange  tioixh  er  bort  bleiben?  4.  SBarum  l^atte  SI,  nid^t 
friil^er  gef)ort,  bafe  ber  S3ruber  fort  mar?  5,  9[Bamm  nimmt  S3, 
nur  20  SWarf  mit?    6,  ®eben  ®ie  in  birefter  9?ebe  eine  Unter{)al= 

2S  tung  stDifd^en  S3,  unb  if)xtm  S3ater,  toenn  fie  if)n  um  ®elb  bittet 

c)   My  dear  Mrs.  Black, 

It  has  been  raining^  here  steadily  for  four  days  and,  as 
it  is  no  weather  for  running  about  or  for  walking,  I  will 
1  Gram.  246. 


ABOUT  —  FOR  —  IN  39 

write  you  a  letter  for  your  birthday.  I  came  to  the  moun- 
tains to  find  the  rest  I  longed  for,  but  in  the  long  run  I 
find  it  too  quiet  and  I  shall  only  stay  for  another  week.  I 
was  prepared  for  some  rain  in  the  mountains,  but  I  had 
hoped  for  some  pleasant  days  for  walking.  There  is  noth-  s 
ing  to  do  in  the  country  in  such  weather  and  I  long  for 
town. 

Yesterday  I  wanted  something  to  read  and  I  asked  the 
landlord  for  a  book,  but  he  had  only  about  three  in  the 
house  and  those  I  had  unfortunately  read.  I  have  asked  lo 
my  brother  to  send  some  from  town,  but  I  have  no 
confidence  in  his  memory  and  I  fear  I  shall  have  to  wait 
a  few  days  for  them.  This  morning  I  went  into  the  little 
village  shop  to  buy  you  something  for  your  birthday.  I 
had  plenty  of  money  about  me,  but  I  bought  nothing.  I  15 
asked  for  all  sorts  of  things,  but  they  had  no  books  at  all 
and  nothing  that  I  wanted.  My  father  has  little  confi- 
dence in  my  economy  and  gave  me  very  little  money  when 
I  came,  but  in  my  opinion  it  is  easy  to  be  economical  here, 
where  there  is  nothing  to  buy.  20 

I  have  a  bad  cold  and  have  sent  twice  for  the  doctor, 
but  he  only  comes  to  the  village  for  a  couple  of  hours 
twice  a  week.^  I  am  hoping  for  a  visit  from  him  to- 
morrow. 

I  should  like  to  tell  you  something  more  interesting  25 
about  my  stay  here,  but  this  short  letter  must  do  for  the 
present.     I  long  for  letters  and  hope  for  an  answer  from 
you  soon. 

Please  remember  me  kindly  to  your  sister  and  her 
children.  30 

Yours  sincerely, 
Anna  B, 
1  Gram.  20,  III. 


40       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

34.  Review 

Based  on  Exercises  19-24 

A,  —  May  I  ask  you  how  your  sister  is?  B,  —  Thank 
you.  So  far  as  I  know  she  is  quite  well;  she  is  in  the 
country  now.  A,  —  This  year  I  forgot  for  the  first  time 
to  congratulate  her  on  her  birthday.  I  am  very  sorry, 
5  for  I  know  she  hoped  for  a  letter.  B.  —  She  asked  about 
you  last  week,  when  she  came  to  ask  me  for  a  book 
which  she  had  left  Ijdng  on  my  table.  There  were  all 
kinds  of  things  on  it,  but  I  could  not  find  the  book  of  which 
she  had  spoken.     I  have  little  confidence  in  her  memory, 

lo  perhaps  she  left  it  somewhere  else.  It  is  easy  to  explain 
why  she  does  not  know  anything  more  about  it,  for 
the  night  before  she  left  we  had  a  party.  There  was 
singing  and  dancing  in  our  house  and  everything  was  in 
disorder.    A.  —  Do  you  know  that  my  brother  is  going 

15  to  Europe?  B,  —  Which  one  do  you  mean?  The  one 
who  has  been  sick  [already]  so  long?  A,  —  Yes,  my 
youngest  brother.  He  is  better  now,  but  he  is  not 
allowed  to  stay  in  this  country  in  winter.  B,  —  I  have 
often  thought  of  him  since  I  heard  of  his  illness.     I  passed 

20  his  house  yesterday,  but  everything  was  closed.  A.  —  If 
you  had  come  a  few  days  ago  you  would  not  have  found 
the  doors  closed.  He  is  just  on  the  point  of  leaving 
America.  I  think  he  will  Hke  Rome  very  much.  There 
are  so  many  interesting  things  there.     I  always  remember 

25  with  pleasure  the  months  I  spent  there.  I  hved  in  a  hotel 
which  was  situated  on  a  steep  hill;  there  were  good  roads 
for  driving  and  narrow  old  streets  for  walking,  but  the 
most  beautiful  thing  of  all  was  the  view  of  the  city  by 
moonlight.    B.  —  I  remember  your  letters  and  picture 


SEPARABLE   PREFIXES  41 

postal  cards  from  Italy.  I  do  not  know  whose  letters  I 
liked  best,  yours  or  your  sister's.  I  was  very  jealous  of 
my  little  cousin,  because  you  had  written  to  her  several 
times,  although  you  lacked  time  to  write  to  me.  A,  —  I 
am  going  to  see  the  friend  now,  whose  diamond  bracelet  5 
was  lost  in  Italy;  do  you  not  remember  how  it  was  found 
by  young  Count  B.? 

25.  SBcim  Slufftel^ett  —  Getting  up  in  the  Morning 

Separable  Prefixes 
Grammar,  16,  I,  II 

a)  21*  —  §orcn  ©ic,  e^  ift  l^od^fte  3^it,  bag  ®ic  anfangcn 
aufpftef)en!  S.  —  SBirfiid^,  id)  bin  eben  erft  aufgetDad^t.  %.  — 
3d^  l^abe  fd^on  ein  S3ab  genommen,  mtd^  fertig  ange^ogen  unb  lo 
fefee  eben  meinen  §ut  auf,  um  au^sugcf)en.  ©tcl^en  ©ie  fd^nell 
auf  unb  gel)en  ©te  tnit!  S3.  —  933o  gef)en  ©ie  benn  f)in  fo  friif) 
am  SD^orgen?  2l^  —  yinn,  id^  i)abt  Q^nm  bod)  geftem  tnitge^ 
teilt,  bafe  ntein  OnM  l^eute  anforriTnen  tt)irb.  (Sr  iDiirbe  nte  auf= 
f)oren,  ftd^  ju  beflagen,  metin  id^  if)n  nic^t  an  bcr  S3af)n  ab^olte.  is 
S.  —  2ld^  fo!  S3itte,  fagen  ©ie  bem  Tlixbd)m,  fie  mod^te  etnen 
Slugenblidf  l^erauffommen.  6tn  ^nopf  ift  an  metnem  Sirmel  ab^ 
geriffen  unb  fie  foil  if)n  iDieber  anna^en.  Jragen  ©ie  ii)v  auf, 
frifd^e  §anbtlid^er  unb  ©eife  in  ba^  Sabegintmer  p  bringen. 
Unb  f)at  fie  benn  alle  meine  ^ragen  unb  ^xa'oattm  ntttgenom:^  20 
men?  Qd)  farm  nid^t^  in  meinem  ©d^Iafgimmer  ftnben,  nad^== 
bem  fie  aufgeraumt  l^at.  §1.  —  ®ut,  id^  toerbe  e^  i^r  mitteilen. 
©te  fommt  gerabe  jur  §au^tllre  fierein.  yinn  leben  ©ie  tooi)ll 
3d^  fann  nid^t  auf  ©ie  marten*  8Juf)en  ©ie  fid^  nod^  gut  au6, 
bi^  id^  SuriidEfomme,  25 

6)   1.  3Barum  ift  21.  I^eute  fo  frii^  aufgeftanben?    2.  53e- 
fd^reiben  ©ie,  toa^  ©ie  morgen^  betm  Slufftefien  tun?    3.  SBar^ 


42  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

um  toid  21*  ben  Onfel  abl^olen?    4.  SBarum  ruft  ©♦  nad&  bcm 
^itnmermcibd&en?    5,  SBarum  ift  er  unsufrieben  mit  if)r? 

c)  A.  —  Please  get  up.  It  is  high  time  to  go.  B,  — 
Where  are  you  going?    You  are  all  dressed  and  I  am  just 

5  waking  up.  Where  are  you  going  so  early?  A,  —  Uncle 
has  just  telephoned  that  he  will  arrive  at  half  past  eight 
and  I  want  to  meet  him  at  the  station.  Do  you  want  to 
come  with  me?  B,  —  I  have  begun  to  dress  already. 
Come  up  for  a  moment  and  wait  for  me.    I  am  sewing  on 

lo  a  button  that  I  tore  off  yesterday.  A.  —  You  always 
tear  off  your  buttons  and  then  complain,  because  you  have 
to  sew  them  on  again.  Why  didn't  the  maid  sew  it  on 
yesterday?  B.  —  Unfortunately  she  had  no  time,  for 
mother  had  told  her  to  put  a  bedroom  in  order  for  Uncle 

15  and  to  put  fresh  towels  and  soap  in  the  bath-room.  Be- 
sides, you  did  not  tell  me  that  he  was  coming  so  early  in 
the  morning.  A.  —  Oh,  didn't  I?  Well,  I  had  not  time 
to  explain  everything  to  you.  Stop  complaining  and 
come  with  me.    B,  —  I  have  just  finished  dressing.    Now 

20  I  will  put  on  my  hat  and  come.  Where  are  you?  A,  —  I 
am  just  going  out  the  door  of  the  house.  Hurry  up.  You 
can  rest  when  you  come  back.  B,  —  Why  do  you  meet 
Uncle  at  the  train  to-day?  When  he  arrived  last  week, 
no  one  met  him.    A.  —  You  know  he  complained  that 

25  no  one  was  there  and  as  I  woke  up  early  to-day,  I 
thought  I  would  meet  him.  I  like  to  go  out  early  in  the 
morning.  B.  —  I  like  to  get  up  early,  but  I  do  not  Uke 
to  dress  so  quickly. 


INSEPARABLE    PREFIXES  43 

36.  Set  Xm  —  At  Table 

Inseparable  Prefixes 
Grammar,  16,  III 

a)  31*  —  33itte,  bebienen  @ie  fid^!  gntfc^ulbigen  ©le,  bag 
id^  eben  erft  bemerfe,  bafe  3?f)r  Seller  leer  tft*  93-  —  Sitte  fel^r! 
21.  — 5«e^men  ©ie  etma^  ^artoffelfalat!  93.  — Sanfe!  ^d^ 
ntu§  0eftef)en,  ba^  id^  fefir  fiun^rig  bin.  Qd)  l^abe  nur  einen 
goffel  ©uppe  au  SJJittag  gegeffen.  Slber  ©ie  effen  gar  nid^t^!  5 
SI*  —  ^^  ^o,be  \tijv  fpat  gefriififtudEt;  e^  fotntnt  mir  t)or,  ate  ob 
id^  eben  erft  2Keffer  unb  @abel  toegQelegt  f)(itte.  93.  —  SBol^er 
befoTTttnen  ©te  tf)r  fd^one^  ©emiife  unb  ^l^r  ©eftiigel?  21.  — 
®a^  tft  ein  ©efd^ent  be^  ®rafen  §.,  ber  f)ier  in  ber  9lal)e  etn 
?anbgut  beftfet  unb  ftd^  eifrig  mit  feinem  ©arten  befd^aftigt.  10 
^ennen  ©ie  il^n?  93.  —  ^Jlid^t  fef)r  Qut.  S<^  f)cibe  if)n  bor  ei* 
nigen  3cif)ren  auf  einer  SJerfantmluuQ  fennen  gelemt.  21.  —  Qd) 
erf)ielt  gerabe  einen  93rief  Don  il^nx,  er  Icifet  fid^  S^nen  aud^  em- 
pfei^Ien.  @r  f)at  fid^  ben  gug  libertreten  unb  langmeilt  fid^  fef)r;  er 
f)offt,  bafe  ©ie  il^n  befud^en  merben,  if)n  p  erl^eitem.  93.  —  ©ef)r  15 
geme,  id^  geniefee  einen  J^ag  auf  bent  ?anbe  immer  fef)r,  aber 

e^  gelingt  ntir  nid^t  oft,  l^inau^siifommen.  21.  —  3)er  ®raf  ift 
ein  fe^r  mertoiirbiger  alter  §err.  (£r  l^at  feinem  ©ol^ne  nie  l)er= 
gief)en,  bafe  er  fein  Sanbgut  t)erlaffen  f)at.  (S^  gefaHt  if)m  nur 
auf  bem  Sanbe,  er  urteilt  fef)r  f)art  iiber  bie  ?eute  in  ber  ©tabt  unb  20 
migtraut  if)nen  alien.  9Bir  mifefallen  if)m  aber  iDeniger  aU  bie 
anbem,  unb  er  bett)irtet  un^  oft  in  feinem  §aufe» 

b)  1.  SBarum  ift  21.  nid^t  fetir  f)ungrig?    2.  SBa^  tciffen  ©ie 
iiber  ben  ®rafen  §.?    3.  SBo   f)at  ii^n  93.  fennen  gelemt? 

4,  SBarum  ift  93.  bereit  il^n  gu  befud^en?    5.  9[Barum  urteilt  25 
ber  ®raf  fef)r  f)art  iiber  feinen  ©of)n?    6.  93efd^reiben  ©ie  ba^ 
Smittageffen! 


44       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

c)  A.  —  Do  not  lay  down  your  spoon.  You  have 
hardly  eaten  a  spoonful  of  soup.  It  seems  to  me  as  if  you 
were  eating  nothing  at  all.  Will  you  not  take  some  vege- 
tables or  some  salad?  Please  help  yourself.  B,  —  Please 
5  excuse  me  for  eating^  so  little,  but  I  am  not  at  all  hungry. 
I  dined  to-day  in  the  country  with  that  curious  old  gentle- 
man Count  H.,  and  he  would  hardly  allow  me  to  lay  down 
my  knife  and  fork.  I  never  succeed  in  visiting  him  with- 
out eating  and  drinking  too  much.    A.  —  What  beautiful 

lo  vegetables  and  poultry  he  has  on  his  estate !  I  received  a 
present  of  some  j&ne  vegetables  from  him  last  week  (some 
vegetables  as  a  present).  B,  —  Yes.  He  sent  his  re- 
gards to  you  and  wanted  to  know  whether  you  had  received 
it.     I  often  visit  him  on  his  beautiful  estate,  for  I  Hke  the 

15  country  (it  pleases  me  in  .  .  .).  It  amuses  me  very  much 
to  observe  how  much  he  dislikes  all  the  people  who  live 
near  by.  He  would  be  very  much  bored,  if  he  were  not  so 
much  occupied  with  his  garden.  A.  —  Does  he  not  like 
to  entertain  his  friends  from  town?    He  has  often  invited 

20  me  and  I  have  breakfasted  with  him  once  and  dined  with 
him  twice,  but  I  must  confess  that  I  dislike  him  very  much. 
Perhaps  I  judge  him  harshly,  but  I  mistrust  a  man  who  is 
deserted  by  his  own  children.  B.  —  They  say  that  his 
sons  did  not  like  life^  in  the  country.    A,  —  They  have 

25  never  forgiven  their  father  for  not  letting  them  become 
officers.    B.  —  Is  that  so? 

1  Gram.  21d,  *  Gram.  20,  la. 


PKEFIXES  SEPARABLE  OR  INSEPARABLE     45 

27.  2)ie  erfifd^aft  —  The  Inheritance 

Prefixes  Separable  or  Inseparable 
Grammar,  16 

a)  ©eftem  unterf)ielt  tc^  mtd^  fel^r  gut  in  etner  ©efeUfd^aft, 
rtield^e  bei  bem  ®rafen  §,  ftattfanb*  3d^  traf  einen  jutiQeu  53e= 
fannten,  beffen  Onfel  if)m  gang  unerlDartet  ein  grofee^  S?ermogen 
{)mterlaffen  f)at,  Sr  ift  ein  fef)r  sut)erIa6iGer  junger  Tlann,  mit 
bem  tt)tr  alle  fel^r  gertie  umgef)en;  man  tann  i^m  alle^  ant)ertrauen  s 
unb  er  tDirb  fein  grofee^  S5ermogen  gelDife  nid^t  mipraud^en* 
@r  beabfid^tigt  jei^t,  eine  9ietfe  um  bie  3BeIt  gu  madden  unb  er  bot 
mir  einen  ^la^  in  feinem  Slutomobil  an*  Seiber  ift  meine  3^it 
SU  fef)r  in  Slnfprud^  genommen,  aU  bag  id^  mit  if)m  gel^en  fonnte* 
3)a  id^  gerabe  ein  Sud^  iiberfefee,  tt)eld^e6  ber  Onfel  be^  iungen  lo 
9D?anne^  gefd^rieben  f)atte,  intereffierte  e^  mid^  fef)r,  ettra^  mel^r 
iiber  biefen  p  f)oren.  ?eiber  l^atte  er  teinen  fe{)r  guten  9?uf;  oft 
f)at  er  ba6  ©efefe  umgangen  unb  aud^  feine  greunbe  l^interging  er 
mand^mal  @r  t)erlor  fein  2thtn,  al6  er  fid^  in  einem  fleinen 
93oot  tiber  einen  glufe  fe^en  Iie§»  3)a  ba^  SBetter  fe^r  ftiirmifd^  15 
mar,  rieten  i{)m  bie  ©d^iffer  bat)on  ab,  aber  er  beftanb  barauf  unb 
tDoUte  feinen  SBitlen  burd^fe^en,  unb  niemanb  tDagte,  if)m  su  it)iber:s 
fpred^en* 

6)  1»  SBo  unb  tDann  traf  en  ©ie  Q^xtn  iungen  Setannten? 
2,  SBa^  tDiffen  ©ie  iiber  fein  Seben?  3,  SBeld^e  "ipiane  l^at  er  20 
Jei^t?  4.  SBarum  intereffieren  ©ie  fid^  iefet  befonber^  filr  il^n? 
5,  SBa^  tDiffen  ©ie  liber  ba^  ?eben  be6  Ontel^?  6.  ©eben  ©ie 
in  birefter  9?ebe  bie  Unterl)altung  gmifd^en  Ql^nen  unb  Q^xtm 
iungen  93etannten. 

c)   My  dear  Henry,  25 

Do  you  remember  the  old  gentleman  we  met  last  summer 

in  Italy,  whom  the  boatmen  would  not  set  across  the  lake? 

He  had  intended  to  reach  the  railroad  station  on  the  othef 


46  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

side  that  night  and  when  the  boatmen  advised  against  it 
and  said  it  was  too  stormy,  he  contradicted  them  and 
wanted  to  carry  through  his  plan.  They  could  hardly 
understand  what  he  said,  but  I  translated  for  them  and 
5  afterwards  I  conversed  with  him  a  long  time.  I  have 
just  learned  that  this  man  was  a  cousin  of  my  father's 
with  whom  he  had  not  associated  for  years,  because  he 
beheved  he  had  deceived  him  and  abused  his  confidence. 
As  a  young  man^  my  father  entrusted  all  his  small  prop- 

lo  erty  to  this  cousin,  whom  he  considered  very  trustworthy, 
although  he  had  not  a  very  good  reputation  and  some  of 
his  friends  advised  against  it.  When  my  father  came 
back,  his  cousin  said  that  the  money  had  been  lost.  Un- 
fortunately it  could  not  be  proved  that  his  cousin  had 

15  evaded  the  laws  and  so  the  latter  was  able  to  carry  through 
his  wicked  plan  and  keep  the  money.  Now  we  have  just 
heard  most  unexpectedly  that  he  has  died  in  Bavaria  and 
left  me  his  estate  and  a  large  fortune.  My  time  is  too 
much  occupied  for  me  to  be  able  to  go  there  at  present, 

20  but  I  am  going  next  month  to  a  meeting  which  takes  place 
in  Munich  and  I  intend  to  take  the  trip  in  an  automobile 
and  to  visit  my  new  estate.  May  I  offer  you  a  place  in 
my  automobile? 

38.  ^a^  ^E^eatcr  — The  Theater 

The  Subjunctive  Mode 
Grammar,  26,  I  and  II 

a)  SI*  —  SBotlcn  ©ic  j[e^t  mtt  mtr  in  ba^  X^eakx  gel^cn,  menn 
25  ©tc  3^it  l^aben?    ^tn  SoniGlid^en  ©d^aufptelf)au^  tDirb  niimlid^ 
ba^  Srama  „SBiIf)eIm  2:eir'  aufQcfiifirt,  unb  id)  mod^tc  c«  fef)r 
1  Gram.  20,  II. 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   MODE  47 

geme  fefien,  S3- — ^atk  id^  nur  3^it!  §(itte  td^  nur  tncinc 
S3riefe  geftern  gcfd^rieben!  21*  —  Site  ob  ©ie  3f)te  Sriefe  nid&t 
gerabe  fo  gut  morgen  fd^reiben  fonnten!  ©em  Jl^catersettel  nad^ 
treten  bie  erften  ©d^aufpieler  f)eute  abenb  auf»  3d&  ft^eue  mid^ 
befonber^  auf  bie  britte  ©s^ne  im  britten  Slufpg,  tt)o  XtU  ben  5 
Slpfel  t)om  ^opf  feine^  ^tnbe^  fd^ie^t.  S.  —  9^un,  td^  tt)erbe  mit^ 
gel^ett.  SBa^  fiir  "ipici^e  n)erben  rt)tr  nel^men?  2l»  —  3d^  benfe,  e^ 
toixve  am  beften,  toenn  tx)ir  ^tDet  ^Ict^e  nebeneinanber  in  ber  erften 
ober  gmeiten  9?eif)e  im  erften  9tang  befommen  fdnnten^  SBenn  tt)ir 
t)or  fieben  Ul^r  an  bie  2:f)eaterfaffe  fommen,  fonnen  lt)ir  gelDife  10 
nod^  gnte  ^la^e  befommen.  §atte  id^  baran  gebad^t,  fo  {)atte  id) 
bie  ©intritt^farten  geftem  beforgt!  S.  —  SBenn  id)  nur  toiifete, 
tDO  id&  meine  §anbfd^uf)e  l^ingelegt  \)abtl  2l»  —  §ier  finb  fie; 
fie  feF)en  au^,  ate  ob  fie  ganj  neu  tDdren,  S*  —  3a,  ba^  finb  fie 
aud^*  @el^en  mir,  ef)e  e^  ^n  fpftt  tt)irb!  25ergeffen  ®ie  3f)r  15 
Opemgla^  nid^t,  bamit  tt)ir  genau  fef)en  fonnen,  toa^  auf  ber 
S3lif)ne  i)orgef)t»  Senn  id)  3^^  gel^abt  l^citte,  f)atte  td^  ba^ 
®rama  fef)r  geme  nod^  einmal  t)or  ber  Sluffiil^rung  gelefen^ 

6)  L  SBarum  tDoIIte  2l»  l^eute  befonberg  gem  in  ba^  Jfieater 
gel)en?  2.  9Ba6  far  ^lafee  nal^m  er?  3.  SBarum  toare  e^  20 
beffer  getoefen,  bie  ©intritt^farten  fruiter  gu  beforgen?  4,  SBa^ 
mu^  man  mitnel^men,  loenn  man  in  ba^  Jl^eater  gel^t?  5,  2Bar^ 
um  ift  e^  gut,  ein  ©rama  t)or  ber  Sluffiifirung  nod^  einmal  in 
lefen?  6.  ©eben  ®ie  bie  Unterfialtung  an  ber  JI)eaterfaffe, 
toenn  21*  bie  gintritt^farten  fauft*  25 

c)  Yesterday  evening  I  went  to  the  theater  with  my 
friend  Count  B.  to  see  a  performance  of  the  drama 
William  Tell,  I  looked  forward  with  special  pleasure  to 
the  evening,  for  I  had  heard  that  the  best  actor  of  the 
Royal  Theater  was  to  appear  as  Tell.  It  would  have  3° 
been  better  to  get  the  tickets  the  day  before.  But  who 
would  have  thought  that  so  many  people  would  be  there! 


48  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

When  we  got  to  the  box-office,  it  looked  as  if  we  could  not 
get  any  places  at  all.  We  asked  the  man  at  the  box- 
office  what  places  we  could  get.  ^^If  you  had  come 
yesterday,  you  would  still  have  found  good  seats,''  said 

S  he.  ''Now  I  can  only  give  you  seats  in  the  tenth  row  of 
the  balcony,  if  you  want  to  sit  together."  "Would  it 
not  be  better  to  come  to-morrow  evening?''  said  I.  ''As 
if  we  could  not  see  the  stage  just  as  well  from  the  balcony," 
cried  the  Count,  "especially  with  an  opera  glass ! "    "Yes," 

lo  said  I;  "if  only  I  had  not  forgotten  to  bring  mine  with  me." 
But  he  had  his  and  we  really  saw  very  well.  The  per- 
formance was  not  very  good.  If  I  had  only  read  my  pro- 
gram before  the  performance,  I  should  have  seen  that  the 
principal  actor  was  ill  and  could  not  appear.     The  one 

15  who  played  Tell  looked  as  if  he  were  a  very  young  man. 
If  you  had  only  seen  him  when  he  shot  the  apple  from 
the  head  of  his  child  in  the  third  scene  of  the  third  act! 
He  will  certainly  never  become  a  great  actor! 

39.  ^ic  SBudfl^attblung  —  The  Bookstore   . 

Subjunctive  in  Indirect  Statement 
Grammar,  25,  III,  and  6,  16 

a)  ^eibelberg,  ben  !!•  a«at,  1910. 

20         SWem  Itebe^  graulein! 

@g  tut  TTtir  fcl^r  leib,  ba^  i^  crft  f)eute  S^ren  Sluftrag  auS- 
fil{)rcn  fonntc,  abcr  id)  {)atte  eine  fd^Iimmc  (Srfaltung,  unb  ber 
Slrst  fagte,  bag  16)  ctnige  Jage  in  §aufe  bleiben  mufete.  Site  id) 
f)cutc  morgcn  in  ber  93u(^t)anblun0  bic  ©oetl^e^Slu^Qabe,  in  ?eber 
25  gebunbcn,  t)crIanQte,  [agte  ntir  ber  Sud^^anbler,  bafe  er  biefe  ?lu6^ 
gabe  nur  in  ?einenbanb  ober  ungebunben  dorratig  l^cttte,  aber  ber 
SDrutf  unb  bie  Slu^ftattung  feien  gerabe  fo  gutt    3^  faf)  fie  an 


SUBJUNCTIVE   IN   INDIRECT   STATEMENT  49 

unb  fanb,  ba^  er  bte  SBal^rfieit  gefprod^en  f)atte»  S)ann  fragte  id) 
m^  neuen  beutfc^en  9tomanen*  @r  fagte,  ba^  bie  9iorttane  Don 
2?iebi0,  ©trafe,  3ci^n  u4-ti3-(Ite^:  unb  fo  tDetter)  im  lefeten  3a{)rc 
fef)r  t)icl  t)erlangt  tDorben  njdren,  er  felbft  fcinbe  bic  3tJf)u'f(^en 
dtomam  fel^r  padenb  unb  intereffant,  unb  tt)are  geme  bereit,  s 
3^nen  cinige  jur  §lu^tt)a]^I  gu  fenben^  3<^  tDci^Itc  ctnigc  au^,  bte 
aud^  einen  l^libfd^en  Sinbanb  {)atten  unb  f)offe,  bafe  ©ie  barunter 
tttm^  finben  iDerben,  tna6  3f)uen  gefallt* 

9Wit  freunblid^en  ©riigen 

3f)re  Slnna  9}JuIIer.      lo 

6)  !♦  SBeld^cn  Sluftrag  f)atte  graulein  2)?utler  befommen? 
2«  SBarum  f)atte  fie  il)n  nid^t  gleid^  au^gefilfirt?  3*  SBarum 
empfal)!  ber  33ud&f)(inbler  bie  ^alin'fd^en  9?omane?  4,  SBa^  fiir 
©oetl^e^Slu^gaben  l^atte  ber  Suc^{)anbler?  5,  SBeld^e  33ud^er 
tDttl^Ite  grdulein  3)?»  au^  unb  marum?  6*  ©d^reiben  ©ie  ben  15 
53rlef,  in  bent  biefe  Same  graulein  Slnna  9WuIIer  bitUt,  if)xm 
Sluftrag  in  ber  Sud^f)anblung  au^pfu{)ren, 

c)  A,  —  My  sister  has  written  me  that  she  wants  to 
give  her  friend  Miss  D.  some  nice  books  for  her  birthday. 
She  says  she  has  a  bad  cold  and  cannot  go  out  and  asks  20 
me  to  pick  out  the  books.     Do  you  think  that  I  can  exe- 
cute her  commission?    B.  —  If  you  take  my  advice,  you 
will  go  to  the  bookstore  on  Williams  Street;  they  say 
that  the  bookseller  is  a  very  intelligent  man  and  that  he 
has  all  the  best  books  in  stock.     Did  your  sister  tell  you  25 
what  kind  of  books  she  would  like  to  have?    A.  —  She 
said  they  must  be  bound  in  leather  and  that  the  print 
must  be  very  good,  as  Miss  D.  has  strained  her  eyes  and 
cannot  read  small  print.     B.  —  Didn^t  she  tell  you  what 
kind  of  books  Miss  D.  Hkes?    A.  —  She  said  that  Miss  D.  30 
had  no  good  edition  of  Goethe  and  that  she  had  thought  of 
buying  her  one,  but  that  she  herself  likes  to  read  some- 


50  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

thing  modem  and  exciting  and  she  would  rather  choose 
some  of  the  new  German  novels.  B,  —  I  have  heard  that 
Viebig's  novels  have  been  very  much  read  this  year,  but 
I  have  only  seen  them  bound  in  linen  or  unbound.  Didn't 
5  your  sister  say  that  these  books  must  have  a  very  pretty 
binding?  A,  —  Yes.  I  have  been  at  the  shop  and  the 
bookseller  says  he  will  send  her  several  on  approval,  and 
if  she  selects  some  from  among  them,  he  is  ready  to  have 
them  bound  in  leather.     He  says  he  is  sorry  that  he  hasn't 

lo  the  novels  of  Stratz,  Zahn,  etc.,  in  stock,  but  he  himself 
thinks  the  Viebig  novels  more  exciting  and  they  are  more 
in  demand.  B,  —  I  think  you  have  carried  out  your 
sister's  commission  very  well  and  I  am  sure  she  will  find 
some  among  the  books  you  have  sent  which  will  please 

IS  her. 

30.  Review 

Based  on  Exercises  25-30 

As  Charles  had  rested  well,  he  rose  very  early,  before 
half  past  six  o'clock.  He  had  told  the  maid  the  day  be- 
fore that  he  wished  to  breakfast  early,  as  he  intended  to 
spend  the  day  in  the  country.     He  was  going  to  visit  an 

2o  old  friend  of  his.  Count  H.  The  latter  had  sprained  his 
ankle,  and  the  doctor  had  told  him  that  he  would  have  to 
stay  at  home  quietly  for  several  days.  He  was  very  much 
bored  and  wanted  to  be  amused.  At  breakfast  Charles 
told  the  maid  to  ask  his  sister  whether  she  would  like  to 

25  come  with  him,  but  she  said  that  she  was  not  yet  dressed 
and  that  she  could  not  go.  ''If  you  had  only  told  me 
about  your  plan  yesterday,"  she  called  out,  '*I  would  have 
gone  with  you.  If  I  had  been  told  before,  I  would  have 
got  up  early  and  should  be  ready  now.    Then  I  should 


REFLEXIVE  AND  IMPERSONAL  VERBS      51 

have  done  yesterday  all  that  I  have  to  do  this  morning. 
I  should  have  enjoyed  a  day  in  the  country  very  much. 
Now  I  shall  have  to  be  alone  all  day  long  and  I  shall  be 
very  much  bored."  Her  brother  said  that  she  could 
occupy  herself  with  her  books,  but  she  said  she  had  noth-  5 
ing  interesting  to  read.  As  Charles  thought  that  she 
would  never  stop  complaining,  he  left  the  house  as  quickly 
as  he  could.  On  his  way  to  the  station  he  went  into  a 
bookstore  and  asked  for  some  new  German  books.  The 
bookseller  showed  him  several  novels,  and  as  some  of  10 
them  looked  as  if  they  were  not  quite  new,  he  said  he 
would  sell  them  to  him  more  cheaply.  Charles  asked 
him  whether  he  would  be  willing  to  send  some  of  them 
to  his  sister  on  approval  and  the  bookseller  said  that  he 
would  be  very  glad  to  send  her  all  she  wanted.  So  the  15 
young  man  chose  several  books  which  had  very  nice 
bindings  and  the  owner  of  the  store  promised  to  send  them 
immediately  to  his  sister^s  address. 

31.  2)er  SBefu^  —  A  Morning  Call 

Reflexive  and  Impersonal  Verbs 
Grammar,  17,  18 

a)  SI.  —  ©utcn  SWorgett,  §en:  *iProfeffor!  93itte,  fe^en  ®ie 
fid^!  S§  frcut  mid)  fcf)r,  ®te  p  fef)en.  SBie  gef)t  e^  3f)nen?  20 
93.  —  Sanfe,  gut;  id)  {)abc  ntid^  tDteber  ganj  erl^olt.  Unb  toie 
bcftnbcn  ©ie  fid^?  21.  —  2)anfe,  ntd^t  befonber^;  td^  f)abe  mtd^ 
fcf)r  erfciltet;  e^  friert  tnid^  ben  gangen  Jag,  trofebem  id^  mid^  fef)r 
toarm  angesogen  f)abc.  95.  —  2ld^,  ba^  tut  mir  fel^r  leib.  Sd) 
btlbete  mir  ein,  ®te  erfalteten  fid^  nie.  21.  —  O  bod),  fel^r  oft.  25 
Qd)  toax  in  etner  ©efellfd^aft,  Ido  id^  mid^  fcl^r  gut  untcrfialten 
l^atte;  e^  regnete,  ate  id^  nad^  §aufe  ging,  unb  id^  bad^te,  e^  fei 


52  GERMAN  AND   ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

nid^t  ber  SJHl^ie  tpert,  einen  ^a^m  gu  nel^men,  fo  tnurbc  id&  gans 
nafe*  53*  —  @^  f)atte  fid^  aber  bod^  ber  Wxf)e  geIof)nt,  emc 
!Crofd^te  p  be^al^Ien.  2L  —  9^un,  ma^  gibt  e^  9ieue^?  S*  — 
Qd)  tiad^  md)t6  ?leue6,  2^duf(^te  i^  mtd^  ober  fal)  id)  Qljxen 
5  §erm  ®ot)n  geftem  auf  ber  ©trafee?  3d&  tDunberte  mid^  bar^- 
ilber,  benn  id)  bad)U,  er  fei  in  greiburg,  SI,  —  ®ie  f)aben  fid) 
nid^t  geirrt,  (S^  gelang  ititn,  Uriaub  gu  befomtnen,  unb  er  fam 
geftem  I)ier  an,  @^  tDiirbe  if)m  getDife  33er0nu0en  madden,  ®ie  p 
begriifeen,  aber  er  mar  fe{)r  milbe  unb  ruf)t  fid^  nod^  ou^,  @r  iDirb 
10  ©ie  getDife  morgen  befud^en,  @^  gibt  ttjenig  9)Jenfc§en,  an  bie  er 
fid^  mit  fold^em  SSergnilgen  erinnert  mie  an  ©ie» 

6)  h  aSie  fam  e^,  bag  §err  21,  fid^  erfaltet  f)atte?  2,  9[Bar== 
um  begriigt  fein  ©obn  §erm  ^rofeffor  nid^t?  3,  SBa^  n)iffen 
©ie  ilber  ben  ©obn?  4,  aBarum  tt)irb  er  §erm  "iprofeffor  erft 
IS  ntorgen  befud^en?  5,  Sefc^reiben  ©ie  ben  33efud^,  ben  W^  ©obn 
morgen  bei  bent  §erm  *iProfeffor  madden  it)irb  unb  er^ablen  ©ie, 
tDie  m\j)  iDoriiber  fid^  bie  beiben  §erren  unterbalten  tcerben, 

c)  A,  —  Good  morning,  Mrs.  Smith.  I  am  very  glad 
that  you  have  recovered  from  yom-  cold.    Are  you  quite 

2o  well  now?  B.  —  Thanks,  but  you  are  mistaken.  I  never 
catch  cold.  A,  —  I  am  very  glad  to  hear  that.  I  am 
always  cold  here  in  the  country  and  often  take  cold. 
B.  —  If  you  are  cold,  you  must  dress  more  warmly;  then 
you  will  be  well.    A.  —  Shall  I  not  have  the  pleasure  of 

25  seeing  Professor  Smith? ^  How  is  he  to-day?  B,  —  Un- 
fortunately he  is  not  well.  He  caught  a  bad  cold  a  few 
days  ago  and  has  not  recovered  from  it.  A,  —  I  am  very 
sorry  for  that.  How  did  it  happen  (come)?  B,  —  He 
had  to  go  to  town  and  came  back  so  late  that  he  did  not 

30  succeed  in  getting  a  cab  at  the  station,  so  he  arrived  at 
home  quite  wet.     To-day  he  is  resting,  but  he  will  be  very 

1  Gram.  30. 


MODAL  auxiliaries:  bilrfen,  fonnen,  tnogen      53 

sorry  not  to  see  you.  A.  —  And  how  is  your  son?  I  am 
surprised  that  I  have  not  seen  him  here  this  summer.  I 
remember  his  last  visit  with  great  pleasure;  isn^t  he  com- 
ing this  year?  B,  —  I  thought  he  would  succeed  in  getting 
leave  of  absence,  but  I  was  mistaken.  He  longs  for  the  5 
country,  but  he  thinks  it  is  not  worth  while  to  come  for 
three  days.  Is  there  any  news  to-day?  Am  I  mistaken, 
or  were  you  at  Countess  X's  party  last  night?  Did  you 
have  a  good  time?  A,  —  Not  especially.  I  had  imagined 
that  I  should  have  a  good  time,  but  I  was  mistaken;  it  10 
was  hardly  worth  the  trouble  of  going.  ^  B.  —  It  is  still 
raining;  please  sit  down  again.  It  is  not  worth  while  to 
go  out  in  the  rain.  A,  —  Thank  you,  I  will  take  a  cabj 
then  I  shall  not  get  wet. 

33.  S«  bet  2cxi^hiblxoti)tt  —  At  the  Circulating  Library 

Modal  Auxiliaries:  biirfen,  fonnen,  tnogen 

Grammar,  19 

a)  2L  —  Sann  td^  etntge  neue  Sixd^er  befotnTtten?    ^d^  l^citte  15 
bit  alten  Qeme  gurlidfQcbrad^t,  e^  mogen  brei  ober  t)ier  fein,  aber 
iii)  f)abe  fie  nod^  ntd^t  fertig  lefen  fbnnen;  id)  ttjerbe  fie  mit  ber 
"iPoft  prildEfd^iden,  benn  td^  felbft  it)erbe  in  ben  nttd^ften  Jagen 
nid^t  in  bie  ©tabt  fomnten  fonnen.  S^  module  geme  ben  neneften 
9Joman  Don  ©nbermann  {)aben.    3ft  er  l^ier?    S3.  —  9fein,  20 
leiber  nidjt,  aber  er  fann  ieben  SlngenbKdf  priidEfommen.    3)arf 
id^  ibn  filr  ©te  t)ormerfen?    SBenn  ©ie  granjofifd^  fonnen, 
mod^te  id^  Ql^nen  btefe  9toDeIIen  empfel^Ien.    21. — Seiber  fann  id) 
e6  nid)t    Qd)  \)abe  ate  ^inb  feine  frenxben  ©prad^en  lemen  bilr= 
fen,  unb  jefet  mag  id^  ntd^t  mel^r  anfangen.    Sd)  module  gem  25 
biefen  gefd^td^tlid^en  9?oman  Don  gber^  mitnel^nxen;  id^  i^abe  ge= 

1  Gram.  29. 


54  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

l&ort,  er  fei  intereffant,  aber  id^  tann  mid^  geirrt  l^aben.  33»  — 
®a^  fann  fem»  ®ie  bilrfen  nid^t  aHe^  glauben,  toa^  ©ic  f)oren, 
§err  §.  fagte,  bafe  er  bariiber  f)atte  etnfd^Iafen  fonnen.  21.  — 
SSSie  bem  aud^  fein  mag,  id^  mag  biefen  ©d^riftftelkr  iiberfiaupt 
5  ntd^t  befonber^  gem.  Slber  id)  merbe  ba^  S3ud&  bod^  mitnel^men; 
meine  ©d^n3efter  mag  il^n  lieber  ate  id^,  unb  fie  h)irb  ben  9?oman 
lefen,  mag  er  langmeilig  fein  ober  nid^t. 

b)  1.  SBarum  ging  21.  in  bie  Seif)bibIiotf)ef?    2.  9Ba6  lt)irb 
fie  mit  i\)xtn  alten  S3iid^em  madden?    3.  SBarum  fonnte  fie  ba^ 

lo  gemiinf d^te  33uc^  nid^t  betommen?  4.  SBarum  n)oHte  fie  feine 
franjofifd^en  9lobetten  mitnel)men?  5.  SBarum  nal^m  fie  einen 
gefd^id^tlid^en  $Roman  mit?  6.  S3efd^reiben  ©ie  bie  Seif)bibIio== 
t\)cl  in  3l^rer  Btabt 

c)  A.  —  May  I  bring  you  anything  from  town?    I  am 
15  going  there  to-day  and  can  bring  back  anything  you  want. 

B, — I  should  like  some  books  from  the  circulating  Hbrary. 
As  I  have  not  been  able  to  go  to  town  the  last  few  days 
(last  days),  I  have  not  been  able  to  get  any  new  ones. 
A.  —  What  kind  of  books  do  you  like?    May  I  select 

20  them  for  you,  or  will  you  tell  me  what  you  want?  Do 
you  prefer  novels  or  short  stories?  B,  —  I  should  have 
liked  to  get  the  latest  drama  by  Hauptmann,  but  I  could 
not,  because  it  had  not  come  back.  The  hbrarian  said 
he  could  reserve  it  for  me,  but  he  may  have  forgotten  it. 

25  A,  —  It  may  not  have  come  back  yet.  May  I  not  get 
you  some  French  novels?  I  like  to  read  books  in  foreign 
languages.  B.  —  Unfortunately  my  mother  says  that  I 
must  not  read  French  novels.  I  know  French,  but  I  do 
not  like  the  French  books  I  have  been  allowed  to  read. 

30  My  teacher  recommended  a  very  tiresome  historical  novel 
to  me,  but  I  told  her  that  I  could  not  finish  it  and  that  I 
almost  went  to  sleep  over  it.    I  do  not  want  to  begin  a 


MODAL  auxiliaries:  milffen,  foMen,  tooHen       55 

new  one.  A,  —  I  could  have  recommended  some  good 
French  stories  that  you  would  have  hked.  However  that 
may  be,  I  will  get  you  some  plays  by  Hauptmann,  if  I  can. 
He  is  an  author  of  whom  I  am  especially  fond.  There 
may  be  two  or  three  of  his  plays  in  the  library  which  you  5 
have  not  read.  B,  —  Bring  me  whatever^  books  you  like 
yourself.  I  will  read  them,  whether  they  are  dull  or  not. 
One  can  read  anything  in  the  country. 

33.  ®er  mifilungcne  5Plan  —  The  Plan  that  Fafled 
Modal  Auxiliaries:  tnllffen,  fotteU;  tDoHen 

Grammar,  19 

a)  31.  —  ©te  l^cttten  geftem  mit  mir  in  ba6  Sl^eater  gel^en 
foHen.    ©ie  flatten  e^  aud^  t)erfpro(^en,  marum  famen  ©le  ntd^t?  lo 
3?(^  mitt  nic^t  f)offen,  "t^o,^  ©ie  franf  tt^aren!   33.  — 3^  ^(ire  fel^r 
gerne  gegangen,  aber  \i)  l^abe  nid^t  gefien  fonnen.     ©erabe  ate  td& 
an  bie  Saf[e  gefien  inoHte,  fam  ber  junge  §err  ©.  unb  fo  mu^te 
\i)  ivc  §aufe  bleiben.    21.  —  ^6)  fottte  benfen,  ©ie  l^atten  tf)m 
fagen  fonnen,  er  fotte  ein  anbere^  9KaI  ju  Sl^nen  fommen.    S3.  —  is 
®a6  tDottte  \i)  ntd^t.    @r  f)atte  tntereffante  S^ac^rid^ten.    (Sr 
njttt  t)on  meinem  t)erfd^oHenen  grennb  in  Slmerifa  gel^ort  fiaben. 
@r  mar  ein  Snabe,  ber  nte  gel^ord^en  mottte,  nnb  lief  feinen  (SItem 
meg.    3efet  fott  er  in  ^altfomien  leben  nnb  fid^  bort  ein  S3ermo= 
gen  ermorben  l^aben.    21.  —  ©ottte  \iQi^  mal^r  fein!    3n  ^ali=  20 
fomien  ntnfe  t%  fef)r  fd^on  fein.    S3.  —  SBte  mar  e^  int  Jl^eater? 
21.  —  SBir  mufeten  bie  ganse  ^Ai  lad^en.    S3.  —  ^0,^  motten     , 
©ie  bamit  fagen?   21. — Qtn  nener  innger  ©d^anfpieler  fpielte  bie 
Sfotte  be^  §elben  fef)r  fd^Ied^t.    3)ie  guten  ©d^anfpieler  nxiiffen 
atte  franf  ober  anf  Sfeifen  gemefen  fein.    SBenn  biefer  ftd^  nid^t  25 
beffert,  mirb  er  gemife  ba^  2:l)eater  t)erlaffen  mltffen,  er  f)(itte  mirf* 

»  Gram.  12,  IV 


66  GEBMAN   AND   ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

Ii($  ctncTt  anbem  Scruf  ml)kn  foHen!  Wlan  l)'dtk  if)m  ntd^t 
eriauben  foUcn,  in  biefem  S)raina  aufsutreten  (ober:  man  l^citte 
tl^n  in  biefem  ©ratna  nid^t  auftreten  laffen  foKen)^ 

b)  h  SBarum  h)ar  33-  geftem  ntd^t  in  ba«  2:f)eater  gegangen? 
5  2.  SBie  Wt^  er  ben  33efnd&  fortfd^iden  fonnen?    3.  SBa^  fiir 

9Zad^ric^ten  brad^te  $err  ©♦?  4.  SBarum  tdav  21*  nid^t  mit  ber 
Slnffiil^runG  pfrieben?  5,  2Ba^  fagte  er  iiber  ben  ©d^aufpieler, 
n)eld^er  bie  StoIIe  be^  §elben  fpielte? 

c)  My  dear  Charles, 

lo  I  ought  to  have  written  you  before  and  I  wanted  to, 
but  I  have  not  been  able  to.  You  want  me  to  give  you 
news  of  our  lost  friend  Henry  M.  He  has  gone  to  Cali- 
fornia and  is  said  to  be  very  ill,  but  Mr.  S.  claims  to  have 
heard  that  his  parents  had  to  send  him  away,  because  he 

IS  had  lost  so  much  money.  He  has  had  to  leave  Germany 
and  to  choose  a  new  profession.  It  is  said  to  be  very  easy 
to  make  a  fortune  in  CaUfomia,  but  I  think  he  ought  to 
have  gone  sooner.  If  he  had  been  obUged  to  obey  his 
parents  as  a  boy,  he  would  not  have  had  to  leave  them  now. 

2o  I  must  tell  you  about  the  play  I  saw  last  night.  They^ 
were  going  to  give  the  drama  Minna  von  Bamhelm,  a  play 
which  I  like  very  much,  and  a  famous  actor  was  to  appear 
as  the  hero,  Tellheim.  He  must,  however,  have  been  away 
or  ill,  for  he  could  not  appear.     They  ought  to  have  told  us 

25  so  at  the  box-office;  then  we  could  have  chosen  another 
theater.  I  should  have  Hked  to  go  out  after  the  first  act, 
but  I  could  not,  because  I  had  invited  young  Mr.  G.  and 
he  wanted  to  stay.  We  hoped  that  the  actors  would  im- 
prove, but  they  grew  (acted)  worse  and  worse.     I  could 

30  not  help  laughing,  but  I  hope  that  I  shall  never  again  have 
to  see  so  bad  a  performance. 

1  Gram.  12, 1. 


MODAL   AUXILIARIES  57 

Another  time  I  shall  be  able  to  write  you  something  in- 
teresting about  my  life  here.    Now  you  must  write  to  me. 
With  kindest  regards  to  all  your  family, 

Yours  truly, 

Hermann  D.       5 

34.  ^ie  Xa^^tnnf}v  —  The  Watch 

Modal  Auxiliaries 
Grammar,  19 

a)  9Sor  ad^t  S^agen  f)at  ber  Heine  ^an^  fetne  Ul^r  fallen  laffen. 
Sr  l^tttte  e^  nid^t  tun  foHen,  benn  feine  ©Item  flatten  gefagt,  er 
bllrfte  fie  ntd^t  betnt  ©ptelen  tragen*  @r  fagt,  er  iiabt  e^  getDig 
ntd^t  tun  moHen;  e^  mufe  tt)of)I  au6  S3erfef)en  gefd^el^en  fein.    @^ 

ift  bent  tiiefigen  Ul^rmad^er  ntd^t  gelungen,  fie  au^pbeffem,  tro^==  10 
bent  er  ein  fet)r  gefd^tdter  5D?ann  fein  iDtH*  5Run  tDirb  ber  Uf)r- 
madder  in  S3*  getDtg  etnige  ©tunben  arbeiten  ntixffen,  urn  fie  h)teber 
in  Orbnung  gu  bringen,  unb  e^  tDtrb  btel  foften,  benn  er  foil  fel^r 
teuer  fein,  9Kan  l^atte  fie  gleid^  p  il^m  fd^idfen  foHen,  man  follte 
nie  einent  ©orful^rmad^er  trauen!  3)te  ©Item  be^  fleinen  §ang,  15 
—  er  mag  neun  ober  sel^n  Sai)xe  alt  fein,  —  tDoIlten  if)m  lange 
3eit  leine  U^r  geben,  obgleid^  fie  e^  gefonnt  i)'dtkn,  aber  fd^Iiefelid^ 
mu^ten  fie;  benn  ber  3?ater  l^tte  il^m  eine^  Jage^  eine  Ul^r  ber^ 
fprod^en,  falfe  er  am  @nbe  be^  ©d&uliaf)re^  ein  t)orsitgIid^e^  3^ug= 
ni^  nad^  §aufe  bxad^U.  6r  bad^te,  er  toerbe  e^  nie  tun  fonnen,  20 
benn  ber  3^unge  foil  fel)r  faul  fein,  Slber  tnte  bem  aud^  fein  mag, 
fein  Oftergeugni^  entl)ielt  nur  bie  beften  9?oten;  er  mu^  plofelid^ 
fel^r  aufmerf fam  unb  flei^ig  gelDorben  fein.  9latiirlid^  moUte  ber 
S3ater  fein  3?erfpred^en  I)alten  unb  fo  befam  ber  ^nabe  bie  Ul^r. 
3d^  liatte  geme  feine  greube  gefel)en!  25 

b)  L  SBie  fam  eg,  bag  §ang  feine  \Xf)v  gerbrod^en  l^atte? 
2.  SBag  tut  man,  tomn  due  ]Xf)X  gerbrod^en  ift?    3.  SBamm 


58  GERMAN  AND   ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

mug  man  bte  Uf)r  je^t  fortfd^tdfen?  4.  SBic  lam  e^,  bafe  bcr 
SSater  §an^  eine  Ut)r  gefd^enft  f)atte?  5.  eraal)ten  ©ie  ato 
ilber  bte  UI)r,  ate  ob  ©ie  ber  Heine  §an^  maren. 

c)  I  have  wanted  for  a  long  time  to  own  a  watch,  and 
5  my  micle  wanted  to  give  me  one,  but  he  could  not,  for  my 
father  had  said  I  must  not  have  a  watch  until  I  had  brought 
home  a  good  report  from  school.  He  was  not  satisfied 
with  my  report  at  Easter  and  said  that  I  could  have 
done  better,  if  I  had  wanted  to,  and  that  I  ought  to 

lo  have  worked  harder.  I  promised  him  that  I  would  work 
hard,  but  he  had  no  confidence  in  me  and  did  not  believe 
that  I  could  do  it.  I  do  not  Hke  the  school  here,  although 
it  is  said  to  be  very  good,  but  I  can  work  when  I  want 
to,  and  I  succeeded  in  getting  a  good  report  at  the  end 

15  of  the  year.  You  ought  to  have  seen  the  watch  my 
father  gave  me!  It  must  have  cost  a  good  deal.  There 
may  be  four  or  five  girls  in  the  school  who  have  watches, 
but  they  all  had  to  acknowledge  that  mine  is  the  prettiest. 
They  all  wanted  to  look  at  it  and  each  one  said  she  would 

20  like  to  have  such  a  watch.  My  friend  Mary  B.  wanted  to 
wear  it  for  a  few  hours,  but  she  dropped  it.  It  may  have 
happened  by  accident,  but  she  ought  not  to  have  worn 
my  watch  while  [she  was]  playing.  I  had  to  have  it  re- 
paired and  I  should  have  had  to  send  it  to  B.,  if  there 

25  had  not  been  a  very  good  watchmaker  in  our  village.  He 
was  able  to  repair  it  very  well.  It  cost  a  great  deal,  but 
he  is  said  to  be  a  very  excellent  watchmaker  and  he  claims 
to  have  worked  several  hours  to  put  it  in  order  again. 


REVIEW  59 

35.  Review 

Based  on  Exercises  31-35 

A.  —  Good  morning.  I  have  not  seen  you  for  a  long 
time.  I  heard  you  were  ill  and  could  not  go  out.  B,  —  I 
am  very  much  better  to-day  and  as  it  had  stopped  raining, 
I  thought  I  would  take  a  short  walk.  I  had  to  post  a 
letter  and  I  wanted  some  books  from  the  circulating  s 
library.  A,  —  I  hope  you  have  dressed  very  warmly,  for 
it  is  cold  and  you  must  not  take  cold  again.  B,  —  Is 
there  any  news?  Mr.  B.  claims  to  have  seen  you  at  the 
theater  last  week  with  Anna,  but  I  told  him  he  must  have 
been  mistaken,  for  I  was  sure  that  Anna  had  never  been  lo 
allowed  to  go  out  in  the  evening.  A,  —  Yes,  we  were 
there.  Anna  wanted  so  much  to  go  that  we  decided  to 
take  her.  B,  —  I  think  you  ought  not  to  have  done  so. 
In  my  opinion  children  of  her  age  ought  to  work  hard  and 
go  to  bed  early.  A.  —  She  would  not  have  been  allowed  is 
to  go,  if  she  had  not  finished  all  her  school  work.  You 
ought  to  have  seen  her  joy  when  I  asked  her  whether  she 
would  like  to  go  with  us  on  Saturday.  But  she  knew  that 
she  would  have  to  stay  at  home,  if  she  had  not  learned  all 
her  lessons  for  Monday.  B.  —  Well,  I  think  she  could  have  20 
waited  a  little  longer.  I  was  twenty  years  old  before  I 
was  allowed  to  see  a  play.  A,  —  But  you  know  that  our 
parents  could  not  have  taken  us  to  the  theater  even  if 
they  had  wanted  to,  as  there  was  none  in  our  village.  We 
should  have  had  to  take  a  long  journey  and  that  they  25 
could  not  afford.  B.  —  I  should  like  to  know  what  play 
you  saw.  There  are  said  to  be  very  few  good  plays 
written  now.  A,  —  Our  friend  Professor  White  claims  to 
have  seen  all  the  good  modem  dramas  and  he  advised  us 


60       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

to  go  to  see  the  drama  Alt-Heidelberg,  And  I  am  sure  we 
could  not  have  chosen  anything  better.  I  should  have 
enjoyed  myself  more,  if  we  had  had  better  seats.  At 
first  we  thought  we  could  not  get  any,  because  the  theater 
5  was  so  full,  but  at  last  we  succeeded  in  getting  some  in 
the  sixth  row  of  the  balcony.  I  could  not  see  very  well, 
because  I  had  forgotten  to  take  my  opera  glass  with 
me.  I  did  not  remember  it  until  I  was  leaving  the 
house  and  then  it  was  not  to  be  found.    B.  —  You  ought 

lo  to  have  ordered  your  seats  several  days  before*  The  house 
is  said  to  be  always  very  full  when  that  play  is  given,  and 
it  was  not  to  be  expected  that  you  could  get  good  places 
at  the  last  moment.  I  should  like  to  have  gone  with  you. 
It  must  be  four  or  five  years  since  I  have  seen  a  good  play. 

IS  A.  — Anna  would  like  to  go  again  next  week,  and  I  have 
told  her  that  she  may  go  the  next  time  that  one  of  Schiller^s 
dramas  is  given,  but  not  before. 

36.  ^ic  S^itung  —  The  Newspaper 

The  Article 
Grammar,  20 

a)  S)te  B^itung,  auf  tDeld^e  id)  abonntert  bin,  entf)alt  locate 
aHerlei  3ntcreffante§.    Unter  btn  poIiti[d^en  9fad^rid^ten  ftelfit, 

2o  bafe  ®raf  S3-  tntt  grower  ©ttmmenmel)rl)cit  sum  ^rcifibenten  bcr 
2lu^fteIIung  gen^dfilt  murbe.  @r  tear  frii^er  preufeifd^er  Dfftsier 
unb  ift  fd^on  feit  )Dkkn  3a{)rcn  SKeid^^tag^abQeorbtieter.  ©em 
©ruber  ftarb  tiiv^li^  ate  §elb  in  ©ilbafrifa,  h)o  er  ftd^  im  ^ampfe 
fiegen  bte  ©ngeborenen  au^geseid^net  f)atte,    3n  ber  niid^ften 

25  SBod^e  foHen  bte  Seratungen  liber  ^olonialpolitif  im  Steid^^tag 
beginnen.  ©ann  lieft  man,  bag  bie  Ufer  be^  dt^dn^  iiber^ 
fd^tDemmt  finb,  be[onber^  in  ber  ©d^mcig  unb  in  53aben.    S^ 


THE   ARTICLE  61 

ftDlgen  me^rerc  ©palten  ilber  ben  fieriifiTnten  3^PP^Iin»  ©ein 
guftfd^iff  ful^r  mef)rere  ©tunben  iiber  Serg  unb  Sal,  aber  fd^Iiefe^ 
lid^  tDurbe  e^  Don  etnem  ftarfen  SBtnb  nad^  ©iiben  getrieben  unb 
mugtc  lanben*  S)reimal  bit  SSod^e  toerben  f)ter  Ubungen  mit 
bent  Suftfd^iff  gentad^t*  !Der  ^ring  bon  ©»  mad^t  etne  8ieife  5 
int  Slutomobil  burd^  Ofterreid^  unb  bie  Jiirfei,  im  griil^ial^r 
mirb  er  eine  "iprinsefftn  au6  bent  §aufe  §o^ensottern  gur  grau 
nel^nten*  S)a^  Sleifd^  n)trb  tntnter  teurer;  e^  foftet  stDet  Waxt 
bag  ^funb  l&eute,  2luf  ber  lefeten  ©ette  fte{)en  biele  ©eburt^^, 
§od^Seitg=  uttb  3:obcganset0en,  Sie  Seilage  entf)alt  eine  2lb=^  10 
f)anblung  ilber  bie  ^unft  unb  bie  9latur  in  ©ried^enlanb,  fiir  bie 
id^  mid^  befonber^  intereffierte, 

6)   1.  SBarunt  lefen  ©ie  bie  3^itung  ieben  STa^?    2.  2Bag 
erfubren  ©ie  liber  ben  ©rafen  S3*?    3.  SBa^  berid)tet  bie  cSeitung 
aber  3ePP^Ktt?    4»  SBeld^c  9^ad^rid&t  brad^te  bie  ^eitung  iiber  15 
ben  "ipringen  ©«?    5*  53efd§reiben  ©ie  bie  anterifanifd^e  cS^itung, 
tDeld^e  ©ie  lefen* 

c)  A,  —  Have  you  read  the  newspaper  to-day?    Is 
there  anything  interesting  in  it?  (does  it  contain  .  .  .)• 
B.  —  There  is  all  sorts  of  news  tn  it.     Are  you  interested  20 
in  pontics?    A,  —  Not  particularly,  but  I  should  like  to 
know  whether  Count  B.  has  been  elected  a  member  of 
Parliament.  B,  —  No;  Mr.  von  X.,  who  distinguished  him- 
self as  an  officer  in  the  war  in  South  Africa,  was  elected  by 
a  large  majority.     He  will  be  very  useful  as  a  member  25 
of  ParHament,  for  he  will  know  all  about  colonial  politics. 
A,  —  Is  there  anything  about  the  famous  Count  Zeppelin 
and  his  airship?    As  a  Prussian  officer  I  am  interested  in 
all  that  he  does.    B,  —  He  practises  with  it  twice  a  week 
and  next  week  he  is  going  to  take  a  journey  to  the  south  30 
with  it.     He  will  fly  over  Baden  and  Switzerland  and 
land  in  Switzerland,  probably  on  the  banks  of  the  Rhine. 


62       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

A,  —  Is  there  anything  in  the  paper  about  Prince  S.?  j5.  — 
Do  you  mean  the  one  who  was  president  of  the  Exposition 
in  the  spring  and  who  married  Countess  M.?  There  is 
nothing  about  him  in  the  poHtical  news,  but  I  will  look  on 
5  the  last  page  among  the  birth  and  death  notices.  A,  —  Oh 
no,  he  has  not  died!  He  has  been  traveling  for  several 
weeks  in  Austria  and  Turkey  in  an  automobile  and  I 
lately  read  several  columns  about  him.  A  prince  of  the 
house  of  Hapsburg  is  with  him.  B,  —  Are  you  interested 
lo  in  art?  Here  is  something  about  an  exhibition  of  pictures. 
A,  —  Not  especially.  But  I  should  like  to  know  whether 
poultry  is  still  getting  dearer.  Last  week  I  had  to  pay  two 
marks  and  fifty  pfennigs  a  pound.  We  can  only  have 
(eat)  it  once  a  week  now. 

37.  2)cr  atte  ©^ulftcunb  —  An  Old  Schoolmate 

Genitive  and  Accusative 
Grammar,  21,  23 

15  a)  S)u  erinnerft  ®td^  gemi^  nod^  unfere^  altcn  ©d^ulfrcunbe6 
6.  Unter  alien  ^naben  f)atte  x6)  il^n  gum  liebften  ©efdl^rten  q/t^ 
tDcil^It  unb  il^n  ftet^  fiir  cinen  treuen  greunb  gel^alten  unb  fciner 
mit  ?iebe  gebac^t.  Qd^  mufete  nid^t,  Xoa^  au^  tf)m  geh)orben  xoox, 
aber  neulid^  flanb  cr,  ben  §ut  in  ber  §anb,  an  meiner  ^an^tiire. 

2o  ©etDol^nlid^  bleibe  id^  abenb^  gu  §aufe,  aber  biefen  Slbenb  tnar 
id^  mit  einenx  ^^^^itnbe  an^gegangen  nnb  tarn  fef)r  fpfit  nadf)  §aufe. 
S.  n^ar  ben  gangen  S^ag  geretft  unb  xoax  abenb^  angefommen. 
(gr  torn  gleid^  an  mir,  aber  er  n)ar  be^  langen  SBarten^  milbe  unb 
n)oIIte  gerabe  fortgef)en,  ate  cr  mid^  bte  ©trafee  I)erauf fommen  faf). 

25  @r  tDar  lange  3af)re  in  2lmertfa  genjefen  unb  mar  im  93ilrger* 
friege  gum  ©eneral  emannt  morben.  Sr  geigte  nttr  etn  53ilb  t)on 
fid^  in  Uniform,  bie  §anb  auf  bem  ©d^mert,  ba^  mid^  fef)r  an 


GENITIVE   AND   ACCUSATIVE  63 

feinen  33ater,  ber  an(i)  Offiaier  ttjar,  erinnerte,  Setber  toav  tv  bcr 
§offnung  beraubt  tDorben,  btefen  ^tebergufef)en,  benn  er  tDar  t)or 
einigett  SBod^en  geftorben,  2ln  feinem  @rabe  flagte  er  ftd^  ber 
Siebloftgfeit  an,  meil  er  nid^t  fruf)er  in  bie  §eimat  surttcfgefont^ 
men  tvax.  3eftt  lebt  er  fef)r  nil^tg  l^ier  in  ber  9faf)e;  er  bebarf  ber  s 
©d^onnng  nnb  ift  nid^t  mef)r  fold^er  Slnftrengungen  fdf)i0  mie 
frnf)er;  aber  ntein  §an^  betrac^tet  er  al6  feine  ^tDeite  §eimat  unb 
fontmt  stoei  ober  brei  9KaI  ben  2Konat  auf  einen  Sag  p  ^i^ 
l^eriiber* 

&)  1.  2Bte  tarn  e^,  ba^  ©ie  S^^ren  ©tfjnifrennb  fo  lange  nid^t  lo 
gefefien  l^atten?  2.  33efc^reiben  ©ie  ba^  3Bieberfef)en,  3,  SBag 
fiir  ein  Seben  l^atte  ber  ©d^ulfrennb  gefiilirt?  4.  SBa^  filr  ein 
?eben  fii{)rt  er  jefet?  5.  SBie  fomntt  e^,  ba^  ©ie  il^n  jefet  ofter^ 
feben?  6.  (Srsablen  ©ie  alle^  iiber  3I)r  Seben,  al^  ob  ©ie  ber 
©d^nlfrennb  njciren*  15 

c)  Some  weeks  ago  General  G.  came  back  from  South 
Africa  where  he  had  hved  many  long  years.  He  had  gone 
away  as  a  boy  and  his  parents  did  not  know  for  years 
what  had  become  of  him.  But  he  had  always  remembered 
his  home  and  his  parents  and  had  hoped  to  see  them  again.  20 
Two  years  ago  he  wrote  to  his  mother  and  sent  her  a  picture 
of  himself  in  his  uniform,  sword  in  hand,  and  from  that 
time  on  she  received  a  letter  from  him  twice  a  month. 
Then  he  became  tired  of  life  in  a  foreign  land  and  needed 
rest,  and  when  he  was  appointed  general  he  asked  for  25 
leave  of  absence  and  returned  to  Germany,  which  he  had 
always  regarded  as  his  home.  His  father  had  died  years 
before,  but  he  considered  it  a  great  piece  of  good  fortune 
that  his  old  mother  was  still  living.  When  he  arrived 
in  Berlin  he  went  home  at  once,  for  he  knew  that  he  should  30 
find  her  at  home.  She  was  not  capable  of  any  great  exer- 
tion and  never  went  out  in  the  evening.    This  evening, 


64  GEBMAN  AND   ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

when  he  came  up  the  street,  he  saw  her  at  the  window, 
where  she  had  been  waiting  for  him  all  day.  He  was  at 
home  again.  The  next  week  he  wanted  to  go  to  Potsdam 
for  a  day  to  visit  an  old  schoolmate,  whom  he  had  formerly 
5  considered  his  best  friend.  But  he  was  deprived  of  the 
joy  of  seeing  him  again,  for  he  learned  that  he  had  lately 
died,  just  a  few  days  after  he  had  been  elected  member  of 
the  Reichstag.  Hat  in  hand,  he  stood  beside  his  grave 
and  accused  himself  of  neglect,  because  he  had  not  written 
lo  to  him  for  years,  although  he  had  always  thought  of  him 
with  friendship  and  love. 

38.  2)cr  ^pott  —  Athletic  Sports 

The  Dative 
Grammar,  22 

o)  Hamburg,  ben  10»  gebruar,  1910. 

?ieber  3)?aj! 
©d^on  Icingft  tooUtt  i^  S)ir  auf  Seine  grage  liber  ben  ©port 

IS  f)ier  antlDorten.  ©laube  mtr,  e^  fel)lt  mtr  f)ier  nid^t  an  S3en)e= 
fiung  im  greien  unb  id)  farm  Sir  nur  raten,  and)  f)ier]^er  gu 
fontmen.  2)ie  (Sinlabung  eine^  53efannten,  einent  ©port^t)erein 
beiptreten,  h)ar  mir  fef)r  iBillfommen,  unb  id^  bin  i^nt  fel^r 
banfbar  bafiir.    Qd)  f)abe  tnt  §erbft  btel  Jennie  unb  gufe^ 

2o  ball  gefpielt;  troijbem  biefe  ^af^xt^itit  f)ter  fel)r  feud^t,  raul^  unb 
regnerifd^  mar,  f)at  fie  meiner  ®efunb{)eit  ntd^t  gefd^abet.  3d^ 
bin  aud^  Diel  geritten;  id^  fd^meid^Ie  mir,  ein  guter  9teiter  gu  fein, 
unb  id^  folge  ben  §unben  mit  SSergnilgen  liber  alle  ©raben* 
®ann   fant   ba^   ©d^littfd^ul)laufen  unb    ©d^Iittenfal&ren    im 

25  SBtnter,  ma^  mir  fef)r  gut  geftel.  g^  tft  mir  aud^  gelungen, 
©d^neefd^ube  laufen  ju  lemen,  mobet  ein  greunb  mir  b<Jlf»  3^ 
grubjabre  fangen  mir  an,  an  fegein  unb  gu  rubem.    2)te  ®egel== 


THE   DATIVE  65 

boote  l^ier  finb  ben  Unfercn  gan^  Ixt^nlid)  unb  9ef)oren  bem  S3erem» 
2lud^  ba^  ©c^mimmen  in  bem  5D2eere  befiagt  ntir  fel)r,  unb  id^ 
troi^e  ben  iDiIbeften  SSogen,  3^  kge  bem  33rief  einige  "ipfioto^ 
grap{)ien  bom  lefeten  'ipferberennen  f)ier  bei,  bie  Sir  gelDig  greube 
madden  iDerben*  s 

aWit  fierslid^en  ©rilgen 

©ein  §an^. 

6)   !♦  SBarum  ift  ^l^r  i^^eunb  einem  ©port^berein  beigetre^ 
ten?    2.  33efd^reiben  ©ie  ben  ©port  a)  im  SBinter,  6)  im  ©om= 
mer.    3,  SBeld^en  9Jat  gibt  §an^  feinem  greunbe?    4,  SBeld^en  lo 
©port  treiben  ©ie  am  liebften  unb  toarum? 

c)  A,  —  Did  you  not  lack  exercise  in  the  open  air  while 
you  were  in  Germany?  It  would  injure  my  health  very 
much  to  have  no  exercise  for  a  whole  year.  B.  —  Do  not 
believe  the  people  who  tell  you  that  there  are  no  athletic  15 
sports  in  Germany.  I  flatter  myself  that  I  rode  and  skated 
more  last  winter  than  I  should  have  done  [it]  if  I  had 
stayed  at  home.  A,  —  It  would  not  be  pleasant  to  me  to 
ride  and  sail  alone.  B,  —  I  joined  an  athletic  club  on  the 
invitation  of  a  German  acquaintance,  and  I  advise  you  20 
to  do  the  same.  A,  —  I  shall  certainly  follow  your  advice. 
What  kind  of  athletic  sports  did  you  have?  B.  —  The 
autumn  was  very  cold  and  wet,  but  we  defied  the  weather 
and  played  tennis  and  football  a  great  deal.  But  I  liked 
the  skating  and  coasting  best  (pleased  me).  A,  —  Did  25 
you  take  your  own  skates  with  you?  B,  —  No,  the 
skates  and  sleds  belong  to  the  club.  They  are  not  exactly 
like  ours;  I  can  show  you  some  photographs  of  them  which 
my  friend  enclosed  in  his  last  letter.  A.  —  What  did  you 
do  in  the  spring?  B.  —  In  spite  of  the  weather  being  very  30 
cold  and  raw,  we  rowed  and  rode  every  day,  and  I  learned 
to  swim  with  the  help  of  a  friend.     I  hke  rowing,  but  I  did 


66  'GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

not  succeed  in  learning  to  sail.  A,  —  I  shall  be  very 
grateful  to  you  if  you  will  help  me  to  get  acquainted  with 
some  of  your  German  friends.  B,  —  I  will  give  you  a 
letter  to  my  best  friend  and  I  flatter  myself  that  you  will 
5  be  invited  at  once  to  join  the  club.  I  am  sure  you  will 
like  it. 

39.  2)cr  Unf aK  —  The  Accident 

The  Infinitive 
Grammar,  26 

a)  ©eftem  I)atten  tt)ir  beim  Slu^fal^ren  einen  UnfaH  unb  h)ur= 
ben  au^  bent  SBaQen  getnorfen.  ^d)  f)abe  mtr  ben  gnfe  leid^t  Der^ 
le^t  unb  ntufete  ben  Slr^t  rufen  Iaf[en;  guerft  tdax  er  nirgenb^  su 

lo  finben.  SBir  liegen  ii)m  fagen,  fofort  p  fontnxen,  aber  an^tatt 
ba^  SU  tun,  mad^te  er  nod^  einen  anbem  33efu(^  unb  lie^  un^ 
bret  ©tunben  toaxten.  S^\^^^^^  \^^  i^  ^i^^n  S3efannten  nteine^ 
SSruber^  t)orbeigef)en,  ber  and)  Slrjt  tft  unb  ben  id)  furgftd^  fiabe 
fennen  lemen,    @r  biteb  fofort  ftef)en,  al^  er  mtd&  rufen  f)orte 

IS  unb  tnar  geme  berett  an  l^elfen*  @r  fagte,  e6  fei  p  erlDarten  Qe= 
tDefen,  ba^  toir  eine^  2^age§  mit  btefen  milben  "ipferben  t)erun= 
gliidfen  toiirben.  Sr  derbanb  nteinen  gufe  unb  tootlte,  bafe  id) 
etnige  2^age  ruf)ig  liegen  bleiben  foUte.  @^  tut  mtr  fel)r  leib  unt 
nteinen  93ruber.    @r  mollte  fo  t)tel  fpa^ieren  gefien  unb  tnoHte 

2o  befonber^,  bafe  td^  nttt  il^nt  gel^en  foUte;  aber  nun  ift  e^  ntd^t  gu 
anbem*  yiad)  etn  paax  2:aGen,  fobalb  ber  gufe  p  fd&nter^en  auf= 
l^ort,  iDerbe  td^  toieber  gu  gel^en  anfangen,  aber  bann  tdixb  ber 
Uriaub  nteinen  33ruber^  p  @nbe  fetn  unb  id^  ntufe  if)n  fortgel&en 
fefien,  ol^ne  bag  Intr  unfere  ^lane  pfantnten  au^gefill)rt  t)aben» 

25  Qei^t  befd^tifttge  td^  nttd^  ntit  Sefen  unb  ©d^reiben,  ober  td^  fal^rc 
int  SBagen  ober  int  2IutontobiI  fpagteren, 

b)  1.  SBte  fant  e^,  bag  ®ie  einen  UnfaH  l^atten?  2.  2Bte 
gelang  e§  Qi^nen,  ctnen  Slrgt  au  finben?    3,  SBa^  tat  ber  Slrjt? 


THE   INFINITIVE  67 

4.  9Bomit  befd&aftigen  ©ie  ftd^  fefet?  5.  SBeld^c  ^tonc  ^attc 
3t)r  iBruber  Qerttac^t  unb  tnarmn  fann  er  biefelbeu  jefet  nid^t  au^- 
fii^ren?  6»  ®rsaf)len  ©ie  alle^  ilber  ben  Unfall,  ate  ob  ®ie  ber 
S3ruber  tDaren, 

c)  I  must  tell  you  about  the  accident  that  we  had  in  5 
the  mountains  last  week.  My  brother  suddenly  fell  down 
while  walking  and  hurt  his  foot  very  badly.  He  wanted 
to  get  up  and  go  on,  but  I  wanted  him  to  lie  still  (remain 
lying),  for  his  foot  began  to  hurt  him  very  much  and  I  did 
not  believe  that  he  could  reach  the  hotel  on  foot.  I  went  10 
back  to  the  road,  but  there  was  no  one  to  be  found  and  I 
was  very  glad  when  at  last  I  saw  a  boy  go  by.  At  first  he 
did  not  hear  me  call,  but  as  soon  as  he  saw  me  he  stopped. 
I  told  him  to  call  a  doctor  and  to  come  back  with  a  carriage. 
He  was  quite  ready  to  do  so  and  promised  to  come  back  15 
at  once,  but  he  kept  us  waiting  a  whole  hour,  for  the  doc- 
tor was  not  to  be  found  and  he  had  to  send  for  one  from 
town.  After  having  bound  up  my  brother's  foot,  the 
doctor  had  him  carried  to  the  carriage  and  driven  to  the 
hotel.  He  told  him  it  was  not  to  be  expected  that  he  20 
could  walk  this  week.  He  is  the  best  doctor  I  have  ever 
met;  yesterday  he  came  again  without  our  having  sent  for 
him  and  the  foot  is  already  beginning  to  pain  my  brother 
less.  Still  I  am  very  sorry  for  him.  He  finds  reading 
and  writing  dull,  and  instead  of  walking  he  now  has  to  25 
drive,  which  he  does  not  like  at  all.  Before  he  can  walk 
again  his  leave  will  be  up  and  he  will  have  to  go  away  with- 
out being  able  to  carry  out  his  plans.  He  wants  to  go 
away  at  once,  but  I  want  him  to  stay  until  his  foot  stops 
hurting.  30 


68       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

40.  ^ie  f?amiKe  —  The  Fanuly 

Dependent  Clauses 
Grammar,  26,  IV,  V,  and  27,  Ic,  d 

a)  (S^  berging  eine  aiemltd^  langc  3^it,  ti)t  e^  mtr  gclang,  bie 
atificnel^ine  beutfd^e  gamitic  p  ftnben,  bet  ber  id)  {cfet  tDol^nc.  S)er 
§err  be6  §au[e^  ift  "^rofeffor  an  bem  ©ijmnaftutn  l^icr,  (Sr  l^at 
menig  ©el^alt,  abcr  baburd^,  bag  er  ^cnftoncirc  nimtnt  unb  ^ribat^ 

5  ftunben  Qibt,  fann  er  in  einein  fd^otien  §aufe  tntt  einem  erofeen 
©arten  tt)of)nen»  (gr  ift  grofe  unb  tragt  einen  blonben  S3art,  @r 
beftef)t  barauf,  bafe  id^  bei  2^ifd^  gut  S)eutfd^  fpred^e*  SBenn  td^ 
einen  gef)Ier  gemad^t  f)abe,  forrigiert  er  mid^,  unb  bantit  id^  mid^ 
baran  erinnere,  lafet  er  mid^  ben  ©ai^  ft)ieber]^oIen.    gran  ^ro= 

lo  feffor  ift  eine  forpulente,  Heine,  luftige  S)ante»  SBenn  fie  ntir  int 
§au^  ober  ©arten  begegnet,  bleibt  fie  ftel^en,  rebet  ntid^  an  unb 
beftel^t  barauf,  eine  gute  beutfd^e  Hntmort  ju  befomnten,  ®ie  l^at 
einen  ©of)n  bon  fed^s^f)n  Qdf)xm,  blafe,  fd^Ianf,  ntit  bunfein  Slugen; 
er  benft  nie  baran,  ntir  guten  9Worgen  p  fagen  unb  er  benft  aud^ 

15  nid^t  baran,  bag  id^  ntit  if)nt  reben  toiU  unb  tDunbert  fid^,  n)entt  id^ 
if)n  anfpred^e*  !Dann  gibt  e^  nod^  eine  erb)ad^fene  Xod)tev  ntit 
fd^mar^en  ?odten  unb  einer  frifd^en  ©efid^t^farbe.  ©ie  fprid^t 
babon,  nad^  Slnterifa  gu  gef)en,  unb  erjdf)Ite  mir,  bag  fie  einige 
aWonate  in  Snglanb  geb^efen  mar.    ^eben  SWorgen  fontntt  fie 

2o  eine  f)albe  ©tunbe  auf  ntein  3ii^^^^/  bamxt  id)  ein  bi^d^en  @ng== 
lifd^  ntit  il^r  plaubere.  S)aburd^,  bag  id^  fonft  ben  gangen  Jag 
nur  ©eutfd^  l^ore  unb  rebe,  'i)aU  id)  in  bier^el^n  Jagen  fd^on  red^t 
biel  gelemt. 

b)  1.  SBie  fiel^t  ber  §err  ^rofeffor  au6,  bei  meld^ent  ©ie  h3ol^:= 
25  nen?    2.  SBarunt  nimntt  er  ^enfiondre?    3,  Sluf  meld^e  SBeife 

lemt  man  ant  beften  Seutfd^?  4,  9Bie  l^ilft  3f)Tten  §err  unb 
gran  ^rofeffor  unb  bie  ilbrigen  gantilienntitglieber,  3)eutfd^  gu 


DEPENDENT  CLAUSES  W 

lemen?    5»  SBefd&reiben  ©ie  a)   htn  ©of)n,  b)   bte  Xo^ttx. 
6.  S5efd^reiben  ©ie  3f)re  etgenen  @Item  unb  ©efc^mifter* 

c)  Before  coming  to  Germany  I  thought  that  it  would  be 
very  easy  to  learn  German  here,  but  now  I  know  that  one 
can  only  learn  a  language  by  speaking  and  hearing  it  all    5 
day  long,  and  it  is  very  hard  to  do  that.     At  first  I  took 
private  lessons  of^  a  tall,  blond  man  who  is  professor  in 
a  high  school  here.     I  went  to  his  room  every  morning 
for  an  hour,  but  after  having  taken  lessons  of  him  for  a 
fortnight,  I  had  learned  very  little.     He  told  me  much  lo 
about  his  school,  his  family  and  his  small  salary,  but  he 
did  not  think  of  having  me  talk.     Then  I  succeeded  in 
finding  a  German  student  to  walk  with  me  every  after- 
noon.   He  was  a  jolly,  fat  little  man,  about  twenty-one 
years  old,  but  unfortunately  he  is  thinking  of  going  to  is 
England  and  wants  to  learn  English.    He  insisted  on 
talking  to  me  in  English  and  was  surprised  at  my  wanting 
to  speak  German.    Now  I  was  sure  that  I  could  only 
learn  German  by  hving  in  a  German  family,  but  I  had 
to  look  a  long  time  before  finding  a  pleasant  family  who  20 
took  boarders.  My  meeting  Mrs.  Professor  F.,  in  whose 
family  I  am  now  living,  was  a  great  piece  of  good  fortune. 
She  is  a  slender  little  lady  with  light  curls  and  a  pale  com- 
plexion and  has  two  young  sons.    By  taking  boarders 
she  is  able  to  send  them  to  the  high  school.     One  of  them  25 
talks  of  becoming  a  professor  of  English,  but  he  never 
thinks  of  talking  English  to  me,  for  his  mother  insists  on 
our  always  speaking  German  together.     Having  found 
what  I  wanted,  I  am  now  working  very  hard  and  I  believe 
I  shall  really  learn  to  speak  German  well  before  leaving  30 
Germany. 

1  bet. 


70       GERMAN  AND  ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

41.  ^er  ©otte^bicnft  —  Divine  Service 

Attributive  Phrases 
Grammar,  27,  le 

a)  S)te  alte,  Dor  btelen  3^a]&rf)unberten  erbaute  unb  t)on  tntr 
lefeten  ©onntag  befud^te  SDorffird^e  ftef)t  auf  einer  fleinen  2lnf)ol^e 
mitten  in  einem  tnalerifd^  an  bem  9Jf)ein  Qelegenen  3)drfd^en. 
SSon  bem  mit  2)?oo^  unb  @feu  bemad^fenen  ^ird^turme  riefen 
s  bie  ©loden  pm  ©otte^btenft,  unb  id^  betrat  ba^  ©otte^l^au^  mit 
ber  langfam  ber  J?ird^e  guftromenben,  anbdd^tiGen  ©emeinbe* 
©rinnen  iDaren  fd^on  t)iele,  bom  SBetter  gebrtiunte  unb  t)on  f)arter 
Slrbeit  gebeugte  33auem  unb  S3auerinnen  berfammelt;  bor  ber 
Orgel  fag  ber  freunblic^  au^fetienbe  ©d)unel)rer  unb  um  il&n  f)er 

lo  bie  2)orfiu8enb,  bie  mit  if)ren  l^etten,  mand^mal  dvoa^  fd^rifl 
Hingenben  ©timmen  ben  ©efang  leiteten.  @in  alter,  toiirbiger, 
mit  etnem  fd^toar^en  Jalar  befleibeter  *iPfarrer  trat  t)or  htn  211== 
tar  unb  fprad^  ein  ®thtt  S)ann  fang  bie  ©emeinbe  ha^  tool^t 
befannte,  t)on  Sutt)er  gebid^tete  ^ird^enlieb:  „@in  fefte  53urg  ift 

15  unfer  ®ott,''  S)arauf  beftieg  ber  ©eiftlid^e  bie  Mangel  unb  l^ielt 
eine  furje,  aber  gut  au^gebad^te  unb  toarm  empfunbene  iprebigt. 
9tad^  einem  a^Deiten,  t)on  ber  ©emeinbe  gefungenen  Sf)oraI  fd^Iog 
cr  mit  ©ebet  ben  einfad^en,  aber  p  ^er^en  gel^enben  ©otte^bienft, 
3d^  blieb  nod^  eine  SBeile  in  ber  langfam  fid)  leerenben  ^ird^e 

2o  surildE,  um  mir  bie  burd^  if)r  Sitter  unb  il)re  gefd^id^tlid&en  @rin^ 
nerungen  inteffanten  ^nfd^riften  angufelien. 

h)   1.  SBo  liegt  bie  ©orffirdf)e,  toeld^e  ©ie  befud^ten?    2,  53e- 

fd^reiben  ©ie  bie  ?eute  in  ber  ^ird&e,    3»  SBie  fal^  ber  ^farrer 

ou§?    4,  93efd^reiben  ©ie  ben  ©otte^bienft^    5*  SBarum  blieben 

25  ®ie  nad^  bem  ©otte^bienft  in  ber  ^ird^e?    6*  (ix0jitn  ©ie  W 

©efd^id^te,  al6  ob  ©ie  a)  ber  ©eiftlid^e,  h)  ber  ©d^ullel^rer  maren. 

c)   It  was  Sunday  morning  when  I  arrived  in  the  pic- 
turesque Httle  village,  so  interesting  for  its  historical  asso- 


REVIEW  71 

ciations.  The  bells  in  the  church  tower  were  calling  to 
service  and  the  whole  congregation  was  streaming  toward 
the  moss  and  ivy  covered  church.  I  entered  the  church 
and  seated  myself  among  the  picturesquely  dressed 
peasants  (men  and  women).  The  service  began  with  a  5 
fine  old  hymn  sung  by  the  whole  congregation.  The 
singing  was  led  by  the  dignified-looking  schoolmaster, 
sitting  at  the  organ,  and  by  the  school  children  gathered 
about  him.  Then  all  looked  reverently  at  their  pastor, 
bowed  with  age  and  clad  in  a  long  black  robe,  as  he  offered  10 
a  short  prayer  before  the  altar.  After  a  rather  long  sermon 
delivered  from  the  pulpit,  the  service  was  closed  by  a 
simple  prayer  full  of  feeling.  After  the  church  had  slowly 
emptied  the  kindly  schoolmaster  showed  me  the  old  castle, 
picturesquely  situated  on  a  little  hill  and  interesting  for  15 
its  historical  associations,  and  explained  to  me  the  old 
inscriptions  cut  in  the  stone  many  centuries  ago.  We 
cHmbed  the  old  tower,  now  overgrown  with  ivy,  where 
one  has  a  beautiful  view  of  the  whole  little  village  situated 
on  the  river,  and  entered  the  little  room  where  the  famous  20 
Luther  is  said  to  have  composed  some  of  those  well-known 
hymns  still  sung  in  all  the  churches  of  Germany. 


42,  Review 

Based  on  Exercises  36-42 

Do  you  remember  the  picturesque  ivy  covered  church 
we  passed  one  day  in  Switzerland?  We  had  stopped  there 
to  admire  the  lovely  view  toward  the  south;  we  looked  25 
over  mountain  and  dale  and  in  the  far  distance  we  saw  the 
hills  of  sunny  Italy.  I  was  with  young  Brown;  it  was  the 
year  he  had  been  appointed  president  of  the  Exposition, 


72  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

he  had  worked  very  hard  and  needed  a  rest,  so  he  wished 
me  to  go  to  Europe  with  him.  We  certainly  had  a  delight- 
ful trip  in  spite  of  my  friend  having  a  bad  accident.  He 
had  insisted  on  climbing  a  high  cHff  in  order  to  get  some 
5  rare  white  flowers  called  Edelweiss.  I  wanted  him  to 
give  up  the  attempt,  but  he  would  not  be  persuaded 
that  it  was  dangerous.  So  he  began  to  cUmb,  but  he  was 
very  sorry  for  it  afterwards  for  he  fell  down  and  hurt  his 
foot  very  badly.     He  could  not  walk  at  all,  so  he  wanted 

lo  me  to  go  and  find  a  carriage.  I  left  him  sitting  there 
quite  alone  and  walked  to  the  next  village.  A  full  horn- 
passed  before  I  succeeded  in  finding  a  physician.  My 
friend  grew  very  tired  of  waiting;  he  was  delighted  to  see 
me  come  back  with  the  doctor.     The  doctor  told  him  that 

IS  he  could  recover  quickly  by  keeping  his  foot  absolutely 
quiet.  He  would  not  believe  this,  but  I  insisted  on  his 
following  the  doctor's  advice.  We  took  him  to  a  httle  inn 
near  by,  and  as  the  house  lacked  comfortable  chairs,  the 
doctor  advised  him  to  stay  in  bed  for  a  few  days.     This 

20  did  not  please  poor  Hans  at  all,  but  it  could  not  be  helped. 
The  doctor  spoke  of  coming  again  early  the  next  morning, 
but  he  kept  us  waiting  until  late  in  the  afternoon,  as  he 
had  a  great  deal  to  do.  He  was  a  nice,  dignified  old  man, 
who  was  quite  surprised  at  my  being  able  to  talk  German 

25  with  him.  He  considered  us  very  interesting  people  and 
told  us  that  meeting  us  had  given  him  great  pleasure  and 
that  he  hoped  to  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  us  again. 
One  afternoon  some  boys  came  to  the  inn  and  offered  us 
some  Edelweiss  for  sale.    The  flowers  seemed  to  us  very 

30  cheap,  only  two  francs  a  dozen,  so  we  bought  them,  but  the 
landlord  told  us  afterwards  that  we  ought  not  to  have 
paid  so  much  for  them. 


GENERAL   REVIEW  73 

43.  General  Review  I 

Bingen  on  the  Rhine,  May  14,  1911. 
My  dear  Mary, 

I  was  on  the  point  of  going  out,  but  as  it  has  just  begun 
to  rain,  I  have  decided  to  write  a  letter  to  you. 

You  know  I  am  going  to  spend  this  summer  in  the    5 
country  with  my  brother  and  his  [family].     He  Hves  in 
the  prettiest  little  village  in  a  small  house,  and  from  the 
front  windows  [of  it]  we  have  the  most  beautiful  view  of 
the  distant  hills  and  the  lovely  river  near  by. 

We  all  get  up  very  early  in  the  morning  and  about  10 
7  o'clock  the  whole  family  is  dressed  and  ready  to  go 
[out]  to  walk  or  to  drive  or  to  take  a  longer  excursion. 

If  I  had  not  been  sick  with  rheumatism  I  should  have 
gone  to  America  this  summer,  but  all  my  friends  advise 
me  to  wait  until  I  feel  stronger.     Everybody  is  very  kind  15 
to  me,  and  I  have  been  much  better  for  the  last  two  weeks. 

I  often  think  of  you,  and  if  everything  goes  well  I  hope 
you  will  come  to  visit  me  soon.  I  want  very  much  to  see 
you,  and  I  know  you  will  like  it  here. 

With  kindest  regards  to  you  and  your  family,      20 

Yours  ever, 
Gertrude. 

44.  General  Review  n 

If  I  could  only  find  something  interesting  for  my  uncle 
to  read.  He  does  not  like  reading,  but  he  has  sprained  his 
ankle  and  he  cannot  do  anything  else  now,  as  he  is  not  25 
allowed  to  walk.  The  other  day  he  said  that  he  preferred 
dramas  to  novels.  I  should  like  very  much  to  find  the 
book  of  which  my  brother  spoke  yesterday,  and  the  author 
of  which  I  met  at  a  party  which  was  given  by  an  old  friend 


74  GERMAN  AND   ENGLISH  EXERCISES 

of  mine.  It  has  been  very  much  praised  by  all  my  friends, 
but  I  cannot  even  remember  the  title  of  it.  I  must  go  to 
the  bookstore  now  and  buy  a  couple  of  novels  or  plays. 
Please  come  with  me  and  show  me  the  shops  where  books 
5  are  best  and  cheapest.  I  cannot  find  my  purse,  for 
though  I  laid  it  on  the  table  this  morning,  I  do  not  see  it 
there  (on  it)  now.  Have  you  any  money  about  you?  If 
you  have  not,  I  will  ask  father  for  some.  We  shall  have 
to  hurry,  for  it  is  half  past  twelve  o'clock  now  and  we  dine 
lo  at  one  o'clock. 


45.  General  Review  in 

My  dear  Henry, 

Since  my  arrival  in  Berlin  I  have  not  been  able  to  write 
to  you  as  I  had  promised  to  do,  for  my  teacher  does  not 
want  me  either  to  write  or  speak  English  while  I  am  here. 

15  He  insists  on  my  writing  every  day  a  description  in  Ger- 
man of  something  that  I  have  seen  or  done.  I  am  also 
learning  a  great  deal  by  going  to  the  theater  and  by  read- 
ing the  newspapers.  You  ought  to  have  heard  what 
good  German  I  spoke  in  a  shop  yesterday.     You  certainly 

20  would  have  taken  me  for  a  German! 

Do  you  remember  Mr.  H.  whom  we  met  last  summer 
on  the  train  going  from  Munich  to  Switzerland?  I  met 
him  the  other  day  just  coming  out  of  a  hotel  and  he  told 
me  that  he  had  had  to  come  here  to  see  a  doctor.     I  went 

25  with  him  to  see  some  new  books  that  he  is  having  bound 
as  a  present  for  his  son,  who  is  studying  German  at  the 
university. 

Before  leaving  Germany  I  am  thinking  of  going  to 
Dresden  to  see  the  famous  picture-gallery.     Every  one 

30  advises  me  to  and  I  think  I  ought  to.     I  will  try  to  send 


GENERAL   REVIEW  75 

you  some  photographs  of  the  paintings,  since  you  are  so 
much  interested  in  art. 

Yours  sincerely, 

Charles  Gardner. 

46.  General  Review  IV 

A.  —  I  shall  have  to  go  down  town  this  morning  to  do  s 
some  shopping  and  to  look  at  a  dress  that  my  mother  is 
having  made.  B.  —  May  I  ask  you  to  do  an  errand  for 
me?  A,  —  Certainly;  I  shall  be  very  glad  to.  B,  —  I 
should  like  to  have  this  book  bound  as  soon  as  possible, 
for  I  am  going  to  give  it  to  my  friend  for  a  birthday  present.  lo 
She  wants  to  learn  German  and  I  want  her  to  read  as 
many  German  books  as  possible.  Don't  you  think  she 
would  hke  this  novel?  A.  —  I  may  have  read  it,  but  I  do 
not  remember  it  at  all.  But  I  was  very  much  pleased  by 
a  book  written  by  the  same  author  which  was  given  me  15 
last  year.  B.  —  I  should  like  to  know  whether  Mary 
has  read  it  and  I  ought  to  have  asked  her  before  buying 
it.  I  never  succeed  in  finding  just  what  she  wants.  I 
could  have  written  to  her  last  week,  but  now  it  is  too  late. 
A,  —  I  consider  this  a  very  nice  present,  and  Mary  has  20 
often  told  me  that  she  likes  books  handsomely  bound  in 
leather  better  than  anything  else.  I  must  hurry  now,  for 
I  have  only  ten  minutes  to  get  to  the  shop  where  I  am  to 
meet  my  mother.  She  insisted  on  my  being  there  at  half 
past  ten  and  I  never  think  of  keeping  her  waiting.  25 

47.  General  Review  V 

In  winter  I  usually  get  up  at  half  past  six.  My  bed- 
room is  on  the  third  floor  and,  as  I  keep  my  windows 
open  during  the  night,  the  room  is  very  cold  in  the  mom- 


76  GERMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

ing,  but  the  bath-room  where  I  take  a  bath  and  dress  is 
warm.  At  seven  o'clock  we  breakfast  all  together  and  as 
we  have  a  big  dining-room  with  windows  toward  the  east, 
we  have  the  morning  sun.  Our  house  is  situated  on  a 
5  hill,  we  have  a  beautiful  view  over  the  city  and  we  can  see 
the  mountains  on  the  other  side  of  the  river. 

For  breakfast  I  usually  eat  fruit  and  eggs  and  I  drink 
two  cups  of  hot  milk.  Afterwards  I  take  my  books  and 
go  to  school.     We  hve  outside  the  city  in  a  beautiful  park, 

lo  so  it  is  too  far  to  walk  to  school  and  I  take  the  electric  car 
through  the  park  to  the  city  gate.  There  I  get  out  and 
walk  along  the  river  to  the  schoolhouse.  This  school  is 
considered  to  be  the  best  in  town,  but  I  wish  the  lessons 
did  not  begin  at  half  past  eight  o'clock,  as  I  do  not  like 

IS  to  get  up  so  early.  My  father  is  a  physician  and  professor 
at  the  university  here  and  it  is  the  wish  of  my  heart  to 
become  as  famous  a  doctor  as  my  father  is.  At  half  past 
twelve  the  lessons  are  over  and  I  hurry  home  for  dinner, 
for  I  am  usually  very  hungry.     When  I  arrive  at  home  I 

20  sometimes  find  the  family  already  at  table.  For  dinner 
we  have  soup,  meat  or  poultry,  different  vegetables  and 
potatoes,  a  sweet  dish  and  cheese.  After  dinner  my 
father  drinks  a  cup  of  coffee  in  his  study  and  reads  the 
newspaper.    As  my  grandfather  is  a  member  of  parlia- 

25  ment,  we  are  all  very  much  interested  in  politics  and  my 
father  often  talks  to  me  on  this  subject  (about  it).  After 
dinner  I  rest  or  read  for  a  little  while  and  then  I  spend  a 
few  hours  out  of  doors.  I  do  not  lack  exercise  and  there- 
fore studying  has  never  injured  my  health. 

30  When  the  weather  is  fine  I  spend  a  few  hours  skating  or 
coasting,  or  I  go  shooting  with  my  father.  Last  summer 
I  succeeded  in  learning  how  to  ride,  and  several  times  I 
made  excursions  into  the  mountains  with  my  friends. 


GENERAL  REVIEW  77 

Sometimes  I  go  down  town  again  with  my  mother,  she 
likes  me  to  accompany  her  while  she  is  doing  errands  in 
the  different  shops.  Yesterday  we  bought  something  very 
nice  for  my  little  sister's  birthday  present.  On  reach- 
ing home  I  drink  a  cup  of  tea,  then  prepare  my  written  5 
and  oral  work  for  next  day.  I  am  very  much  interested 
in  my  lessons  and  it  never  bores  me  to  learn  them.  At 
half  past  seven  we  have  supper,  hot  and  cold  meat,  bread 
and  butter,  different  kinds  of  salad,  fruit  and  tea.  I  al- 
ways enjoy  this  meal  very  much;  father  tells  us  about  his  10 
travels  and  studies,  and  mother  talks  to  us  about  the  new- 
est books  or  the  letters  she  has  received  from  her  friends. 
After  supper  we  all  like  very  much  to  listen  to  my  sister's 
singing.  She  has  a  beautiful  voice  and  takes  lessons  from 
a  well-known  music  teacher.  She  often  goes  to  the  opera  15 
and  sometimes  I  am  allowed  to  go  with  her.  Very  often 
my  eldest  brother  comes  to  see  us  in  the  evening.  He  is 
just  serving  his  time  in  the  army,  and  the  children  admire 
his  beautiful  gay  uniform.  Just  now  he  has  to  Hve  down 
town  in  the  barracks  for  several  weeks,  which  does  not  20 
please  him  at  all,  as  he  prefers  to  live  at  home.  My 
parents  insist  on  my  going  to  bed  at  nine  o'clock  though  I 
would  like  very  much  to  sit  up  later,  and  I  think  I  am  old 
enough  to  do  so. 

48.  General  Review  VI 

As  the  doctor  insisted  on  my  taking  a  rest  and  as  he  25 
repeatedly  advised  me  to  go  to  Europe,  I  finally  made  up 
my  mind  to  do  so.  He  says  that  I  can  only  get  the  rest  I 
need  in  this  way,  because  I  have  injured  my  health  by 
working  too  hard.  He  thinks  I  ought  to  have  gone  to 
Europe  before  and  that  I  ought  to  take  a  few  weeks'  30 


78  GEKMAN   AND   ENGLISH   EXERCISES 

vacation  every  year,  but  since  I  have  been  president  of 
this  joint  stock  company  I  have  been  unable  to  find  any 
time  for  traveling.  The  doctor,  whose  advice  I  value 
very  highly,  spoke  of  going  to  Europe  himself,  but  un- 

5  fortunately  we  could  not  start  at  the  same  time,  so  I  had 
to  come  alone.  He  came  to  the  pier  to  say  good-by  to  me 
and  while  the  big  steamer  slowly  pulled  out  of  the  harbor 
I  saw  him  standing  there,  hat  in  hand,  waving  his  hand- 
kerchief.   At  that  time  I  did  not  know  that  I  was  never  to 

lo  see  him  again,  for  he  died  quite  suddenly  while  I  was  away. 

There  were  no  friends  or  relations  of  mine  on  board  the 

ship,  but  I  soon  found  some  travelers  I  liked.    The  man  I 

liked  best  was  a  former  pupil  of  a  friend  of  mine,  who  was 

going  to  Europe  to  study  at  a  German  university.     I  had 

15  heard  my  friend  say  that  he  considered  him  a  very  inter- 
esting yoimg  man,  so  I  was  very  glad  to  make  his  acquaint- 
ance. Every  day  I  saw  him  studying  his  maps  and  guide 
books  with  the  greatest  interest.  I  myself  did  not  do 
very  much  reading,  though  one  ought  to  read  something 

20  good  every  day.  I  often  felt  too  tired  to  do  so  and  I  was 
not  allowed  to  use  my  eyes  very  much.  There  was  much 
dancing  and  card  playing  during  the  passage.  There  are 
so  many  interesting  things  to  be  seen  in  Europe  that  I 
could  not  see  half  of  them,  though  I  wanted  to  very  much, 

25  but  after  having  spent  a  morning  in  a  museum  or  a  picture- 
gallery  my  head  and  my  eyes  ached  and  I  generally  had 
to  rest  the  whole  afternoon.  It  seemed  to  me  that  all 
Germany  was  most  int.  rested  in  the  famous  Zeppelin  and 
his  air  ship.     Unfortunately  I  did  not  succeed  in  seeing 

30  him,  although  I  made  several  attempts  to  do  so,  all  of 
which  failed.  One  day  I  stood  for  three  hours  waiting 
for  his  arrival,  but  having  had  an  accident  he  did  not 
reach  our  village  at  all. 


II.  ^rcte  ^eprobuftion 

A.  SJRunbKd^c  uttb  fd)riftlid^e  ftfiungcn  jur  SSicbctl^oIung 

golQCtibc  SlufQabcn  ftnb  mit  Seniifeung  ber  SBorte  unb  2lu^^ 
briide  ber  angegebcnen  Ubungen  ju  madden, 

1.  ®te  ©oinmerferien 2,  3,  17,  19,  20 

2.  T)ie  grembenpcnfton      4,  40 

3.  gine  9Jetfe  nac^  S)eutfdf}Ianb      8,  10,  13,  21    s 

4.  gin  Sag  in  Berlin 7,  9,  23 

5.  ®ne  5D?af)Iseit  im  §oteI 11,  20,  26 

6.  (Sin  SWotQen  in  ber  ©djule 14,  16,  40 

7.  ®ne  Slbenbgefellfd^aft 22,  27,  31 

8.  @ine  JReife  auf  ber  (Sifenbafin .  13,  17,  19  lo 

9.  Sin  ^Sefud^  bei  Sefannten 5,  23,  31 

10,  Sine  S3ert)erbnng  nm  eine  ©telle   ....  15,  31 

11,  Sluffte^en  nnb  griiMtM 3,  11,  25 

12,  @in  Slbenb  im  Sweater 8,  28,  33 

13,  gine  Unterf)altnng  beim  Snd}f)anbler    .    .  9,  29,  32  15 

14,  @in  UnfaK  anf  bem  ©port^felb     ....  38,  39 

15,  @ine  S3efd^reibung   eine^  grennbe^,  fein 

Seben  unb  fein  Slu^fe^en 37,  40 

B.  3«f^«tmctt]^angcnbc  ©rsai^Iung,  munblid^  unb  frfiriftlt^, 

ubtx  cigenc  ©rlctniffc,  a*  ^* 

1.  (Sine  Sicife 

2lm  S3a{)n]^of  —  bie  9Jeife  mit  ber  gifenbal^n  —  eine  9?ad§t  im 
§oteI — Unterbaltung  beim  grill^ftiidf — SSefd^reibung  ber  SBeiter:=  20 
rcife, 

79 


80  ^rete  Heprobuftion 

2.  (Bn  Xaq  in  bcr  ©rofeft^tbt 

(Sinfdufe  im  ^auf^au6  —  tm  53ud^Iaben  —  SJcfud^  bd  Scfann* 
ten  — cine  2:eegefeIIfd[)aft  —  ein  Slbcnbeffen  im  §oteI  — cin 
Slbenb  im  Jl^eater. 

3.  S^  ^aufc 

©ie  SSaterftabt  —  ba^  (SItemf)au^  —  bie  gamilie  —  ber  ©onm 
5  tag  utib  ber  ©otte^bienft* 

4.  gn  bcr  ©d^ule 

Sin  SBod^entag  in  ber  ©d^ule  —  ber  beutfd&e  Unterrid^t  — 
bie  beutfd^en  Siid^er  —  bie  gefirer  —  ber  ©port* 

5.  ^crSlu^flug 

Sin  Slu^flug  in  bie  33erge  —  SSefd^reibung  ber  ©efellfd^aft  — 
Sefd^reibung  ber  ©egenb  —  ein  !Dorf  —  bie  ©orffircOe  —  ba^ 
lo  aWittageffen  im  SBirt^Iiau^  —  bie  diMki)v  mit  ber  (gifenba]f)n 
ober  su  ©d}iff* 


III.    Dcutfd?Ianb 

Compare  Exercise  10 

1.  Qitoqxaptnid) 

a)  S)cutfd^Ianb  ift  ctnja  fo  gro^  tok  ber  atnerifanifd^e  ©taat 
2eja^»  ©^  umfa^t  ein  ®ebiet  t)on  545000  Ouabratfilometer 
unb  f)at  55  aKitlionen  (Sintr)o{)ner»  3)ie  ©rengen  ©eutfd^Ianb^ 
tm  9torben  ftnb  bte  S^orbfec,  ©anemarf  unb  bie  Oftfee,  ^ttt 
Often  gren^t  Seutfd^Ianb  an  SJufelanb*  ©iiblici^  bon  S)eutfd^Ianb  5 
liegt  Sfterrctd^  unb  bie  ©d^tDeq*  Qm  SBeften  grengt  35eutfd^Ianb 
an  granfreid^,  33elgien  unb  bie  %ieberlanbe,  2)ie  tDid^tigften 
gliiffe  finb,  bon  SBeften  nad^  Often,  ber  dt^dn,  bie  SBefer,  bie 
©Ibe,  bie  Ober,  bie  SBeid^fel,  bie  Sonau*  S)er  dl\)ein  entfpriuQt 
auf  ben  ©d^tt)eiser  2llpen.  ©r  burd^fliefet  hen  Sobenfee,  bei  Safel  lo 
menbet  er  fid^  nad^  9lorben  unb  bon  Wlain^  an  fliefet  er  in  norb^^ 
iDeftlid^er  9tid^tung»  Qn  §oIIanb  teilt  er  fid^  in  nxel^rere  2lrme 
unb  miinbet  in  bie  9?orbfee»  S)er  mid^tigfte  9?ebenf[u6  be^ 
SR^ein^  ift  ber  Tlain,  beffen  Ouetle  auf  bem  gic^telgebirge  ift  unb 
an  bem  granffurt,  bie  ©eburt^ftabt  ®oetf)e6  liegt^  9^orbbeutfd&:=  15 
lanb  ift  eine  flad^e  Jiefebene.  9WitteIbeutfd^Ianb  ift  ein  ^ilgel^ 
lanb  unb  in  ©libbeutfc^Ianb  erl^eben  fid^  fiol^e  ©ebirge.  @ine^  ber 
fd^onften  ©ebirge  in  ber  9Kitte  2)eutfd^Ianb6  ift  ber  Jl^ilringer 
SBalb, 

S)ie  norbbeutfd^e  jtiefebene  ift  ba^  ©ebiet  ber  nieberbeutfd^en  20 
(ober  plattbeutfd^en)  ©prad^e,  tDop  aud^  ba6  gufilifd^e  unb  ba^ 
^ottcinbifd^e  gel^bren, 

h)  1.  5yfennen  ©ie  bte  ©rengen  ©eutfd^Ianb^,  2,  9?ennen 
©ie  bie  hjid^tigften  gliiffe  bon  Often  nad^  2Beften.  3.  iBefd^rei- 
ben  ©ie  bm  ?auf  a)  be«  9?f)eine^,  b)  ber  ©Ibe*    4.  9?ennen  ©ie  25 

81 


82  Deutfdjianb 

brci  ©tabtc  in  ©eutfd^Ianb  unb  befd^reiben  ©te  il^re  Sage.    5.  9[Bic 
[tub  bie  ©ebirge  in  ©eutfdjlanb  berteilt? 

c)  The  fifty-five  million  inhabitants  of  Germany  occupy 
a  territory  which  is  only  about  as  large  as  Texas,  a  state 
5  which  has  but  four  milhon  inhabitants.  Yet  Germany 
is  one  of  the  largest  and  most  powerful  countries  of 
Europe.  In  the  north  it  borders  on  the  North  Sea, 
Denmark  and  the  Baltic.  To  the  east  lies  Russia.  In 
the  south  it  is  bounded  by  Austria  and  Switzerland,  in 

lo  the  west  by  France,  Belgium  and  the  Netherlands.  The 
highest  and  most  beautiful  mountains  are  in  southern 
Germany,  but  the  hills  of  middle  Germany  are  very  pretty 
and  in  the  flat  plain  of  north  Germany  rise  the  famous 
Harz    mountains   (sing.)     While    almost    all  the  larger 

IS  rivers  of  Germany  flow  northward  and  empty  into  the 
North  Sea  or  the  Baltic,  the  largest  of  all,  the  Danube, 
flows  in  quite  a  different  direction.  It  has  its  source  in 
the  mountains  of  the  Black  Forest  in  Baden,  and  flows 
in  an  easterly  direction  through  Wtirttemberg,  Bavaria 

2o  and  Austria,  whose  capital,  Vienna,  Hes  on  this  river.  In 
Hungary  it  turns  to  the  south  and  finally  empties  into  the 
Black  Sea.  Munich,  the  capital  of  Bavaria,  lies  on  the 
Isar,  one  of  the  tributaries  of  the  Danube,  which  rises  in 
the  Alps. 

2.  5Uoa«f(i^ 

25  a)  ©eit  ^al^rl^unbcrtcn  f)attc  ba6  geiftigc  ?cbcn  ©eutfd^IanbS 
cinen  grofeen  ginflufe  auf  bie  europaifd^c  ^ultur  au^geubt,  aber 
fcit  1870  l)at  \xi)  ba^  neugeeinigte  5Dcutfd^Ianb  gn  ciner  @ro6= 
tnad^t  erftcn  $Rangc«  emporgcfd^tDungcn  unb  bie  (grgeugniffe  ber 
bcutfd^en  Snbuftrie,  ^unft  unb  iffiiffcnfd^aft  tDerben  in  aUen 

30  SBeltteilen  gefd^afet. 

S)a^  3)cutfd^c  dtdd)  ift  eine  SSereinigung  t)on  26  ©taatcn.  ©a« 


poltttfcf?  83 

fiememfame  Oberl^aupt  berfelbeti  ift  ber  f  onig  t)on  "ipreufeen,  ber 
ate  fold^er  ben  Jitel  „S)eutfd&er  ^aifer"  fiilirt.  3eber  eingelne 
©taat  l^at  feme  eigene  93erfa[[un0  unb  SJertDaltung  beibef)alten, 
aber  atle  Sragen,  meldje  ba6  Qanje  9?et($  bctreffen,  merben  t)on  ber 
Sunbe^regterung  beraten,  Ser  ^aifer  ift  ber  aIIerf)od^fte  ^rieg^^  5 
l^err  unb  uvtxiit  ba^  dteid)  na(^  aufeen*  ®er  S3unbe^rat  beftef)t 
au^  58  SSertretem  ber  einjelnen  ©taaten,  bie  t)on  ben  §errfd^em 
berfelbcn  emannt  ^erben,  3)er  9?etd^^tag  beftef)t  au^  397  2lbge^ 
orbneten,  bie  burd)  allgemeine  gelieime  Slbftimmung  unmittelbar 
Don  bent  33oIfe  getDctfilt  iperben,  ®er  9tei(^^tag  unb  ber  SSunbe^^  10 
rat  gufantmen  befc^Iiegen  bie  ©efefee,  fefeen  bie  Slu^gaben  unb  @in= 
nal^men  be^  JKeid^e^  feft  unb  UbertDad^en  bie  SerlDaltung  be^ 
ateic^e^  im  allgemeinen* 

b)  h  SBeld^e^  [tub  bie  ^flid^ten  be^  ^aifer^?    2.  SBiebtel 
gj^ad^t  l^at  ieber  eingelne  (S>taat?    3.  SBiebiele  9KitgIieber  l^at  15 
a)  ber  S3unbe^rat,  b)  ber  9{ei(^^tag,  unb  tDie  tDerben  fie  gen)a{)tt? 

4.  SBeld^e  ^flic^ten  f)aben  ber  33unbe^tag  unb  ber  9{eid&^tag? 
5»  SBelc^e  ©tellung  nimmt  ©eutfc^Ianb  {)eute  ein? 

c)  When  the  rulers  of  the  various  German  states  chose 
the  King  of  Prussia  as  chief  of  the  new  German  Empire,  20 
each  state  preserved  its  own  independent  constitution  and 
administration.     All  questions  which  concern  the  income 
and  expenditures  of  each  state  are  settled  by  its  own  gov- 
ernment  and  only  the   laws  which   concern  the  whole 
Empire  are  made  by  the  Federal  Government,  which  con-  25 
sists  of  the  Federal  Council  and  the  Parliament.     The 
rulers  of  the  separate  states  appoint  the  members  of  the 
Federal  Council,  but  the  members  of  the  Reichstag  are 
elected  by  universal  suffrage  and  represent  the  whole  Ger- 
man people.     As  mihtary  chief  of  the  nation  the  Emperor  30 
watches  over  everything  that   concerns  the  army  and 
directs  the  external  policy  of  the  empire. 


84  Deutfd?Ian5 

3.  ^iftmfc^ 

a)  Sari  bcr  ©ro^e  ift  ber  Srftc,  iDcId^er  bic  t)crf($iebcncn  beut^ 
fd^en  ©tamme  gu  einem  SReid^e  bcremigte  unb  er  licfe  fid^  im  Qal^r 
800  t)om  ^apft  in  9tom  aunt  beutfd^en  Satfer  fronen.  9^ad^ 
fetnem  Jobe  gerfiel  ba^  3Jeid^  in  gn^ei  2:eile  nnb  ba^  ©ebiet  ant 

5  red^tcn  JR^einufer  murbe  t)on  jefet  an  3)eutfd^Ianb  genannt*  ©eit 
iener  ^^tt  rcgierten  Satfer  au^  Derfd^iebenen  ^anfem,  aber  bic 
JRcid^^fiirften  murben  intnter  mfid^tiger  unb  immcr  feltcner  gelang 
c^  ben  Saifem,  fie  unter  if)re  §errfd[)aft  gu  bringen,  ©o  h)urbe  feit 
bent  brei^el^nten  Qal^rl^unbert,  ate  bie  SaifertDtirbe  bauemb  an  ba^ 

10  §au^  ^ab^burg  ilberging,  bie  3)?ad^t  be^  Saifer^  intnter  geringer 
unb  int  3cif)t  1806,  aU  Seutfd^Ianb  faft  ganj  unter  bie  §errfd[)aft 
5)lapoIeon^  gefontnten  mar,  legte  granj  ber  3^eite  bie  beutfd^e 
fi'aiferfrone  nieber  unb  feit  jener  3^it  ift  ©fterreid^ein  felbftanbige^ 
Saiferreid^*  —  ©d^on  feit  ber  3^it  griebrid^^  be^  ©rofeen  ^atte 

IS  ^Jreufeen  eine  fii^renbe  9?otte  unter  ben  anberen  beutfd^en  ©taaten 
gefpielt;  aber  erft  nad^  bent  beutfd^^fran^ofifd^en  Sriege  (1870- 
1871)  fam  e6  p  einer  h)irtlic^en  93ereinigung»  2lnt  erften  ^ctnuar, 
1871,  tDurbe  ba^  neue  ©eutfd^e  $Reid^  gegriinbet.  SBill^elnt  ber 
(Srfte,  ber  Sonig  t)on  ^reufeen,  au^  bent  §aufe  §of)en3oHem  tDurbe 

2o  junt  Saifer  gen)at)It  unb  gilrft  33i6ntardE  tt)urbe  ber  erfte  SKeid^^^ 
fanjler^ 

6)   L  SBann  unb  t)on  n^etn  h)urben  bie  beutfd^en  ©tctmrne  gu 

cinent  9teid^  t)ereinigt?    2,  SBeld&e^  ©d^idtfal  f)atte  ba^  9?eid& 

nad&  bent  Jobe  Sarte?    3.  SBa^  tuiffen  ©ie  ilber  bie  §ab^= 

25  burger  unb  ilber  Sfterreid^?    4,  SBeld^e  5RoIIe  bat  ?5reu§en  ge* 

fpielt?    5,  SBa6  ift  ba^  neue  ©eutfd^e  $Reid^? 

c)   In  the  eighth  century  Charles  the  Great  (Charle- 
magne) united  all  the  German  tribes  into  one  empire  and 
after  he  had  been  crowned  Emperor  by  the    Pope    he 
30  ruled  for  a  time  over  almost  all  Europe.     Since  that  time 


^tftortf^  85 

only  Napoleon  has  succeeded  in  uniting  so  large  a  part  of 
Europe  under  his  rule.  But  after  the  death  of  Charles 
his  sons  divided  his  empire  and  from  that  time  on  the 
territory  on  the  western  bank  of  the  Rhine  was  called 
France,  that  on  the  eastern,  Germany.  Germany  was  ruled  5 
by  emperors  of  different  families,  among  whom  the  house 
of  Hohenstaufen  was  the  most  powerful,  but  even  the 
great  Emperor  Barbarossa  did  not  succeed  in  estabhsh- 
ing  his  rule  over  all  the  princes  of  the  empire.  The  power 
of  the  princes  became  ever  greater  and  that  of  the  em-  10 
perors  ever  less.  The  house  of  Hapsburg  held  the  im- 
perial dignity  for  more  than  five  centuries,  but  when  it 
resigned  the  crown  in  1806,  it  had  long  ruled  Germany 
only  in  name.  The  present  German  Empire  has  only 
existed  since  1871,  when  the  imperial  dignity  passed  over  15 
to  the  HohenzoUern  dynasty.  For  a  hundred  years 
Prussia  had  been  growing  constantly  stronger  and  more 
influential,  and  after  Francis  the  Second  had  resigned  the 
title  of  German  Emperor  in  1806,  and  Austria  had  become 
a  separate  empire,  almost  all  Germany  came  under  Prus-  20 
sian  influence.  During  the  Franco-Prussian  war  Bismarck 
succeeded  in  uniting  all  the  German  states  under  the 
leadership  of  Prussia  and  on  January  18th,  1871,  William 
the  First  was  crowned  Emperor  of  Germany  in  the  palace 
of  Versailles  in  France.  25 


IV.  2lnefboten  5um  mixnMidjen  unb  fd?riftltd?en 
(Bebraudj 

1.  ^ic  faulctt  2)icnftmabcl^cn:  Sine  fleifetQc  §au^frau  toedk 
if)vt  betben  ©ienftntctbd^en  jeben  aWorgen  sur  Slrbeit,  fobalb  ber 
§a]^n  hai)k.  ®a  murben  bie  Sienftmabd^en  fo  aomtg  auf  ben 
^al^n,  bafe  fie  tl^n  toteten.    ©ie  fiofften  nun  Icinger  fd^Iafen  gu 

5  fonnen*  Slflein  bie  §au^frau  mu^te  jefet  gar  nid^t  mef)r,  tDie 
fpat  e^  fei,  al6  fie  aufmad^te,  unb  medfte  bie  ©ienftmabd^en  t)on 
nun  an  nod^  fruiter,  oft  fd^on  furs  ^^^  SWittemad^t* 

!♦  SBann  unb  t)on  iDent  tDurben  bie  ©ienftntabd^en  gelDedft? 

2.  SBa^  bad^ten  bie  ©ienftmftbd^en  iiber  ben  ^al^n?    3,  2Ba« 

lo  gefd^al),  nad^bent  fie  ben  §af)n  getotet  f)atten?    4.  @rsaf)Ien  ®ie 

bie  ©efd^idjte,  al^  ob  ©ie  a)  bie  ^au^frau,  6)  ba^  ©ienftmcibd^en 

n)ttren. 

2.  2)er  gekngniJeiWe  ©aft:  ©^  tt)ar  grofee  ©efeUfd^aft  in  einem 
angefef)enen  §aufe*    Siner  ber  eingelabenen  §erren  ftanb  in  einer 

IS  (gde  unb  qa^ntt.  „©ie  langtceilen  fid^  tt)of)I,  mein  §err?"  fragte 
if)n  ein  9^ad^bar,  „^a,  id)  langtDeile  mid^  entfefelid^/'  n)ar  bie  2lnt* 
tDort*  „Unb  ©ie?"  —  „£),  id&  Iangn)eile  nti(^  ebenfatl^  furd^t* 
bar." — „SBie  iDcir'^  alfo,  menu  tt)ir  beibe  fortgingen?" — „2ld^,  id^ 
fann  leiber  nid^t,  id^  bin  ber  §err  be^  §aufe^/' 

2o  1.  aBarunt  gcii^nte  ber  §err?  2.  SBa^  fagte  fein  '!!lla(i)bav  gu 
U)m?  3.  aSetd^e  SInttDort  gab  ber  §err  be^  ^aufe^?  4,  ^eh 
d^en  aSorfd^Iag  mad^te  ber  ©aft?  5.  (Srjaf)Ien  ©ie  bie  ©efd^id^te, 
ate  ob  ©ie  a)  ber  ©aft,  b)  ber  §err  be^  §aufe^  lofiren. 

3.  2)ie  ungletd^ctt  STctlc:   @in  armer  gifd^er  l^atte  etnen 
25  aufeerorbentlid^  grofeen  gifd^  gefangen;  er  befd^Iofe,  il^n  bem  ^onig 

86 


Tlndbokn  87 

Su  Bringen,  ber  eiti  Stebl^aber  t)on  ©eltcnl^citen  toax.  @r  fam 
mit  feincm  gifd^e  unb  berlangtc  ben  ^onig  p  fpred&cn;  ber  ©tener 
tDottte  il^n  aber  nid^t  t)orIaffen,  bi^  er  U)m  bie  §alfte  t)on  bent  t)er= 
fprad^,  lDa6  er  bom  ^ontg  betommen  tDixrbe,  3)er  ^onig  beh)un^ 
bertc  ben  gifd^  unb  befaf)I,  bem  Uberbringer  l^unbert  9Karf  p  5 
geben.  Site  ber  i^i\(iicx  ben  Sefel^I  f)i)rte,  fagte  er:  „9lein,  gnabiger 
§err,  nid^t  l^unbert  9Karf,  fonbem  l^unbert  ©todfd^Icige/  9Ser^ 
iDunbert  fragte  ber  ^dntg  nad^  bem  @runbe  fold^er  S3ttte»  S)a 
er^tiblte  ber  gifd^er,  tDie  er  nid^t  el^er  borgelaffen  tr)orben  fei,  ate 
bte  er  bem  S)iener  bie  §alfte  Don  bem,  toa^  ber  ^onig  if)m  geben  10 
toiirbe,  berfprod^en  liatU.  ®a  fagte  ber  ^onig:  ,,S)u  foUft  ]^un= 
bert  9Karf  unb  f)unbert  ©todffd^Iiige  fiir  beinen  gifd^  befommen; 
bu  nimmft  ha^  ®db,  unb  ber  2)tener  bie  ©d^Kige*"  Unb  babet 
blieb  e§» 

1*  SBarum  fam  ber  %i\il)tv  gu  bem  ^onig?    2.  SBa^  fagte  is 
ber  ^onig,  ate  er  ben  gifd^  faf)?    3*  SBarum  tooUte  ber  gifd^er 
©todffd^Iage?    4»  2luf  meld^er  SBeife  betobnte  ber  ^onig   ben 
gifd^er  unb  ben  ©iener?    5*  grsftb^n  ©ie  bie  Slnefbote,  ate  ob 
©ie,  a)  ber  ^onig,  6)  ber  gifd^er,  c)  ber  2)iener  mttren. 

4.  ?5urft  SBi^marrf  unb  fein  Slrst:  2lte  Si^mardf  etnmal  un=  20 
h)oI)I  toar,  fanbte  er  nad^  einem  iungen  Slr^t,  ben  er  nod^  nie  ge^ 
feben  batte,  aber  ber  ibm  febr  empfoblen  toorben  tDar.    ®er  junge 
Slrjt  fam  unb  fing  an,  gragen  p  ftetlen.   @r  fragte  unter  anberem: 
„9[Bie  lange  fd^lafen  ©ie  nad^t^?    SBie  Diel  SBein  ober  S3ier  trin^^ 
fen  ©ie  taglid^?    SBic  lange  geben  ©ie  ieben  Jag  fpa^ieren?"  25 
3uerft  beanttDortete  33t6mardf  bie  gragen  febr  boflid^,  aber  fd^Iiefe^ 
lid^  berlor  er  bie  ©ebulb  unb  rief:  „§err  S)oftor,  id^  bcibe  ©ie 
fommen  laffen,  bamit  ©ie  mid^  gefunb  madden  unb  nid^t  bamit  ©ie 
mid^  au^fragen!"    ,r®ut/'  fagte  ber  iunge  ©of tor  faltbliltig,  ,,tDenn 
©ie  Don  einem  Slrjt  bebanbelt  toerben  Gotten,  obne  au^gefragt  gu  30 
toerben,  bann  fd^idfen  ©ie  nad&  einem  Sierargte/'    S)ie  Slntmort 


88  2tnef5oten 

geftcl  bent  grofecn  ©taat^mann  fo  gut,  ba^  cr  ben  iungcn  9Wann 
gu  feinem  2eibargt  mad^te* 

!♦  SBer  mar  SSi^mard?    2»  SBarunx  Keg  cr  etnen  Slrgt  font* 

men?    3.  SBarunt  n3ar  St^mard  gucrft  unjufriebcn  nttt  il^nt? 

5  4,  SBarunt  gefiel  ber  Hr^t  bent  ©taat^ntanne  aber  fpater? 

5,  @rg(il)len  ©tc  btc  Slnefbote,  ate  ob  ®ie  a)  S3tentarcf,  b)  ber 

Slrst  todxtn. 

5.  ^ie  Sftueritt  auf  ber  5Poft:  Sine  alte  53(iuerin  l^atte  ntit 
t)ieler  9}Juf)e  etnen  33rtef  an  t^ren  ®oI)n  gefd&rteben,  ber  gerabe 

10  bet  ben  ©olbaten  btente,  unb  beftanb  barauf,  il^n  felbft  auf  bie 
S^o\t  gu  tragen*  ®er  ^oftbeantte  nai)m  ben  S3rtef,  fanb  t^n  gu 
fd^tner  unb  fagte  gu  i^r:  „®er  53rtef  ift  su  fd^tDer;  e^  ntufe  nod^ 
erne  9Karfe  barauf/  2)te  93duerin  befann  ftd^  lange,  fal^  t^n  fel^r 
erftaunt  an  unb  fagte:  „2lber  bann  tDtrb  ber  S3rief  ia  nod& 

15  fd^n)erer»" 

1.  SBarunt  gtng  bie  53auerin  auf  bie  ^oft?    2.  SBa^  miffen 

©ie  itber  ben  ®ot)n  ber  Sauerin?    3,  SBarunt  nafirrt  ber  Se= 

atnte  ben  S3rief  nid^t  an?    4»  SBie  berftanb  bie  33auerin  bie 

SBorte  be^  93eantten?    5*  (grgcil^Ien  ©ie  bie  ©efd^id^te,  ate  ob 

2o  ©ie  ber  Seamte  mxcn. 


V.    A  Summer  in  Germany 
1.  Letter  of  Inquiry 

Professor  Fritz  Miiller, 

Dear  Sir,^ 

I  have  learned  from  my  German  teacher,  Dr.  Edward 
Meyer,  that  you  sometimes  take  into  your  family  foreign-    5 
ers  who  wish  to  learn  German.     May  I  ask  whether  you 
will  have  room  in  your  house  this  summer  for  my  sister 
and  me?    We  want  to  spend  three  months  in  Germany 
and  to  learn  as  much  German  as  possible  in  that  time, 
for  I  intend  later  to  enter  the  diplomatic  service  and  my  10 
sister  wishes  to  be  a  teacher  of  German.     We  have  both 
read  and  studied  German  for  a  number  of  years,  but  we 
lack  practice  in  speaking  and  I  know  that  one  can  only 
learn  to  speak  a  language  fluently  by  hearing  and  talking 
it  constantly.     My  sister  is  still  at  school  and  I  am  study-  15 
ing  at  the  university  here,  but  our  holidays  begin  early  in 
June  2  and  we  intend  to  reach  Berhn  about  the  middle  of 
that  month. 

Hoping^  that  you  will  be  willing  to  receive  us  into  your 
family  and  to  give  us  German  lessons  during  our  stay,  I  20 
remain, 

Yours  sincerely, 

Robert  Walter. 

*  See  Exercise  14  and  Gram.  30,  II.    2  Construe:  beginning  June, 
^  Construe:  In  the  hope. 


89 


90  A  SUMMER  IN   GERMANY 

3.  Answer 

Berlin,  S.  W. 
April  12,  1910. 
My  dear  Mr.  Brown, 
I  hasten  to  answer  your  letter  and  to  assure  you  that 
5  we  shall  be  very  happy  to  take  you  and  your  sister  into 
our  family  for  the  summer.     You  will  be  the  only  foreign- 
ers in  the  family  this  year  and  this  will  be  very  good  for 
you,  for  you  will  not  be  tempted  to  speak  English.    Neither 
I  nor  my  sons  understand  the  language  at  all,  and  although 
lo  my  wife  has  been  in  England  and  speaks  a  little  English, 
I  always  insist  on  her  speaking  German  with  our  boarders. 
Our  High  School  vacation  begins  about  the  first  of 
August  and  my  wife  and  I  intend  then  to  take  a  little 
journey  through  southern  Germany  and  to  spend  a  few 
IS  weeks  in  the  Black  Forest.     Perhaps  you  and  your  sister 
would  like  to  join  us  in  this  trip.     You  will  certainly  want 
to  see  something  of  Germany  beside  Berlin  and  you  ought 
to  spend  part  of  the  summer  in  the  country.     If  you 
would  like  to  go  with  us,  we  can  continue  the  German 
2o  lessons  through  the  whole  summer  and  you  will  also  have 
an  opportunity  of  seeing  a  very  beautiful  part  of  Germany. 
You  need  not  bring  any  books  with  you  except  the  Ger- 
man grammar  which  you  are  accustomed  to  use. 

Please  send  me  a  telegram  when  you  arrive  in  Hamburg 
25  and  let  me  know  by  what  train  you  will  reach  Berlin.     I 
shall  certainly  be  at  the  station  to  meet  you. 
Hoping  to  meet  you  soon,  I  remain. 

Yours  sincerely, 

[Dr.]  FrIEDRICH   MtJLLER, 

30  Oberlehrer. 


AERIVAL   IN   BERLIN  91 

3.  Arrival  in  Berlin 

Conversation 

Good  morning,  Professor,^  I  did  not  expect  to  meet 
you  here  at  the  station.    Are  you  going  away? 

—  No  [indeed].  I  cannot  do  that  until  the  holidays 
begin.  I  am  here  to  meet  a  young  American  and  his 
sister  who  are  to  spend  several  months  with  us.  They  s 
telegraphed  this  morning  that  they  would  arrive  by  the 
express  at  half  past  eleven.  That  must  be  their  train 
that  is  just  coming  in.  Good-by!  I  must  hurry  to  be 
at  the  gate  when  they  get  out. 

—  I  am  sure  this  must  be  Mr.  Walter  and  Miss  Walter.  lo 
Welcome  to  Germany  and  to  Berlin!    I  am  very  glad  to 
see  you. 

—  It  is  very  kind  of  you  to  meet  us  at  the  station.    I 
did  not  know  whether  you  would  receive  my  telegram, 
as  I  could  not  go  to  the  post-office  myself  and  had  to  send  15 
it  by  a  porter. 

—  Yes,  it  came  early  this  morning  and  you  will  find 
everything  ready  for  you  at  our  house.     My  wife  and 
children  are  looking  forward  with  much  pleasure  to  your 
coming.     But  you  must  be  very  tired  after  your  long  20 
journey. 

—  The  train  was  so  comfortable  and  we  saw  so  much 
that  was  new  and  interesting  on  the  way,  that  we  have 
had  no  time  to  feel  tired. 

—  I  have  engaged  a  cab,  and  if  you  will  give  your  checks  25 
to  this  porter,  he  will  get  the  luggage  and  we  will  drive 
home  at  once. 

—  Is  it  a  long  drive? 

1  Gram.  30. 


92  A   SUMMER   IN   GERMANY 

—  Rather  long,  I  am  sorry  to  say.  We  shall  have  to 
drive  across  the  whole  city,  as  we  live  in  Charles 
Street. 

—  I  am  very  glad,  to  hear  that,  for  I  shall  enjoy  very 
5  much  a  drive  through  Berlin.     It  is  the  first  foreign  city  I 

have  ever  seen,  for  we  had  only  an  hour  in  Hamburg  this 
morning.  It  is  always  delightful  to  drive  through  a 
strange  town  for  the  first  time. 

—  I  will  tell  the  coachman  to  take  a  Httle  longer  way 
lo  and  to  drive  us  through  the  middle  of  the  city. 

—  What  beautiful  trees!  Is  that  a  park?  And  what 
is  that  large  building  to  the  left? 

—  That  is  the  Parliament  House  and  beyond  it  is  the 
Tiergarten,  the  largest  park  in  Berhn.     You  will  have 

15  many  opportunities  of  seeing  it,  for  we  often  drive  and 
walk  there  in  summer.  Now  we  must  turn  to  the  left, 
for  we  live  at  the  other  end  of  the  town,  as  I  must  be  near 
my  school. 

—  Isn't  that  the  Brandenburger  Tor?    I  recognize  that 
20  at  the  first  glance,  for  I  saw  a  picture  of  it  in  a  German 

book  I  read  last  winter.     It  is  very  handsome. 

—  We  shall  drive  through,  but  not  through  the  middle, 
for  only  the  Emperor  and  his  family  are  allowed  to  do 
that.     This  is  our  finest  street.     It  is  called  ^^  Under  the 

«S  Lindens." 

—  Yes,  I  know  that  the  largest  hotels  and  the  most 
elegant  shops  are  on  it.  The  street  is  very  fine  and 
broad,  but  I  must  confess  that  the  trees  are  not  as  large 
or  as  beautiful  as  I  had  expected.     But  how  many  uni- 

30  forms  there  are  on  the  street!  One  sees  that  Berlin  is  the 
capital  of  a  mihtary  nation. 

—  That  large  house  which  we  are  just  passing  was  the 
palace  of  our  old   Emperor,  William  the  First,  whose 


LETTER   FROM   MRS.    MULLER  TO   HER   SISTER     93 

memory  we   Prussians   all   honor.    Opposite    it    is    the 
monument  to  Frederick  the  Great. 

—  I  must  come  again  and  look  at  that.     I  have  read  a 
great  deal  about  him  and  admire  him  very  much. 

—  Mr.  Walter,  you  will  be  interested  in  that  long,  low  5 
building  opposite.  It  is  the  university,  where  you  can 
hear  excellent  lectures  on  art,  Uterature,  etc.  .  .  .  This  is 
Charles  Street  and  we  shall  be  at  home  in  a  moment. 
Here  we  are.  We  live  in  that  house  and  I  see  my  wife 
on  the  balcony  looking  out  for  us.  10 

4.  Letter  from  Mrs.  Miiller  to  her  Sister 

My  dear  Sister, 

I  ought  to  have  written  to  you  before  to  thank  you  for 
the  delightful  books  you  sent  me  for  my  birthday.  You 
could  not  have  picked  out  anything  that  would  have 
pleased  me  better,  for  I  like  Viebig's  novels  very  much  15 
and  it  is  always  so  difficult  to  get  them  from  the  circulat- 
ing library,  because  they  are  so  popular. 

I  know  you  will  forgive  me  for  not  having  written 
sooner  when  you  hear  that  our  two  young  American 
guests  have  arrived  and  that  I  have  had  no  time  to  think  20 
of  anything  else.  You  know  I  was  a  little  afraid  of  their 
coming,  for  I  speak  very  little  English  and  I  did  not  know 
whether  we  could  understand  each  other  at  all.  Besides  I 
had  heard  so  much  about  American  girls  and  how  inde- 
pendent they  are  and  how  much  money  they  spend,  that  25 
I  feared  we  could  not  make  Miss  Walter  happy  here. 
You  know  I  had  to  give  her  the  little  room  next  the 
dining-room  and  although  I  had  had  it  newly  put  in 
order  for  her  I  was  afraid  she  would  not  like  it,  but  she 
seems  quite  satisfied  with  it  and  thinks  everything  in  the  30 


94  A   SUMMER   IN   GERMANY 

house  very  comfortable.  I  wish  you  could  see  her.  She 
is  a  charming,  slender  little  girl  with  light  hair  and  dresses 
very  well  but  very  simply.  Her  brother  is  tall  with  dark 
eyes  and  hair,  and  both  seem  to  be  very  intelligent.  Both 
5  speak  German  very  fairly  well,  so  that  we  can  talk  about 
anything  we  want  to.  Miss  Walter  likes  to  go  out  with 
me  mornings  when  I  am  doing  my  errands  at  market 
or  in  town;  she  is  interested  in  everything  she  sees 
and  asks  me  all  sorts  of  questions,  some  of  which  I  can 

lo  hardly  answer.  We  were  all  invited  to  a  little  evening 
party  at  Mrs.  Professor  Francke's  last  night,  I  had  in- 
tended to  refuse  the  invitation,  but  when  I  found  that  my 
young  guests  spoke  German  so  well,  I  thought  it  would 
amuse  them  to  go.     Unfortunately  Miss  Walter  had  lost 

15  one  of  her  trunks  and  had  no  evening  dress  and  there 
was  no  time  to  have  one  made,  but  we  went  down-town 
and  bought  a  pretty  white  silk  dress  which  was  very 
becoming  to  her.  I  thought  she  would  be  very  much 
surprised  at  our  large  department  stores,  but  she  says 

20  they  have  just  as  big  and  just  as  fine  ones  in  New  York. 
But  she  is  delighted  with  everything  that  is  old  or  that 
that  has  historical  interest.  It  is  a  pity  that  Berlin  is 
such  a  modern  city.  How  she  will  enjoy  our  trip  to  the 
Black  Forest  and  the  beautiful  old  towns  of  southern 

25  Germany! 

The  party  at  Dr.  Francke^s  was  very  agreeable  and  our 
guests  met  several  nice  young  people,  whom  they  hked 
and  with  whom  they  are  to  make  an  excursion  by  boat 
to  Potsdam  next  week.     Of  course  they  both  take  a  Ger- 

30  man  lesson  every  day  with  my  husband  and  Mr.  Walter 
intends  to  go  to  some  lectures  at  the  university,  so  you 
see  they  will  have  plenty  to  do. 

I  hope  you  are  enjoying  your  visit  in  the  country  and 


A  TRIP  TO  THE  BLACK  FOREST        95 

that  you  feel  much  better  than  you  did  before  you  went. 
Give  my  kindest  regards  to  Mrs.  Black  and  her  family. 

Your  loving  sister/ 

Margarete  Muller. 


S.  A  Trip  to  the  Black  Forest 

a)  Mr.  Walter  and  his  sister  had  spent  six  very  pleas-    5 
ant  and  profitable  weeks  in  Berlin.     Besides  the  German 
lessons  which  they  took  every  afternoon  from  Professor 
Muller,   Robert  Walter  had  attended   some   interesting 
lectures  on  history  at  the  university.     His  sister  was  more 
interested  in  art  than  in  history  and  she  had  studied  the  10 
history  of  art  with  a  very  inteUigent  and  cultivated  lady 
with  whom  she  had  visited  all  the  museums  and  picture 
galleries  of  the  town.     Both  had  gone  often  to  the  theater 
and  had  seen  many  of  the  best  modern  plays.     They  had 
hoped  to  see  on  the  stage  some  of  the  great  dramas  of  15 
Lessing  and  Schiller  which  they  had  read  in  America, 
but  they  soon  learned  that  the  classical  dramas  are  only 
given  during  the  winter.    Both  the  young  people  had 
made  (found)  pleasant  acquaintances  among  the  younger 
friends  of  the  Muller  family,^  with  whom  they  had  played  20 
tennis  and  made  excursions  by  boat  or  by  bicycle  in  the 
neighborhood  of  Berlin.     But  the  weather  had  now  grown 
rather  hot,  many  of  their  friends  had  already  left  the  city 
and  had  gone  to  the  seashore  or  the  mountains,  and  they 
began  to  long  for  the  country.     So  they  were  both  very  25 
much  pleased  when  Professor  Muller  said  one  day  at 
dinner,  that  he  should  be  ready  the  next  week  to  start  on 
their  proposed  trip  to  the  Black  Forest.     '*I  have  really 

1  See  Exercises  4  and  21.  ^  Construe:  the  family  Muller, 


96  A   SUMMER   IN    GERMANY 

been  too  busy  to  make  any  plans/'  said  he.     "Have  you 
heard  whether  we  can  get  rooms  anywhere?  " 

"Yes/'  answered   Mrs.   Mtiller,    "I   have  written  to 
several  places  and  I  heard  yesterday  from   the   Hotel 

5  Bear^  at  Titisee  that  we  can  have  three  rooms  in  the 
third  story  with  a  beautiful  view  over  the  lake  for  ten 
marks  a  day.  But  they  will  not  be  free  until  the  fif- 
teenth. Don't  you  think  we  had  better  engage  them  at 
once?" 

lo  "Yes,  certainly/'  said  the  professor.  "It  is  a  beautiful 
place.  We  shall  all  enjoy  the  bathing  and  boating  and  it 
is  delightful  to  be  so  near  the  woods  and  the  mountains. 
My  holidays  begin  the  fifth  and  then  I  shall  have  time  to 
arrange  everything." 

15  "I  propose  that  we  divide  the  work  between  us/'  said 
Mrs.  Mtiller.  "You  have  enough  to  do  with  your  school, 
so  you  must  leave  everything  else  to  us.  I  shall  be  busy 
getting  the  house  in  order  and  packing.  Miss  Walter 
must  read  the  guide  book  and  decide  where  we  shall  stop 

20  on  our  journey  and  what  we  ought  to  see,  and  Mr.  Walter 
now  speaks  and  writes  German  so  well  that  he  can  get  the 
time-tables,  look  up  the  trains,  buy  the  tickets  and  order 
rooms  at  the  hotels  where  we  are  to  spend  the  night.  In 
this  way  we  shall  be  able  to  start  as  soon  as  your  holidays 

25  begin  and  shall  have  a  week  to  spend  on  the  way  to  the 
Black  Forest." 

b)   Every  one  was  satisfied  with  this  plan  and  a  week 

later  they  were  all  sitting  comfortably  in  a  second-class 

compartment  of  the  express  train  that  was  to  take  them 

30  by  way  of  Leipzig  to  Weimar,  where  the  first  stop  was  to 

be  made.    The  day  was  fine  and  the  young  Americans 

*  $otcI  gum  SSilrcn. 


A  TRIP  TO  THE  BLACK  FOREST        97 

were  delighted  when  they  left  the  flat  plains  of  the  north 
and  entered  the  beautiful  hill  country  of  central  Germany. 
At  half  past  six  o'clock  the  train  arrived  at  Weimar  and 
they  drove  at  once  to  the  quaint  old  Elephant  Hotel/ where 
Mr.  Walter  had  engaged  rooms  overlooking  the  market-  s 
place.  They  spent  two  very  interesting  days  in  the  little 
Thuringian  town,  which  is  still  so  full  of  memories  of 
Goethe  and  Schiller  that  it  seems  to  belong  more  to  the 
past  than  to  the  present.  Their  next  stop  was  at  Frank- 
fort-on-the-Main,  where  they  only  spent  the  night  and  lo 
visited  the  old  market-place  with  its  quaint  mediaeval 
buildings  and  the  house  where  Goethe  was  born.  The 
next  day  they  went  on  to  Heidelberg,  for  they  all  wanted 
to  see  the  famous  castle  and  the  beautiful  surroundings  of 
this  well-known  town.  Robert  had  also  a  couple  of  Ameri-  15 
can  friends  who  were  studying  at  the  university  and  under 
their  guidance  our  (the)  party  visited  the  ruins  of  the 
castle  by  daylight  and  by  moonlight,  and  they  no  longer 
wondered  why  Germany  is  so  proud  of  the  splendid  old 
building  which  is  as  rich  in  historical  associations  as  in  20 
architectural  beauty.  It  was  hard  to  tear  themselves 
away  from  this  beautiful  place  and  from  the  merry  student 
life  which  one  sees  so  much  better  in  a  smaller  town.  But 
on  the  thirteenth  of  August  they  had  to  leave,  for  they 
wanted  to  see  at  least  one  big  German  watering-place  and  25 
had  decided  to  spend  the  last  night  of  their  journey  at 
Baden-Baden.  They  found  the  place  very  interesting 
with  its  big  hotels  and  its  swarm  of  people  from  every 
country  in  Europe,  but  what  pleased  them  most  was  that 
they  had  the  good  luck  to  see  the  famous  Count  Zeppelin  30 
make  an  ascent  in  his  great  air  ship.  From  Baden-Baden 
they  went  directly  through  to  Titisee  by  way  of  Freiburg 
1  Compare  note,  page  96. 


98  A   SUMMER   IN   GERMANY 

and  all  looked  forward  with  pleasure  to  a  few  quiet  weeks 
in  the  country  after  their  interesting  but  rather  fatiguing 
trip. 

c)  The  life  at  the  lake  pleased  the  whole  party  very  much. 

S  Their  rooms  were  very  comfortable  and  had  a  lovely  view 
over  the  lake  to  the  Feldberg,  the  highest  mountain  in  the 
Black  Forest;  they  took  all  their  meals  out  of  doors  on  a 
beautiful  terrace  above  the  water  under  the  shade  of  great 
trees,  which  kept  them  cool  even  on  the  hottest  days. 

lo  But  to  the  young  Americans,  who  were  accustomed  to  a 
much  warmer  chmate  at  home,  all  the  days  seemed  cool, 
and  they  soon  began  to  take  long  walks  in  the  forest  or 
to  make  excursions  on  foot  or  by  carriage  in  the  neighbor- 
hood.   After  they  had  spent  three  weeks  very  pleasantly 

15  in  this  lovely  region,  they  took  a  most  interesting  and 
dehghtful  pedestrian  tour  through  some  of  the  wilder  and 
less-known  parts  of  the  Black  Forest  and  climbed  the 
Feldberg.  From  the  top  of  this  mountain  they  saw  in  the 
distance  the  snowy  mountains  of  Switzerland  and  they 

20  would  have  liked  very  much  to  continue  their  journey  to 
the  south  and  to  see  that  wonderful  country  of  which  they 
had  heard  so  much.  But  it  was  now  the  middle  of  Septem- 
ber, Professor  Mliller  had  to  return  to  Berlin  for  the 
opening  of  school  and  the  time  had  come  for  the  Walters 

25  to  leave  the  country  that  they  had  grown  so  fond  of.  In 
Frankfort  they  parted  from  their  new  friends^  and  while 
the  Mtillers  turned  westward  to  visit  some  relations  in 
Mayence,  the  Walters  traveled  all  night  in  a  sleeping-car 
and  the  next  day  embarked  again  at  Hamburg  on  one  of 

30  the  huge  steamers  of  the  Hamburg-American  Line. 


VI.    Abstract  of  German  Grammar 

(References  are  to  sections,  not  to  pages.) 

1.  Capitals.  The  German  uses  capital  initial  letters,  like  the 
English,  at  the  beginning  of  sentences,  of  lines  of  poetry  and  of 
direct  quotations;  also  for  all  nouns  and  words  used  as  nouns,  and 
for  pronouns  of  the  third  person  when  used  in  address  with  the 
value  of  those  of  the  second  person,  but  not  for  adjectives  of  nation- 
ality: thus,  hit  bcutfc^c  (Sprad^c,  the  German  langitage;  fie  ift  franjdfifd^; 
etn  cngltfd^e^  SBud^;  but  er  fprtd^t  (Snglifd^  unb  Ucft  ^cutfd^.  Compare 
also  6,  II. 

2.  Punctuation  and  Division  into  Syllables.  I.  The  one  impor- 
tant difference  between  Enghsh  and  German  punctuation  is,  that 
in  German  every  dependent  clause  must  be  separated  by  commas 
from  the  principal  sentence. 

II.  At  the  end  of  a  line,  division  into  syllables  is  indicated  by  a 
double  hyphen. 

o)  A  single  consonant  goes  with  the  following  vowel:  QC*bcn» 

6)  Of  two  or  more  consonants  the  last  goes  with  the  following 
vowel:  SlHcr,  ftn=Qen.  But  ^,  pl^,  fd^,  ft  and  6  are  not  separated: 
beut=fc§e^,  tna=(^cn;  d  becomes  M:  be0lllf*fen. 

c)  Compounds  keep  their  parts  intact:  !5)orf=arat,  l^cr^cin, 

3.  Gender  and  Case.  There  are  in  German  three  genders,  muscu- 
line,  feminine  and  neuter.  There  are  four  Pn5',p=^ :  t  lu^  nominative  is  the 
case  of  the  subject,  the  genitive  corresponds  in  general  to  the  Eng- 
lish possessive  with  of,  the  dative  is  the  case  of  the  indirect  object, 
the  accusative  of  the  direct  object. 


100 


ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


S   S   S   S  I  fjnBium  seq  laAajsi 

o    t>    o    t>  I  -^^  Si^TJAviu  jaMOA  raa^g 

f  -epjOM  (^sora 

o    o    §    «u  I  ni  po'^nBiran  pAioA  ina-^g 

II  I    I         -poijnBiuin  A19J « ^lao 


W 

j> 

J> 

rAj 

H 

</j 

n 

ca 

1 

OQ 

2 

a 

H 

M 

> 

IS 

> 

r/j 

s 

"< 

o 

a> 

Q 

W 

§ 

H-4 

1 

g 

a> 

r^ 

•-3 

O 

< 

>      55 


S    ?? 


C    PS 


o     o 


55  o.sg ::  s-g  ..5pMM- 


»II  dllOHO 


>2n 


^^ « « ^  s  o  i^ 


i.|^.§,S:«fiJS 


8i  daoHo 


CQ      i-s         . 


•♦H    f-ihH  d    tJ    o   00   fl 


<5 


«  o  «>    5 

JQ  J=t  JQ    J=> 

ja  j=i  ja  -^ 

%  *2  §  S 

JO  Jd  .o   .^ 


JO  .o  >«  -« 


^dQ<i     ^OP^ 


Hv^noNis     avHiiid 


GERMAN   DECLENSIONAL  ENDINGS 


101 


ft 


o  .5   g   o 


^-^ 


H 


.  _-  -  v  ^  ^  §  .9  :s  73 


■  S  .5  ^   9  5 


a  a 


M     03 
3    <« 


S  «  S 


W) 


§  i  §  ° 

«    §    i    n 


S  o 


CO    <n  a> 

""  ^  -43 

O)     O  o 

+a  73  -2? 

_     0)  T3 

d     IM)  03 

CI  fl  « 

<u  o  e 

O  tH  s 


_d 

2 

3 

E 

C3 

bO 

13 

! 
§ 

'B 

d 

a> 

a 

^ 

d 

<D 

g 

1 

I 

^  ^  !  a  .9  ^  -9  a  >.  I  a  ^  o 


•sri-S^  l-JQ^^  l^^l^-j 


^  d  p  ^  ^  W 


3  :d  ^  «*H  M 

'  S  d  3   o  d 

d  5  "^  d  f^ 

g  ^  §  a  i 

o  «  o  §  j9 

^  "«  b!^  1 

<  ^^^^ 


d  5j  ?i 

o  p  g 

2  T3  «? 

a  d  « 

d  „  -5 

S  d  «* 

^  ^  s 


S^ 


s 


102  ABSTEACT  OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

5.  Adjectives.     I.  The  adjective  is  declined  only  when  used  at- 
tributively or  substantively;  it  remains  uninflected  when  used  as 
predicate,  in  apposition  or  as  adverb. 
-    For  th3  declen-sion.of  adjectives,  see  4,  sets  II,  III  and  IV. 

o)  Indeclinable  adjecti';fee  are  made  from  the  names  of  towns  by  adding  er: 
tbiw,  *>ai  JSerlCncr  geOen,  Berli?^^  life. 

h)  Adiectif ea  ATe  often  made  from  names  of  persons  by  adding  the  ending  'fci^; 
these  adjectives  are  declined  like  any  others:  thus,  bie  ©octl^'fd^n  ©cbld^te. 

c)  Adjectives  of  nationality,  when  used  to  denote  language,  are  decHned  only 
when  preceded  by  the  article:  bic  IDcutfd&cn  f predict!  !Dcutfd^;  tolc  fafit  man  ba«  ouf 
gronjflfifd^,  how  do  you  say  that  in  French?;  ba9  !Dcwtfc&e  ift  bcm  (SngUfd&cn  Derhxmbt, 
German  is  related  to  English. 

II.  a)  An  adjective  is  often  used  as  a  substantive,  either  with  or 
or  without  an  article  or  other  determining  word.  It  is  then  written 
with  a  capital  letter,  but  retains  its  adjective  inflection:  thus,  bcr 
©utc,  the  good  man;  ba6  ©d^one,  the  beautiful^  what  is  beautiful;  hit 
iJrcmbcn,  the  strangers  or  foreigners. 

b)  After  ettDa^,  toa^,  m$t^,  also  t)tel  and  mcnig  when  undeclined,  an 
adjective  is  treated  as  a  substantive  in  apposition;  it  is  therefore  of 
the  first  declension  and  written  with  a  capital  initial:  thus,  eth)ag 
©utc^,  something  good;  nid^t^  S^cuc^,  nothing  new;  but  allt^  ©d^onc, 
everything  beautiful. 

III.  Any  adjective  may  be  used  in  its  uninflected  form  as  an  ad- 
verb. 

IV.  a)  The  comparative  and  superlative  of  adjectives  are  formed, 
as  in  English,  by  adding  cr  and  eft  (sometimes  shortened  to  r  and 
ft).  They  are  declined  like  any  other  adjectives,  but  some  of  the 
commoner  monosyllabic  adjectives  modify  the  vowel  in  the  com- 
parative and  superlative:  bic  {itngerc,  the  younger  girl;  ha^  3nteref* 
fantcftc,  the  most  interesting  thing  or  things. 

b)  The  comparative  is  freely  used  in  its  uninflected  form  as  predi- 
cate and  as  adverb;  but  not  the  superlative;  for  this,  as  predicate,  is 
substituted  an  adverbial  phrase  with  ant,  at  the:  thus,  bic  Xa^t  finb 
ftirgcr  im  §crbftc  unb  am  filrgcftcn  im  SBinter,  the  days  are  shorter  in 
autumn,  and  shortest  in  winter.  The  superlative  with  aufg  (auf  ba^) 
expresses  an  absolute  superiority;  with  am  it  expresses  superiority 
in  comparison  to  other  persons  or  things:  thus,  al(c  ^inbcr  Jobcn  il^rc 
Slufgabc  auf«  beftc  gclcmt,  aber  SO^aria  fann  ftc  tDirflid^  am  bcftcn,  all  the 
children  have  learned  their  lesson  very  well  (most  excellently),  but  Mary 
really  knows  it  best 


NUMERALS  103 

6.  Numerals.  I.  The  Cardinal  numerals  are  as  follows: 

1.  em(6)  11,  clf  21.  cm  unb  gtoangtg 

2.  grt)ci  12.  ghjolf  22.  gtDei  unb  aioangig 

3.  brci  13.  breiscl^n  30.  breifeig 

4.  t)ier  14.  \>kvitf)n  40.  bicrgig 

5.  fttnf  15.  filnfge^n  50.  filnfjig 

6.  Mg  16.  fcd^gc^n  60.  fcd^jtg 

7.  ftcben  17.  ficbgcfjn  70.  ftebsig 

8.  ad^t  18.  a^t^t^n  80.  ad^tgig 

9.  ncun  19.  ncungel^n  90.  ncungtg 
10.  gcl^n  20.  gnjatiiig  100.  {)unbcrt 

1000.  taufenb  1,000,000.  eine  9«lttion 

a)  The  other  numbers,  between  twenty  and  one  hundred,  are 
formed  always  by  prefixing  the  name  of  the  unit  to  that  of  the  ten, 
with  unb,  and,  interposed:  thus,  brci  unb  jtoangig. 

b)  The  higher  numbers,  l^unbcrt,  taufenb,  million,  are  multiplied  by 
prefixed  numbers,  as  in  EngUsh:  thus,  fcd^S  Ijunbcrt,  600;  bret  unb 
ad^tgig  taufenb,  83,000.  The  German  says  eine  9Jitllton,  a  million,  as 
we  do,  but  simply  l^unbert,  a  hundred,  taufenb,  a  thousand, 

c)  @in,  one,  is  fully  inflected  [see  4:  when  used  attributively,  set 
IV;  after  an  article,  set  III;  as  pronoun,  set  V].  It  is  uninflected 
in  the  compound  numbers,  ein  unb  gtt)angig,  etc. 

d)  ^eibe  is  often  used  for  two:  thus,  ntcinc  beiben  ^riiber,  my  two 
brothers. 

II.  a)  After  a  numeral,  a  noun  expressing  measurement  (unless 
it  be  a  feminine  noun  in  e)  usually  has  the  singular  form:  thus,  ac^t 
gujj  lang,  eight  feet  long;  gel)n  taufenb  Mann  ftarf,  10,000  men  strong; 
gmangig  Tlaxt,  twenty  marks;  but  fiinf  SO^eilen  iDeit,  five  miles  distant. 

b)  The  following  noun,  expressing  the  thing  measured,  is  usually 
left  unvaried:  thus,  gel^n  gafe  ^ier,  ten  casks  of  beer;  glDet  ^funb  2^ee, 
two  pounds  of  tea;  brei  SO^cter  ^uc^,  three  yards  of  cloth;  ein  paar  2^age, 
a  couple  of  days. 

c)  The  same  rules  are  followed  after  indefinite  numerals:  thus, 
cinige  gufe,  some  feet;  tt)k  t)iel  "iPfunb,  how  many  pounds? 

d)  The  time  of  day  is  expressed  by  Ul^r,  hour,  which  is  not  varied: 
thus,  ein  Uf)r,  one  o'clock;  gef)n  Ul^r,  ten  o'clock.  For  the  half-hour, 
5alb,  half,  is  prefixed  to  the  next  higher  number:  thus,  t)alb  fed^^,  half 
past  five.    The  quarters  are  generally  counted  with  auf,  toward,  and 


104 


ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


the  following  hour:  thus,  cin  S5icrtcl  auf  brci,  quarter  past  tw;  bret  5Sicr* 
tel  auf  ficben,  quarter  before  seven. 

III.  a)  The  Ordinal  numerals  are  adjectives  formed  from  the 
cardinals  by  the  suffixes  t  and  ft,  from  the  numbers  2-19  by  adding 
t,  from  the  higher  numbers  by  adding  ft;  they  are  declined  like 
other  adjectives:  bcr  gmeite,  ba^  fcd^gefintc,  bcr  sh)ansi9fte,  blc  l^unbertfte, 
bcr  glDct  unb  gmansigftc, 

b)  But  the  ordinal  of  etn  is  crft,  brct  forms  irregularly  britt,  and 
ad)t,  ad^t  (not  ad^tt). 

c)  In  enumeration  the  German  says:  crftcn^,  first;  giDcitcn^,  second; 
brittcnS,  etc. 

d)  The  name  of  a  month  is  unvaried  after  an  ordinal:  ben  ncuntcn 
^ai,  the  ninth  of  May. 


7.  Personal  Pronouns. 

I.        FIRST  PERSON 

Singular        Plural 


THIRD   PERSON 

Singular 

MASC.  PEM. 


N.  cr  fie  c3 

G.  fcincr,  fein  il^rci:  feincr,  fcin 

D.  ii)m  i\)x  if)m 

A.  if)n  fie  c« 

Plural 

M.  F.  N. 

N.  fie 

G.  il^rcr 

D.  i^nen 

A.  fie 

II.  Reflexive  Pronouns.  The  dative  and  accusative  forms  of 
the  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  are  also  used  reflex- 
ively.  For  the  third  person  ftd^  is  used  reflexively  for  all  numbers, 
persons  and  cases. 

III.  a)  In  ordinary  address,  either  to  one  person  or  to  more  than 
one,  the  pronoun  of  the  third  person  plural,  ^k,  etc.,  is  used,  cor- 
responding to  our  you;  all  its  forms  are  then  written  with  a  capital, 
except  its  reflexive  fid^.  The  verb  agrees  with  it  in  the  third  person 
plural. 


N. 

td^                      iDtr 

G. 

tncincr,  tnein       unfer 

D. 

tnir                    unS 

A. 

mid^                   un« 

• 

SECOND  PERSON 

N: 

,  bu                     iftr 

G. 

beincr,  bcin         euer 

D. 

btr                     ewd& 

A. 

bid&                     tVLiS) 

POSSESSIVES  105 

6)  3)u  (and  its  plural  IJr)  is  used  only  in  the  language  of  famili- 
arity, of  poetry  and  of  worship. 

IV.  The  pronoun  of  the  third  person  singular  generally  takes 
the  gender  of  the  noun  to  which  it  relates.  But  it  is  seldom  used 
in  the  genitive  and  dative  for  things  without  Hfe;  for  it  is  usually 
substituted  a  demonstrative,  bcr  or  bcrfclbc,  or,  if  governed  by  a 
preposition  (in  dat.  or  accus.),  a  combination  of  ha,  there,  (before  a 
vowel  bar)  with  the  preposition :  thus,  bomit,  uyith  it  or  them  or  that; 
bafilr,  for  it  or  them  (literally,  therewith,  therefore) ;  barum,  for  it,  that; 
gcftcrn  Icgtc  i^  tneine  ^xilk  auf  ben  Xi\<i),  aber  I)eutc  lag  fie  nld^t  mef)r 
barauf. 

V.  a)  The  neuter  c^,  it,  is  used  as  the  indefinite  and  impersonal 
subject  of  a  verb,  answering  to  English  it  or  there.  Often  it  serves 
merely  to  change  the  position  of  the  subject.  The  verb  then  agrees 
in  number  with  the  following  noun  (predicate  or  logical  subject): 
thus,  e6  finb  gu  Dtele  ge()(er  barin. 

b)  @g  is  also  indefinite  predicate  or  object,  to  be  rendered  by  so 
and  the  like:  thus,  Qcn)of)nUci&  ift  fie  fleifelg,  aber  ()eute  njar  fie  e§  nid^t. 
Instead  of  it  is  I,  and  so  on,  the  German  says  /  am  it,  i^  bin  c^, 

8.  Possessives.  I.  a)  Possessive  Adjectives  are  tnein,  my; 
bein,  thy;  fcin,  his,  its;  U)X,  her;  unfer,  our;  cuer,  yourf  l()r,  their  (3][)r, 
your)  [for  declension,  see  4,  set  Vj. 

b)  Instead  of  the  possessive  adjective  the  German  often  uses  the 
definite  article,  sometimes  adding  a  dative  of  the  personal  pronoun: 
id^  l^atte  tnir  ben  3lrnt  gebrod^en,  /  had  broken  my  arm. 

c)  The  genitive  of  a  demonstrative  pronoun  is  sometimes  used 
instead  of  a  possessive  adjective  to  prevent  confusion  or  uncer- 
tainty: Ic^  mar  mit  §erm  iBraun,  feinent  ^ruber  n^ib  beffen  (Bol^n,  /  was 
with  Mr.  Brown,  his  brother  and  his  (the  latter^ s)  son, 

II.  a)  Possessive  Pronouns  are  formed  by  prefixing  the  definite 
article  to  the  possessive  adjective  or  to  a  derivative  form  in  ig 
[for  declension,  see  4,  set  III] :  thus,  feln  35ater  toav  Slrgt,  ber  3][)rigc 
or  ber  S^xc  ift  ^farrer. 

b)  The  possessive  is  not  used  in  its  uninflected  form  as  predi- 
cate. Where  we  say  the  book  is  mine,  the  German  says  ba^  ift  mein 
©ud^,  ba^  53ud^  fic()ort  ntir,  ba«  ift  bag  iO^einige  or  ba^  9)?ctnc, 

c)  The  possessives  are  sometimes  used  absolutely  to  denote  what 


106      ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

belongs  to  one:  ba^  SD^etnc,  my  possessions  or  what  lies  in  my  power; 
bit  ©eintQcn,  those  who  belong  to  him,  his  family, 

d)  For  a  friend  of  mine  the  Germans  say  ntetn  Jreunb,  ein  grcunb 
Don  tnir  or  einer  ntciner  grcunbc, 

9.  Demonstratives.  The  demonstratives  are  bcr  [for  declension, 
see  4,  set  I,  note  1],  biefer,  this  or  that,  jencr,  yon,  that  [for  declension, 
see  4,  set  II].    They  are  used  both  adjectively  and  substantively. 

I.  a)  liefer  is  the  demonstrative  most  commonly  used  in  German, 
jcncr  being  used  only  when  the  difference  between  this  and  that  is  to 
be  emphasized. 

h)  liefer  sometimes  means  the  latter  and  jcncr,  the  former, 

II.  a)  In  familiar  speech  bcr  often  takes  the  place  of  the  pronoun 
of  the  third  person  used  emphatically:  ben  fcnnc  ic^  nic^t,  /  donH  know 
him, 

h)  The  neut.  sing,  ba^  and  bic^  are  often  used  as  indefinite  sub- 
jects of  verbs,  meaning  this,  these,  that,  those;  the  verb  then  agrees 
in  number  with  the  following  predicate  noun:  thus,  ha^  finb  ntcine 
53riibcr,  those  are  my  brothers, 

c)  German  usage  does  not  allow  such  phrases  as,  he  has  my  ticket 
and  my  brother^ s.  The  noun  previously  used  must  always  be  repeated 
by  a  demonstrative  pronoun:  cr  l^ot  mcinc  gal^rfartc  unb  bicjcnigc  met* 
nc«  53rubcr«. 

III.  a)  2)crj[cn{gc,  that  one,  the  one,  and  bcrfelbc,  the  same  {one),  are 
also  demonstrative  pronouns  [for  declension,  see  4,  bcr,  set  I,  *fclbc 
and  ^ientge,  set  III]. 

b)  3)cr,  bcricntgc  and  bcrfclbc  are  often  used  as  antecedents  to  a 
relative,  where  we  use  a  personal  pronoun  or  the  one:  totX^t^  ^otel 
tncincn  (Sic:  ba^icnigc,  n)cld^c^  gcrabc  bet  bcr  33ur9  ftcf)t,  ober  ba^  neuc  l^in* 
tcr  bcrfclbcn,  which  hotel  do  you  mean:  the  one  which  is  close  to  the 
castle  or  the  new  one  behind  it? 

For  demonstratives  used  as  possessive  adjectives,  see  8,  Ic;  used 
in  composition  with  prepositions,  see  7,  IV. 

10.  Interrogatives.  I.  The  interrogatives  are  iDcr,  who;  tva^, 
what,  and  tDcId^er  [for  declension,  see  4,  set  II],  what,  which.  All  the 
interrogatives  are  also  used  as  relatives. 

a)  SBcr  and  n)a^  have  no  plural.  The  one  denotes  persons,  the 
other  things.    They  are  declined  as  follows: 


RELATIVES 

N. 

JDcr 

teas 

G. 

iDeffcn 

h)cffcn 

D. 

n)cnt 

A. 

h)cn 

h)a« 

107 


6)  For  the  dative  and  accusative  of  luaS  as  governed  by  preposi- 
tions, are  sometimes  substituted  compounds  with  too,  where:  thus, 
tootnit,  wherewith,  with  what;  toofilr,  wherefore,  for  what;  iDOgu  btcnt 
btcfcr  Xvixm,  what  is  the  v>se  of  this  tower,  hterally  what  does  this  tower 
serve  as  or  forf 

c)  As  an  adjective  qualifying  a  noun  expressed,  toeld^cr  means 
either  what  or  which;  used  absolutely,  it  is  our  which:  thus,  toelc^cS 
^ud),  what  or  which  hookf;  toeld^cS  bon  biefen  ^ild^em,  zi;/iicA  o/  these 
books? 

d)  SBcId^c  is  sometimes  familiarly  used  to  signify  some:  toollen  <©ic 
no(i&  ciniQC  firfd^en?   !Dan!c,  ic^  l^abc  nod^  toeld^e* 

II.  S33a8,  with  the  preposition  ftir  after  it,  is  used  in  the  sense  of 
what  kind  of?  It  is  then  invariable,  and  the  words  to  which  it  is 
prefixed  have  the  same  construction  as  if  they  stood  alone:  thus, 
toa^  filr  ^rot,  what  kind  of  bread?;  mit  toaS  filr  ctncr  gcber  fd^rcibcn  ©ic? 

11.  Relatives.  I.  The  demonstrative  bcr  and  the  interrogatives 
tocr,  tt)a^,  toaS  fiir  and  todd^tv  are  also  used  as  relatives. 

a)  ^cr  and  totld)tt  are  the  ordinary  relatives  following  an  ante- 
cedent. In  the  nominative  and  accusative  they  are  used  inter- 
changeably. In  the  dative  (except  after  prepositions)  the  cases  of 
ber  are  preferred;  and  in  the  genitive  only  bcffcn  and  bercn  are  ever 
met  with:  ber  ^naht,  bcffen  58ater  geftorbcn  ift;  bk  2tf)Xtxin,  beren  Untcr* 
rid^t  id)  bcfuc^c. 

II.  a)  SBer,  toaS  and  toa^  filr,  and  toeld^cr  used  adjectively,  are 
properly  compound  relatives,  or  antecedent  and  relative  combined: 
toer  reid^  ift,  ift  nid^t  immer  gliidflid^,  he  who  is  rich,  is  not  always 
happy;  id)  toeig  nid^t,  t)on  tocld^cm  ^ud)  <Bk  fprcd^cn. 

6)  Wit  and  too  are  also  sometimes  used  like  relatives,  also  aU  after 
expressions  of  time:  hit  Slrt,  toic  fie  e^  erfldrt,  the  way  {in  which)  she 
explains  it;  ba6  le^te  9}2al,  al«  id)  fie  fal^. 

c)  After  an  indefinite  neuter  antecedent  or  a  clause,  toa§  is  used 
instead  of  ha^  or  toeld^c^:  baS  @rfte,  toa^  fie  ^oxttn;  leiber  fonnte  id)  md)t 
alle«  t)erfte]^en,  toa^  mid)  fel^r  itrgerte. 


108      ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

d)  SScr  and  toa^  may  have  the  meaning  whoever,  whatever,  but 
more  often  they  are  followed  by  Xotxm,  avi6)  or  immer  and  often  by 
the  subjunctive  to  make  this  indefinite  sense  clearer:  glaubcn  ©tc 
ijm  ntc|t,  hjaS  cr  Qud^  fagc,  do  not  believe  him,  whatever  he  may  say;  cr 
bcl^anbelt  fcinc  ©driller  gleic^  gut,  tocr  fie  aud&  feicn,  he  treats  his  pupils 
equally  well,  whoever  they  may  he, 

III.  Instead  of  a  relative  governed  by  a  preposition,  a  compound 
of  the  preposition  with  tt)o  is  generally  used  when  things  and  not  per- 
sons are  referred  to.  With  prepositions  governing  the  genitive  h^eS- 
is  used:  bic  Slncfbotc,  h)orubcr  toir  etncn  Sluffaij  fd^rcibcn  follcn;  ftc  njar 
fronf,  tt)t^\)alh  ftc  gu  §aufc  bictbcn  mugtc, 

IV.  The  relative  is  never  omitted  in  German:  thus,  bic  fjreunbc, 
bic  id)  Hebe,  the  friends  I  love. 

13.  Indefinite  Pronouns.  I.  SD^an  is  used  as  indefinite  subject 
of  a  verb  (Hke  the  French  ^on',  or  our  one,  they) :  thus,  man  fagt,  they 
say,  it  is  said.  If  any  case  but  a  nominative  is  required,  einer  is 
used  instead:  cS  mad^t  etnem  immer  greube,  einen  alten  greunb  gu  fel)en, 
it  is  always  a  pleasure  (for  any  one)  to  see  an  old  friend. 

II.  3>emanb,  some  one,  niemonb,  no  one,  are  usually  declined  (in 
the  singular  only)  as  nouns  of  the  first  declension.  3eber,  each,  every, 
has  full  adjective  inflection  and  may  be  preceded  by  ein;  {cbermann, 
every  one,  has  only  the  genitive  {ebermann^. 

III.  @tn)a«,  something,  and  ntd^tS,  nothing,  are  indeclinable  sub- 
stantives. A  following  adjective  or  (with  tfma^)  noun  is  in  apposi- 
tion: ctlDag  ®elb,  some  money,  nt(^t^  SBal^rcg,  nothing  trv£. 

IV.  9D?and^,  many  a,  many;  fold^,  such,  and  oil,  all,  before  other 
limiting  words,  are  often  undeclined:  foI(5  ein  2)?ann  or  ein  foI($er 
Tlann,  such  a  man;  all  ha^  ®utc  or  alleg  @ute,  h)a6  er  mir  getan  l)at. 

V.  3SieI,  mv^h,  and  iDcnig,  little,  are  also  undeclined,  except  after 
another  limiting  word;  also  ein  tDtniQ,  a  little.  Tlti)X,  more,  and 
it)entfier,  less,  are  nearly  always  unvaried:  cr  \)attt  tDcnifl  SBrot,  ahtx  ha^ 
SEScntfic,  h)a«  cr  l^attc,  Qah  er  un«. 

VI.  The  adverb  trgcnb  is  often  added  to  give  still  greater  in- 
definiteness:  irgcnb  icmanb  toirb  gu  ^aufc  fcin,  soms  one  or  other  wiU 


CONJUGATION   OF   VERBS  109 

be  at  home;  gcbcn  ©ic  mix  irgcnb  cin  55u(^,  give  me  any  hook  (whatso- 
ever) ;  f ommcn  <Bk  gu  irgenb  toeld^er  3^it,  bie  3 Jnen  pagt,  come  at  whair 
ever  tims  suits  you. 

VERBS 

13.  Conjugation  of  Verbs.  I.  The  German  verb  system  corre- 
sponds very  closely  to  the  English.  There  are  in  German,  as  in 
English,  two  conjugations:  the  Old  or  Strong  and  the  New  or  Weak 
conjugation.  Each  conjugation  has,  as  in  English,  only  two  simple 
tenses  (present  and  preterit),  an  imperative,  an  infinitive  and  two 
participles;  all  the  other  forms  are  made  with  the  help  of  auxiliar- 
ies. The  German  has,  however,  a  subjimctive  tense  corresponding 
to  every  tense  of  the  indicative. 

II.  The  Principal  Parts,  from  which  all  the  other  forms  may 
be  made,  are:  the  Infinitive,  the  First  Person  Singular  of  the 
Preterit  Indicative  (sometimes  called  the  imperfect  or  the  simple 
past)  and  the  Past  Participle. 

From  the  infinitive  are  made  the  present  participle  (by  adding  b) 
and  the  present  and  imperative  (by  dropping  the  en  or  n  of  the  in- 
finitive ending  and  adding  the  tense  endings;  see  14).  From  the 
preterit  are  made  the  other  forms  of  the  preterits.  From  the  past 
participle  are  made,  with  the  help  of  an  auxiliary,  all  the  compoimd 
forms  of  the  verb. 

III.  a)  The  Old  or  Strong  Verbs  form  their  preterit  by  chang- 
ing the  stem  vowel  and  the  past  participle  by  adding  en  with  or 
without  change  of  vowel  and  prefixing  ge:  fingen,  fang,  gcfungen,  sing^ 
sang,  sung;  gcben,  o^ahf  ficgeben,  give,  gave,  given. 

h)  The  New  or  Weak  Verbs  form  the  preterit  by  adding  te  to 
the  stem  of  the  verb,  and  the  past  participle  by  adding  t  and  prefix- 
ing 0c:  licbcn,  licbtc,  gcUebt,  love,  loved,  loved. 

c)  All  past  participles  begin  with  gc,  except  those  of  verbs  com- 
pounded with  inseparable  prefixes  (see  16,  III,  IV)  and  foreign  de- 
rivatives in  icrcn;  amuse,  amii*fieren,  amiifiertc,  amiificrt. 


110  ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

14.   I.  Tense  Endings.^ 

Old  Verbs  New  Verbs  Old  Verbs  New  Verbs 

INDICATIVE  present'  SUBJUNCTIVE  PRESENT 


e 

c* 

ft 

eft 

1? 

e 

en 

en 

t 

et 

en 

en 

PRETERIT 

— 

tc 

-c« 

tc« 

ft 

tcft 

-eft 

left 

— 

te 

-e 

te 

en 

ten 

-en 

ten 

t 

id 

-et 

tet 

en 

ten 

-en 

ten 

IMPERATIVliJ 

2d  sing. 

c^ 

2d  plur. 

t 

*  For  purposes  of  clearness  and  of  euphony  verbs  with  stems  ending  in  t  or 
b  take  an  e  before  the  t  of  all  tense  endings;  those  with  stems  in  f  or  g  take  e  be- 
fore f:  rcben,  er  rebctc;  fttrd&tcn,  cr  fUrd^tctc;  tonjcn,  hu  tonacft. 

'  The  present  of  all  verbs  has  these  endings,  except  that  the  modal  auxiliaries 
and  toiffen  (toeife)  have  present  singular  like  preterit  of  Old  conjugation  and  fcin 
has  irregularly  bin,  blft,  ift,  finb,  fctb,  finb. 

»  In  3d  sing.  pres.  ^abm  has  f)at;  tocrbcn,  tolrb.  Verbs  of  Old  conjugation  mod- 
ify stem  a  in  2d  or  3d  sing,  and  generally  change  stem  e  to  le  or  I;  see  table  of 
irreg.  verbs. 

*  fcln  has  irregularly  fcl,  felft,  fcl,  fcicn,  fctct,  fcicn;  all  other  verbs  have  these 
endings. 

'  Old  verbs  add  these  endings  to  preterit  indie,  and  modify  the  stem  vowel  if 
possible. 

8  ^Qben,  bUrfen,  fdnnen,  mdecn,  tnttffcn  and  tolffcn  modify  stem  vowel  in  this 
tense;  indie,  battc,  burftc,  etc.;  subj.  tyitU,  bUrftc,  etc. 

'  A  few  Old  verbs  have  irreg.  imperative  in  2d  sing.,  see  table  of  irreg.  verbs. 
Missing  forms  of  the  imperative  are  supplied  from  pres.  subjunctive  or  by  phrases 
with  loffen:  gcben  (©ic;  fcien  toir  nid&t  ungerec^t;  lafet  un8  Qt^etw 

II.  Formation  of  Compound  Tenses. 

Judicative        Perfect,  present  of  l^aben  or  fetn  and  ppl.  of  verb 
cr  i)ai  0eliebt,  er  ift  gegangcn 


PASSIVE   VOICE  111 

Pluperfect,  preterit  of  l^abcn  or  fcin  and  ppl.  of  verb 
er  l^attc  gelicbt,  cr  toax  fiegattficn 

Future,  present  of  tocrben  and  infinitive  of  verb 
cr  H)irb  liebcn,  er  mirb  gel^cn 

Future  Perfect,  present  of  tDcrbcn  and  perfect  infini- 
tive of  verb 
cr  iDirb  ficliebt  l^abcn,  er  \mh  Qegangen  fcin 

Conditional      Present,  imperfect  subjunctive  of  iDcrbcn  and  infini- 
tive of  verb 
cr  toilrbe  lieben,  er  h)llrbe  ge^en 

Imperfect,   imperfect   subjunctive   of   h)erben   and 
perfect  infinitive  of  verb 
cr  iDiirbe  gelicbt  i)ahcn,  er  Mrbc  QCflanQcn  fcin 

Compound  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  are  formed  like  those  of  the 
indicative,  except  that  the  subjunctive  tenses  of  the  auxiliary  verbs 
are  used :  thus,  Perfect,  er  \)aht  geltebt,  er  fei  fiefiangen,  etc. 

III.  AuxiLiAKiES.  Most  verbs,  including  all  transitives,  reflexives 
and  impersonals,  take  f)aben  as  auxiliary;  fein  is  used  as  auxiliary  by 
fein,  tDcrben,  bleiben  and  intransitive  verbs  of  motion. 

15.  Passive  Voice.  I.  a)  The  passive  conjugation  is  made  with 
the  auxihary  iDcrben.  To  make  any  given  mode,  tense  and  person 
of  the  passive  of  a  verb,  add  its  past  participle  to  the  corresponding 
form  of  toerben. 

b)  The  participle  of  tDcrben  as  passive  auxiliary  is  toorben,  instead 
of  getDorben.  The  participle  of  the  main  verb  is  put  after  the  personal 
verb-forms  of  the  auxiliary,  but  before  its  infinitive  and  participle: 
thus,  indie,  er  h3irb  geltebt,  er  tDurbe  geltebt,  er  tft  geliebt  tnothtn,  er  tvax 
fieliebt  h)orben,  er  toirb  Qcliebt  toerben,  er  h)trb  geliebt  morben  fein;  subj.  er 
JDcrbe  fieltebt,  etc. 

c)  After  a  passive  the  agent  is  expressed  by  l)on;  sometimes,  if  a 
non-personal  instrument  or  means,  by  burd^. 

d)  The  verb  fein  is  also  often  used  with  the  past  participle  of  a 
verb,  but  indicates  the  result  of  the  action,  not  the  action  itself. 
A  passive  with  toerben  shows  the  action  as  going  on  at  the  time 
denoted  by  the  tense  of  the  verb;  with  fcin  it  shows  the  result  of 


112      ABSTRACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

previous  action:  thus,  unferc  §au«tiir  tft  nad&t«  tmmcr  gUQcfd^Ioffcn; 
fie  tDixb  ieben  5lbcnb  urn  neun  Ufir  t)on  bent  ^Dtcncr  ^ugcfc^Ioffen, 

II.  a)  Passives  are  sometimes  made  from  intransitive  verbs, 
especially  an  impersonal  passive:  thus,  cS  tourbc  ficlad^t,  there  was 
laughing;  f)eutc  abcnb  toixb  Qctangt,  i/iere  mill  be  dancing  to-night;  e«  tourbc 
tntr  ficfagt,  /  loas  told  [see  18c]. 

6)  The  passive  is  much  less  common  in  German  than  in  EngUsh; 
for  it  is  often  substituted  a  reflexive,  or  an  active  with  the  indefinite 
subject  man:  thus,  e^  fragt  fid^,  it  is  questioned,  the  question  is;  man 
fagt,  they  say,  it  is  said;  e§  lagt  fic^  bttt)d\tn,  it  can  be  proved. 

16.  Compound  Verbs.  I.  a)  Verbs  are  compounded  with  pre- 
fixes of  two  classes,  separable  and  inseparable. 

6)  The  separable  prefixes  are  used  also  as  independent  words, 
namely  adverbs  and  prepositions,  and  are  but  loosely  combined 
with  the  verb,  being  separated  from  it  in  many  of  its  forms  (as 
usually  in  Enghsh):  thus,  id^  gef)c  au^,  /  go  out.  With  these  the 
verb  is  said  to  be  separably  compounded. 

c)  The  inseparable  prefixes  are  never  found  in  separate  use,  but 
always  stand  before  the  verb  and  are  written  as  one  word  with  it: 
thus,  er  Dergifet  atlc^,  he  forgets  everything. 

II.  a)  The  Separable  Prefix  stands  before  the  verb  in  the  in- 
finitive and  both  participles,  but  after  it  in  all  the  other  simple 
forms.  It  always  has  the  accent.  When  the  prefix  precedes  the 
verb,  they  are  written  as  a  single  word;  when  it  follows,  it  must 
stand  at  the  end  of  the  whole  clause  (see  28,  la):  thus,  anfangcn, 
begin,  i^  fangc  an,  /  begin;  i(5  f  t  n  9  biefen  TloxQtn  fril^  gu  ftubicrcn 
an,/  began  to  study  early  this  morning. 

6)  But  if,  by  the  rules  for  the  arrangement  of  the  sentence,  the 
verb  is  removed  to  the  end,  it  naturally  stands  after  its  prefix  (see 
28,  lie),  and  is  then  written  as  one  word  with  it:  thus,  alS  i(i)  biefen 
9)?  or  gen  friif)  ju  ftubieren  a  n  f  i  n  g  ,  when  I  began  to  study  early  this 
morning. 

c)  The  sign  of  the  past  participle,  ge,  stands  between  the  prefix 
and  the  root;  also  the  sign  of  the  infinitive,  gu,  when  used:  thus,  cd 
Ift  3cit/  angufangcn;  id)  l^abc  fc^on  angefangen. 

III.  The  Inseparable  Prefixes  are  be,  ent  (or  cm^),  er,  ge,  ber 
and  get.  They  remain  in  close  combination  with  the  verb  through 
its  whole  conjugation,  forming  with  it  an  inseparable  combination  in 


MODAL  AUXILIARIES  ;113 

which  the  radical  syllable  receives  the  accent.  The  sign  of  the  in- 
finitive, gu,  is  put  before  the  combination,  as  if  it  were  a  simple 
verb.  The  sign  of  the  participle,  qc,  is  omitted  altogether:  iii)  cmp=' 
fal^I  tl^m  cin  ^ud^,  h)cld^e«  fe()r  leid^t  gu  tocrfte^en  ift  unb  In  toeld^cm  tnein 
grcunb  fcinc  9Jcifcn  bcfd^ricbcn  'i^at 

IV.  Prefixes  Separable  or  Inseparable.  A  few  properly  sepa- 
rable prefixes  sometimes  form  inseparable  compounds:  they  are 
burd),  jointer,  liber,  um,  unter,  tntebcr,  (or  hJiber).  The  separable  com- 
pounds have  the  meanings  of  both  parts  nearly  unchanged,  the  in- 
separable usually  take  an  altered  or  figurative  meaning:  um'gel^en, 
go  about,  umge'ficn,  evade.  Compare  English  set  up,  upset;  run  out, 
outrun. 

17.  Reflexive  Conjugation,  a)  A  verb  is  made  reflexive  simply 
by  adding  the  proper  reflexive  pronoun.  A  reflexive  verb  is  often 
used  for  an  English  intransitive,  sometimes  for  a  passive:  thus,  td^ 
filrd^tc  mid^,  /  am  afraid;  cr  bcfinbet  ftc^  mol^I,  he  is  well;  fie  frcut  fid^, 
she  rejoices,  is  glad.  Compound  tenses:  toir  f)abcn  unS  gefreut;  fie  ft)cr* 
ben  ftc^  freucn,  etc.  [see  7,  II]. 

b)  The  reflexive  pronoun  often  has  a  reciprocal  sense:  thus,  ftc 
Itcbten  fid^,  they  loved  one  another;  h)tr  fd^littelten  unS  bic  ^'dnbt,  we 
shook  hands  {with  each  other). 

c)  A  very  few  verbs  take  a  reflexive  object  in  the  dative:  for  ex- 
ample, id5  f d^mcid^Ic  mir,  /  flatter  myself. 

18.  Impersonal  Verbs,  a)  A  verb  is  used  impersonally  in  the 
3d  person  singular,  with  the  indefinite  subject  e^,  it:  thus,  cS  rcgnct, 
it  rains;  c^  I'dutd,  it  is  ringing,  the  bell  is  ringing;  c^  tut  mtr  tt)t\),  c3 
fd^tncrgt  mid),  it  hurts  me;  e6  Qclang  mtr,  boS  gu  tun,  /  succeeded  in  doing 
that. 

b)  (S8  fitbt,  etc.,  with  following  accusative,  is  equivalent  to  English 
there  is,  there  are:  thus,  c«  Qtbt  btele  ba,  there  are  many  there;  cS  gab 
fcinen  SSein,  there  was  no  urine. 

c)  But  the  impersonal  subject  cS  is  very  often  omitted,  especially 
when  the  object  of  the  verb,  or  an  adjunct  qualifying  it,  comes  to 
stand  before  it:  thus,  il^n  l^unQcrtc,  he  was  hungry;  tr)k  tool^I  ift  mlr^ 
how  well  I  feel,  abcnbS  h)irb  gctangt  unb  gefungcn. 

For  impersonal  passive  phrases,  see  15,  II. 

19.  Modal  Auxiliaries.  I.  a)  There  are  in  German  six  modal 
auxiliaries;  they  have  a  mixed  inflection,  their  present  indicative 


114       ABSTKACT  OF  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 

being  like  a  preterit  of  the  Old  conjugation,  but  the  rest  being  of 
the  New.  They  are  conjugated  in  full,  only  lacking  (except  tooUtn) 
an  imperative. 

b)  Principal  Parts  and  irregular  forms. 

Infinitive 
bftrfcn       fanncn       miJgcn         mttffcn       fottcn         tooKcn 

Indicative  Preterit 
sing.  1  burftc        fonntc        ntoc^tc         mugtc        foHtc  tooKtc 

Past  Participle 
ficburft       gcfonnt       gemod^t        Gctnufet       ficfoB^t        QctooKt 


Indicative  Present 

8tn^.  1  barf 

fann 

ntag 

mug 

foil 

toitt 

2  barfft 

fannft 

tnafift 

ntufet 

fonft 

totttft 

3  barf 

fann 

mag 

mu6 

foa 

njiH 

pZ.  1  bUrfcn 

fdnncn 

miJfien 

mliffen 

foacn 

iooHcn 

2  bilrft 

fonnt 

moQt 

milgt 

font 

moot 

3  biirfcn 

Unntn 

moficn 

tnilffcn 

fottcn 

tooUtn 

Subjunctive  Preterit 

sing.  1  bilrftc 

fanntc 

mfid^tc 

mllfetc 

foKtc 

molltc 

c)  The  compoimd  tenses  of  the  modal  auxiliaries  are  made  like 
those  of  other  verbs,  with  the  important  exception  that  in  the  per- 
fect and  pluperfect  tenses,  when  used  with  the  infinitive  of  another 
verb,  as  is  usually  the  case,  the  infinitive  is  put  in  place  of  the  past 
participle:  thus,  id&  ^aht  c«  ntc^t  gcfonnt,  /  was  not  able  to,  I  could 
not;  but,  i^  i)abt  e«  ntd^t  tun  fonncn,  /  was  not  able  to  or  could  not  do 
so;  cr  l^ftttc  c«  ntd^t  fagcn  foUcn,  he  ou^ht  not  to  have  said  it.  Note  that 
when  the  dependent  infinitive  is  omitted,  its  place  is  suppHed  by  c«. 

d)  Some  other  verbs,  especially  laffen  (also  j^cifecn,  I)elfcn,  prcn, 
fcl^cn),  when  governing  another  infinitive  directly,  make  the  same 
substitution:  thus,  cr  \)at  unS  toartcn  laffen,  he  has  rnode  us  waitj  kept 
v^  waiting. 


MODAL  AtrXILIAEIES 


115 


e)  Order.  The  transposed  personal  verb  (see  28,  lie)  may  not 
be  put  at  the  end  of  a  clause  after  two  or  more  infinitives  of  which 
the  last  has  the  value  of  a  participle,  but  must  stand  instead  next 
before  them:  thus,  tddl  id)  nic^t  i)aht  gcf)en  fonncn,  hecaiLse  I  have  not 
been  able  to  go,  er  fagtc,  bag  i(5  e^  nid^t  I)atte  tun  folTen, 

II.  Use  of  the  Modal  Auxiliakies.  a)  As  the  Enghsh  modals 
corresponding  to  the  German  ones  are  all  defective  verbs  and  have 
only  two  tenses  (must  has  only  one)  a  number  of  verbal  phrases  are 
used  to  supply  the  missing  forms.  This  often  causes  great  confu- 
sion when  translating  into  another  language.  Remember  that  the 
meaning,  not  the  words,  of  the  Enghsh  phrase  is  to  be  rendered  in 
German. 


Meaning 
bllrfcn,  permission,  right 


fonticn  (1)  abiUty 

(2)  possibility 

mogcn  (1)  desire,  choice 
(2)  concession 

miiffen,  absolute  obUgation, 
compulsion 

follcn    (1)  moral  obligation, 
duty 
(2)  report 

hjotten  (1)  will,  intention 


(2)  claim 

b)  The  following  forms,  all 
advantage  be  learned  by  heart, 

3d)  Wtte  c«  tun  bilrfcn 


3d)  l)'dttt  e«  tun  fdnncn 
3d)  pttc  eg  tun  milffcn 


expressed  by: 

may,  (nrith  neg.)  must  not,  might,  be 
permitted,  be  allowed,  have  the 
right 

can,  could,  be  able 

may,  might 

like,  wish,  care,  desire 

may,  might 

must,  have  to,  be  obUged,  be  com- 
pelled 

shall,  should,  ought,  be  to,  be  fitting, 
be  necessary 

be  said  to,  be  reported  (that) 

will,  would,  wish,  want,  desire,  in- 
tend, be  willing,  be  on  the  point  of, 
be  going  to 

claim  to,  assert  (that) 

of  which  occur  frequently,  may  with 


/  should  have  been  allowed  to  do  it 
I  might  have  done  it  (permission) 
/  should  have  been  able  to  do  it 
I  could  have  done  it 
I  might  have  done  it  (possibility) 
/  should  have  been  obliged  to  do  it 
I  should  have  had  to  do  it 


116  ABSTRACT   OF  GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

3d^  F)(tttc  e§  tun  follen  /  ought  to  have  done  it 

3(5  ^atte  c«  tun  tootten  ^  ^  '^"^  ^"^  "'""'^'^  ""^  ^ 


/  would  have  done  it 

I  should  have  liked  to  do  it 


(3d^  l)attc  eg  tun  moficn) 

More  usually  ^^  f)atte  eg  gern  gctan . 

c)  Like,  Like  to:  i^  mag  gern  (Ueber,  am  liebften)  /  like  {prefer,  like 
best)  is  used  only  with  nouns;  i^  ntoc^te  gem  (lieber,  am  liebften),  / 
should  like  (prefer,  like  best)  is  used  with  both  nouns  and  verbs. 
But  the  Enghsh  verb  like  is  represented  in  German  by  a  large  num- 
ber of  expressions:  how  do  you  like  himf  I  like  him  very  well,  tote 
gefallt  er  Ql^nen?  3d^  l^abc  il^n  gern,  id^  mag  tl^n  gern;  /  like  him  better 
than  his  brother,  x^  mag  ibn  Ileber  al^  feinen  53ruber,  er  gefatlt  mir  beffer 
oX^  fein  ^ruber;  /  should  like  to  go  with  you,  but  first  I  should  like  a 
glass  of  water,  i^  mod^te  gern  mitgeben,  aber  guerft  module  id^  ein  ®la0 
SSaffer;  /  like  cherries  and  milk,  but  I  do  not  like  these  cherries,  iii)  effc 
gem  ^irfd^en  unb  td^  trtnfe  gem  ay^ild^,  aber  btefe  ^irf(f)en  fd^medfen  mir 
ntd^t;  they  like  to  sit  in  the  garden,  fie  fit^en  gern  im  (Garten;  we  like  to 
be  in  the  country,  eg  gefiillt  ung  auf  bcm  Sanbe;  /  like  skating,  but  I  like 
rowing  better,  x^  laufc  gem  ^Sd^littfd^ul^c,  aber  id^  mberc  lieber. 

20.  Use  of  the  Articles.  I.  In  many  cases  the  article  is  used  or 
omitted  where  the  contrary  is  the  usage  in  English: 

a)  The  definite  article  is  used  with  abstract  nouns  and  those  taken 
in  a  universal  sense:  bag  ?eben  tft  fur^,  life  is  short;  ha^  ®oIb  ift  gelb, 
gold  is  yellow. 

b)  It  is  often  used  where  we  use  a  possessive  adjective:  ber  55ater 
fd^littelte  ben  ^opf,  the  father  shook  his  head;  er  fd^iittelte  mir  bte  §anb. 

c)  It  is  prefixed  to  the  names  of  seasons,  months  and  days  of  the 
week,  to  names  of  streets  and  mountains,  to  the  feminine  names  of 
countries  and  to  proper  names  when  preceded  by  an  adjective:  im 
SStnter  toobnt  er  in  ber  griebrid^ftrafec,  im  "SRax  gebt  er  auf  ben  5SefuD;  ber 
Heine  ^ang  reift  in  bte  ©c^toeig;  er  gebt  in  bie  ^d^ule,  in  bie  ^ird^e. 

II.  The  article  is  omitted  after  alg  meaning  as  a,  before  predicate 
nouns  denoting  profession  or  condition  and  sometimes  after  the 
points  of  the  compass:  alg  ^inb  Xoax  x^  oft  In  Berlin;  fetn  33atcr  Ift  Cffi* 
gier;  er  fubr  nad^  (SUben. 

III.  The  definite  article  is  sometimes  used  in  German  where  the 
indefinite  article  is  required  in  English:  er  fommt  bretmal  bie  SSod^e; 
bag  gleifd^  foftet  gtoei  moxl  bag  "iPfunb. 


SPECIAL  USES  OF   DECLENSION  117 

SPECIAL  USES  OF  DECLENSION 

31.  The  Genitive,  a)  The  genitive  is  sometimes  used  with  a  verb 
in  the  manner  of  a  direct  object:  thus,  cr  bebarf  ber  ©c^onung;  id)  ge* 
bac^te  fctncr  mit  !2icbe. 

h)  Much  more  often,  the  genitive  is  second  object  of  a  verb, 
especially  of  a  reflexive:  thus,  er  crinncrt  fid^  feiner  grcunbc,  er  Hagtc 
fid^  ber  ^ieblofigfeit  on, 

c)  The  genitive  may  also  depend  on  an  adjective:  thus,  er  tDor 
be«  lattficn  SBartcnS  miibc. 

d)  A  genitive  is  often  used  adverbially,  especially  to  denote  in- 
definite or  recurrent  time:  thus,  eineg  XagcS,  one  day;  be^  SD^orficn^,  in 
the  morning;  (SonntafiS  gc{)en  luir  in  bie  ^ird^c. 

e)  The  Germans  avoid  the  use  of  two  or  more  genitives  in  close 
connection:  thus,  two  of  my  brother's  friends,  gn)ei  grcunbe  nteinc^  ^ru* 
bcr^, 

/)  A  proper  noun  depending  on  another  limiting  noun  is  not  put 
in  the  genitive,  but  is  left  unvaried:  hk  (Stabt  Berlin,  ba^  ^ontgreld^ 
*}Jren6en,  ber  9}?onat  SD^arj. 

22,  The  Dative,  a)  Besides  the  verbs  that  take  a  dative  as  sec- 
ond or  remoter  object,  a  great  many  are  followed  by  a  dative  used 
like  a  direct  object:  eS  gcftel  ntir  fe()r  gut,  ein  greunb  tialf  mir  babei. 

b)  A  dative  may  also  be  used  with  certain  adjectives:  i(i)  bin  if)m 
fel^r  banfbar;  bicfe  iBoote  finb  ben  Unfem  gang  (i()nlid^. 

c)  For  the  dative  used  instead  of  a  possessive  adjective,  see  8, 16. 

23.  The  Accusative,   a)  A  few  verbs  govern  two  accusatives:  er 

nannte  il^n  einen  'I)kh, 

b)  Often,  where  we  use  a  second  accusative  the  German  uses  a 
preposition  with  the  noun:  ®raf  ^.  tDurbe  gum  ^rafibenten  ber  5lu§* 
ftellung  gcn)(if)lt,  Count  B.  was  elected  President  of  the  Exposition;  i^ 
^aU  i()n  ftet^  fiir  einen  treuen  greunb  ge()alten. 

c)  The  accusative  is  used  to  express  measure  of  time,  space,  etc.: 
er  fommt  gtDeimal  ben  Tlomt;  ba^  ^inb  tft  bret  Sa\)vt  alt 

d)  Definite  time  is  expressed  by  the  accusative:  geh)of)nIi(^  bletbe 
id^  be«  5Ibenb§  or  abenb^  gu  §aufc,  aber  btefen  5lbenb  tear  id^  mit  einem 
greunb  au^gegangen. 

e)  An  accusative  is  used  absolutely  to  express  an  accompanying 
circumstance,  where  in  English  we  should  generally  use  with  or  hav- 
ing; er  ftanb  an  meiner  ZiXx,  ben  ^ut  in  ber  §anb. 


118  ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


USE  OF  TENSES  AND  MOODS 

34.  Indicative,  a)  The  present  tense  is  sometimes  used  for  the 
past  in  lively  narration,  and  very  often  for  the  future:  thus,  mor* 
ficn  Qcf)C  i<i)  auf  ba^  2anb,  to-morrow  I  am  going  to  the  country. 

h)  To  signify  what  has  been  and  still  is,  or  what  had  been  and 
still  was,  the  present  and  preterit  are  used  respectively  (not  the 
perfect  and  pluperfect,  as  in  English) :  thus,  er  toar  fd&on  lange  bo,  he 
had  already  been  there  a  long  time;  Xoix  finb  f(^OTi  feit  gh)ei  (Stunben  \yitx, 
we  have  been  here  two  hours. 

35.  Subjunctive.  I.  The  subjunctive  is  the  mood  of  doubt  or 
uncertainty  or  contingency.  Its  use  in  German  depends  always  on 
the  shade  of  meaning  to  be  expressed,  not  on  a  definite  preceding 
word,  as  in  French. 

a)  It  may  thus  be  used  in  any  phrase  to  express  doubt  or  uncer- 
tainty: c^  fie^t  au3,  aB  ob  c^  ncu  Xo<Xxt,  it  looks  as  if  it  were  new. 

.  b)  It  is  often  used  to  express  a  wish:  h)clrc  er  nur  f)ier,  were  he  only 
here! 

II.  a)  In  conditions  contrary  to  fact,  i.e.  sentences  stating  that  if 
something  were  (or  had  been)  true,  something  else  would  be  (or 
would  have  been)  the  case,  the  subjunctive  is  always  used,  though 
the  conditional  may  be  used  in  the  conclusion.  The  preterit  refers 
to  present  time,  the  pluperfect  to  past:  thus,  c§  hJiire  am  beftcn,  iDenn 
h)ir  ghjet  $Ia^  befommen  fonntcn,  it  would  be  best  if  we  could  get  two 
seats;  l^fttte  tc^  baran  Qcbad^t,  fo  l^citte  i(5  eg  fieftem  beforgt,  if  1  had 
thought  of  it,  I  would  have  attended  to  it  yesterday. 

b)  Often  the  conclusion  alone  is  stated,  the  condition  being  un- 
derstood or  implied:  thus,  <Bk  \)'dtttn  c^  tun  tbnnm,  you  could  have 
done  it  (if  you  had  wanted  to). 

III.  a)  The  subjunctive  is  also  much  used  in  indirect  discourse, 
that  is,  to  express  something  reported  or  affirmed  by  another 
and  not  stated  on  the  authority  of  the  speaker  or  writer.  Such  a 
subjunctive  may  be  either  in  the  present  (the  tense  which  was  used 
in  the  direct  statement)  or  in  the  past,  as  in  English:  thus,  er  fagte^ 
er  fci  \t^x  trourig,  n)eil  er  gebort  bStte,  hai  ber  ^onig  geftorben  metre. 

b)  If  the  speaker  believes  what  he  has  heard  to  be  a  fact,  he  may 
use  the  indicative:  thus,  id)  f)Qbe  foeben  gebort,  t>ai  ber  ^dnig  geftorben  ift. 


USE   OF   TENSES  AND   MOODS  119 

26.  Infinitive.  I.  Any  infinitive  may  be  used  directly  as  a  noun, 
with  or  without  the  article;  it  is  always  neuter  and  adds  ^  in  the 
genitive:  thus,  er  burftc  bit  \Xi)t  nt(j^t  bcim  <Bpkltn  tragcn,  he  was  not 
allowed  to  wear  his  watch  while  playing;  ha^  Sefen  etifilifd^er  D^omanc 
mad^t  mix  immtx  greubc,  reading  English  novels  always  gives  me 
pleasure. 

II.  The  infinitive  is  generally  preceded  by  gu. 

a)  But  it  is  used  without  gu  after  the  auxiliary  Jrcrbcn  and  the 
modal  auxiharies;  also  after  laffen,  fc^en,  Ifiorcn,  \iif}ltn,  f)el6en,  Icrnen, 
f)tl\m  and  a  few  others  of  less  common  occurrence. 

h)  The  infinitive  of  all  these  verbs  is  also  generally  used  instead 
of  the  participle  in  compound  tenses  when  another  infinitive  de- 
pends on  it  [see  19,  Ic,  d,  e]:  thus,  id^  fcl^c  ben  bcriil^mten  (SftnQcr 
oft  t)orbei8e]^en;  aber  id^  l^abc  ii)n  nie  ftngen  ^oun. 

III.  The  active  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  a)  where  we  expect  a 
passive:  thus,  iii)  ^aht  ben  Slrgt  rufcn  laffcn,  aber  cr  ift  ntrfienbs  gu  ftnbcn, 
/  sent  for  the  doctor  (had  the  doctor  called)  j  but  he  was  not  to  he  found;  . 
cr  litfet  e^  madden,  he  is  having  it  made;  b)  where  we  expect  a  present 
participle:  thus,  cr  blicb  ftel^en,  aU  er  mid^  am  gcnftcr  ftcl^cn  \a^,  he 
stopped  {remained  standing)  when  he  saw  me  standing  at  the  window; 
\6)  \0i\)  eg  auf  bcm  2:tfd^e  liegcn,  /  saw  it  lying  on  the  table. 

IV.  a)  The  infinitive  with  gu  may  be  governed  by  three  preposi- 
tions, um,  of)nc,  anftatt. 

b)  Other  prepositions  are  combined  with  ba,  the  infinitive  (or  in- 
finitive clause)  being  construed  as  in  apposition  to  this  ha:  thus,  cr 
bcftel^t  barauf,  !Dcutfd^  gu  fprcd^cn,  he  insists  on  talking  German  (liter- 
ally, he  insists  on  this,  talking  German);  cr  bcnft  ntc  baran,  mtr  fiutcn 
SJiorgcn  gu  fagcn. 

c)  When  the  action  of  the  infinitive  has  a  different  actor  (ex- 
pressed in  English  by  a  possessive)  from  the  subject  of  the  preced- 
ing verb,  a  substantive  clause  with  bafe  takes  the  place  of  the 
infinitive:  er  befte!)t  barauf,  bag  i^  !5)eutfd^  mit  il^m  fpred^c,  he  insists 
on  my  speaking  German  with  him. 

V.  No  infinitive  can  have  in  German  a  subject  other  than  that 
of  the  verb  on  which  it  depends:  thus,  er  ttjill  5lrgt  toerbeu,  aber  fetn 
IBatcr  h)iiufd^t,  ha^  er  ^rebtQcr  toerben  foil,  he  wants  to  he  a  doctor,  hut 
his  father  wants  him  to  he  a  clergyman. 


120  ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

VI.  Whatever  depends  on  an  infinitive  comes  regularly  and 
usually  before  it,  the  infinitive  standing  at  the  end  of  its  clause. 
If  one  infinitive  depends  on  another  the  dependent  one  comes  first: 
ifi)  ^aht  hit  Slbfid^t,  tnir  etn  neue^  ^allfleib  madden  ju  laffen,  /  intend  to 
have  a  new  ball  dress  made  [see  28,  Ila]. 

27.  Participles.  I.  a)  The  participles,  or  verbal  adjectives, 
have  in  general  the  inflection  and  constructions  of  adjectives.  Some 
words  which  are  participles  in  form  have  assumed  wholly  the  char- 
acter of  ordinary  adjectives:  as,  retsenb,  charming;  bebcutcnb,  inv- 
portant;  ^dtf)vt,  learned;  bcforgt,  anxious;  gebilbet,  educated. 

b)  But,  except  in  the  case  of  words  like  those  given  above,  the 
present  participle  is  not  used  as  predicate,  and  neither  the  present 
nor  the  past  participle  is  compared  or,  save  in  rare  instances,  used 
as  adverb. 

c)  Participial  clauses  (with  present  or  perfect  participle)  are  not 
used  in  German  as  in  English;  ordinarily  they  are  to  be  represented 
by  full  adverbial  clauses,  introduced  by  a  conjunction:  aU  'vi)  nad^ 
^aufe  tarn,  fanb  16)  S^xtn  53rlcf,  on  coming  home,  I  found  your  letter; 
nad^betn  l^  t{)n  gclefen  i^attt,  ag  i^  su  TlittaQ,  after  having  read  it,  I  ate 
my  dinner. 

d)  Modern  German  usage  does  not  allow  a  participle  following  a 
verb  to  denote  a  simultaneous  action  or  state :  he  stood  looking  after 
her,  cr  ftanb  unb  fa!)  i{)r  nad^;  she  is  sitting  at  the  table  reading,  fie  fil^t 
Qtn  Z\\6)  unb  licft. 

e)  Any  word  or  phrase  depending  on  or  limiting  a  participle  must 
stand  before  it  [see  28,  Ila].  This  remains  so  even  when  the 
participle  is  used  Uke  an  attributive  adjective:  bcr  frcunbUd^  au^* 
fel^enbc  ©d^ulntciftcr,  the  good-natured  looking  schoolmaster;  btc  t)on  mir 
le^tcn  <Sonntafi  befud^tc  !Dorffir(^c,  the  village  church  I  visited  {visited  by 
me)  last  Sunday;  ba^  mol^lbcfanntc,  t)on  !2utf)er  gcbld^tetc  ^ird^cnlieb,  the 
well-known  hymn,  composed  by  Luther, 

28.  Order  of  the  Sentence.  I.  German  sentences  are  classified 
as  a)  Normal,  b)  Inverted,  c)  Transposed,  according  to  the  position 
of  the  personal  verb,  i.e.  that  part  of  the  verb  which  agrees  in  per- 
son and  number  with  the  subject. 

II.  The  Normal  and  Inverted  Orders  belong  to  Principal 
Clauses  only.  In  such  clauses  the  personal  verb  always  stands 
in  the  second  place.     The  Transposed  Order  belongs  to  Depen- 


FORMS   OF  ADDRESS  121 

DENT  Clauses  only.     In  such  clauses  the  personal  verb  always 
stands  at  the  end. 

a)  The  Normal  or  Regular  Order  is:  1)  subject,  2)  personal  verb, 
3)  pronoun  object,  4)  adverb  (if  more  than  one,  time  precedes  place), 
5)  noun  object,  6  and  last)  impersonal  part  of  the  verb,  i.e.  infini- 
tive, past  participle  or  separable  prefix:  thus,  tnein  53rubcr  l^at  l^eutc 
feinen  $ut  t)crIoren;  er  Ifiat  mix  fieftem  in  ber  ©tabt  einen  $ut  gefauft. 

b)  The  Inverted  Order.  If  any  part  of  the  predicate  (object,  ad- 
jective, adverb  or  subordinate  clause)  stands  at  the  beginning  of  the 
sentence,  the  subject  must  stand  directly  after  the  personal  verb: 
thus,  f)eute  l^at  metn  ^ruber  feinen  §ut  berloren;  al3  meln  58ruber  in  hk 
(Bc^ule  ging,  ^at  er  bm  ©ut  t)erIoren. 

The  inverted  order  is  also  used,  as  in  English,  in  questions  and 
in  a  conditional  sentence  to  take  the  place  of  if:  thus,  I)at  er  ben  §ut 
fieute  Derloren?  $attc  er  feinen  $nt,  fo  fonntc  er  nic^t  in  bie  ©d^ulc  gefien, 
if  he  had  or  had  he  no  hat,  he  could  not  go  to  school. 

c)  The  Transposed  Order  belongs  to  dependent  clauses  only  and 
only  to  such  as  are  introduced  by  a  relative  or  a  subordinating  con- 
junction. The  personal  verb  is  then  transposed  to  the  end  of  the 
clause:  thus,  mein  ^ruber  f)at  feinen  ^ut  bcrloren,  al«  er  in  W  ©d^ulc 
ging;  ber  §ut,  ben  er  Derloren  l^at,  ift  gefunben  tDorben.  [For  trans- 
posed verb  with  two  or  more  infinitives,  see  19,  le.] 

The  only  conjunctions  which  are  not  followed  by  the  transposed 
order  are:  unb,  obcr^  abcr,  fonbcm,  alletn,  benn. 

29.  J&itt  and  l^cr.  With  verbs  of  motion  or  direction  the  Ger- 
man language  demands  an  adverb  to  denote  whether  the  motion 
be  toward  (f)er)  or  away  (^in)  from  the  speaker:  how  can  I  get  there? 
n)ic  fann  \^  bortf)in  fontmen?;  how  can  he  get  here?  XQXt  fann  er  l^terl^er* 
fontnten?;  she  fell  down,  fie  fiel  l^in;  it  is  hardly  worth  while  going 
there,  e^  lof)nt  ftd^  faunt  j^tn^ugel^en;  they  are  just  coming  up  the  street, 
cben  fommen  fie  bie  ©trafee  f)erauf;  /  am  invited,  but  I  do  not  want  to 
go,  id)  bin  eingelaben,  abet  ic&  mag  nid^t  ^itigel^en, 

30.  Forms  of  Address.  I.  a)  It  is  customary  and  good  form  in 
Germany  to  address  a  man  who  holds  a  position  or  a  degree  by  his 
title:  $err  Tiottov,  $err  "iProfeffor,  §err  iBiirgermeifter,  §err  ^riifibent, 
©err  !8eutnant. 

Recently  the  expression  grttulcin  2)oftor  has  become  good  usage. 


122  ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

h)  The  wife  also  is  addressed  by  her  husband^s  title:  grau  ^farrcr, 
grau  ^Ircftor,  grau  !Doftor. 

c)  A  gentleman  usually  addresses  a  lady,  and  a  younger  woman 
an  older  one,  as  gnabtgc  grau,  gnciblgeg  grciuletn. 

d)  In  speaking  to  a  person  about  members  of  his  or  her  family  it 
is  polite  to  say  3ff)r  §err  S5ater,  S^xt  griiulcln  Xo(i)itT,  3f)rc  grau  ®c* 
mal^Un. 

II.  The  forms  for  beginning  and  ending  a  letter  also  differ  very 
much  in  German  and  English,  as  does  also  the  punctuation. 

a)  For  familiar  letters,  compare  Exercises  4,  21,  38. 

h)  For  more  formal  letters,  compare  Exercises  15,  29. 

In  such  letters  a  lady  should  be  addressed  as:  ^ti)X  gcel^rtc  gnabific 
grau  (graulcin),  or  <SeI)r  gccl^rtc  grau  ?5rofcffor. 

c)  A  business  letter  would  be  as  follows: 

!^rc«bcn,  ben  15.  3anuar,  1912 
^ttftx^i^t  ^Bud^ljanblung. 

©ittc  um  fofortific  ^ufcnbung  bcr  bcftclltcn  53ii(^cr. 
$oc|ad^tuuggi)oIIft 

Dr.  S.  iBraun. 

31.  Prepositions.  The  meaning  of  a  preposition  is  largely  deter- 
mined by  the  word  or  phrase  which  it  follows  and  of  which  it  is  a 
part.  Students  should  observe  carefully  these  prepositional  phrases, 
especially  when  they  differ  from  EngUsh  usage.  See  also  Exercises 
7,  13,  21,  23. 

Prepositions  governing  the  Genitive 

onftatt,  ftatt,  instead  of  obcrl^alb,  above 

ou6crf)aIb,  withouty  outside  (of)  ixoi},  in  spite  of 

blc«fcit8,  on  this  side  of  um  .  .  .  tDillcn,  for  the  sake  of 

f)alhtx,  for  the  sake  of  ungcad^tct,  notwithstanding 

inncrl^alb,  vnthin,  inside  (of)  unterl^alb,  below 

icnfcit^,  on  the  further  side  ofy  untDeit,  not  far  from 

beyond  tocrmoge,  by  dint  of 

fraft,  by  virtue  of  h)(if)rcnb,  during 

liing^,  along  iDcgcn,  on  account  of 

lout,  according  to  juf  olge,  in  consequence  of 
mittclft,  by  means  of 


STRONG   AND   IRREGULAR   GERMAN    VERBS       123 

Prepositions  governing  the  Dative 

auS,  out  of  fictnag,  in  accordance  ob,  above 

aufecr,  besides  with  faint,  along  with 

bet,  by,  at  mit,  with  felt,  since 

btnncn,  within  nad^,  after,  to  t)on,  o/,  /rom 

cntgcgen,  against  ncid^ft,  nea:^  to  gu,  to 

fiCficnilbcr,  opposite  neb  ft,  aZongf  with  guiDibcr,  contrary  to 

Prepositions  governing  the  Accusative 

bis,  <iM,  unto  ficgcn,  against  um,  about,  round 

burd^,  through  ol^nc,  without  h)ibcr,  against 

filr,  /or  f onbcr,  without 

Prepositions  governing  the  Dative  or  Accusative 

on,  on,  a^  in,  in,  into  untcr,  among,  under 

auf,  on,  wpon,  wp  ncbcn,  beside  bor,  6e/ore 

l&intcr,  behind  Uber,  o6ot;e,  over  gtoifc^cn,  between 

These  take  the  dative  in  answer  to  the  questions  where?  or  when?, 
the  accusative  in  answer  to  the  questions  whither?  or  how  long? 

3!?.  Old  (or  Strong)  and  Irregular  German  Verbs 

Classified  According  to  Vowel  Changes 

First  Class:  Root  vowel  i,  c,  ie. 

I.  i-a-u  —  binbcn,  bingcn,  brtngcn,  ftnbcn,  ficlingcn,  fltngcn,  rtngen, 
fd^totngen,  f(^n)inben,  fd^Unficn,  ftnfcn,  fingcn,  fpringcn,  trtnfcn, 
tDinbcn,  jtotngcn, 

II.  c  or  i-a-u  —  bcfel^Icn,  cntpfcl^Ien,  ncl^ntcn,  ftcblcn;  bcrgcn,  bcrftcn; 
brc(^cn,  crfd^rccfen,  gclten,  l^elfcn,  fc^cltcn,  fprcd^en,  fteljcn,  fterbcn, 
trcffcn,  tcrbcrbcn,  tocrbcn;  getoinncn,  fd^tointntcn,  finncn,  begin* 
ncn,  rinncn,  fpinncn, 

III.  a)  ic  («)-0-D  —  btcficn,  bictcn,  fltcgcn,  flicl^cn,  flicfecn,  frted^en,  frtc* 
rcn,  gcntcgcn,  gtefecn,  ricd^cn,  fd^icbcn,  fc^icfecn,  fprtegcn,  Derlicren, 
fc^Ucgcn,  t)crbric6cn,  micgcn,  gicl^cn  (gog);  bctrligcn,  liigen,  filrcn, 
b)  c-o-0  —  brcfc^cn,  fe(|tcn,  flec^tcn,  l^cben,  ntclfen,  quettcn,  fd^tocl* 
gen,  fd^melaen,  fd^tocUcn,  fd^toCrcn,  njcben. 


124  ABSTRACT   OF   GERMAN   GRAMMAR 

IV.  c  or  i-a-c  —  fijjcn,  liegcn,  Icfcn,  trctcn,  ficbcn,  ficnefcn,  gcfd^cljicn, 
fcf)en,  cffcn,  frcffcn,  mcffcn,  t)ergcffcn. 

Second  Class:  Root  vowel  ci. 

I.  ct-i-i  —  beigen,  blctd^cn,  gleitcn,  gleidjen,  grctfcn,  Iciben,  pfeifen, 
reifecn,  reiten,  fd)Ieid)en,  fdjieifen,  fc^mclBcn,  fcf)neiben,  fc^retten, 
ftreirf)cn,  ftreiten,  n^etc^en* 

II.  ci-tc-ic  —  bletben,  gebeificn,  Ieif)cn,  melben,  prctfen,  rclbcn,  fc^cibcn, 
fc^citien,  fd^reiben,  fd^reien,  fcjlueigen,  ftetgcn,  treiben,  njeifcn,  ber^ 
Sciften;  l^ciBen  (geJeiSen). 

Third  Class:  Root  vowel  a. 

I.  a-i  or  tc-a  —  blafcn,  braten,  fallen,  l^altcn,  laffcn,  ratcn,  fd^Iafcn; 
fatiQcn,  I)anQen  (f)angen);  laiifen,  l^auen  (()ieb). 

II.  a-u-a  —  fasten,  firaben,  laben,  fc^affen,  frfjlagen,  tragen,  n)ac^fen, 
tcafd^cn. 

Mixed  Verbs:  c-a-a  —  brennen,  fenncn,  nennen,  renncn,  fcnbcn,  men* 
ben;  benfcn  (bac^tc),  bringen  (brad&te). 

Irregular:  bUrfen,  ftinnen,  mogen,  milffen,  foUen,  toollcn;  miffen,  l^abcn; 
fein,  merben;  bitten,  ge^en,  fomnten,  ftef)en,  ftofecn,  rufen, 
tun. 


LIST  OF  OLD  (OR  STRONG)  AND 
IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Explanations.  —  In  the  following  table  are  given  the  princi- 
pal parts  of  all  the  verbs  of  the  Old  conjugation,  together  with 
the  preterit  (imperfect)  subjunctive;  also  the  second  and  third 
singular  indicative  present  and  the  second  singular  imperative, 
whenever  these  are  otherwise  formed  than  they  would  be  in  the 
New  (or  Weak)  conjugation.  Forms  given  in  full-faced  type 
(thus,  gebacfen)  are  those  which  are  alone  in  use;  for  those 
in  ordinary  type  (thus,  h'dd\t,  bacft)  the  more  regular  forms,  or 
those  made  after  the  manner  of  the  New  conjugation,  are  also 
allowed. 

No  verb  is  given  in  the  List  as  a  compound.  If  found  only  in 
composition,  hyphens  are  prefixed  to  all  its  forms,  and  an  added 
note  gives  its  compounds. 


Infirutive. 

SBarfcn/bake' 
often  of  New 
participle. 
*bttrctt 

only  in  c^cbftrcn, 
SBetftcn/bite' 
SBcrgcn/hide' 
SBicgcn/bend' 
Stctcn/ offer' 
S3tnbcn/bind' 
a3ittcn/beg' 
SBlafctt/blow' 
Slcibctt/ remain' 
JBtctd^cn/ bleach' 
as  intransitive, 
SBratcn, 'roast' 
i8rc(^en/ break' 
SBrcnitcit/bum' 
SBringcn/ bring' 

obsolete  except 


pres'tind.sing.      pret.  ind.  pret.  subj.   imper.    past  part. 

ba(fft,bficft       buf         btllc        fleBarfcn 

conj.,  especially  when  transitive;  except  the 


s'blerft,  *blert     'hat 
'bear,  bring  forth.' 

m 


*Mxt      MtT   'hoxtn 


fiitffc  geBiffctt 

barg  bdrge  btrg  gedorgen 

bog  bilge  gebogcn 

hot  hotc  gcbotctt 

banb  banbc  gcbunbcn 

bat  bote  gcbcten 

blctfeft,  blrtft    bttc^  blicfe  gcblafcn 

blieb  bttebe geblicben 

^    blid^  bUd^e  gebltd^en 

of  either  conj.;  as  transitive,  of  New  only. 

bratft,  bratet     briet  briete  gcbraten 

bn(t)ft,  bric^t    brad^  brttd^e  bric^  gebrod^ctt 

brannte  brcnnte  gcbrannt 

bra^te  brad^te  gebrac^t 

^^jel^  ^bicl^e  ^bie^en 

in  Qcbei^en,  'thrive.' 

125 


126       LIST  OF  OLD  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Infinitive. 


imper. 


*bricfien 

only  in  toerbrtegcn, 
^ringen, 'press' 
^ilrf  en,  *  be  per- 
mitted' 
(Sffeit/eat' 
ga^rcn/go' 
gaHcn/fair 
gangctt/ catch' 
gc^tcn/ fight' 
•^fel^len 


barfft,barf 
fangft,fangt 

fi(f)tft,n(^t 


btattg  btilnge 
burfte  biirftc 


*birb 


brifd^ 


past  part. 

geboc^t 
*borben 


pres't  ind.  sing.    pret.  ind.  pret.  subj. 

^Cttfcn, 'think'      bad^tc   bfid^tc 

^htxhm  *birbft,  *birbt    *barb    *bftrbc 

^bttrbc 

only  in  t)erbcrbcn,  'perish';  which,  as  transitive,  'destroy,'  is  of 
New  conj. 
^rcfi^icn, 'thresh'  brifd^eft, brifc^t brofc^   brfifd^c 


gebroffi^en 
*broffcn 


gcbruttgctt 

wanting  gebutf  t 


ftcl 
ftng 


ftfic 
fti^rc 
ftclc 
pttge 
fdc^te 
fci^le 


ifi 


^fteDt 


only  in  befcl^len,  'command,'  cnipfel^lcn,  'commend.' 


Jtnbcn,'find' 

Jlcci^tcn, '  twine'    flid^tft,  fttd^t 

JUcgen/fly' 

y(tc5cn,'flee' 

J(ic^cn,'flow' 

^tcffctt, '  devour'    f  rtffcft,  f  ri^t 

IJncrcn,' freeze' 

©ft^ren,' ferment' 

©cbcn,  'give'         gibft,  gibt 

@c^cn,'go' 

©etten,  'be  worth'  gtltft,  gilt 
'fieffen  -giffeftr  ^fiifet 

only  in  tjerQeffcn,  'forget. 

©teftcn, '  pour' 

^ginnen 

only  in  bcgitincn,  'begin.' 

@lciii^cn,'re- 

semble' 

©Icitcn/ glide' 

©Ummen,  'gleam' 


fanb 
ffog 


fraft 
fror 

gab 

gwg 
gait 

^gann 


anbe 
lage 

im 

riitc 

g&be 
ginge 
g(ilte 
-gftfec 

fliJffe 
^giinne 


mt 


m 


gib 

gilt 
''flifi 


@rabcn,'dig' 
@retfe«,' gripe' 
Jf^aben/have' 
fatten/ hold' 
i^ange«,'hang' 
^auen,'hew* 
Jfcben,' raise' 


grftbjt,  gtiibi 
Ifiingft,  ^angt 


glic^  glid^c 

glitt  glittc 
glomm  gliJmntc 

grub  griibe 

griff  griffc 

^attc  fi&tit 

tixtlt  btelte 

fttng  ^ingc 

l^lcb  l^lcbc 

l^ob  l^dbe 


gegcffen 

gefaliren 

gefatten 

gefangen 

gefofi^ten 

^fol^ten 

gefitnben 

gefloii^ten 

gcflogctt 

ge^o^en 

gefloffett 

geftcffett 

gcfwrctt 

gcgol^rcn 

gegeben 

gcgangett 

gegolten 

-geffen 

gcgpffcrt 
^gonnen 

gegltd^en 

gcgllttcn 

gcglommcn 

gegraben 

gcgriffen 

gebabt 

gel^alten 

gebangen 

gel^aueit 

ge^oben 


LIST  OF  OLD  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS         127 


imper. 


ijitf 


past  part. 

fie^cifien 
ge^otfen 

Qcfannt 

genommm 

geflungcn 

gcfommen 

wanting  gcfpnitt 

gcfrot^ctt 

Qcforcn 

gelaben 

gclaffen 

gelaufcn 

getittett 

getefett 
gelegen 
4oren 


liei^ 


Infinitive.  preset  ind.  sing,  pret.ind.  pret.subj. 

^cificn/cair ^icff     t|ieftc 

§clfett/help^        l&WrWt  fialf     Wife 

Wenncn^'know' tannic  Icnntc 

^limmcn,  'climb' flotntn  flfimmc 

^Ungcn/ sound' flatig    flange 

^ommcn/come' lam     fftme 

^iJnncn/can'        Iannft,fantt  lonntt  (iJnntc 

^ricij^cn/ creep' Uodf    friJd^c 

^iitcn/ choose' for       f5rc 

2aben/load'         labft^tttbt  lub       liibc 

Saffen/let'  liiffcft,  (ftftt  licff      licfie 

fiaufcn/run'         lawfft,  (iiuft  licf      Itcfc 

Seiben/ suffer' litt      litte 

2ei§en/lend' licfi      lic^c 

Scfcn/read'  Itcfcftjtcft  la^       lilfe 

fitegen/lie' lag      Irlge 

mlxtttn 4or      4dre 

only  in  t)crUcrcn,  'lose.' 

4ingen 4ang   4ttnge     *Iungcn 

only  in  gclingcn,  'succeed,'   mifeUngen,  'fail';   used  in   third 
person  only. 

Silf^cn,  'extin-      Uf(^cft,  lifc^t  Iofc§     liifc^c     Ufd^         gelofd^cn 
guish' 
the  forms  of  New  conj.  preferably  limited  to  transitive  meaning. 

Stigen/lie' log       liJgc        gclogcn 

ai^lcibcn/shun' micb    micbe      gcmicbctt 

SJleffcn,' measure' miff  eft,  mtftt  maft     mttfic       miff      gemeffeti 

aWiJgen/may'        magft,mag  mot^tc  miji|te  wanting  gemoti^t 

SJlttjfen/must'      mufttrmu^  muftte  miiftte  wanting  gemuftt 

SRe^imen/take'      nimmft, mmmt naffm  niti^me     nimm  genommen 

Slennen/name' nanntenenntc     

*ttefcn =na)^     *=n(ifc       

only  in  gcnefcn,  'recover,  get  well.' 

•ttiefecn *noff     :=niJjfe      

obsolete,  except  in  geniegen,  'enjoy.' 

gSfctfen,' whistle' |>flff     ^fiffe       

pm2    iirtefc 

qulUft,  quillt  quoll     quiJtte       quitt 

rfttft,rcit  rtet      ricte        

rieB      ticBc       

rilf       riffe        

nit      txtit        


genannt 
^nefen 

^ttojfett 


$reifett,' praise' 
Cuetteiir'gush' 
IRaten,' advise' 
meiben,'rub' 
SRetften/tear' 
meiten/ride' 
IRennen/run' 
IRteci^en,' smell' 
aHingen/ wring' 


rannte  rcnntc 
tang     rdnge 


ge^ftffcit 

gcpriefctt 

gequotten 

geraten 

gerieben 

geriffeit 

gerittett 

getattnt 

geto(i^ets 

genmgen 


128       LIST  OF  OLD  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Infinitive.  pres't  ind. sing,  pret.ind.   pret.subj.      imper.       past  part. 

SRinnctt/run' xann       rannc        gcronnctt 

fRufctt/cair nef         ricfc  gcrufen 

©rfiaffcn/ create' fd^uf        fd)Ufe         Qefc^affen 

generally  of  New  conj.  when  meaning  *be  busy/  or  'procure.' 
©fallen, 'sound' fc^otl        fc^5(Ic        gcf^ollen 

only  in  gefc^cl^en,  'happen';  used  in  third  person  alone. 


@d)cibcn/part' ^tcb       ft^icbc 

©d^cinctt,  *ap- jc^iett      frf|icnc 

pear' 

et^cltctt/ scold'  W\U\t, 

Bdikhtn/  shove' f  ^06       f  (i^tJfic 

(B^kf\tn, '  shoot ' f  (^ofl        f  (|iiffc 

ec^lafctt/ sleep'  Mlftfft,       f(I)Ucf      f relief c 

wm 

'strike'  MIftflt 

Rnpak 

et^Ucfictt/shut' fc^toft      ft^tilffc 

©(i^Uttgctt/ sling' f  editing    fdilange 

©d^mclsen/melt'fc^tnilgeft,    fd;mol3     fc^molgc 
fi^miljt 

®(^iteibctt/cut' frfjmtt     ft^nittc 

©(i^rcrfctt/be       fcfjricfft,       fc^raf       f(f)rafe 

afraid'                 fd)rictt 
of  New  conj.  as  transitive,  'frighten.' 
SrffrctBctt, ^6imh     fti^ncOc 

'write' 

©(^rctett,'cry' fdjrtc       f  thrice 

©clftrcitcn, 'stride' fti^rttt      ft^tittc 

©ci|toctgcn/be f(^h»ic8    fc^hJtefic 

silent' 
©(^ttjcttctt,  f(^mltlft,      fdjmott      fc^mallc 

'swell'  fd^mitlt 

of  New  conj.  as  transitive. 
©(i^hJtmmcn, 

'swim' 


flcfd)tcbcn 
gcf(^icnett 

fc^alt      f(^(tae       fd^ilt    gcft^oltcn 

Offd)offc« 

gcfdjlafen 

gcf^tagcn 

gcfc^lic^cn 

gcft^roffcn 

\d)\mii  gefd)mol3cii 

gcft^nittcn 

\(i)nd  Qcfc^roden 


gcf^ricBctt 

ficfdjnccn 

gefc^rittcn 

gcf(^ttJicgcrt 

fc^mill  gefd^motlcn 


Sd^n^tnbettr 

'vanish' 
(St^mtngcn, 

'swing' 

'swear' 


f  (^mamm  f  ^itjdmmc  - 
fd^toanb  fdjnjdnbc  - 
((i^hjang  frfjnjingc  - 


-  gcfd^njommcn 

-  gcfdittiunbcn 

-  gcfd^ttjungcn 

-  gefd^tooren 


LIST  OF  OLD  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS        129 


Infinitive. 

©cljcn/see* 

8etn/be' 

©cnbcn/send' 

6tcbcn,'boir 

(Smgcn,'sing' 

©mfctt/sink' 

©tnnctt,' think' 

©i^cn/sit' 

©ottcn/ shall' 

©^jinncn,'spin' 


Bpm^m, 
'sprout' 
©pringett, 
'  spring' 
©tcti^Ctt/ prick' 
©tc^en/ stand' 
©tc^ktt, 'steal' 
©tcigen,  'as- 
cend' 

©tcrficitr'die' 
©toftctt,  'push' 
©trcid^ctt, 
'stroke' 

©treitcn, 'strive' 
ftragcn,  'carry' 
J£rcffcn,'hit' 
H^rctben, 'drive' 
Xxcttn,  'tread' 
Xtinttn,  'drink' 
XtUQcrXf  'de- 
ceive' 
^un,' do' 
SSac^feti,  'grow' 
aSttgen/ weigh' 
2Baf(i^ctt,'wash' 
aaScftcn,' weave' 
SBetcftcn, 'yield' 
SScifcn/show* 
S!Bcnben,*tum' 

aScrben/sue' 


pres't  ind.  sing.    pret.  ind. 

]&iu,  liift,  ift  2c.  hjar 

fanbtc 

'cnbctc 

btt 

ang 

anf 

ann 

fafe 

futtft,  foa  foKtc 
f^ann 

fliroe 

f^irang 

ftt(^ft,fti(^t  ftac^ 
ftaitb 

ftieg 


pretsubj.   imper.        past  part 


ftirBftJttrBt 


trftgft,  tragi 
triffftrtrifft 

trittft,  tritt 


ftarO 
fticft 
ftri* 

ftritt 

trug 

traf 

tricb 

trat 

tranf 

ttpg 


tat 

hjog 

trcifcfieft,  mafd)t  ttjufti^ 

tDOb 

h)id^ 

hJie^ 

hjanbte 

hicnbctc 
tx)xxf>\t,  toitht    toaxh 


toatt 
fcnbctc 

fiebetc 
fangc 
fdnfc 
fanne 

foatc 

f^annc 
fi)ra(^c 

grange 


fci 


gcfc^icn 
getticfcn 
gefanbt 


gcfottcn 

gcfungcit 

gcfunfcii 

gefonnen 

gcfcffcn 

want'g  gefoEt 

gcf^pimctt 

f^rtt^  gef^iroti^cn 


gcf^roffen 
gcfpntngctt 


ftttci^c  fttd^  geftoc^icti 

ftrinbc  gcftanbcit 

mu  fttcftl  gcfto^lcii 

fticgc  gcfticgen 


ftftrBc 
fttcfic 


ftirO 


ftrittc  

triigc  

trafc  Idff 

tricbc  

triitc  tritt 

tranfc  

triige  

mt  

toiic^fc  

UJiigc  

toUf^c  

intibc  

h?id^e  

hJtcfc  

njcnbete  

niiirl^e  toiri 


geftorbcn 

gcftoftctt 

geftrid^cii 

gcftrittcit 

getragen 

getroffcri 

getrtebett 

getrctctt 

gctrunfcn 

gctrogen 

getatt 

gctoac^fcn 

gchjogcn 

gett)af(^en 

gemoben 

geiDtd^cn 

gctotefctt 

getoianbt 

getnenbet 

genjorben 


130        LIST  OF  OLD  AND  IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Infinitive.  pres't  ind.  sing. 

SBerbeit, '  be-  totrft,  toitb 
come' 

SBerf  en, '  throw'  toirfft,  totrf  t 

SBicgcti/ weigh* 

SBinbctt,  'wind' 

SSSiffen, '  know'  Xotx^i,  toctfi 

Bpacn/wiir  totEft,tota 

3  ei^en/ impute' 

Dcrjcll^cn  more  common. 

3te^cn/puir 

3wi«0en,  'force' 


pret.ind.  pret.subj. 


toarb 

lourbe 

toarf 

tDOg 

nianb 
touftte 
toottte 
5«^ 


tottrbc 

hittrfe 
totirfc 

mdnbe 
toUgte 


jtoang     stoiiinge 


imper.     past  part. 

getootben 

toirf    getoorfen 

gctoogeit 

gcttiunben 

hitffc  gcttiufft 

getooKt 

gesic^en 

gcjogett 
gcstoungeit 


VOCABULAEIES 


ABBREVIATIONS  USED 


a. 

adjective 

nom.  nominative 

ace. 

accusative 

npr.   proper  noun 

ad. 

adverb 

num.  numeral 

an. 

article 

pers.  personal 

c. 

conjunction 

pi.      plural 

dot. 

dative 

poss.  possessive 

def. 

definite 

ppl.    past  participle 

dem. 

demonstrative 

pr.     pronoun 

/. 

feminine  gender 

prp.   preposition 

M 

figurative 

rail,    railroad 

M 

future 

refl.    reflexive  verb 

gen. 

genitive 

rel.     relative 

Gram. 

grammar 

(f.)     conjugated  with  fcin 

impers. 

impersonal 

8.       substantive 

in  comp. 

in  composition 

sep.    separable  verb 

indef. 

indefinite 

sing,  singular 

insep. 

inseparable  verb 

theat.  theatrical 

inter. 

interrogative 

tr.      transitive 

intr. 

intransitive 

V.       verb 

m. 

masculine  gender 

♦        Old  (or  Strong)  or  irregu- 

modal aux, 

.  modal  auxiliary 

lar  verb 

n. 

neuter  gender 

Nouns:  in  the  German-English  Vocabulary,  the  declension  of  all 
regular  nouns  is  designated  by  numbers  as  follows: 

1,  gen.  -6,  pi.  like  sing.  3,  gen.  -g  or  -e8,  pi.  adds  -cr. 
1",  same  with  umlaut  in  pi.  3",  same  with  umlaut  in  pi. 

2,  gen.  -^  or  -c8,  pi.  adds  -c.  4,  gen.  -(e)n,  pi.  adds  -(e)n. 
2*,  same  with  umlaut  in  pi. 

Irregular  genitives  and  plurals  are  given  in  parenthesis. 

In  the  English-German  Vocabulary  the  nom.  sing,  of  every  noun 
is  given  with  the  def .  art.,  also  the  nom.  pi.  Only  irregular  genitives 
are  given,  as  all  neuter  nouns  have  -g  in  the  gen.  sing.,  also  all  mas- 
culine nouns  unless  they  add  -n  in  the  nom.  pi.,  in  which  case  the 
gen.  is  -n:  Gram.  4,  set  VI.  Remember  that  feminine  nouns  make  no 
changes  in  the  singular:  Gram.  4,  set  VI. 

Pronouns:  for  declension  and  translation  of  pronouns,  see  Gram, 
7  to  13. 

Adverbs:  adverbs  ending  in  ~ly  are  not  given,  being  translated  in 
German  by  the  simple  adjective. 

Prepositions:  for  cases  which  follow  prepositions,  see  tables, 
Gram.  31. 

Verbs:  all  Old  (or  Strong)  and  irregular  verbs  are  indicated  in  the 
vocabularies  by  an  asterisk,  *.  For  all  forms,  see  Gram.  13,  and  Table 
of  Irregular  Verbs,  page  125.  Separable  verbs  are  denoted  by  an 
apostrophe  after  the  prefix:  an'fangcn.  For  all  forms  and  translation 
of  model  auxiliaries,  see  Gram.  19.  Verbs  are  marked  as  transitive 
or  intransitive  only  when  there  is  a  difference  between  the  two 
languages. 

Grammar:  references  are  to  Abstract  of  German  Granmiar,  pp.  99 
to  124. 


132 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


Wttnh,  m.  2.  evening.  ||  abenb6,  in 
the  evening.  ||  — e[fcn,  n.  supn 
per.  II  — gefcllf c^aft,  /.  evening 
party,  reception. 

ttBcr,  c.  but,  however. 

ah'fafjxtn*  v.  (f.)  depart,  leave. 

5CbQCorbnctc(r),  ppl.  as  s.  deputy, 
representative,  member. 

5tb^attb(ung,  /.  4.  essay,  treatise. 

ai)%oUn,  V.  fetch,  go  for,  meet. 

ab'lcftnctt,  v.  decHne,  refuse. 

ah'xaUrtf  v.  advise  against. 

Stbrcife,  /.  4.  departure,  setting 
out. 

aB'rcifcn,  v,  (f,)  set  out,  leave,  go 
away. 

ah'ttij^tn*  V.  tear  off,  pull  off, 
break  off. 

5(16f(^ieb,  m.  2.  leave,  parting, 
farewell.  ||— nel^mcn  (t)on),bid 
farewell  (to). 

ob'fddmbcn,*  v.  copy. 

Slbfidftt,  /.  4.  view,  intention,  pur- 
pose. 

tlBfttmmung,  /.  4.  voting,  vote. 

abttJcfcnb,  a.  absent,  away. 

ad^,  interjection,  alas!  ah! 

5tbrcffc,  /.  4.  address. 

5lbtJofat,  m.  4.  lawyer. 

Slfrifa,  Africa. 

affniidi,  a.  resembling,  like,  simi- 
lar. 

5(f tie,  /.  4.  share,  stock.  ||  — ngc* 
fcltfrf)aft,  /.  4.  joint  stock  com- 
pany. 

aU,  indef.  pr.  and  a.  all,  entire, 
whole.    II  bel  — (e)beTn,  after  all. 


II  — c8,  everything.  ||  — crfd^finft, 

most  beautiful  of  all. 
aUcixtf  a.  and  ad,    alone,   only. 

11  c.  only,  but. 
attcrici,  indeclinable  a.  and  s.  all 

sorts  of,  all  sorts  of  things. 
ottgcmcin,  a.  general,  universal. 
aEtaglii^,  a.  daily,  everyday. 
Silken,  pi.  Alps. 
al^,  c.  {definite  past  time)  when. 

\\ad.  as,  as  a;  (after  comparor- 

live)  than. 
alfo,  adv.  so,  thus,  then. 
ait,  a.  old,  ancient. 
mtat,  m.  2".  altar. 
5(ltcr,  n.  1.  age. 
Slmcnfa,  America. 
$(mcnfancr,   n.    1.    (—In,  /.   4) 

American. 
amcrifanife^,  a.  American. 
an,  prep,  at,  close  by,  by;  about; 

in,  of,  to,  by  means  of. 
an'bictcti,*  v.  offer. 
5(n6(trf,  m.  2.  view,  aspect,  sight. 
anbad^ttg,  a.  devout,  attentive. 
anbcr,  a.  other,  else,  different. 
dnbcrn,  v.  alter,  change.     ||  e«  ift 

nid^t  gu  — ,  it  can't  be  helped. 
2(ttcfbote,  /.  4.  anecdote, 
an'fangcn,*  t;.  begin,  commence, 
angcne^m,  a.  agreeable,  pleasant. 
an'f)aiUn,*  v.  stop,  stand  still. 
^nf^otjt,  f.  4.  rising  ground,  hill, 
on'fkgcn,  v.  accuse,  charge, 
ati'fommcn,*  v.  (f.)  arrive. 
Slnfunft,  /.  2".  arrival. 
an'nal^ett,  v.  to  sew  on. 


133 


134 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


an'ncl^tncn,*  v.  take,  accept;  aa- 
sume.  II  refl.  {with  gen.)  take 
an  interest  in. 

an'reben,  v.  address,  accost. 

att'fcftctt,*  V.  look  at,  regard,  con- 
sider. 

S(nft(^t,/.4.  sight,  view,  prospect; 
opinion.  ||  — ^jjoftfarte,  /.  4. 
picture  post  card. 

an'ipuditn,*  v.  address,  accost. 

Slnf|)ruti^,  m.  2".  claim.  ||  in  — 
ncf)mcn,  lay  claim  to,  take  up. 

axi^tatt,  prp.  instead  of,  in  the 
place  of. 

an'ftrenQCtt,  v.  strain,  exert. 

5(nftrcngung,/.  4.  exertion,  strain. 

^nttooxt,  f.  4.  answer,  reply. 

anttoottcn,  v.  answer,  reply. 

on'tjertrauctt,  v.  entrust,  confide. 

Slnjcige,  /.  4.  indication,  notice; 
advertisement. 

an'siei^Ctt,  *  v.  pull  on.  ||  refl.  dress, 
put  on  one^s  clothes. 

^pUh  w.  I'',  apple. 

^thtxt,  f.  4.  work. 

arbeitcn,  v.  labor,  work. 

SlrBeitcr,  m.  1.  workman,  laborer. 

axQttn,  V.  anger,  annoy. 

5(rm,  m.  2.  arm.  ||  — banb,  n. 
3''.  bracelet. 

arm,  a.  poor. 

Sirmcl,  m.  1.  sleeve. 

axmiidj,  a.  poor,  miserable. 

Slrt,  /.  4.  kind,  species,  sort; 
manner,  way. 

^t^i,  m.  2".  physician. 

audi,  c.  and  cwi.  also,  too,  likewise. 

awf,  pry.  upon,  on;  at,  in,  of. 

fiviX\vi^xt%  V.  {(heat.)  perform, 
represent,  act. 

$(uffit]^ruttg,  /.  4.  {theat.)  per- 
formance, representation. 

$(uf gabe,  /.  4.  task,  theme^  prob- 
lem. 


auf  i^drcn,  v.  cease,  stop. 

oufmcrffam,  a.  attentive. 

auf raumcn,  t;.  clear  up,  put  in 
order. 

Sluffa^,  m.  2".  composition,  es- 
say. 

auf'fcl^cn,*  look  up.  ||  as  s.  sur- 
prise, sensation. 

auffc^cn,  V.  put  on. 

aufftc^cn,*  V.  get  up,  rise. 

5(uftrag,  w.  2".  commission. 

auf'tragen,*  t;.  carry  up,  charge, 
commission,  tell. 

auf'trctctt,*  V.  (f.)  step  up,  enter 
upon  the  stage,  make  appear- 
ance, act. 

auf'ttja^en,  v.  awake,  wake  up. 

auf'ttJcrfen,  v.  awaken,  rouse  from 
sleep. 

Slufsug,  m.  2".  {theat.)  act. 

Stttgc,  n.  H,  -n)  eye.  ||  — nar^t, 
m.  occulist. 

Stugenblirf,  m.  2.  moment. 

an§,  prp.  out  of,  from,  of. 

an^'hc^cxn,  v.  mend;  restore. 

ttu^'benfcn,*  v.  devise,  contrive, 
imagine. 

an^'^ai)xcn,*  v.  (f.)  take  a  drive. 

^n^iafixt,  f.  4.  drive. 

Slttj^ftug,  m.  2".  excursion,  trip, 
outing. 

au^'^aqtn,  v.  ask  many  ques- 
tions. 

au§'^uf)Xtn,  V.  carry  out;  accom- 
plish, perform;  work  out  in  de- 
tail. 

SCui^gabc,  /.  4.  (books)  edition. 
II  {money)  expense,  expendi- 
ture. 

au^'qthtn,*  V,  give  out,  spend. 

ou^'gc^ctt,*  V.  (f.)  go  out. 

$(u^hmft,  /.  2".  information. 

au^'xttftn,*  V.  cry  out,  exclaim. 

au^'xttfitn,  V.  rest,  repose. 


/ 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


135 


au^ 'fe^cn,*  v.  look,  appear.  ||  — 
toitf  look  like,  resemble.  ||  as 
s.  appearance,  looks. 

auftctt,  ad.  outside,  without. 

aufecr,  prp.  except,  beside.  ||  — * 
orbcntlid^,  extraordinary. 

5(U!^ficftt,  /.  4.  view,  prospect. 

Stu^ftattung,  /.  4.  outfit. 

auj^'fteigcn,*  v.  (f.)  get  out. 

5(u^ftcttung,  /.  4.  exposition,  ex- 
hibition. 

au^'fucfien,  v.  select. 

aw^'iibcn,  ?;.  exercise,  exert. 

^n^tt)ai)l,  f.  4.  choice,  selection. 

an^'tt)ai)Un,  v.  choose,  select. 

5(utomoiiii,  n,  2.  automobile, 
motor-car. 


f8ah,  n.  3".  bath.  ||  — csitntner,  n. 
bath-room. 

S3aftn,  /.  4.  road,  way;  railway. 
II  — l^of,  m.  railway  station. 

ftatb,  ad.  soon,  shortly,  quickly. 

S5attf,/.  2".  bench. 

fiarfufi,  a.  barefoot  (ed). 

JBart,  m.  2".  beard. 

l&auen,  v.  build. 

S3aucr,  m.  (-§  or  -n)  peasant, 
farmer. 

SBaucritt,  /.  4.  peasant,  country- 
woman. 

S3aum,  m.  2".  tree. 

Ibcaftfidftttgen,  v.  have  in  view,  in- 
tend. 

S3camte(r),  m.  a.  os  s.  official. 

ficanthjorten,  t;.  answer. 

bcauffic^tigen,  v.  superintend,  con- 
trol. 

Ibebetfen,  v.  cover. 

bebienen;  v.  serve,  attend.  ||  reji, 
(ivith  gen.)  make  use  of;  (at 
table)  help  yourself. 

SJebingung,  /.  4.  condition. 


Bcbiirfcn,*  v.  (gen.)3need,  want. 

hmUn,  V.  hurry,  hasten. 

S^efe^l,  m.  2.  order,  command. 

lief ei^ (en,*  v.  command,  order. 

befinben,*  v.  refl,  be,  feel.  ||  SBic 
—  ©ie  ftc^?  how  are  you?  how 
do  you  do?    ||  as  s.  health. 

Befragcn,  v.  ask,  question,  ex- 
amine. 

l&cfrcunbcn,  v.  befriend,  connect 
by  friendship,  be  friends. 

begegnett;  v.  meet,  meet  with. 

Bcginncn,*  v.  begin,  undertake. 

SBcgriff,  m.  2.  conception,  idea. 
II  tm  —  fcln,  be  on  the  point 
of,  be  about  to. 

Begriiftcn,  v.  greet,  welcome. 

Bel^agen,  v.  impers.  please  (dat.). 

Bcl^anbeitt,  v.  treat,  use. 

hex,  prp.  by,  by  the  side  of,  near, 
at,  in,  with,  to;  at  the  house  of. 

htVhtiiaUcn,*  v.  keep,  preserve. 

Iicibe,  a.  both,  the  two. 

S3etlcge,  /.  4.  supplement. 

beilcgctt,  v.  add,  enclose  in  (dat.). 

fiei'trctctt,*  v.  (f.)  agree;  enter, 
join. 

hdannt,  a.  known,  well  known. 
II  as  s.  acquaintance. 

Bcfiagen,  v.  deplore.  ||  refl.  to 
complain  of  (iibcr  ace). 

Bcftcibctt,  V.  clothe. 

hctommcn,*  v.  obtain,  get. 

S3c(gicn,  Belgium. 

f8tiuhti)txtf  f.  favor,  popularity. 

bcmerfen,  v.  perceive,  observe. 

fienii^cn,  v.  make  use  of. 

bcqucm,  a.  comfortable,  easy. 

l&cratcn,*  v.  advise;  take  counsel, 
confer. 

S3erat«ng,  /.  4.  council,  delibera- 
tion. 

htxanhtn,  v.  rob,  deprive. 

htt^it,  a.  ready,  prepared. 


136 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


S3  erg,  m,2.  mountain. 

Ibcrtr^tcn,  v.  report,  tell. 

S3er(in,  Berlin  {accent  on  last  sylr 
lahle). 

IScruf,  m,  2.  vocation,  trade,  pro- 
fession. 

beriil^mt,  a.  renowned,  famous. 

bcfc^aftigcn,  v.  refl.  to  occupy 
oneself. 

Befcfjlie^en,*  v.  determine,  decide. 

befcftrcibcn,*  v.  describe. 

f8e(d)te\hnnQ,  /.  4.  description. 

Iicfi^cn,*  V.  possess,  have. 

IScfi^er,  m.  1.  (—in,  /.  4.)  posses- 
sor, owner. 

Bcfonbcr^,  ad.  particularly. 

bcforgen,  v.  take  care  of;  procure. 

S3cfi)rgun9,  /.  4.  care,  manage- 
ment. 

ht^pxtd)tn,*  V.  discuss,  talk  over. 

bcffcr,  a.  better. 

l^cffcrn,  V.  better,  improve. 

S3cffcrung,  /.  4.  amelioration,  im- 
provement. II  fiute  — !  I  hope 
you  will  soon  be  well. 

ht^t,  a.  best. 

Beftanbig,  a.  continual,  perpetual. 

l&cftclftcti,*  V.  exist.  II  consist  (of, 
au«).  II  auf  (dat.)  —,  to  make  a 
point  of,  insist  upon. 

bcfteigcn,*  v.  ascend,  climb. 

bcftcttcn,  V.  order. 

ficftimmt,  a.  appointed,  fixed, 
definite. 

Scfud),  m.  2.  visit. 

licfuc^cn,  V.  visit. 

bctcn,  V.  pray. 

ftctrot^tcn,  ?^.  look  at,  consider. 

bctrcjfcn,  t^.  concern.  ||  XO(x^  if)n 
betrifft,  as  far  as  he  is  con- 
cerned. 

bctrctcn,*  v.  step  on,  tread,  enter. 

S3ett,  n.  (-€«,  -en)  bed. 

lieugeit/ 1;.  bend. 


S3ek)i)Iferung,  /.  4.  population. 

betJOtfte^en,*  v.  impend,  be  im- 
minent. 

betuad^fen,*  v.  overgrow,  cover. 

S8eU»egimg,  /.  4.  movement,  mo- 
tion. 

behierben,*  v.  apply  for. 

S3enjerbung,  /.  4.  application. 

bclnirten,  v.  entertain,  treat. 

belDO^inen,  v.  live  in,  inhabit. 
II  ^eft)o{)ner,  m.  1.  inhabitant, 
occupant. 

benjitnbern,  v.  admire. 

bejal^len,  v.  pay. 

biegett,*  v.  bend,  bow;  turn. 

SBter,  n.  beer. 

S5i(b,  n.  3.  picture,  painting. 

bittig,  a.  cheap,  low  priced. 

binben,*  v.  bind,  tie;  bind  a  book. 

bt^,  ad.  and  c.  till,  until. 

biSc^en;  ein  — ,  a  httle  bit,  some- 
what. 

S3itte,  /.  4.  request. 

bitten,*  v.  beg,  request,  ask  (for, 
um).     II  bitte,    please,    if   you 


blaff,  a.  pale,  wan. 
a3(att,  n.  3^  leaf,  sheet, 
blan,  a.  blue. 

hitihtn*  V.  (f.)  remain,  stay. 
S5tirf,  m.  2.  glance,  look;  view, 
btonb,  a.  fight-colored,  fair, 
©oben,  m.  V.  bottom,  ground. 
JBubenfee,  m.  Lake  of  Constance. 
93oDt,  n.  2.  boat. 
S3otfd^oft,  /.  4.  message. 
S3ranbenbnrg,  a  Prussian  province, 
branc^en,  v.  need,  use. 
braunen,  v.  grow  or  make  brown, 
breit,  a.  broad, 
brennen,*  v.  burn. 
S3rtef,  m.  2.  letter. 
S3ritte,  /.  4.  spectacles,  pair  of 
spectacles. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


137 


Brittgcn,*  v.  bring. 
f8tot,  n.  2.  bread. 
83rucfe,  /.  4.  bridge, 
©ruber,  m.  V.  brother, 
©runncti,  m.  1.  well,  spring. 
3©uc6,  n.  3".  book.     ||  — ()anbluna, 

/.    4.   bookstore.     ||  — {)(inblcr, 

m.  1.  bookseller. 
S5«l^ne,  /.  4.  (theat.)  stage. 
JBunb,  m.  2".  band,  tie;  league, 

federation.     ||  — e^rat,  Federal 

Council. 
Bunt,  a.  variegated,  colored. 
JBurg,  /.  4.  castle,  citadel. 
JBitrgcr,  m.  1.  citizen.     ||  — frieg, 

m.  2.  civil  war. 
©utter,  /.  butter. 

^tjoval,  m.  2".  choral,  hymn. 
6^rtft,  m.  4.  Christian. 

ba,  a(i.  there,  then.  ||  c.  when, 
whereas,  as,  since.  ||  —bet, 
ad.  close  by;  c^  bleibt  — , 
agreed,  that  is  the  end  of  it. 
II  — burd^,  — filr,  — mit,  —rum, 
etc.,  see  Gram.  7,  IV. 

^a^,  n.  3".  roof. 

^amc,  /.  4.  lady. 

bamtt,  ad.:  Gram.  7,  IV.  ||  c.  in 
order  that,  that. 

^ampfer,  m.  1.  steamer. 

^anf,  m.  thanks. 

banfbar,  a.  thankful,  grateful. 

banfen,  v.  thank. 

bann,  ad.  then,  thereupon. 

bar'ftetten,  v.  exhibit,  represent. 
II  {theat.)  perform. 

^CL^f  c.  that,  so  that. 

^auer,/.  duration,  length  of  time. 
II  auf  bie  — ,  in  the  long  run. 

baucrn,  v.  last,  endure. 

bcinig,  poss.  pr. 


benfen,*  v.  think,  imagine. 

^cntmal,  n.  2.  or  Z".  mommient, 
memorial. 

betiti,  c.  for.  II  ad.  then;  for. 
II  {after  comparative)  than. 

ber  (bie,  ha^),  def.  art. 

bergleic^en,  ad.  such,  such  as. 

berjcnige,  dem.  pr. 

berfelbe,  dem.  pr. 

be^^alb,  ad.  on  this  account, 
therefore. 

bcutfd),  a.  German. 

^cutfc^tanb,  n.  Germany. 

^iamant,  m.  4.  diamond. 

bic^ten,  V.  compose,  write. 

^tcftter,  m.  1.  poet,  author. 

bienett,  v.  {dat.)  serve,  be  of  ser- 
vice to,  be  useful  to. 

Wiener,  m.  1.  servant. 

^ienft,  m.  2.  service.  ||  — mitb* 
d^en,  n.  maid. 

btc^,  bicfcr,  dem.  pr.  and  a. 

bo(f|,  c.  yet,  however. 

^oftor,  m.  4.  {title)  Doctor,  Dr. 

^otn,  m.  2.  cathedral. 

^onau,  /.  Danube. 

^onner^tag,  m.  2.  Thursday. 

X)i)rf,  n.  S\  village. 

bort,  ad.  there,  in  that  place. 

^rama,  n.  {pi.  !Dramcn)  drama, 
play. 

hxau^eUfad.  out  of  doors,  without. 

brinnen,  ad.  inside,  within. 

^rittcl,  n.  1.  third. 

^rofcftfe,  /.  4.  cab. 

^rurf,  m.  2.  impression,  print. 

hu,  pers.  pr, 

^uft,  m.  2".  exhalation,  fra- 
grance. 

bunfel,  a.  dark. 

burcft,  ad.  through.  ||  jyrp.  by 
means  of,  through,  owing  to,  by. 

burrftbringcn,*  v.  penetrate,  per- 
meate. 


138 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


butddffteften,*  v.  flow  through, 
burd^'fe^en,  v.  carry  through. 
bihrfcn,*  v.  modal  aux.:  see  Gram. 

19,  II. 
^tt^cnb,  n,  2.  dozen. 


ebeti,  a.  even,  level,  flat.  ||  ad. 
even,  just.  ||  — fo,  likewise, 
in  the  same  way.  ||  — fall^, 
likewise,  also,  too. 

@cfe,  /.  4.  corner. 

cbel  {decline  cblcr,  etc.)^  a.  noble, 
generous.     ||  as  s.  nobleman. 

©feu,  n.  ivy. 

efte,  c.  before. 

el^ren,  v.  honor,  respect.  ||  qc^ 
el^rtcr  §crr!  dear  sir. 

®i,  n.  3.  egg. 

ciferfiieldtig,  a.  jealous. 

eifrig,  a.  zealous,  eager,  ardent. 

eigen,  a.  own. 

©igetifd^aft,  /.  4.  quahty,  pecuh- 
arity. 

citt,  indef.  art.,  num.  or  pr. 

^xnhanh,  m.  2".  bmding. 

eitt'bilben,  v.  refl.  imagine,  fancy, 
think  {what  is  impossible). 

cm'bmgcn,*  v.  bring  m. 

einfad^,  a.  single,  simple. 

Gtnfluff,  m.  2".  influence. 

Gtiigcborcnc(r),  a.  as  s.  native. 

einige,  einigci^,  pr.  some,  a  few. 

etntgen,  v.  unite. 

^nfauf,  m.  2".  purchase. 

cin'Jabett,*  v.  invite. 

©inkbung,  /.  4.  invitation. 

einmal,  ad.  once,  one  time. 

©inna^me,  /.  4.  receipts,  in- 
come. 

ein'ne^men,*  v.  receive,  take  pos- 
session of,  occupy. 

eitt'fc^(afen,*r.  (f.)  fall  asleep,  go 
to  sleep. 


ein'ftctgcn,*  v.  (f.)  climb  in,  get  in, 
enter. 

etti'tteten,*  v.  (f.)  enter. 

©intritt^f arte,  /.  4.  ticket  (of  ad- 
mission). 

cintjerftonben,  a.;  —  fcin  ntit,  to 
agree  (with  or  to). 

©intool^ner,  m.  1.  inhabitant. 

einjein,  a.  single,  separate. 

©ifenbal^n,  /.  4.  railway. 

©tbe,  /.  rivefT  in  Germany. 

clcftrift^,  a.  electric. 

©Item,  pi.  parents. 

empfe^len,*  v.  reconmiend. 

©m^fel^lung,  /.  4.  recommenda- 
tion; compliments. 

empflnben,*  v.  feel,  perceive,  be 
sensible  of. 

cm^ior,  ad.  upward.  ||  fid^  — 
f(5tDtngcn,*  rise. 

©«be,n.  (-e6,-cn)  end,  conclusion. 

©nglanber,  m.  1.  (—in,  /.  4)  Eng- 
lishman {or  woman). 

englifd^,  a.  English. 

©niCeI,m.  1.  grandson,  grandchild. 

entfernt,  a.  remote,  distant. 

©ntfetnung,  /.  4.  removal;  dis- 
tance. 

entftatten,*  v.  contain,  hold. 

cntlang,  prp.  along. 

entfdftulbigen,  v.  excuse. 

entfc^licft,  a.  terrible. 

entf^jringen,*  v.  (f.)  spring  from, 
rise. 

tt,  pers.  pr. 

etbouen,  v.  build,  erect. 

@tbf  r^af  t,/.  4.  inheritance,  legacy. 

©rbe,  /.  4.  earth. 

erfcl^ren,*  v.  experience,  learn, 
hear. 

©rfal^ntng,  /.  4.  experience, 
knowledge. 

©tfolg,  m.  2.  result,  effect;  sue- 


GEKMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULAEY 


139 


tt^thtn,  ppL  as  a.  devoted,  re- 
spectful. 

et^olten,*  v,  obtain,  receive,  get. 

crftcbcn,*  v.  raise. 

tti)txittn,  V.  exhilarate. 

er^olen,  v.  refi.  recover. 

cmncrn,  v.  remind.  ||  refl.  re- 
member, recollect. 

©rinncrung,  /.  4.  remembrance. 

ctfditcn,  V.  refl.  catch  cold. 

©rfaltttng,  /.  4.  cold. 

crflarctt,  v.  explain. 

crfranfcn,  v.  fall  sick. 

©rfunbigung,  /.  4.  inquiry. 

txianhtn,  v.  permit,  allow. 

^tithm^,  n.  2.  experience,  event. 

crmiibcn,  v.  get  tired,  become 
fatigued. 

ernenncn,*  v.  nominate,  appoint. 

crtcgcn,  v.  excite,  provoke. 

crft,  num.  a.  and  ad.  first,  at 
first,  not  until.  ||  eben  — ,  only 
just. 

erhjae^ifctt,  a.  full-grown. 

ertoarten,  v.  expect,  await. 

ettoerbcti,*  v.  acquire. 

erttiibcrtt,  v.  return,  answer. 

erja^tctt,  v.  relate,  narrate,  tell. 

Qx^df)lnnq,  f.  4.  narrative,  story. 

etjcugen,  v.  engender,  produce. 

Qt^cnqni^,  n.  2.  product,  pro- 
duction. 

t^f  pers.  pr. 

effcn,*  V.  eat. 

tttoa,  ad.  nearly,  about. 

etltJa^,  indef.  pr.  something. 

^uro^ja,  n.  Europe. 

euro^dtfc^,  a.  European. 

eiiattgelifd^,  a.  evangelical. 


fd^tg,  a.  capable. 
faftren,*  v.  (f.)  go;  (in  a  carriage^ 
train,  hoat,  etc.)  drive,  sail,  etc. 


gaftrfartc,  /.  4.  (rail.)  ticket. 
II  — nau^gabc,  /.  ticket  office. 

i^af:ixpian,  m.  2".  time-table. 

fjai^rrab,  n.  3".  bicycle. 

5?a^tfd^cin,  m.  2.  ticket. 

gatt,  m.  2".  fall,  falling;  case. 

fatten,*  V.  (I)  fall. 

fatt)^,  c.  in  case,  if. 

fJamiKc,  /.  4.  family. 

fangcn,*  v.  catch. 

??ar6c,  /.  4.  color,  hue. 

faffcn,  V.  seize,  take  hold  of, 
grasp.    II  refl.  compose  oneself. 

faft,  ad.  almost. 

faul,  a.  lazy,  idle. 

%tht\xat,  m.  February. 

gcbcr,  /.  4.  pen. 

fcl^tcti,  V.  miss,  be  wrong,  be  ab- 
sent. II  impers.  to  lack,  be  a 
lack  of  (an). 

ffe^iler,  m.  1.  fault,  error. 

fjclb,  n.  3.  field. 

ffelfen,  m.  1.  rock. 

fjcnftcr,  n.  1.  window. 

fern,  a.  far,  remote,  distant. 

fjerne,  /.  distance. 

fer tig,  a.  finished,  through;  ready. 
II  —  madden,  finish  making,  fin- 
ish. 

feft,  a.  fast,  firm.  |j  —  feijen,  fix, 
determine 

fenc^t,  a.  moist. 

SitfftelgeBirge,  n.  mountain  range 
in  Germany. 

fjteber,  n.  1.  fever. 

finbcn,*  V.  find. 

gifc^,  m.  2.  fish. 

tjifcfter,  m.  1.  fisherman. 

flad^,  a.  flat,  level. 

S^dd^entnl^ah,  m.  area. 

gleiftft,  n.  flesh,  meat. 

gletft,  w.  diligence,  industry,  as- 
siduity. 

Peifeig,  a,  diligent,  industrious. 


140 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


fltcfectt,*  V.  (I)  jBow. 

flnd)tcn,  V,  refl.  flee,  escape. 

JJlwfl,  w.  2".  river,  stream. 

folgcn,  V.  follow  (dat.). 

fort,  oc?.  forth,  away,  gone,  off. 

fort'faftrcn,*  v.  continue,  go  on. 

furt'gc^cn,  *  t;.  (f .)  go  away,  depart. 

fott'frf)trfcn,  V.  send  away. 

fort'fc^cn,  r.  continue. 

tf ortf c^ung, /.  4.  continuation. 

forage,  /.  4.  question,  inquiry. 

fragcn,  v.  ask,  question. 

granfrcid^,  n.  France. 

titans,  Francis. 

fratt5drtf(^,  a.  French. 

^taUf  f.  4.  woman,  wife;  Mrs. 

Srdulein,  n.  1.  young  lady;  Miss. 

fret,  a.  free.  ||  itn  — n,  in  the 
open  air. 

frcmb,  a.  strange;  foreign.  ||  as 
s.  stranger,  foreigner.  ||  —en* 
pcnfion,  /.  4.  boarding-house. 

Srcubc,  /.  4.  joy,  pleasure. 

frcucti,  V.  give  pleasure,  please. 
II  refl.  rejoice,  be  glad;  look  for- 
ward with  pleasure  (to,  auf). 

grcuttb,  m.  2.  (—in,  /.  4.)  friend. 

frcunbltt^i,  a.  friendly,  kind. 

gricbrtd^,  Frederick. 

fricrcn,*  v.  impers.  freeze. 

frtfcft,  a.  fresh. 

froft,  a.  joyous,  glad. 

frdijltdft,  a.  merry,  gay. 

friift,  a.  early.  ||  l^cutc  — ,  this 
morning. 

grii^iaftr,  n.  2.  spring. 

frii^ftiirfcn,  v.  breakfast. 

fit^ren,  v.  lead,  guide. 

fiir,  prp.  for,  in  behalf  of. 

gur ti)t,  /.  fear,  dread. 

furc^tbar,  a.  fearful. 

giirft,  m.  4.  prince,  sovereign. 

guff,  m.  2".  foot.  II— ball,  m, 
football. 


®aBcl,/.  4.  fork. 

galftncn,  v.  yawn. 

@ang,  m.  2".  walk,  pace;  corri- 
dor. 

gans,  a.  whole,  complete.  ||  ad. 
wholly,  entirely,  quite. 

gar,  ad.  quite,  very.  ||  —  nid^t, 
by  no  means,  not  at  all. 

©artcn,  m.  1".  garden. 

(SJaft,  m.  2".  guest,  visitor. 

gcbdren,*  v.  bear,  bring  forth. 

©cbdubc,  n.  1.  building,  edifice. 

gcbctt,*  V.  give,  confer,  bestow. 
il  cS  gibt,  there  is,  there  are 
{ace.). 

QHhtt,  n.  2.  prayer. 

^ebiet,  n.  2.  territory,  district. 

gebilbet,  a.  cultivated,  educated. 

©ebtrgc,  n.  1.  mountains,  chain 
or  range  of  mountains. 

©cburt,  /.  4.  birth.  ||  —Sort,  m.  2. 
bh"thplace.  ||— Sanaeigc,  /.  4. 
birth  notice.  ||— ^tag,  m.  birth- 
day. 

©cbtd^t,  n.  2.  poem. 

@cbu(b,  /.  patience. 

©cfa^r,  /.  4.  danger. 

©cfdftrtc,  m.  4.  companion. 

gcfattcn,*  v.  please.  ||  ba«  gcfftUt 
mir,  I  like  that. 

©cftiigcl,  n.  1.  birds,  poultry. 

©cfiiftl,  n.  2.  feeling,  sensation, 
sentiment. 

gcgcn,  prp.  against,  toward. 

©cgcttb,  /.  4.  region,  country. 

©ciiatt,  m.  2.  pay,  salary. 

gcftctm,  a.  secret. 

gcficn,*  V.  (f.)  go,  walk,  leave. 

gc^orc^icn,  v.  obey. 

gcl^iJrcn,  t;.  belong  to. 

©ctft,  m.  3.  spirit,  mind. 

geiftig,  a.  intellectual. 

gciftltift,  a.  spiritual,  clerical. 
[|  as  s.  clergyman. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


141 


ficlb,  a.  yellow. 

@clb,  n.  3.  money.  ||  — Beutcl, 
m.  1.  purse. 

Qclcgcn,  a.  situated. 

©clegcnftctt,  /.  4.  occasion,  op- 
portunity. 

Qclingcn,*  v,  impers.  (f.)  succeed, 
prosper:  see  Gram.  18a. 

ficmctn,  a.  common,  general. 

^cmctnbc,  /.  4.  congregation. 

ficmcitifam,  a.  common,  joint. 

GJcmufe,  n.  1.  vegetable,  vege- 
tables. 

gcnau,  a.  close,  precise. 

©cncral,  m.  2.  general. 

gencfcn,*  v.  (f.)  recover,  be  re- 
stored to  health,  get  well. 

gctticftcn,*  v.  enjoy. 

fieniigcn,  t;.  be  enough,  satisfy. 

gcrabc,  a.  straight,  direct,  right. 

gercrf)t,  a.  just. 

©crccl^tigfctt,  /.  4.  justice. 

©cric^it,  71.  2.  court  of  justice. 
II  (of  food)  dish, 

gertng,  a.  small,  of  small  value. 

ficrn(c),  ad.  with  pleasure,  gladly, 
willingly.  ||  cth)a8  —  tun,  Hke 
doing  a  thing:  see  Gram.  19, 
lie. 

@cfang,  m.  2.  song,  singing. 

©efcftiift,  n.  2.  business. 

ficftiftcl^cti,*  v.  (f.)  happen. 

dJcft^cnf,  n.  2.  gift,  present. 

©cfd)i(i^tc,  /.  4.  story,  tale,  his- 
tory. 

gcfd)ti^tlt(ift,  a.  historical. 

gcfd^trft;  a.  fit,  apt,  clever. 

@cfcttf(^aft,  /.  4.  company,  so- 
ciety; party.  ||  — gfleib,  n. 
evening  dress. 

@cfc^,  n.  2.  law. 

@cfi(^|t,  n.  3.  sight,  face.  ||  — 8^ 
farbc,  /.  complexion 

ficftci^cn,*  V.  confess,  admit. 


Qeftern,  ad.  yesterday. 

gcfunb,  a.  healthy. 

©cfuttb^cit,  /.  health. 

©ctoalt,  /.  4.  power,  force. 

gctuiff,  a.  certain,  sure. 

gchjo^nltd^,  a.  customary,  usual. 

ma§,  m.  2".  glass. 

filaubcn,  v.  believe  (dat.  of  per- 
son). 

Olctcft,  a.  like,  alike.  ||  ad.  im- 
mediately, at  once. 

©lorfc,/.  4.  bell. 

Q^IM,  n.  luck,  good  fortune,  hap- 
piness, prosperity. 

qlMiidi,  a.  fortunate,  lucky. 
II  — crtDCtfc,  ad.  fortunately, 
happily. 

fitidbtg,  a.  gracious. 

(Bott,  m.  3".  God.  ||  — c^btcnft, 
m.  divine  service.  ||  — e!8f)auS, 
n.  church. 

@rab,  n.  3".  grave. 

©rabcn,  m.  1".  ditch,  trench. 

@rab,  m.  2.  degree. 

©raf,  m.  4.  count. 

©rafin,  /.  4.  countess. 

gratulicrcn,  v.  congratulate. 

©tense,  /.  4.  boundary,  bor- 
der. 

firengen,  v.  border,  bound. 

^decftenlanb,  n.  Greece. 

grofi,  a.  great,  large,  big. 

©roguatcr,  m.  1".  grandfather. 

griin,  a.  green. 

©rnnb,  m.  2".  ground,  reason. 

nriinben,  v.  found,  establish. 

©riinbnng,  /.  4.  foundation. 

©rn^j^e,  /.  4.  group. 

©rug,  m.  2".  greeting. 

gtiifecn,  v.  greet,  salute. 

gut,    a.    good,    excellent.    ||  ad 
well. 

dJljmnafium,  n.  (-«,  -ten)  classical 
high  school. 


142 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


l^abcti,*  V.  have,  possess. 

^ah^hnxQ,  family  name  of  the 
reigning  house  of  Austria, 

$ofcn,  m.  V.  harbor. 

^a^n,  m.  2".  cock. 

Ilttlb,  a.  half. 

$alftc,  /.  4.  half. 

inalitn,*  V.  hold,  keep,  retain; 
think,  consider.  ||  —  filr,  deem, 
consider  as.    ||  intr.  stop. 

$anb,  /.  2\  hand.  ||  — fc^ii^, 
m,  2.  glove.  ||  — tud^,  n.  3". 
towel. 

l^attgett,  ^angcn,*  v.  hang. 

J^an^,  short  for  Qo^annt^,  John. 

^art,  a.  hard,  stiff,  difficult. 

^arj,  m.  the  Harz  Mountains. 

^oupt,  n.  S\  head,  chief.  ||  — = 
ftra^c,  /.  principal  street. 

^an^,  n.  3".  house.  ||  gu  — c,  at 
home.  II  nad^  — c,  toward  home, 
home.  II  — arbcit,  /.  house- 
work; lesson  to  be  learned 
at  home.  ||  — frau,/.  lady  of  the 
house.    II  — tiir,  /.  house  door. 

^ccr,  n.  2.  army. 

J&cft,  n.  2.  exercise  book,  blank 
book. 

J&cttnat,  /.  4.  home. 

^cimrctfc,  /.  4.  homeward  jour- 
ney, return  home. 

i^ctft,  a.  hot. 

$elb,  m.  4.  hero. 

ftelfcn,*  V.  help  (cioi.). 

t^tU,  a.  clear,  bright. 

^er,  ad.  hither,  here  (motion 
toward  the  speaker).  \\  — * 
auf,  up  here.  ||  — au«,  out. 
II  — bet,  hither,  this  way.  ||  — * 
cin,  in  here,  here.  ||  —iihtv, 
over,  across.  ||  — urn,  around, 
about:  see  Gram.  29. 

J&crbft,  m.  2.  autumn. 

i^er'gebcn,*  v.  give  up,  surrender. 


J&crr,  m.  (-n,  -en)  master,  gentle- 
man.   II  (in  address)  Mr. 

l^er'rttfttcn,  v.  put  in  order,  ar- 
range. 

l^errlic^,  a.  magnificent,  splendid. 

^errfd^cr,  m.  1.  ruler. 

^ers,  n.  (-en«,  -en)  heart. 

l^erslic^,  a.  hearty,  cordial,  affec- 
tionate. 

^erjog,  m.  2".  duke. 

fitute,  ad.  to-day.  ||  —  abcnb, 
this  evening. 

i^eutig,  a.  of  to-day,  to-day's, 
present. 

Jier,  ad.  here.  ||  — l^er,  hither, 
this  way. 

l^ieftg,  a.  of  this  place. 

l^tn,  ad.  thither,  dowTi  (motion 
away  from  the  speaker).  \\  — * 
ah,  down.  ||  — auf,  up.  ||  — * 
on6,  out.  II  — ein,  in :  see  Gram. 
29. 

Ifttn'Iegen,  v.  lay  down,  put  away. 

fttntcr,  prp.  behind,  after.  ||  — * 
0ef)en,*  (insep.)  deceive.  ||  — * 
laffen,*  (insep.)  leave  behdnd, 
bequeath. 

^i^e,  /.  4.  heat. 

]^0(^  (in  declension  f)0^),  a.  high, 
tall,  great,  exalted,  sublime. 

i^dc^ltd^,  ad.  highly,  in  a  high 
degree. 

pd^ft,  a.  highest,  most.  ||  ad. 
extremely. 

^od^jett,  /.  4.  weddmg. 

^of,  m.  2".  courtyard,  yard, 
court. 

ftoffen,  V.  hope,  expect. 

^offnung,/.  4.  hope,  expectation. 

^dfKtt^,  a.  courteous,  polite. 

1^0^,  see  \)oci). 

^oi^t,  f.  4.  height. 

j^olldnbifd^;  a.  Dutch. 

il'dttn,  V,  hear,  listen. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


143 


^ottl,  n.  (-«,  -«)  hotel. 
iufifdft,  a.  pretty. 
^iigei,  m.  1.  hill,  hillock. 
$Uttb,  m.  2.  dog. 
^utigrig,  a.  hungry. 
^ut,  m,  2".  hat. 

l(ft,  pers.  2?^. 

t(|r,  pers.  and  poss.  a.  and  pr. 

immcr,  ad.  ever,  always.  ||  — ^ 
bar,  —fort,  ad.  always,  forever. 

in,  prp.  (ace.)  in,  into.  ||  (dat.) 
within,  at,  in. 

3nbttftrtc,  /.  4.  industry,  manu- 
facture. 

Snl^filt,  m.  contents,  substance. 

Sttfe^rtft,  /.  4.  inscription. 

intctcffant,  a.  interesting. 

itttcrcfficrctt,  v.  interest.  ||  ftd^  — 
filr,  be  interested  in. 

trgenb,  indef.  pr.  and  ad.  any. 
II  — ino,  anywhere,  somewhere. 

irrctt,  V.  refl.  be  mistaken,  com- 
mit an  error. 

ia,  yes. 

gagb,/.  4.  hunt. 

Siiflcr,  m.  1.  hunter. 

3a^r,  n.  2.  year.    ||  — l^unbert,  n.  2. 

century.    ||  — c^^cit,  /.  season. 
Sanuar,  m.  January. 
jcbcr,  indef.  pr.  and  a. 
jcner,  dem.  pr.  and  a. 
ietifciti^,  prp.  on  the  other  side, 

beyond. 
je^ig,  a.  present. 

it^t,  ad.  at  the  present  time,  now. 
3ube,  m.  4.  Jew. 
Swgcttb,  /.  4.  youth. 
SuU,  m.  July, 
iung,  a.  young. 
Smtge,  m.  4.  little  boy,  lad. 
3tttti,  w.  (-S;  -^)  June. 


^affce,  m.  coffee. 

^alftn,  m.  2".  boat. 

^aif cr,  m.  1 .  emperor.    ||  — fronc,/. 

imperial   crown.      ||  — reid^,  n. 

Empire.    ||  — h)ilrbc,  /.  imperial 

dignity  or  office, 
^alifornicn,  California. 
fait,  a.  cold.     ||  — blilttg,  in  cold 

blood,  cool, 
^am^f,  m.  2".  combat,  battle, 

fight. 
^lanjcl,  /.  4.  pulpit. 
Baxl,  Charles. 

^artc,  /.  4.  card,  ticket,  map. 
^artoffcl,  /.  4.  potato. 
^rifc,  m.  1.  cheese. 
^afcrne,  /.  4.  barracks. 
^affc,  /.    4.    money-box,    desk. 

II  (theat.)  ticket  office. 
fatl^olifd^,  a.  Roman  Catholic, 
faufcii,  V.  buy,  purchase. 
^auflcute,  m.  pi.  merchants. 
^aufmann,  m.  3".  merchant. 
fcin  (felner),  pr.  and  a.  no,  none, 

not  one,  not  any. 
Refiner,  m.  1.  waiter. 
fcnncn,*  v.  know,  be  acquainted 

with, 
^tlomctcr,  m.  and  n.  1.  kilometer, 
^inb,  n.  3.  child. 
^it(^|c,  /.  4.  church.    ||  —cnltcb, 

n.  3.  hymn.    ||  — turm,  m.  2". 

tower. 
^trf d^e, /.  4.  cherry.    ||  — bautn,  m. 

cherry-tree, 
fragctt,  V.  complain. 
liar,  a.  clear. 
e,  /.  4.  class. 

cib,  n.  3.  dress,  garment. 
Ilcin,  a.  little,  small. 
flingctt,*  V.  sound,  ring. 
^lofter,  n.  V.  monastery. 
^nabe,  m.  4.  boy. 
^nopl  m,  2\  button. 


144 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


foromal;  a.  colonial. 

fommcii,*  V.  (f.)  come,  arrive,  ap- 
proach; get. 

^Ottbttorct,  /.  4.  confectioner's 
shop,  tea  room. 

^ontg,  7n.  2.  king. 

fiJmgUd),  a.  royal,  kingly. 

ffinncn,*  modal  aux.:  Gram.  19, 
IL 

^olpf,  m.  2".  head.  ||  — fd^mergcn, 
pi.  headache. 

foi'pulent,  a.  corpulent,  fat. 

forrigtcrctt,  v.  correct. 

foftcn,  V.  cost. 

cttagett,  m.  1.  collar. 

frozen,  V.  crow. 

franf,  a.  sick,  ill. 

^ratiattc,  /.  4.  cravat. 

^ricg,  m.  2.  war. 

frdncn,  v.  crown. 

^ttft,/.  2^cow. 

filial,  a.  cool,  fresh. 

^ullur,  /.  4.  civilization. 

^unft,/.  2".  art. 

furiercn,  v.  cure. 

furg,  a.  short. 

fiirslid^,  ad.  lately,  newly. 


Saborotorium  ,n.  (-^,  -Icn)  labo- 
ratory. 

lac^en,  v.  laugh. 

Sabcn,  m.  1  and  1".  shop. 

2age,  /.  4.  situation. 

Saftn,/.  river  in  Germany.  ||  —  * 
brilde,  bridge  over  the  Lahn. 

2anb,  n.  3".  land,  country.  ||  — * 
gut,  n.  3".  estate.  ||  — farte,  /. 
map.  II  — ftrafee,  /.  highroad, 
highway. 

lanben,  v.  land,  disembark. 

Sanbutig^pla^,  m.  2".  landing- 
place. 

Iatt9(c),  a.  long. 


longhJcitcn,  y.  tire,  bore.  ||  refl. 
feel  bored  or  dull. 

langftjcilig,  a.  tedious,  tiresome. 

Idnq^,  prp.  along. 

lattgfam,  a.  slow. 

Idngft,  ad.  long  ago,  long 
since. 

laffcti,*  V.  let  alone,  leave;  let, 
permit,  allow,  suffer.  ||  (be- 
fore infin.)  cause,  make,  have; 
Gram.  26,  Ilia. 

2anb,  n.  leaves,  foliage. 

2attf,  m.  2.  run,  course. 

laufcn,*  V.  (f.)  run. 

2thcn,  n.  1.  life. 

Ithtn,  V.  live,  exist,  dwell.  ||  — 
@tc  h)of)I,  good-by. 

Scbcr,  n.  1.  leather. 

Iccr,  o.  empty,  vain. 

Iccrcn,  V.  empty. 

Icgcn,  V.  lay,  put,  place. 

Scorer,  m.  1.  (—in,  /.  4.)  teacher, 
instructor. 

2tih,  m.  3.  body.  ||  — argt,  m.  at- 
tendant physician. 

Icid^t,  a.  light;  easy. 

£cib,  w.  (-S,  -en)  sorrow.  ||  cS 
tut  mir  leib,  I  am  sorry. 

Icibcn,*  V.  suffer. 

Icibcr,  ad.  imfortunately. 

Scipifiliotftcf,  /.  4.  circulating 
library. 

Ictljen,*  V.  lend. 

Icincn,  a.  linen.  ||  — banb,  m.  2". 
cloth  binding. 

(etten,  v.  lead,  guide. 

Icrnctt,  V.  learn. 

Icfcn,*  v.  read. 

Ic^t,  a.  last.     II  — cr,  latter. 

Icuc^tcn,  v.  hght,  shine. 

ficutc,  pi.  persons,  people. 

licb,  a.  dear.  ||  — cr,  dearer, 
rather.  ||  am  -— ftcn,  Gram.  19, 
lie. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


145 


2hht,  f.  4.  love.  ||  — «ficfrf)id^tc, 
/.love  story. 

lie^en,  v.  love. 

2xMo[iQUit,  f.  4.  unkindness. 

Sicb,  n.  3.  song. 

licfien,*  V.  (f.)  lie,  be  situated,  be. 

Stnbc,  /.  4.  linden,  lime-tree. 

2tmc,  /.  4.  line. 

linUf  ad.  to  or  on  the  left. 

Sonft,  n.  3".  hole. 

SorfC;  /.  4.  lock  of  hair,  curl. 

2i)ffc(,  m.  1.  spoon,  spoonful. 

lo^nen,  v,  reward,  pay,  recom- 
pense. 

Suft,  f.  2".  air.  |i  -f(5iff,  n.  2. 
airship. 

Suft;  /.  2".  pleasure. 

luftio,  o.  gay,  merry,  cheerful. 


madden,  v.  make,  bring  about,  do. 
2Wad)t,  /.  2".  might,  power. 
tnat^ttg,  a.  mighty,  powerful. 
2)labrf|cn,  n.  1.  girl,  maiden. 
SJlal^lseit,  /.  4.  meal. 
SWai,  m.  May. 
9Jlatti5,  Mayence. 
SJlol,  n.  2.  point  of  time,  time. 

II  stDetmal,  twice. 
aWalcr,  m.  1.  painter. 
ma(crif(^,  a.  picturesque. 
man,  indef.  pr.  one,  people,  they. 
manc^er,  indef.  pr.  and  a.  many 

a,  many  a  one.     ||  pi.  many. 
tnanci^mal,  ad.  many  a  time. 
ayiangel,  m.  1".  want,  lack.    ||  au8 

—  an,  for  want  of. 
ajlann,  m.  3".  man,  husband. 
SKarbutg,  ^ot^n  m  Prussia. 
Wlaxt,  f.  4.  mark  (German  unit 

of  value,  about  25  cents). 
Wlattt,  /.  4.  postage-stamp. 
SWarft,  m.  2".  market,  -place. 
aWarmpr,  m.  2.  marble. 


SD?ccr,  n.  2.  sea,  ocean. 

lucfjr,  ac?.  more. 

mcl)rcrc,  pr.  pi.  more  than  one, 
several. 

mcin,  poss.  a.  and  pr. 

mcincn,  v.  mean,  intend. 

tncinig,  poss.  pr. 

aWcngc,  /.  4.  multitude. 

SD'ienfdd,  m.  4.  human  being,  per- 
son, man. 

mcrJnjiirbifi,  a.  remarkable,  curi- 
ous. 

SRcffer,  n.  1.  knife. 

mm,  f.  milk. 

aJltnute,  /.  4.  minute. 

miPraurftcn,  v.  abuse,  misuse. 

ntifef alien,*  v.  displease. 

mifeiingcn,*  v.  impers.  (f.)  not 
succeed,  fail. 

mtfttrancn,  v.  distrust. 

mxt,  prp.  with,  along  with,  by. 
II  — 'ge^en,*  go  along.  ||  — 'ncft- 
men,*  take  along.  ||  — 'tellen, 
share  with,  communicate,  tell. 

ajlttglicb,  n.  3.  member. 

mUtaq,  m.  2.  midday,  noon. 
11  — 8,  at  noon,  in  the  after- 
noon.    II  — effen,  n.  dinner. 

Wlittt,  /.  middle,  midst. 

SJltttel,  n.  1.  middle,  midst,  means. 

mitten,  ad.  midway.  ||  —  in,  in 
or  into  the  midst  of. 

SRitternat^t,  /.  4.  midnight. 

nidgen,*  modal  aux.'.Gram.  19,  II. 

ajlonat,  m.  2.  month. 

STlonb,  m.  2.  moon.  ||  — fd^etn, 
m.  moonlight. 

9)loo§,  n.  2.  moss. 

9Jlorgen,  m.  1.  morning.  ||  mor* 
fien,  to-morrow,  the  next  day. 
II  ntorgen^,  in  the  morning. 

miibe,  a.  tired,  weary. 

2R«l^e,  /.  4.  trouble,  pains.  ||  bet 
—  toert,  worth  while. 


146 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


S^ttttb,  m.  2.  mouth, 
mitnben,  v.  discharge,  empty. 
aJliittbtgfcit,  /.  4.  majority,  full 

age. 
tnitttblic^,  a.  verbal,  oral,  by  word 

of  mouth. 
SWufcum,  n.  (-«,  -ccn)  museum. 
aWufif,  /.  music.     II  -ftunbc,  /.  4. 

music  lesson. 
mn^tn,*  modal  aux.:  Gram.  19,  II. 
Mutter,/,  l^  mother. 


nadi,  prp.  after,  behind;  for, 
about;  to,  toward,  for.  ||  — '* 
froflcn,  ask  for  or  after.  ||  — * 
mittog,  m.  2.  afternoon.  ||  — * 
htm,  c.  after,  when.  |i  —^cr, 
ad.  afterwards. 

^atf^hax,  m.  (-«  or  -n,  -n)  neigh- 
bor. 

SRad^rtd^t,  /.  4.  news,  tidings. 

ttdd^ft,  superl.  of  nal^. 

SRac^t,  /.  2'.  night.  ||  -«,  at 
night. 

nafi,  a.  near,  close,  neighboring. 

iRa^e,  /.  4.  nearness,  proximity. 
II  in  bcr  —,  near,  close  by. 

tia^en,  v.  sew. 

9lttmc,  m.  (-n«,  -n)  name. 

ttamlic^,  ad.  namely,  viz.,  that 
is. 

waft,  a.  wet,  damp. 

Plaint,  f.  4.  nature. 

natutixkj,  ad.  of  course,  naturally. 

ttebett,  prp.  beside,  by  the  side  of, 
by;  near,  next  to.  ||  —  ctnan= 
bcr,  side  by  side.  ||  — flug, 
m.  tributary  (river). 

iie^men,*  v.  take,  take  away. 

nein,  ad.  no. 

nenticii,*  v.  name,  call. 

SRcft,  n.  3.  nest. 

iiett,  a.  nice. 


tic«,  a,  new.     ||  Don  —cm,  anew, 

afresh. 
neuUd^,  o.  lately,  recently, 
ttic^t,  ad.  not. 
ntd^t)^,  indef.  pr.  nothing.     ||  — 

al3,  nothing  but. 
nic,  ad.  never,  at  no  time. 
mcber,  ad.  down.     ||  — 'legen,  lay 

down,  resign. 
9fiteberIonbe,   n.  pi,  the  Nether- 
lands, 
ttiebrig,  a.  low. 
tiiemanb,  indef.  pr.  nobody,  no 

one. 
ntrgcnb)^,  ad.  nowhere, 
nod^,  ad.  still,  yet. 
91orb,  m.  2.   north.     ||  —fee,  /. 

the    North    Sea.     ||  — mcftU^ 

to  the  northwest. 
9lott,  f.  4.  note,  mark. 
S^otjeHc,  /.   4.   novelette,   short 

story, 
iflummer,  /.  4.  number, 
nun,  ad.  now. 
ttwr,  ad.  only,  simply. 


ob,  c.  whether,  if.     ||  alS  — ,  as 

if. 
Dbcn,  ad.  above,  on  top;  up-stairs. 
obcr,  a.  upper,  superior.     ||  — * 

f)aupt,  n.  head,  chief, 
obgtetc^,  c.  though,  although. 
Obft,  n.  fruit.     ||  — gartcn,  m.  V. 

orchard, 
ober,  con;,  or. 
Ober,  /.  river  in  Germ/iny. 
i)ffcntlt(i^,  a.  pubUc. 
{Dffi5tcr,  m.  2.  officer, 
dffncn,  V.  open. 
oft,  ad.  often,  frequently. 
o^nc,  prp.  without,  except. 
Dftr,  n.  (-e«,  -en)  ear.     ||  — cnar^t, 

w.  2*^.  aurist. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


147 


Onfel,  m.  1.  uncle. 

Dper,  /.  4.  opera.  ||  -~nfila«,  w.  3\ 
opera-glass. 

Crbnung,  f.  4.  order,  arrange- 
ment. 

Orgel,  /.  4.  organ. 

Drt,  w.  2.  or  3*'.  place,  spot. 

Oft,  m.  4.  east.  ||  —fee,  /.  the 
Baltic  Sea. 

Oftcrn,  vl'  Easter.  ||— gcufini«, 
n.  report  at  Easter. 

£)ftcrrcic^,  n.  Austria. 

i)ft(tc^,  a.  eastern. 

Ojcan,  m.  2.  ocean. 


$aar,  n.  2.  pair,  couple. 

:porfcn,  «;.   seize  hold  of,   thrill. 

II  — b,  thrilling,  exciting. 
$o)jicr,  n.  2.  paper, 
^a^ft,  m.  2".  pope. 
^arf,  m.  2.  park. 
^ettjlon,  /.  4.  boarding-house. 
^Penflondr,     m.     2.     pensioner, 

boarder. 
55  erf  on,  /.  4.  person,  individual. 

II  — enpQ,  m.  2".  slow  train,  ac- 
commodation. 
?Pfarrcr,  m.  1.  clergyman,  pastor. 
$fcrb,  n.  2.  horse.     ||  — crcnncn, 

n.  horse-race. 
$futtb,  n.  2.  pound. 
^iotogra^l^tc,  /.  4.  photography, 

photograph. 
$kn,  m.  2".  plan. 
pun,  a.  flat,  level.     ||  -bcutfd^. 

Low  German. 
$Ia^,  m.  2".  place,  space, 
plaubern,  v.  chat,  talk. 
|>li)^lic^,  a.  sudden. 
$oltttf,  /.  poUtics. 
|3oUttf(i^,  a.  political;  politic. 
%o\i,  /.  4.  post,  post-office,  mail. 

II  — fartc,  /.  post  card. 


$ot:^bam,  summer  residence  of  the 
Prussian  kings  near  Berlin, 

$rafibent,  m.  4.  president. 

^rebigt,  /.  4.  sermon,  lecture. 

Sprei^,  m.  2.  prize,  price. 

^Prcuftcn,  Prussia. 

^reufeifc^,  a.  Prussian. 

^rtnj,  w.  4.  prince. 

^rinseffin,  /.  4.  princess. 

^ritiat,  a.  private.  ||  — ftunbc,  /. 
4.  private  lesson. 

jprofeffor,  m.  (-«,  -en)  professor. 

$ttlt,  w.  2.  desk,  writing-table. 


Cluabrat,  n.  2.  square. 
Cttette,  /.  4.  spring,  source. 


fRanq,  m.  2*'.  rank;  circle,  gallery, 
tier.  II  crftcr  —,  (theat.)  first 
balcony. 

fHat,  m.  2".  advice,  counsel. 

tattn,*  V,  (dat.)  advise.  ||  ftd& 
(dat.)  —  laffcn,  take  advice. 

taui^,  a.  rough,  rude. 

rcaliftifcft,  a.  realistic. 

fHtd)nttnq,  f.  4.  computation,  ac- 
count. 

tcd^t,  a.  right.     ||  a(i.  very. 

rebett,  v.  speak,  talk. 

rcgicren,  v.  reign,  rule. 

IRcgicrutig, /.  4.  rule,  government. 

tegneit,  v.  impers.  rain. 

regncrifc^,  o.  rainy. 

fHtidf,  n.  2.  kingdom,  realm,  em- 
pire .  II  — ^f  ilrft,  m.  Prince  of  the 
Empire.  ||  — «fanglcr,  m.  Chan- 
cellor of  the  Empire.  j|  — ^* 
tag,  m.  imperial  parHament, 
Reichstag. 

retc^,  a.  rich. 

reiciien,  v.  reach,  extend. 

fHti^tnm,  m.  3".  riches,  wealth. 


148 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


ffttif^c,  f.  4.  row. 

fRctfe,  /.  4.  tour,  journey.  ||  —  * 
{)anbbud^,  n.  guide  book. 

retfen,  v.  (fO  travel,  journey. 
II  —h,  traveling.  ||  as  s.  trav- 
eler. 

rcitcn,*  v.  (f,)  ride,  go  on  horse- 
back.    II  as  s.  riding. 

fHtitct,  m.  1.  horseman,  rider. 

fftf^tin,  m.  Rhine. 

9ii(^tung,  /.  4.  direction. 

fititttv,  m.  1.  knight. 

fHod,  m.  2".  coat,  skirt. 

[Rotte,  /.  4.  (theat.)  character, 
part. 

diom,  Rome. 

IRoman,  m.  2.  novel. 

[Ri)mcr,  m.  1.  Roman.  ||  —itxt,f. 
time  of  the  Romans. 

tot,  a,  red. 

rubern,  v,  row. 

nifen,*  v.  call;  cry. 

JRttf,  m.  2.  call;  reputation. 

fHnfft,  /.  4.  rest,  repose. 

nti^ig,  a.  quiet,  peaceful. 

SRuPanb,  n.  Russia. 


^a^t,  f.  4.  thing,  affair. 

fagen,  v.  say,  tell.  ||  —  n3otten,* 
mean  to  say,  mean. 

(Balat,  m.  2.  salad. 

fammctn,  v.  gather,  collect. 

fatt,  a.  satiated,  satisfied. 

©a^,  w.  2".  sentence. 

fc^aben,  v.  hurt,  injure  {dat.). 

@(i^affner,  m.  1.  guard,  conductor. 

fcftri^en,  v.  treasure,  value. 

©c^aufpiel,  n.  2.  play.  ||  — cr, 
w.  1.  actor.  II  —\)a\x^,  n.  play- 
house, theater. 

fd^einen,*  v.  shine;  seem,  appear. 

ft^icnfen,  v.  give,  preseiit. 

fc^icfett,  V,  send,  dispatch. 


©d^irffal,  n.  2".  fate,  destmy. 

fc^icfecn,*  V.  shoot,  fire  off. 

@(^tff,  n.  2.  ship,  vessel. 

©c^iiffct,  m.  1.  boatman. 

8d^laf,  w.  sleep.  ||  — jimmcr,  n 
bedroom. 

fc^ilafen,*  v.  sleep. 

8c^Iag,  m.  2".  blow,  stroke. 

fdftlanf,  a.  slender. 

\^lt^i,  a.  bad,  base,  mean. 

fc^iltegcn,*  V.  shut,  close. 

Mlicgac^,  ad,  lastly,  finally,  m 
conclusion. 

fd)Iimm,  a.  bad. 

©c^litten,  m,  1.  sled,  sleigh.  ||  —* 
faf)ren,*  (f . )  go  or  ride  in  a  sleigh. 

ec^littfc^u^,  m.  2.  skate.  ||  —^ 
laufen,*  (f.)  skate. 

©cftlofe,  n,  3".  castle. 

©d^luft,  w.  2".  conclusion,  end. 

fd^mci^cln,  v.  flatter  {dat). 

©(^mcrj,  w.  (-c^,  -en)  pain. 

fcftmcrsen,  v.  hurt. 

fcj^miirfen,  v.  adorn. 

(Scftnee,  m.  snow.  ||  — fd^ul^,  m. 
2.  snow-shoe. 

fd^neH,  a.  quick,  fast.  ||  — gug, 
m.  express-train. 

fdfto«,  od.  already. 

\6)'i>n,  a.  beautiful,  handsome, 
fair,  fine. 

(Bd^Ottung,  /.  4.  forbearance,  in- 
dulgence. 

frfirctbcn,*  t;.  write. 

frftriftlic^,  a.  written,  in  writing. 

©(^riftfteffer,  m.  1.  writer,  author. 

fc^ritt,  a.  shrill. 

©ei^ule,/.  4.  school.  ||— freunb,  m. 
—fellow.  Il—ial^r,  n.  —  year. 
II  —lel^rer,  m.  — teacher. 

@ci^«Icir,  m.  1.  (—in,  /.  4.)  school- 
boy or  girl,  scholar,  pupil. 

fdftuttcln,  V,  shake. 

@cl^toagerl«,  /.  4.  sister-in-law. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


149 


fcfthjars,  a.  black. 

©cfttocij,  /.  Switzerland.     ||  —tx, 

a.  Swiss. 
fd^njer,  a.  hard,  heavy,  difficult, 

grievous. 
©(^toctt,  n.  3.  sword, 
©r^inicftcr,  /.  4.  sister. 
f(fttoimmen,*  ?;.  swim. 
fc^tt)ingen,*  v.  swing,  brandish. 
<3cgc(,  n.  1.  sail, 
fcgclu,  i;.  (f.)  sail. 
fcl^cn,*  V.  see,  look,  behold. 
fcl^ttcn,  V.  refl.  long  or  languish 

(for,  nac^). 
fcl^r,    ad.    very,    greatly,    very 

much. 
fctbcn,  a.  silk. 
Scifc,  /.  4.  soap. 
fcin,*  V.  (f.)  be,  exist. 
fein,  poss.  a.   and  pr.  his,  its. 

II  — etmillen,  for  his  sake, 
fctnig,  poss  pr. 
fcit,  prp.  since. 
8  cite,  /.  4.  side. 
fcliicr,  see  felbft. 
felbft,  pr.  and  a.  self.     ||  — fldii- 

big,  independent. 
feltcn,  a.  seldom,  unusual. 
©eltcnl^ctt,  /.  4.  unusual  thing, 

curiosity, 
fcnbcn,*  V.  send, 
fc^cn,  V.  seat,  place,  put.     ||  refl. 

sit  down, 
fic^i,  refl.  pr.:  Gram.  7,  II. 
fitter,  a.  sure,  certain, 
ftc,  pers.  pr. 
@ieg,  m.  2.  victory.     ||  ©icge^* 

allcc,  /.  Avenue  of  Victory, 
fingcn,*  V.  sing. 
fi^en,*  V.  (f.)  sit. 
fo,  (wi.  so,  as;  thus.     ||  — balb,  c. 

as  soon   as.     ||  —fort,   ad.   at 

once.     II  — n)of)l,  c.  as  well  as. 
^oi^tt,  m.  2".  son. 


fold^,  pr.  and  a.  such,  such  a. 
©otbat,  m.  4.  soldier, 
fotten,*  modaZ  awa:.:  Gram.  19,  II. 
<3ommcr,  m.   1.  summer.     ||  — * 

fericn,  pi.  summer  holidays. 
fonbern,  c  but. 
(Sonntag,  m.  2.  Sunday. 
fonft,  od.  else,  otherwise. 
©^attc,  /.  4.  column. 
(5)jarf amf cit,  /.  4.  economy. 
f^ot,  a.  late, 
fl^asicrcn,   v.   walk,  stroll.     ||  — 

fic^en,*  (f.)  go  for  a  walk. 
S^eifc,  /.  4.  food.     II  — farte,  /. 

bill  of  fare. 
f^ielen,  v.  play.     ||  {theat.)  play 

a  part,  act. 
<Bpoxt,    m.    2.    sport,  athletics. 

II  — ^fterein,  m.   athletic   club. 

11  — Sfelb,  n.  athletic  field. 
(Bpxad)C,  f.  4.  language.     ||  — lel)* 

rcr  (—in),  teacher  of  languages. 
f^rcc^cn,*  V.  speak,  talk. 
^pxte,f.  river  on  which  Berlin  lies. 
<Bpxinqhxnnntn,  m.  1.  fountain. 
(Staat,  m.  (-c«,  -en)  state.     ||  — S^ 

rttann,  m.  statesman. 
(Btabt,  /.  2'\  town,  city. 
©tatt,  m.  2".  stable,  barn. 
<Btamm,m.  2".  stem;  race,  family, 

tribe, 
ftarf,  a.  strong. 
©tatton,  /.  4.  station. 
ftatt'finbctt,*  i;.  take  place. 
ftau()ig,  a.  dusty. 
ftcrfen,  V.  fix,  set. 

ftc^cn,*  V.  (f.)  stand,  remain,  be. 
ftelgcn,*  v.   (f.)  mount,  ascend, 

climb. 
ftcil,  a.  steep. 

©telle,  /.  4.  place,  position, 
fteffen,  v.  place,  put.     ||  grafien  — , 

ask  questions. 
(BitUum,  /.  4.  position. 


150 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


ftcrbcti,*  V.  (f.)  die. 
jjtct^,  ad.  continually. 
8ttmme,/.  4.  voice,  vote.     ||  — n* 

mcl^rl^eit,  /.  majority  vote. 
ftimmen,  v.  agree,  vote. 
8timm««g,  /.  4.  humor,  mood, 

state  of  feeling. 
(Btod,  m.  2",  stick.     ||  m.  and  n. 

2.   story,  floor.     ||  — fd)Iag,  m. 

blow  with  a  stick. 
©toff,    m.    2.    fabric,    material, 

matter;  subject  matter, 
©trafte, /.  4.  road,  street.     ||  — n- 

ha^riff.  4.  street  railway,  tram- 
way, 
ftreng,  a.  severe,  strict. 
(&tiirf,    n.    2.    piece.     ||  (theat.) 

play. 
©tubent,m.4.  (—in,/. 4.)  student, 
ftiibicrcn,  v.  study. 
©tubium,  n.  (-«,  ©tubicn)  study. 
(Biu^i,  m.  2".  chair, 
©tuttbc,  /.  4.  hour. 
fturmifrfi,  a.  stormy. 
fudftcn,  V.  seek,  search  for. 
©lib,  m.  south. 

fubUt^,  a.  southerly,  southern, 
©ummc,  /.  4.  sum. 
©u^^e,  /.  4.  soup, 
©jenc,  /.  4.  scene. 


^afel,  /.  4.  table,  board,  black- 
board. 

2;ag,  m.  2.  day.  ||  — <8anbrud&, 
m.  daybreak,  dawn. 

taglid^,  a.  daily. 

%iii,  n.  3".  valley. 

Xalax,  m.  2.  gown. 

S^annenbaum,  m.  2".  fir-tree. 

tansen,  v.  dance. 

%a\^t,  /.  4.  pocket.  ||  — nul^r,  /. 
watch. 

JTaffe,  /.  4.  cup. 


taufc^cn,  v.  deceive. 

^ce,  m.  tea. 

2^ci(,  m.  2.  part,  share. 

tcilen,  V.  share,  divide. 

teIc:p^omcrcn,  v.  telephone. 

XtUtt,  m.  1.  plate. 

%tnm^,  n.  tennis. 

tcuer,  a.  dear,  expensive,  costly. 

%\)taitt,  n.  1.  theater.     ||  — Faffe, 

/.  box-office.     II  — gettel,  m.  1. 

playbill,  program. 
Jl^fturingctt,  Thuringia. 
ttcf,  a.  deep,  low.     ||  — cbcnc,/.  4. 

low  plain, 
^icr,  m.  2.  animal.     ||  — argt,  m. 

veterinary.    ||  — gartcn,  m.  park 

in  Berlin. 
%mit,  f.  4.  ink. 
^ifcft,  m.  2.  table. 
Xxttl,  m.  1.  title. 
Xotifttx,  f.  V.  daughter. 
Xoh,  m.  2.  death.     ||  — c6anset0C, 

/.  4.  death  notice. 
Xot,  n.  2.  gate,  city  gate. 
tot,  a.  dead. 
ti^ttn,  V.  kill. 

tta^tn,*  V.  bear;  carry;  wear, 
trauctt,  V.  confide,  put  one's  faith 

(in,  dat.). 
trcffcti,*  V.  hit,  meet. 
trciben,*  v.  drive  before  one,  urge, 

incite. 
Xtt^pt,  /.  4.  flight  of  stairs, 
trctcn,*  V.  (f.)  tread,  step, 
treu,  a.  faithful,  loyal, 
trinfcn,*  v.  drink, 
tro^,  prp.  in  spite  of.     ||  — bcm, 

ad.  notwithstanding, 
tro^en,  v.  defy. 
titc^ttO,  a.  able,  competent, 
tun,*    V.    do,    perform,    make, 

put. 
XmUi,  f.  Turkey. 
Xuxm,  m.  2".  tower. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


151 


uhtv,  prp.  over,  above,  higher 
than;  across,  by  way  of;  re- 
specting, concerning, 

iihttWmqtt,  m.  1.  bearer,  mes- 
senger. 

flberfai^rt,  /.  4.  passage. 

liBergcBctt,*  v.  deUver,  surrender. 

uhttqtf^tn*  V.  (fO  go  over,  pass. 

Vibtxi)(mpi,  ad,  in  general,  alto- 
gether. 

fiber (affctt,*  V.  leave,  give  up, 
yield,  resign. 

iiberitac^teii,  v.  pass  the  night. 

iil^crfd^tocmmcn,  v.  flood,  sub- 
merge, inundate. 

iificrfc^en,  v.  translate. 

ftlbcrfei^ung,  /,  4.  translation. 

ii&crtretcn,*  v.  transgress,  violate, 
injure;  sprain. 

ubertDad^en,  v.  watch  over,  guard. 

ubrig,  a.  remaining,  other,  rest  of. 

fil^ung^  /.  4.  exercise,  practise. 

Witt,  n.  1.  bank,  shore. 

mr,  /.  4.  clock,  watch;  o^clock 
II  —madder,  m.  watchmaker. 

urn,  prp.  around,  about,  for. 
II  {with  gu  and  infin.)  in  order, 
so  as. 

tttnfaffcn,  v.  embrace,  include. 

ttmgel^en,*  v.  avoid,  evade. 

\xvx\\tt,  ad,  round,  round  about. 

um'ftcigcn,*  v,  (f,)  {rail.)  change. 

unb,  c.  and. 

unertuartct,  a.  unexpected. 

Unfatt,  m.  2".  accident. 

Mnfru(^tbar,  a.  barren,  sterile, 
fruitless. 

ttngebunben,  a.  imbound. 

ungef al^r,  ad.  about,  nearly. 

ungleid^,  a.  unlike,  dissimilar,  un- 
even. 

Unifiirm,  /.  4.  uniform. 

Uniticrfitat,  /.  4.  university. 

unmittelbair,  a.  inmiediate,  direct. 


unfcr,  pass.  pr.  arwZ  a. 

unicr,  prp.  under,  beneath, 
among,  during.  ||  — bcffctl, 
meanwhile. 

Unitx^ali,  m.  maintenance,  sup- 
port. 

untcrl^aWcn,*  v.  refl.  enjoy  oneself ; 
converse.  ||  — b,  amusing,  en- 
tertaining. 

Unttxt^altnnq,  f.  4.  conversation, 
entertainment. 

Unterrt(i^t,  m.  2.  instruction. 

untcrftel^en,*  v.  be  subordinate  to. 

untcrftii^cn,  v.  prop,  support. 

untoofji,  a.  unwell,  ill. 

unsufticben,  a.  dissatisfied. 

Uriaub,  m.  2.  leave  of  absence, 
furlough. 

Urtcil^  n.  2.  judgment,  sentence, 
opinion. 

ttxitiUn,  V.  judge. 


abater,  m.  r.  father.  ||  —\tabt, 
/.  native  place. 

berbittben,*  v.  tie  up,  bind  up; 
bandage,  dress. 

kierbanfen,  v.  be  indebted,  owe. 

JBcrctn,  m.  2.  association,  club. 

Ucreincn,  tiereinigen,  v.  unite. 

JBereinigung,  /.  4.  union,  associa- 
tion. 

SJerfaffung,  /.  4.  constitution. 

ticrgeffen,*  v.  forget. 

tjcrgtcic^cn,*  v.  compare. 

ilBergnugen,  n.  1.  pleasure,  enjoy- 
ment. 

tiergniigt,  a.  pleased,  cheerful, 
happy. 

tJerfottfcn,  v.  sell. 

Derlangett,  t;.  ask,  desire,  demand. 

tjcttaffen,*  v.  leave,  abandon. 

ijcrlc^en,  t^.  injure,  wound. 

t)txlmtn,*  V,  lose. 


152 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


Uermal^Ictt,  v,  marry,  give  in  mar- 
riage. 
JBcrmiiQcn,  n.  1.  fortune,  wealth, 
bcrncinctt,  v.  deny,  say  no. 
SJerfaillC)^,  tovm  and  palace  near 

Paris. 
tjcrfammcin,  v.  assemble. 
tjcrfcfttcben,  a.  different. 
toerfc^neftctt,*  v.  shut,  lock. 
t>erf(i^oKcn,  a.  forgotten. 
JBcrfci^cn,  n.  1.  error,  mistake. 
t)tx^pxcd)cn,*  V.  promise. 
Dcrftclften,*  v.  understand. 
tJertetlcn,  v.  divide,  share. 
Uertraueti,  v.  have  confidence,  trust 

(auf,  in).     II  as  s.  confidence, 

trust. 
Uertrctcn,  v.  represent. 
SJcrtretcr,  m.  1.  representative. 
t>ttnnqiudcn,   v.   meet  with    an 

accident. 
SJernjaltung,  /.  4.  administration, 

management. 
tjcrtoatibt,  a.  related,  connected. 

II  as  s.  relation. 
tjerltJCttbcn,  v.  apply, 
toettounbcrn,    v.    be    astonished, 

wonder. 
Uerjeil^ett,*  t;.  pardon,  forgive. 
fSttitx,  m.  4.  cousin. 
\)itl, a. andindef.  pr.  much,  many. 
titeUeid^t,  ad.  perhaps,  maybe. 
JBtcrtel,  n.  1.  quarter.    ||— ftunbc, 

/.  quarter  of  an  hour. 
JBogcl,  m.  1".  bh-d. 
fSolt,  n.  S'\  people,  nation, 
tjottbrmgcn,*  v.  accomplish. 
Ijon,  prp.  from,  of,  among,  by. 
t)ot,  prp.  before,  in  front  of,  for, 

on  account  of;  from,  against. 

II  —  clncm  Sa^vt,  a  year  ago. 
t)Oxan^,  ad.  before,  in  advance. 
\>oxhtl,  ad.  by.     ||  — ficl^en,*  pass, 

goby. 


tiorber,  a.  fore,  front. 

tJor'ficfteti,*  V.  (f.)  impers.  occur, 
happen. 

i)Oxfjxn,  ad.  before,  some  time  ago. 

t)ox'tommtn,*  v.  (f.)  occur,  hap- 
pen; seem,  appear. 

tJor'Iaffen,*  v.  admit  to  one's  pres- 
ence, receive. 

bor'Ief en,*  t>.  read  (aloud),  read  to. 

JBorlcfung,  /.  4.  lecture. 

bor'mcrfcn,  v.  mark,  reserve. 

tjorrottg,  a.  in  stock,  on  hand. 

fSoxttxi,  m.  2.  advantage,  profit. 

\yox'ixtitVL,*  v.  (f.)  step  forward. 

Uursiigltti^,  a.  superior,  excellent. 


SSad^tturnt;  m.  2".  watch-tower. 

SSagcn,  m.  1.  vehicle,  wagon,  car- 
riage. 

Itjagcn,  v.  dare,  risk. 

Xodi^itn,  V.  choose,  elect. 

tool^r,  a.  true,  real. 

SSaftr^cit,  /.  4.  truth. 

aSalb,  m.  3".  wood,  forest.  ||  —* 
ircg,  m.  wood  path  or  road. 

hjanti,  inier.  ac?.  when? 

hjarm,  a.  warm,  hot. 

hjarten,  y.  wait.  ||  —  laffcn,  keep 
waiting. 

SSartefoal,  m.  2.  (pi.  — fiilc)  wait- 
ing-room. 

It) arum,  ad.  why,  wherefore. 

hja)^,  inter,  and  rel.  pr. 

aSaffcr,  n.  1.  water. 

hjcrfcn,  v.  wake,  awaken. 

SBcg,  m.  2.  way,  path,  road. 

mcfl,  ac?.  away.  ||  — 'laufcn*  (f.), 
run  off  or  away.  ||  — 'Icgcn,  lay 
aside.   ||  — 'ncljntcn,*  take  away. 

hjegen,  prp.  on  account  of,  about, 
for. 

tocl^,  a.  painful,  sore.  ||  —  tun,* 
hurt,  pain. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


153 


SScie^fcI,  /.  river  in  Germany. 

hjcit,  c.  because,  since,  as. 

SSctle,  /.  4.  while,  short  time. 

SSctn,  m.  2.  wine. 

SSScife,  /.  4.  mode,  manner. 

totxi,  a.  distant,  far.  ||  — cr, 
further. 

tot\6)tt,  inter,  and  rel.  pr.  and  a. 

mtit,  f.  4.  world. 

tocnben,*  v.  turn. 

tocnig,  a.  indef.  pr.  little,  few, 
not  many.     ||  —tx,  less,  fewer. 

totnn,  c.  if,  when  (indef.  and  fu- 
ture). 

toer,  inter,  and  rel.  pr. 

tocrbcn,*  v.  (f.)  become,  grow, 
turn. 

toerfcn,*  v.  throw,  cast. 

Xot^i)aihf  ad.  wherefore,  why: 
Gram.  11,  III. 

SScfcr,  /.  river  in  Germany, 

SScft,  m.  2.  west. 

SScttcr,  n.  1.  weather. 

ttiid^tig,  a.  important. 

toiber^  prp.  against.  ||  — fprcd^cn,* 
contradict. 

tote,  ad.  how,  as,  like.     ||  c.  as. 

njtcber,  ad.  again.  ||  — l^olen,  re- 
peat. II  — 'fc§cn,*  see  again. 
II  as  s.  meeting  after  a  sepsr 
ration. 

milb,  a.  wild. 

aSil^elm,  William. 

SSttte(n),  m.  1.  will,  design,  pur- 
pose. II  urn  , .  .  toitten,  prp.  for 
the  sake  of  .  .  . 

tuittfomtncn,  a.  welcome. 

SSinb,  m.2.  wind,  breeze. 

Ujinfen,  v.  nod,  beckon,  wave. 

SSBinter,  m.  1.  winter. 

toir,  pers.  pr. 

tontixti),  a.  real,  actual. 

SBirt,  m.  2.  host,  landlord.  ||  —«* 
ftauS,  n.  inn,  hotel. 


SBtrtfd^aft,  /.  4.  household,  es- 
tablishment; inn. 

toiffctt,*  V.  know,  be  aware  of. 

SStffenfti^aft,  /.  4.  science. 

SSttttJe,  /.  4.  widow. 

too,  ad.  where.  ||  — l^cr,  whence, 
wherefrom.  ||  — |)in,  whither, 
where  to.  ||  — mtt,  — su,  etc., 
Gram.  10,  15;  11,  116,  III. 

SBocfte,  /.  4.  week. 

SSogc,  /.  4.  wave,  billow. 

SSol^I,  w.  welfare. 

toul^I,  ad.  well,  probably.  ||  —6c* 
tanntf  a.  well-known. 

toofitttn,  V.  dwell,  live,  reside. 

aSoi^nuttg,  /.  4.  dwelling,  resi- 
dence, house. 

ttJotteti,*  modal  aux.:  Gram.  19,  II. 

SSunbcr,  n.  1.  wonder,  marvel. 
II  — fd^on,  wonderfully  fine  or 
beautiful. 

tounbern,  v.  refl.  be  astonished  or 
surprised.  ||  e«  h)unbert  mid^, 
I  am  surprised. 

SStttifd^,  w.  2*^.  wish,  desire. 

toiinfddcn,  v.  wish. 

toittbig,  a.  worthy  of,  deserving. 


50tt,  a.  tender,  gentle,  delicate, 
gcigcn,  v.  show. 
3cit,/.  4.  time. 
Settung,  /.  4.  newspaper. 
Serbrcci^cn,*  v.  break. 
5crfattcn,*y.  (f.)  fall  to  pieces,  fall, 
geugni)^,      n.      2.      testimony. 

II  (school)  report. 
Steven,*  v.  draw,  pull. 
Sicmlicft,*  a.  moderate,  tolerable, 

middling,  fair. 
Simmer,  n.  1.  room.     ||  — tniib* 

d^en,  n.  chambermaid,  maid. 
jornig,  a.  angry. 
5U,  ??rp.  to,  unto,  at,  in.     ||  um 


154 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


♦  . .  — ,  to,  in  order  to.     ||  ad, 

too. 
5uerft,  ad.  first,  at  first. 
Sufallig,  a.  accident.     ||  ad.   by 

chance. 
5ufriebett,  a.  content,  satisfied. 
3«g,  m.  2".  pull;  draft;  train; 

feature. 
5Uglet(^,  ad.  at  the  same  time, 
jtt'fommen,*  v.  (f.)  come  to. 
%vXt^it  ad.  last,  at  last. 
pnad^ft,  ad.  first,  above  all. 
Suriiff,    ad.    back.    ||— 'brtngcn,* 

bring  back.     ||  — biclbcn,*  stay 

behind.  ||~'foinincn,*(f.)come 


back,  return.  ||  — 'fd^tcfcn,  send 
back. 

Sufammen,  ad.  together.  ||  — * 
l^iinficn,*  be  connected. 

au'ft^Iicfeen,*  v.  shut  up,  close. 

Su'ftrfimen,  v.  stream,  flow  to- 
ward. 

5UlJcr(affig,  a.  trustworthy. 

Stt'tutnfen,  v.  wave  to,  beckon  to. 

gUjar,  c.  indeed,  to  be  sure. 

3toerf,  m.  2.  end,  object,  pur- 
pose. 

jhjcicrlct^  two  kinds. 

Stocifctn,  v.  doubt,  have  doubts 
(of,  andat.). 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


a,  an,  art,  cm. 

able,  {capable)  faf)tg.  ||  to  be  — , 
lmntx\.,modalaux.:  Gram.  19,  II. 

about,  oc?.  ()cruTn,  utnl^cr.  ||  {near) 
in  bcr  9^ii]^c.  ||  {on  the  point  of) 
Im  ^cgrtff.  II  {more  or  less) 
ungcfclfir.  ||  prp.  urn,  Exercise 
23.  II  {concerning)  iihtx,  in 
53cgug  auf  (ace).  ||  to  have  — 
one,  Bci  ft(^  {)abcn. 

above,  prp.  liber. 

absent,  abtDcfcnb. 

absolute,  abfolut.    ||  {quite)  gang. 

abuse,  mlfebraud^en. 

accept,  an'nebTTien.* 

accident,  berUnfaH,  "c.  ||  {chance) 
bcr  3ufaE,  "c.  ||  by  — ,  au3 
SBerfc]E)cn. 

accommodation  train,  bcr  ^cr* 
foncnaug,  "c, 

accompany,  bcglciten. 

accuse,  an'flaficn,  bcfd^ulbigcn, 
{gen,), 

accustom,  getofil&ncn.  ||  — ed,  gc* 
h)of)nt. 

acknowledge,  an'erfcnncn.*  ||  (con- 
fess)  Qcftcl^en.* 

acquaintance,  bte  33cfanntfc^aft, 
-^n.  II  {knowledge)  bic  ^cnnt* 
nt«^  -fc.  II  {person)  bcr  Sc« 
fanntc,  a.  as  s. 

acquainted,  bcfannt.  ||  to  be- 
come or  get  —  with,  fenncn*  Icr* 
ncn.    II  to  be  —  with,  fenncn.* 

across,  prp.  mitten  burd^,  liber 
{ace.). 

act,  (deed)  bic  Xai,  -en.    ||  {theat.) 


bcr  Hufaug,  "c;  bcr  mt,  -c.    ||  t;. 

{on  the  stage)  fpielcn,  gebcn/ 

auf'filtircn. 
actor,  bcr  ^Sd^aufptclcr,  -. 
administration,    bte   ^Sernwftung, 

-en. 
admire,  beUJunbcrn. 
adorn,  gtcren,  fd^mlldcn. 
advance,  bcr  gortf(5ritt,  -c.     ||  in 

— ,  tm  Doraug. 
advantage,  bcr  SBortcil,  -c. 
advice,  ber  ^at;  bcr  ^^atfd^Iag,  "c. 
advise,  raten,*  cmpfc&Icn*  {dat.), 
afford,  bcgablcn. 
afraid,  ftngftlid^.    ||  to  be  —  of,  ft(§ 

fUrd^ten  t)or  {dat,). 
Africa,  Slfrifa,  n, 
after,  c.  nac^bem.     ||  prp.  nad^. 
afternoon,    ber    9^ad^ntittag,    -e. 

II  in  the  — ,  am  S^ad&mittag,  nad^* 

mittag^. 
afterwards,  nad^l^cr,  fpiltcr. 
again,  ad,  tokbtv. 
against,  prp.  gcgen. 
age,  ha^  Sifter,  -. 
ago,  ad.  t)or.     ||  years  — ,  Dor  3a5* 

ren. 
agreeable,  angcncl&m. 
air,   bte  ?uft,   ''e.     ||  —ship,   ba« 

?uftfd^iff.     II  in  the  open  — ,  im 

greten,  an  bcr  frifd^cn  i^uft. 
all,  a.  and  indef.  pr.  ganj,  aff. 

II  ad.  gang,  g(tngltd^.    ||  at  — , 

llbcrl^aupt.     ||  not    at    — ,    gar 

ntd^t.     II  none  at  — ,  gar  fcinc. 

II  —  Europe,  gang  (Suropa. 
allow,  {permit)  crlauben,  geftatten, 


155 


156 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


(dat).     II  to  be  — ed,  btlrfcn,* 

modal  aux.:  Gram,  19. 
almost,  bctnaF)c,  faft, 
alone,  allem. 
along,  prp.  cntlong. 
Alps,  bie  5llpen,  /.  pi. 
already,  fc^on,  bereit^. 
also,  ad.  aud^,  cbcnfatt^,  Qlctd^faE^, 

fcmer, 
altar,  ber  SIftar,  -c. 
although,  c.  obgleic^,  obh)of)L 
always,  o^.  immer,  ftetg. 
America,  Slmcrifa,  n. 
American,  s.  bcr  5lmerifancr,  -, 

(/.  -in,  -ncn).    ||  a.  amcrtfanifc^. 
among,  prp.  untcr,  3n)ifci^en,  bei. 
amuse,    amlifiercn,    unter^alten.* 

II  — ing,  amilfant,  untcr f)altcnb. 
and,  c.  unb. 
ankle,  bcr  ^nod^d,  -.     \\  sprain 

one's  — ,  ftd^  ben  gu6  iibcrtrcten. 
another,  a.  (different)  ein  anbercr. 

II  (second)   cin  ^tDcitcr,     ||  (one 

more)  nod^  einer.     ||  one  — ,  ein== 

anbcr:  Gram.  176. 
answer,  s.  bic  3(ntn)ort,  -en;  blc 

(Srmibcrung,  -en.    ||  v.  (reply  to) 

bcanttDorten,     ||  (reply)  anttoor* 

ten  (to,  auf  ace). 
any,  a.   (sing.)   irgcnb   ein,   ein. 

II    (pi.)   cinige;   (indef.)    irgcnb 

h)et(^c.     II  not  — ,  fein.     ||  —  - 

thing,    (irgcnb)    cth)a«,    al(c«. 

II   not  —thing,   nid^t^.     ||  — 

where,  irgenbtoo.      ||   not  — 

where,  nirgenb^. 
appear,     erfd^einen.*    ||  (on    the 

stage)  auf'trctcn*  (f.). 
apple,  ber  ^pfel,  \ 
application,  (petition)  bie  ^etoer* 

bung,  -en;  bie  ^ittc,  -n.     ||  to 

make  —  for,  fid^  bemerben*  um 

(to,  bei). 
apply  for,  fid&  betucrben*  um. 


appoint,  emenncn*  (as,  ^u). 
approval,   bie  3ufttmmung,   -en. 
II  on  — ,  gur  5lu6mal)l,  pr  Sln^ 

mt 

April,  ber  5Ipril. 

area,  (measure)  bcr  5lacf)cntnf|alt. 

arm,  (limb)  ber  Hrm,  -e.  jj  (weap" 
on)  bie  3Baffe,  -n. 

army,  ha^  §eer,  -e;  bie  5Irmee,  -n.  ^ 

arouse,  errcgen,  ermedfen. 

arrange,  etn'rtd^ten. 

arrival,  bie  2lnfunft. 

arrive,  an'fommen*  (f.).  ||  —  at, 
errcid^en  (tr.). 

art,  bic  ^unft,  "c. 

as,  ad.  mic,  aU,  cbenf o  tcic.  ||  — . . . 
— ,  fo  .  .  .  njic.  II  c.  (since)  ha, 
II  -if,  a\^  ob.     II  -a,  als. 

ascent,  ber  Huffticg,  -c. 

ask,  (request)  bitten*  (for,  um). 
II  (demand)  bcrlangen,  forbern. 
II  (inquire)  fragcn,  cine  grage 
ftelien  an  (ace.),  jj  (invite)  ein'* 
iaben.* 

assist,  l^clfen,*  bci'fte()en*  (dat.). 

associate,  um'gclien*  (with,  mit). 

association,  bie  33ercinigung,  -en. 
II  (club)  ber  33erein,  -e.  ||  (mem- 
ory) bie  Srinncrung,  -en. 

assortment,  bie  5luSmaf)I-. 

assimie,  an'ncjmcn.* 

assure,  Derftd^ern. 

at,  prp.:  see  Exercise  13. 

athletic,  ©port-.  ||  —  club,  ber 
©portSt)erein,  -e. 

attempt,  bcr  SSerfudf),  -e. 

attend,  (apply  the  mind  to)  auf* 
paffen  (to,  auf  ace).  \\  (a 
school)  befud^en. 

August,  ber  5luguft. 

Austria,  Sfterreid^,  w. 

author,  ber  58crfaffer,-;  ber  ©d^rift* 
fteller,  -. 

automobile,  ha^  ^utomobil^  -e. 


ENGLISH-GEEMAN  VOCABULAEY 


157 


autumn,  her  ©erbft,  -e. 

avenue,  {of  trees)  bie  Witt,  -n, 

II  {street)  bic  ©tragc,  -n. 
away,  ad.  tucfi,  fort,  abtDcfenb,    ||  to 

go  — ,  fort'gcl^cn,*  ab'rcifen  (f.)* 


back,  ad.  prlldE, 

bad,  fd^Ied^t,  fd^Itnttn. 

balcony,  ber  iBalfon,  -c,    ||  {(heat.) 

bcr  erftc  O^ang. 
ball,  bcr  S8aa,  "e,     ||  —  dress,  U^ 

SBattflcib,  ba^  ©efenfd^aftgflctb, 
Baltic  Sea,  bic  Oftfcc, 
bank,  (0/  a  nver)  bag  Ufcr,  -. 
barracks,  bic  ^afcrnc,  -n, 
bath,  bag  53ab,  "tx,     ||  — room, 

hoL^  ^Babcjimmcr,  -. 
bathe,  v.  babcn,  fid^  babcn. 
Bavaria,  ^aXjtxn,  n. 
be,  V.  fcin  (f»)»    ||  how  are  you,  luie 

fic()t  eg  3^ncn?  Xoit  bcfinbcn  (Sic 

fid^?     II  there  is,  there  are,  eg 

gibt:  Gram.  186. 
bear,  bcr  ^cir,  -en. 
beautiful,  fc^on. 
beauty,  W  ©c^on^cit,  -cn» 
because,  c.  tocil.     ||  —  of,  prp, 

tDCQCn. 

become,  n)crbcn*  ((.)♦  ||  what  will 
—  of  him,  toag  toirb  aug  i()Tn  totX' 
ben?  II  it  is  — ing,  {of  clothes) 
eg  ftc{)t  gut. 

bed,  \iCL^  SBett,  -en.  ||  —room, 
bag  ©d^Iaf^immcr. 

before,  prp.  bor.  ||  years  — ,  t)or 
3af)ren.  ||  ad.  {ahead)  t)or= 
aug,  t)orn.  ||  {beforehand)  t)or=' 
l^er.  II  {earlier)  fritf)er,  fd^on 
langc.  ||  not  — ,  erft.  ||  c.  ef)c, 
bct)or. 

beg,  bitten,*  erfud^en  (for,  um). 

begin,  beginnen,*  an'fangen.* 

behind,  prp.  ()inter. 


Belgium,  $8elgien,  n. 

believe,  glaubcn  (in,  an  ace;  dat. 

of  person). 
bell,  bic  ©lodfc,  -n. 
belong,  geljidrcn  (to,  dat.). 
beloved,  a.  gclicbt.     ||  {popular) 

bcliebt. 
bench,  bic  ^anf,  "c. 
beside  (s),    ad.    {moreover)    aud^, 

aufecrbcm,  gubent.     ||  {over  and 

above)  liber bieg,  nod^  bap.  ||  prp, 

{by  the  side  of)  ncben.     ||  {in 

addition  to)  aufecr. 
best,  a.  beft.     ||  to  do  one's  — , 

fcin  9)idglid^ftcg  or  bag  ©cinigc 

tun.*     II   ad.  am  bcften,   aufg 

beftc:  Gram.  5,  lYb. 
better,   a.   beffer.     ||  ad.  liebcr.; 

II  to  get  or  be  — ,  fid^  crl)olcn, 

eg  ge^t  il^m  bcffcr.     ||  to  like  — 

licbcr  l^aben,  licbcr  mdgen:  Gram. 

19,  IIo. 
between,  prp.  ghDifd^cn,  untcr. 
beyond,  prp.  jenfcitg. 
bicycle,  bag  gal^rrab,  "er. 
big,  gro6. 
bind,  (books)  cin'binben.*  ||  —  up, 

{a  wound)  bcrbinbcn.* 
binding,  ber  ©inbanb,  "e. 
bird,  bcr  SSogcI,  ". 
birth,  hit  ©eburt,  -en.     ||  —day, 

ber  ©eburtgtag.     ||  —  notice,  bic 

(J^cburtgangcigc,  -en. 
black,     fd^marg.     ||  —board,     bie 

2:afcl,    -n;  bic  SSanbtafcl,  -n. 

II  Black  Forest,  ber  (Sd^h3argn)alb. 

II  Black  Sea,  bag  fd^toarge  Wlttx, 
blond,  blonb. 
blue,  blau. 
board,  bic  2:afcl,  -n.     ||  on  —  a 

ship,  auf  bent  ©d^iff,  an  ^orb. 
boarder,  ber  "iPenfioniir,  -e. 
boarding-house,  bit  *!|5cnfion,  -en; 

bic  grembenpenfion. 


158 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


boat,  ba^  53oot,  -c;  ba«  Sd^iff,  -c. 

II  —man,  ber  ©(^iffcr,  -♦     ||  — 

ing,  ha^  <©ci^tffaf)rcn. 
book,  ba«  ^ud^,  "cr.     ||  —store, 

ber  iBud^laben,  -;  bic  i8ud^f)anb=* 

lung,  -cn»    ||  —seller,  ber  ^ud^* 

Wnblcr,  -. 
border,  ble  ©rcnje,  -n»     ||  y.  gren* 

sen  on  (ace). 
bore,   lonfimeilen*     ||  to   be   — d, 

fid^  (anfih)ctlen, 
bom;  to  be  — ,  geboren  toerbcn, 
both,  a.  belbc. 
bound,  (of  books)  gcbunben.     ||  to 

be  — ed,  begrenjt  fein  toon. 
bow,  btegen.*     ||  (salute)  grilfeen, 

fi(^   berbeugen    (to,   t)or   dat.). 

II   — ed  with  age,   t)om  Sifter 

fiebeugt,  QfterSgebeugt, 
box-office,  bie  2:f)eatcrfaffe,  -n. 
boy,  ber  ^nabe,  -n;  ber  Sungc,  -n, 
bracelet,  ha^  Slrtnbanb,  "er. 
bread,  ba6  iBrot,  -e.     ||  —  and 

butter,  ba^  ^utterbrot, 
breakfast,  s.ba^gru6ftiidf,-e.  Ijfor 

— ,  gum  grilMtiicf .  ||  v.  frilMtiidfen* 
bridge,  bie  ^rildfe,  -n, 
bright,  l^eH,  flar,     |j  (gay)  bunt. 
bring,  bringen.*   ||  —  in,  l^erein'* 

brtngen.*  ||  (profit)  eln'brinfien.* 
broad,  breit. 
brother,  ber  iBruber,  ". 
build,  bauen,  erbauen. 
building,  ba6  ©ebctube,  - 
busy,  befd^ciftigt. 
but,  prp.  Qufeer.    ||  c.  aber,  iebod^, 

oHein.     ||  (on  the  contrary)  fon* 

bem. 
butter,  bie  Gutter. 
button,  ber  ^nopf,  't, 
buy,  faufen. 
by,  ad.  naf)e  babel.   ||  (past)  Dorbei, 

II prp.  (beside)  neben,  an.  ||  (near) 

m\)t  bd,  in  ber  9^af)e.   ||  (past) 


an  .  ,  .  t)orllbcr.  ||  (after  pas- 
sive)  Don,  burd^.  ||  —  train,  mit 
bent  SWy  see  Exercise  13. 


cab,  btc  ^r of d^fc,  -n;  ber  SBagen,  -. 
cake,  ber  ^ud^en,  -. 
California,  ^alifomten,  n. 
call,    V.    rufen.*     ||  to  be   — ed, 

feetfeen.*    ||  s.  (cry)  ber  9?uf,  -e. 

II  (social)  ber  ^efud^,  -e. 
can,  fonncn,*  modal  aux.:  Gram. 

19,  II.    II  impers.  laffen*:  Gram. 

15,  116. 
capable,  f(i()tg. 
capital,  ble  ^auptftabt,  "c. 
car,  ber  SBagen,  -.    ||  sleeping  — , 

ber  (Sd^Iaftoagen.     ||  to  ride  in 

or  take  the  (street-)—,  ntlt  ber 

(Stra6enbaf)n  fal^ren*  (f.). 
card,  ble  ^arte,  -n. 
carriage,  ber  SSagen,  — .     ||  by  — , 

gu  iBagen. 
carry,  tragen.*     ||  —  out,  aug'fii^* 

ren.    ||  —  through,  burc^'fii^^^cn. 
castle,  ba^  <Sd^Io6,  "er;  bie  Surg, 

-en. 
catch,  fangen.*    ||  —  cold,  fld^  cr* 

mften. 
cathedral,  ber  ^ont,  -c. 
central,    a.    ntlttel^.     ||  —    Ger- 
many, SWlttelbeutfd^Ianb. 
century,  bag  3af)r()unbert,  -e. 
certain,  (safe)  fid^er.     ||  (definite) 

getolg. 
chair,  ber  <^tui)l,  "t. 
change,  ftnbem,  fld^  ttnbem.     ||  — 

cars,  um'ftelgen*  (f.). 
Charlemagne,  ^arl  ber  ©rofee. 
Charles,  ^arl. 

charming,  Iiebengn)lirblg,  relgenb. 
cheap,  binig,  h)ol^lfelI. 
check,   (for  luggage)  ber  ©epttdC* 

fd^eln,  -e. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


159 


cheerful,  Inciter,  frol^. 

cherry,  bic  ^irfd^c,  -n, 

chief,  a.  {principal)  $au^t*.    ||  s* 

ha^  >Ober()aupt» 
child,  \ia^  ^inb,  -cr. 
choice,  bic  SBaf)I.     ||  {stock)  ble 

choose,  h)af)fen  (to,  as,  ju). 
church,  bie  ^\x6)t,  -n* 
circulating  library,  bic  ^cil^blblio* 

i\)tt,  -en, 
city,  bie  (Stabt,  "c. 
clad,  ficfktbet. 
claim,  in  Slnfprud^  ncl^nien,*  for* 

bern,  tjerlanficn,     ||  {assert)  tooU 

len,*  modal  aux.:  Gram.  19. 
Clara,  ^lara. 
class,    bic    Piaffe,    -n.     ||  travel 

first — ,  crfter  Piaffe  reifen. 
classical,  flaffifd^, 
clear,  \)cU,  flax.     \\  {lucid)  bcutlid^, 

t)crft(inbltc^, 
clerg3rman,   ber  ^farrer,  -;  bcr 

©ciftlicje,  a.  as  s. 
cliff,  bie  mim,  -n;  ber  gelfen,  -. 
climate,  ba«  Mima. 
climb,  befteigen,*  flettern  auf  {ace), 
clock,  bie  Vi\)x,  -en. 
close,  f(%Iie6cn,*3u'ttiac|en.  ||  {end) 

enben» 
cloth,  ba^  Xu(5.    II  —  binding,  ber 

?einenbanb. 
clothes,  ble  ^leiber  {pi.),  bie  ^lei* 

bung. 
club,  ber  ^lub,  -«;  bcr  53crein,  -e. 
coasting,  ba6  <S(i^Uttenfa{)ren. 
coffee,  ber  ^affee. 
cold,   s.   bie  ^(ilte.     ||  {medical), 

bic  (Srfditung,  -en.     ||  to  catch 

or  take  — ,  fid^  erfcilten. 
cold,  fait.     II I  feel  — ,  i(i)  frierc, 

e^  friert  ntid^. 
colonial,  Colonial 
color,  bie  garbc,  -n. 


column,  ble  <B'duU,  -n.  ||  {in 
printing)  ble  ©palte,  -n. 

come,  fommen*  (f.). 

comfortable,  bequcnt,  ht\)a%lx(i),  fic* 
ntiitlld^. 

commission,  ber  Huftrog,  ''c. 

common,  {usual)  gctoolinlic^,  att* 

mm. 

company,  ble  ^efellfc^aft,  -en. 
compartment,  ble  Slbtellung,  -en. 

II  second-class  — ,  SBagcn  gn)el=* 

ter  Piaffe. 
complain,  flagcn,  ftd^  beflagen,  (of, 

itber;  to,  bel). 
complexion,  ble  (5^eftc^t«farbc,  -n. 
compose,  Derfaffen,  bld^ten. 
composition,  {essay)  ber  Sluffatj, 

concern,  bctreffen.*    ||  as  far  as  I 

am  — ed,  toa^  mx^  betrlfft. 
condition,    ble    ^cblngung,    -en. 

II  {state)  ber  ^uftanb,  "c.    ||  on  — , 

untcr  bcr  53eblngun0. 
conductor,  {of  a  train)  ber  (©(^aff* 

ner,  -. 
confectioner's  shop,  ble  ^onblto* 

rel,  -en. 
confess,  gcfteljcn,*  befennen.* 
confidence,   hcL%  S3ertrauen,    (in, 

auf    ace,   gu).     ||    to  feel   — 

3utrauen  I)aben   (in,  gu);  3u* 

trauen  fe^en  (in,  ouf  ace.). 
congratulate,    gratullcrcn    {dat.), 

(on,  gu). 
congregation,  ble  ©emelnbc,  -n. 
consider,  bctrad^ten  (as,  alS  ace), 

lialtcn*  (as,  fiir). 
consist,  beftel^en*  (of,  ou«). 
constant,  bcftiinblg. 
constitution,  {political)  ble53erfaf* 

fung,  -en. 
contain,  entf)alten.* 
contents,  ber  Qnjalt. 
continue,  fort'fetjen. 


160 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


contradict,  h)tbcrfprcd^cn,* 

converse,  \id)  untcrl^altcn.* 

cool,  W)l. 

copy,  ab'fd^rcibcn.* 

cost,  foftcn. 

council,  ber  dlai,  "t.     ||  Federal 

Council,  ^unbc^rot. 
count,  bcr  ®raf,  -tn. 
countess,  bic  ©riifin,  -ncn. 
coimtry,  bic  ©cgcnb,  -en.    ||  (state) 

ha^  :2anb,  "tx.     ||  in  the  — ,  auf 

bcm  Sanb.     ||  to  the  — ,  auf  baS 

ganb. 
couple,    {two)    ha^     ^aar,    -c, 

II  (Jew)  paar:  see  Gram.  6,  116. 
course,   {at  table)  ber  ©ong,  ''c. 

II  of  — ,  natiirli^  c^  bcrftc^t  ftd^. 
court,  courtyard,  ber  §of,  "c. 
cousin,  ber  ^Setter,  -n;  bic  ^ou* 

fine,  -n. 
cover,  V.  bccfcn,  bcbedfen. 
cow,  bic  ^ul),  "c. 
crown,  v.  fronen  (as,  gu).     ||  s.  bic 

Orotic,  -n. 
cry,  rufcn.*     ||  {weep)  Ireincn. 
cidtivated,  {of  mind)  gebilbet, 
cup,  bic  %(x\\t,  -n. 
curious,  {peculiar)  fcltfam,  mcrf* 

toilrbig.      ||   {inquisitive)     neus 

eicris. 
curl,  {of  hair)  bic  Sodfc,  -n, 
cut,  fc^nciben.*   ||  —  in  stone,  cin'* 

^aucti.* 


daily,  tftfilid^,  jcbcn  Za^, 

dale,  ba«  Zal,  "cr. 

dance,  tangcn» 

dangerous,  gefSfirUd^. 

Danube,  bic  !I)onau, 

daughter,  bic  Xo(i)ttx,  ". 

day,  bcr  Xa^,  ~c.  ||  all  — ,  ben 
fiangcn  Stag.  ||  every  — ,  tttglid^, 
aUt   2:ofic.    II  by    — li&ht,    bd 


2:afic«Iid§t,  hd  Za^t.     \\  at  — 

break,  bei  J^age^anbrud^, 
deal;  a  great  —,  bid,  fef)r  DicL 
dear,    lid),    tcucr.     ||  {expensive) 

tcucr. 
death,  bcr  Xob,  pi.  bic  Xobc^faKc. 

II  —  notice,  bic  2:obc«an3cific,  -n. 
deceive,  bctriigcn** 
decide,  bcftitninen.     ||  {intr,)  fi(3^ 

cntfd^cibcn*  (on,  llbcr  ace.). 
definite,  beftimmt. 
defy,    {challenge)    Xxol^    Mctcn,* 

{dat.);  troljcn,  {dat.). 
degree,    {step)    bic    ©tufc,    -n. 

II   {grade)  ber  @rab,  -c.     ||  by 

— s,  allin(i()lid^,     ||  to  a  certain 

—  big  gu  einent  gctoiffen  ©rabc. 

II  to  take  one's  ~,  promotjicrcn. 
delicate,  a.  {weak)  gart,  fci^lciid^Iic^. 
delight,  entsilden,  crfreuen.     ||  be 

— ed,  entgilrft  fein  (with,  ttber 

ace).     II I  shall  be  — ed,  mit 

erofetctn  5$erQnilfien. 
delightful,  fc^on,  entgiicfenb. 
deliver,  {utter)  (jaltcn.* 
demand,  v.  {claim)  berlangcn,  for* 

bcm.  II  5.  {claim)  ba^  iBcrlangcn. 

II  in  great  — ,  bege()rt,  toici  t)cr* 

langt. 
Denmark,  ^'dntmaxt,  n. 
deprive,  bcrauben  (of,  gen.). 
desert,  tocrlaffcn,*  im  <Biiii)  laffcn.* 
desk,  bcr  (©d^rcibtifc^,  -c.     ||  {in  a 

schoolroom)  ba^  ^ult,  ~c. 
diamond,  bcr  !5)iamant,  -en.     ||  — 

bracelet,    bag    S)iaTnantenann* 

banb. 
die,  {expire)  ftcrben*  (f.). 
difference,  bcr  Untcrfd^icb,  -c;  bic 

SScrfc^iebcnf)cit,  -en. 
different,  berfd^iebcn. 
difficult,  fd^tDcr,  fd^tpicrig. 
difficulty,   bic  ©d^toicrigfcit,  -<n; 

ba«  ^inbcmig,  -fe. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


161 


dignified,  a.  Mrbcbott,  tDllrbig. 
dignity,    bie   SSilrbc,   -n.     ||  im- 
perial — ,  bic  ^aifcrtollrbc. 
dine,  fpeifen,  gu  S^tttag  cffen,* 
dining-room,    ba«    ©pcifciitnnter, 

dinner,  ba6  SO^ittagcffcn^  -. 
diplomatic,  biplomatifd^. 
direct,  v.  leitcn,    l|  a.  bircft. 
direction,  bic  ^Rtd^tung,  -en. 
dish,   bie  ©c^iiffel,  -n.     ||  sweet 

— ,  ber  9^ac^tifd^,  bic  filgc  (Spcifc. 
dislike,  mi^^alkn*  {dat.impers.); 

nlc^t  tnoQcn,  nid^t  gcrn  f)abcn: 

Gram.  19,  Ila. 
disorder,  bie  Unorbnung,  bie  SBer^^ 

iDlrrung. 
distance,  bie  (Sntfemung,  -en. 
distant,  a.  (remote)  entfemt,  todt 
distinguish,  v.  au^'geid^ncn.  ||  — ed, 

beriiftmt. 
divide,  tetlen. 
do,  tun,*  ntadjen.     ||  (suit)  ^)affcn. 

II  (be  sufficient)  genilgcn;  that 

will  — ,  ha^  ficniigt,    ||  —  (lessons 

or  tasks)  madden. 
doctor,    (title)   ber   !5)oftor,  -en. 

II  (physician)  ber  2lrjt,  "c. 
dog,  ber  $unb,  -e. 
door,  bie  ^iir,  -e  or  hit  Ziive,  -tn, 
doubt,  ber  B^^tfel,  -.     ||  to  have 

a  — ,  besmetfein,  B^Jcifel  ()aben  an 

(dat.). 
doubtful,   a.    (uncertain)  jtoetfel- 

l^aft,  unfi(5er.     ||  be  —  of,  gtoci* 

fein  an  (ace). 
down,  ad.  f)erab,  nieber,  l^erunter. 
dozen,  ba^  ©uljenb,  -e. 
drama,  ba^  Crania,  pi,  !5)ramen; 

ba^  (Sd^aufptel,  -c. 
dress,  s.  ba^  ^Itxb,  -cr.    ||  (cos- 
tume) (for  men)  ber  ^Ingug,  "e; 

(for  women)  bie  toilette,  -n;  ba^ 

^Idb,  -er.     II  evening  — ,  bic 


•SBarttotlcttc,  bag  ©efeafd^aftsneib. 

II  V.  ftd&  an'fleiben,  fid^  an'gicl^cn.* 

II  — ed,  gefletbet. 
drill,  (military)  ejeratcrcn. 
drink,  trinfcn. 
drive,    (force,  forward)  trciben.* 

II  (in  a  carriage)   faf)ren*  (f.). 

II  take  a  — ,  fpagieren  fa()ren*  (f.), 

etne   ©pasicrfa^rt   nxac^en.    ||  s. 

(outing)  bie  gal^rt,  -en;  bie  SBa* 

gcnfal^rt,  (Spajicrfalirt. 
drop,  (let  fall)  fatten*  laffen.* 
dull,  a.  (stupid)  buntni.     ||  (urir 

interesting)  langtoeilig. 
during,  to'&\)Xtnb, 
dusty,  ftaubig. 
dynasty,   ba«  ^errfd^crl&auS,  baS 

^au6. 


each,  indef.  pr.  and  a, 

early,  (betimes)  frtlKe),  frlil^acitig. 

II  —  in  the  morning,  frlif)ntor* 

gcn^,  in  atter  grli()e. 
earth,  bic  @rbe,  -en.    ||  on  —,  auf 

@rbcn. 
East,  s.  ber  Often.     ||  —em,  — er- 

ly,  a.  fiftUd^.     II  — ward,  nad& 

Often. 
Easter,  Oftem,  n.  pi.',  baS  Ofter* 

feft,  -c. 
easy,leid^t.    ||  (unconstrained)  un* 

gegtuungen.     ||  (well  fitting)  be* 

quern.     ||  (of  a  road)  bcqucm, 
eat,  effen.* 
economical,  fparfant. 
economy,  bit  ©parfamfctt. 
edition,  btc  ^lu^gabc,  -n. 
egg,  ba^  @t,  -cr. 
elect,  malilcn  (gu). 
electric,  a.  eleftrifd^. 
elephant,  ber  (Slefant,  -en. 
else,  anber.     ||  ad.  anber«,  fonft. 

II  anybody  or  thing  — ,  irgenb 


162 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


jcntanb  or  ctma«anbcrc«»  ||  every- 
thing — ,  allc«  anbcrc. 

embark,  ftd^  cin'fd^iffcn, 

emperor,  bcr  £aifcr,  -. 

empire,  ha^  ^aifcrrcid^,  -c* 

empty,  v.  Ittxm,  cntlecren,  ouS'rftu* 
men*  II  (intr.)  ftd^  Iccren.  ||  (of 
a  river)  tniinbcn.    ||  a.  leer. 

enclose,  (shut  in)  etn'fc^liefeen.* 
II  (in  a  letter)  bei'Iegen  (dat.). 

end,  ba^  (Snbe.  ||  (conclusion) 
ber  <B(i)lu^,  "t.  \\  (object)  ha^ 
S^tl,  -e;  bie  Slbftd^t,  -en.  ||t;. 
fd^Itegcn,*  fertig  madden. 

engage,  beftellcn. 

England,  (Snglanb,  n. 

English,  a.  cnglif^. 

Englishman  ( — woman),  ber  ©ng* 
liinber,  -,  (/.  —in,  -nen). 

enjoy,  (delight  in)  9enle6cn,*fi(5  er:* 
freuen  an  (dat.).  \\  I  — ,  c« 
mad^t  mir  greubc. 

enough,  genug. 

enter,  tr,  betreten.*  ||  intr. 
0el)en* in,  ein'treten*  (f.)  in  (ace). 
II  —  the  diplomatic  service,  ein 
diplomat  merben,  bie  biplomattf  d^e 
?aufbal)n  etnfd^Iagen.* 

entertain,  (as  a  gu£st)  bett)irten. 
II  (amuse)  untcr{)alten*,  amilfic* 
rcn. 

entrust,  on't)crtraucn  (dat.). 

errand,  bie  iBeforgung, -en.  ||  (com- 
mission) ber  Sluftrog,  "c. 

especially,  befonberg,  F)auptfa(5* 
lid^. 

essay,  (composition)  ber  5(uffa<2, 

establish,  grtlnbcn,  crrt(5ten,  ||  — 
the  power,  bie  SD^ad^t  auSbreiten. 

estate,  ba«  ®ut,  'er,  ba8  Sanbgut, 
'"er,  ber  Sanbfife,  -t. 

Europe,  (Suropa,  n. 

evade,  (the  law)  umgel^cn.* 


even,  ad.  fogar,  gerabe,  felbft. 
evening,  ber  5lbenb,  -e.     ||  in  the 

— ,  — s,  abenb«.     ||  —  party,  bie 

SlbenbgefeHfd^aft,  -en. 
event,  ba^  @retgnt8,  -fe.     ||  at  all 

— s,  auf  aHe  gaffe. 
ever,  ad.  (always)  immtx»     \\  (con- 
.     tinually)  beftdnbtg,  ftetg.     ||  (at 

any  time)  \t,  {entail.     ||  for  — , 

fllr   tmmer,   auf   intmer.     ||  — 

since,  fett{)er. 
every,  inde}.  pr.  and  a.     \\  — 

body,  ieberman.     ||  —thing,  al* 

Ie«. 
exact,  a.  genau,  rtd^tig.    j|  ad.  ge* 

rabe. 
excellent,  DortreffUd^,  t>orgilgItd^. 
except,  prp.  au^genommen,  auger, 
excitement,  bie  Slufregung,  -en. 
exciting,  a.  aufregenb. 
excursion,  ber  Hu^flug,  "e. 
excuse,  v.  (pardon)  entfd^ulbigen, 

t)ergetf)en*  (dat.).   \\  s.  bie  (Snt* 

fd^ulbigung,  -en. 
execute,     (perform)     au^'\VLf)Xtn. 

II  (put  to  death)  I)in'rid&ten. 
exercise,     bie     ^enjegung.     ||  to 

take  — ,  \id)  ^emegung  madden. 
exertion,  bie  Slnftrengung,  -en. 
exhibition,  (public  show)  bie  SIuS* 

fteHung,  -en. 
exist,  beftel^en.* 
expect,  erh)arten.     ||  (think)    Der* 

muten,  ben!en.* 
expenditure,  bie  5Iu«gabe,  -n. 
expensive,  teuer,  foftfpieltg. 
experience,  bie  Srfal^rung,  -en. 
explain,  erflctren. 
exposition,  (exhibition)  bie  %n^ 

ftellung,  -en. 
express,    au3briidlid^,    befonberS. 

II  5.  (train)  ber  ©d^neKgug,  "t. 
external,      ttuSerlid^.     ||  (outside, 
foreign)  ttuger. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


163 


extreme,   (farthest)  lti$t,  ftufecrft. 
II  (most  intense)  ttufeerft,  pd^ft. 
eye,  ha^  Huge,  -n. 


fail,  mlglinficn*  (f.)/  fd^l'fc^lafien.* 
fair,  fd^fin.     ||  — ly,  gtcmlid^. 
faithful,  a.  cl^rlid^,  treu. 
fall;  to  —  down,  mcber'faHen*  (f.), 

^in'fattcn*  (f.). 
family,  bic  gamllic,  -n.     ||  my  or 

your  — :  Gram.  8,  lie. 
famous,  bcriil^mt  (for,  n)cgcn). 
far,    fern,    cntfcmt.     ||  (far    off) 

melt.     II  by  — ,  melt,  bel  tDeitctn. 

II  as  —  as,    foiDeit   a%    foDicI. 

II  so  —  as,  folDeit. 
fast,  fd^ncll,  gefc^lDinb.     ||  —  train, 

bcr  (Sd^nellsug,  "c. 
fat,  fett.     II  (of  persons)  hid,  for* 

pulent. 
father,  ber  SBoter,  ", 
fatiguing,  crmilbenb. 
fear,  hit  gur(5t  (of,  t)or),  Me  ^e* 

fiird^tung,  -en. 
fear,  filrd^ten,  fid^  filrd^ten  t)or  (dat.), 

II  fig.  beftlrd^ten. 
feeling,    (sensation)   hit  ©ntpftn* 

bung,    -en;    ba§    ©efill^I,    -e. 

II  (opinion)  hit  5(nftd^t,  -en. 
few,  a.  n)em8.    ||  a  — ,  einige,  iDcnifie. 
field,  ha^  gelb,  -tr. 
final,  leijt,  enbltd^.     ||  — ly,  cnblid^, 

guleljt,  fd^liefelld^. 
find,  ftnben.* 
fine,  (delicate)  fein.     ||  (beautiful) 

fd^on. 
finish,  beenbtgen,  DoHenbcn.     ||  (of 

a  piece  of  work)  fertig  madden. 

II  to  —  dressing,  fid^  fertig  an'== 

glel^cn.*  II  be  — ed,  fertig  merbcn 

or  fein. 
fir,  bie  ^Tannc,  -n;  ber  2:annenbaunx, 


first,  num.  a.:  Gram.  6,  III6,  c. 

II  ad.  at  — ,  perft. 
flat,  a.  flad^,  eben«     ||  ~  plain,  bie 

S^iefebene,  -n. 
flatter,  fc^meid^eln  (dat.). 
floor,  (of  a  room)  ber  gufeboben. 

II  (of  a  building)  ha^  ^todtoti^, 

-c. 
flow,  fTtefecn*  (f.). 
fluent,  ftiefeenb. 
fly,  Ptegen*  (f.). 
follow,  folgen*  (f.)  (dat.).    \\  (pur- 

su£)  Derfolgen. 
fond ;  to  be  —  of,  gem  l^aben,  Iteben. 
foot,  ber  gug,  "e.     ||  on  — ,  (walk- 

ing)  p  gui     II  —ball,  bcr  gu6* 

for,   prp.  ftlr;    see  Exercise  23. 

II  (urith  a  view  to)  gu.   ||  (during) 

tD(if)renb.    ||  —  days,  tagelang. 

II  —  years,   feit  ^afti^cn.     ||  c. 

bcnn. 
force,  (violence)  hit  ®eh)alt,  -en. 

II  (power)  hit  SD^ad^t,  "c. 
foreign,  (strange)  fremb.     ||  in  a 

—  land,   in  —  lands,  in  bcr 

grembe.     ||  — er,  s.  ber  Slu«* 

liinber,  -;  ber  grembe,  a.  as  s. 
forest,  ber  ilBalb,   "er.     ||  Black 

Forest,  ber  (Sd^toarjtoalb. 
forget,  bergeffen.*     ||  never  to  be 

forgotten,  unt)erge6Ud^. 
forgive,  t)ergeben,*  bergeil^cn.* 
fork,  hit  @abel,  -n. 
former,  a.   (preceding)  Dorl^rge* 

l^enb.     II  (past)     frti^cr.     ||  the 

— ,  ber  erftere,  jener:  Gram.  9,  I. 

II  -ly,  fm{)er. 
fortnight,  Dlergef)n  2^age. 
fortunate,  gliirflld^.     1|  -ly,  glttdf* 

Ud^ermeife. 
fortune,  (good)  ha^  ©Itidf;  (bad)  hoi^ 

Unglildf.   ||  (fate)  ha^  ©efd^idf,  -c. 

II   (wealth)   ba«  SSecntfigen,   -. 


164 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


II  make  a  — ,  ctn  SBcrtnogcn  cr* 

njcrben.* 
found,  (establish)  crrtd^tctt,  firlln* 

ben.     II  (base)  grilnbcn  (on,  auf 

ace). 
fountain,  bcr  ©runncn,  -.     ||  at 

the  — ,  ant  — . 
fourth,  s.  ba«  SSicrtcI,  -. 
France,  gran!reid^,  n, 
Francis,  grang. 
Franco-Prussian,  a.  (war)  bcutf d^* 

frangofifd^. 
Frankf  ort-on-the-Main,  granffurt 

ant  Tlain,  n. 
Frederick,  grtcbrid^* 
free,  fret. 
French,  franjoftf(^.     ||  —man,  ber 

grangofc,  -n;  btc  granjoftn,  -nen. 
fresh,  frifd^. 
friend,  ber  grcunb,  -e,  (/.  —in, 

-nen). 
friendly,  freunblid^. 
friendship,  bte  grcunbfd^aft,  -en. 
from,  t)on,  t)or  .  . .  Ijer,  au8. 
front,   a.  t)orbcr.     ||  —  window, 

ha^  33orberfenftcr. 
fruit,  ba«  Obft. 

full,  Dott. 


gallery;  picture — ,  bic  ^Bilberga* 
Icric,  -n. 

garden,  ber  ®artcn,  "♦ 

gate,  baS  ^or,  -e.  ||  the  Bran- 
denburg — ,  ha^  ^ranbcnburger 

gather,  fantnteln.    ||    (of  people) 

Dcrfantmeln,  fic^  t)erfantTncIn. 
gay,       (merry)      luftig,      f)eitcr. 

II  (showy)  bunt. 
general,  ber  ©cncral,  -e;  ber  gelb* 

{)crr,  -en. 
general,  a,  (universal)  aflgetnein. 

II  (usual)  ^mii^nli^. 


gentleman,  ber  §crr,  -n,  -en. 

German,  a.  beutfd^.  ||  s.  ber  or 
bie  ^eutfd^e,  a.  as  s. 

Germany,  ^eutfd^Ianb,  n. 

get,  tr.  (procure)  befontnten,*  cr* 
l&alten.*  ||  (become)  merben.  ||  — ■ 
in  order,  in  Orbnung  brin* 
gen.*  II  —  out,  {jerau^'bringen.* 
II  intr.  —  in  (enter)  etn'treten* 
(f.),  I^ineln'fontnten*  (f.);  (to  a 
vehicle)  etn'fteiQen*  (f.).  ||  — 
out  (of  a  vehicle)  auS'ftetfien* 
(f.).  II  —  there,  bort{)in'fom* 
men*  (f.),  an'fommen*  (f.).  ||  — 
home,  na(5  §aufe  fontmen*  (f.). 

ghost,  bie  @eele,  -n;  ber  ®eift,  -er. 
II  (apparition)  ba^  ©efpenft,  -er; 
bcr  ®etft,  -er. 

gift,  ha^  ©efd^enf,  -c. 

girl,  ba«  a^ftbd^en,  -. 

give,  geben.  *  1 1  to — up,  auf geben.  * 
II  —  pleasure,  greube  mad)cn. 
II  (act)  bar'fteaen,  auf filf)ren. 

glad,  (pleased)  crfreut,  gufriebcn. 
II  to  be  — ,  fid^  freucn  (of,  liber 
ace). 

glass,  ba«  ®Ia«,  "er.  ||  a  —  of: 
Gram.  6,  Ila,  b. 

go,  0ef)cn*  (f.).  II  to  —  out,  au«'* 
0e()en.*  ||  —  by,  (past)  t)orbei'* 
gel^en*  (an,  dat.).  \\  —by train, 
ntit  bent  Sm  fa{)ren*  (f.).  ||  to 
—  to  sleep,  ein'fd^lafen*  (f.). 

good,  a.  fiut,  fiiltig.  ||  — by,  Icb' 
t\)o\)U  Icben  ^xt  tDO^U 

goods,  (possessions)  bie  ©ad^en. 
II  (in  a  shop)  bie  SBaare,  -n. 

government,  bic  D^cgierung,  -en. 
II  federal  — ,  bie  ^unbcSrcgic* 
rung. 

grammar,  bic  ©ratnntatif,  -en. 

grandfather,  bcr  ©rofetoater,  ". 

grandmother,  bie  ©rogmuttcr,  *. 

grateful,  banfbar. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


165 


grave,  ha^  ®rab,  "cr. 

great,  grog. 

greet,  bcfirilfeen, 

greeting,  ber  ®ru6,  "c, 

grey,  grau. 

grow,   toad^fen*   ((.)♦     II  {become) 

tocrbcn  (f.).    II  —n  up,  crnjad^fen. 
guidance,  bie  giif)runQ,  -en. 
guide,  V.  filbrcn.     ||  —  book,  ha^ 

9?cifcf)anbbud^. 
guest,  ber  ®aft,  ''c. 


half,  a.  l^alb*     ||  s.  hit  ^alftc,  -n. 

II  —  past  (time):  Gram.  6,  lie?, 
hand,  hit  ^anb,  "c.     ||  v.  Ubcr'* 

Qcbcn,*  rcid^cn. 
handkerchief,  ba§  2:af(^cntud^,  "cr. 
handsome,  fd^dn,  ftattlld^. 
hang,  bcinfien. 
happen,  fid^  erctgnen,  Qcf  d^ebcn*  (f.). 

II  how  did  it  — ,  h)ic  fam  c6? 
happy,  filiidflic^.     1 1  be  —  to,  fid^ 

frcuen  .  .  .  gu. 
harbor,  ber  ^afcn,  -. 
hard,     f)art.     ||  (difficult)    fc^mer, 

fc^toiertg.      ||  (diligent)     fleifeig. 

II  — ly,  faum. 
harsh,  a.  (severe)  l^art,  ftrcng. 
Harz  Mountains,  ber  ^ax^, 
hasten,  eilen,  ftd^  beeilen. 
hat,  ber  $ut,  "e. 
have,    l^aben.     ||  (cause)    laffen*: 

Gram.  26,  Ilia.    ||  (be  obliged) 

mtlffcn,  modal  aux.:  Gram.  19,11, 
he,  jpers.  pr. 
head,  ber  ^opf,  "e;  bag  ©aupt,  "er. 

II  ^gr.  (chief)  ber  gill^rcr,  -;  ber 

Setter,  -. 
health,  bte  ©cfunbl^eit. 
hear,  l^oren. 
heart,  ha^  ^erg,  -eng,  -en.     ||  fig, 

ha^  ©erg;  bie  @eele,  -n.     ||  with 

all  one's  — ,  t)on  fiangent  ^ergen. 


help,  V.  (aid)  l^elfen,*  bei'ftcben* 
(dat.).  II I  cannot  —  it,  id)  farm 
eg  nld^t  (inbern.  ||  it  cannot  be 
— ed,  eg  Ictgt  ftd^  nic^t  ftnbern. 
II  to  --  oneself,  (at  table)  \i<i) 
bebtenen.  ||  s.  bie  ©ilfe,  -n. 
II  with  the  — ,  tntt  ©life. 

Henry,  ©einrid^, 

her(s),  poss.  pr.  and  a. 

here,  ad.  bier.  ||  (hither^  motion 
toward  the  speaker)  ber,  ^itx^tx: 
Gram.  29 

hero,  ber  $elb,  -en. 

high,  a.  bod^  (in  decl.  bob),  (^o^^v, 
bod^ft).  II  —road,  bie  Sanb* 
ftrafee,  -n.     ||  —  time,  bie  ^Q(i)\tt 

hill,  ber  ©ilgel,  -      ||  —  country, 

ha^  ©iigellanb. 
his,  poss.  pr.  and  a. 
historic (al),  a.  btftortfd^,  gefd^id^t* 

Itd^. 
history,  bte  ®efd)td^te,  -n.     ||  art 

— ,  ^unftgefd^id^te. 
hold,  balten.* 
hole,  ha^  Sod^,  ''er. 
holidays,  bte  gerten. 
home,  ha^  ©etm,  -c.     ||  (country) 

hit  ©etmat.     ||  — ,  to  one's  — , 

betm,  nad^  ©aufe.     ||  at  — ,  gu 

§aufe. 
hope,  V.  boffen  (for,  auf  ace).   \\  s. 

hit  ©offnung,  -en. 
horse,  ha^  ?ferb,  -c.     ||  on  — 

back,  gu  ^ferbc. 
hot,  betjj. 
hotel,  bag  ©otel,  -g;  ber  ©aftbof, 

"t;  bag  iBtrtgbaug,  "er.    ||  Hotel 

Bear,  $otel  gum  ^(iren. 
hour,  bte  ©tunbe,  -n. 
house,  bag  .©aug,  "er.     ||  at  our 

— ,  bet  ung. 
how,   ad.  mte,   auf  iDeld^e  SSetfe. 

II  —ever,  ad.  toit  aud^,  tote  febr 


166 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


oud^.   II  c.  abet,  inbcffcn,  bcnno(5, 

fiIcic§n)o{)L 
huge,  \ci)x  grofe,  gctoalttg,  ricfcn* 

grog. 
Hungary,  Ungam,  n. 
hungry,  l^ungrtg. 
hunter,  bcr  3(ificr,  -. 
hurry,  cilcn,  fid^  bccilcn.     ||  --  up, 

fid^  bcctlcn. 
hurt,     (injure)    Dcrlcijcn,     ||  (iV 

sw^O   franfcn,     ||  (cause    pain) 

tt)t\)(t)    tun*    (dat.),    \^mtXsca 

(daL), 
husband,  bcr  SO^ann,  "cr;  bcr  ©attc, 

-n;  bcr  ©cntoW. 
hymn,  \iOi^  ^ird^cnllcb,  -cr. 


if,  c.  h)cnn.  ||  (whether)  ob.    ||  even 

— ,  tocnn  auc§,  fclbft  h)cnn. 
ai,  (sic/:)  untDol^I,  franf. 
imagine,  (what  is  impossible)  fic^ 

ctn'bilbcn.     ||  (what  is  possible) 

fid^  bor'ftcHcn. 
immediately,  ad.  foglcic^,  fofort. 
imperial,  faifcrlid^. 
improve,  bcffcm,  fid^  bcffcm, 
in,  prp,  in,  an,  auf :  see  Exercise 

23.   ||ad.  I^inein,  l^crein:  Gram, 

29. 
income,  ha^  (Stnfommcn,  - 
independent,    unabJ^ftnglg,    fclb* 

ftanbig. 
indtilgent,   nad^gicbtg,   giltifi  (to, 

ficficn). 
industrious,  flctgtg. 
industry,    (assiduity)   bcr  glclg. 

II  (bvMness)  haQ  ©ctocrbc,  -. 
influence,  bcr  Sinflufe,  "c. 
influential,  cinflufercid^,  mad^tig. 
information,     bic    Hu^funft,    "^t, 

II  (news)  bic  9^od^rid^t,  -en. 
inhabitant,  bcr  53cn)of)ncr,  - ;  (Sin* 

JDO^ncr,  -♦ 


injure,     (harm)    fd^abcn     (dat). 

II  (/iwr/)  t)crlei5en. 
inn,  bcr  @aftf)of,  "c;  ba«  183irt«l)au«, 

"cr;  bic  SBirtfd^aft,  -en. 
inscription,  bic  3nfd^rift,  -en. 
insist,  (be  persistent)  bcMcn*  (on, 

auf  dat.). 
instead,  ad.  ftatt  bcffcn.     ||  —  of, 

prp.  (an) ftatt. 
instruction,  bcr  Untcrrid^t. 
intelligent,  flug. 
intend,  bcabfid^tigcn. 
intention,  bic  ^bfid^t,  -en.     ||  with 

the  —  of,  in  bcr  ^h\i(S)t  .  .  .  gu 

(infinitive). 
interest,  bag  3ntcrcffe,  -n;  bic  ZdU 

nalimc,  -n  (in,  filr).     ||  take  an 

—  in,  fid^  intcrcfficrcn  filr.    ||t;. 

intcrefficrcn.     ||  to  be  — ed  in, 

fid^  intcrcfficrcn  filr. 
interesting,    intcrcffant;  Dcrtraut, 

bcfrcunbct. 
into,  prp.  in.    ||  ad.  f)incin:  Gram. 

29. 
invitation,    bic    (Sinlabung,    -en. 

II  on  the  — ,  auf  bic  Sinlabung. 
invite,  ein'Iabcn.* 
it,  pers.  pr. 
its,  poss.  pr.  and  a. 
ivy,     bcr     (Sfcu.     ||  — covered, 

efcubcmad^fcn. 


January,  bcr  3?anuar. 

jealous,   a.   eiferfild^tig    (of,   auf 

ace.). 
Jew,  bcr  3ubc,  -n,  (f.  "in,  "ntn). 
join,  (take  part)  tcirncfimcn*  (in, 

an  dat.).     ||  (a  dub)  bei'trctcn* 

(f.)  (d^t.). 
joint  stock  company,  bic  ^fticn* 

gcfcUfd^aft,  -en. 
jolly,  a.  luftig,  muntcr. 
joxuTiey^  bic  S^cifc,  -n. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


167 


judge,  cntfd^cibcn,*  urtcilcn  ilber 
(ace).     II  {condemn)  rt(^ten» 

Jtily,  ber  3ult. 

June,  ber  3>unt» 

just,  a.  Qcred^t,  ||  (exact)  Qcnau, 
fierabc,  ||  ad.  gerabe,  eben,  foeben, 
II  —  as  well,  Qcrabe  fo  gut, 

justice,  bic  ©credfitigfeit,  -♦ 


keep,  l^altcn.*  ||  {retain)  belialtcn.* 
II  —  open,  offen  laffen.*  ||  — 
waiting,  marten  laffen,* 

key,  ber  (Sc^Iilffel,  -, 

kilometer,  ber  kilometer,  -,  (1000 
meterSj  about  five-eighths  of  a 
mile). 

kind,  s.  {sort)  bic  5Irt,  -en;  bic 
(©orte,  -n.  ||  all  — s  of,  atler== 
lei,  II  what  —  of,  m^  filr.  ||  a. 
fitltig,  freunbltd^,  lieben^lDiirbig 
(to,  gcgen), 

king,  ber  ^onig,  -t. 

knife,  ba^  ^t\\a,  - 

knight,  ber  9?itter,  -, 

know,  {ideas)  miff  en,*  ||  {per- 
sons or  objects)  fennen,* 


laboratory,  ha^  Saboratoriunt,  pi. 

Saboratorien, 
lack,  s.  ber  SJJangel  (of,  an  dat.). 

II  for  —  of,   au^  —   an,     ||  v. 

SD^angel  l^aben  an,  mangeln;  e^ 

mangelt  mir  an  {dat.).     \\  {feel 

a  lack)  t)ermiffen, 
lady,  hit  !Dame,  -n, 
lake,  ber  @ee,  -en, 
land,  s.  bag  2anh,  "er,     ||  by  — ,  ju 

iganbe,     ||  «;.    lanben.     ||  — ing- 

place,  ber  Sanbung^pla^,  "c, 
landlady,  bic  ^irtin,  -nen, 
landlord,  {of  an  inn)  ber  3Btrt, 


language,  bic  ^Sprac^c,  -n. 
large,   a.    {big)  grofe,     ||  {heavy) 

fd^mer, 
last,  (e^t.     II  at  — ,  cnbtid^,  fc^Ucfe* 

lid^,     II  in  the  —  few  days,  in 

ben  le^tcn  2:agen,  in  ber  le^ten 

3eit, 
late,  {tardy)  \p'dt    ||  of  — ,  — ly,  ad. 

filrglid^,  ittngft,  feit  or  t)or  furgcm. 
latter,  Ic^tcrc;  biefer,  dem.  pr. 
laugh,  lad^en  (at,  tlber  ace). 
law,  (a  law)  ha^  ©cfeij,  -c,    ||  {sd- 

ence  of  law)   bic  9?ccl^tgn)iffen* 

f*aft. 
lawyer,  ber  5lbt)ofat,  -en;  ber  3urift, 

-en, 
lay,  legen,  ftcHcn,  fejjen,     ||  to  — 

down,  i)in1cgen, 
lead,  {conduct)  fuf)ren,  ||  fig.  Icitcn, 

II  {go  before)  t)oran'gef)en*  (f,)« 

II  {of  roads,  etc.)  filf)ren, 
leadership,  bic  gli{)rerfd^aft. 
leaf,  bae  8Iatt,  ''cr, 
learn,  lemen,     ||  {hear)  erfa^rcn,* 

II  — ed,  a.  gelef)rt, 
least;  at  — ,  menigften^. 
leather,  ba^  2tha. 
leave,  v.  laffen,*    ||  {bequeath)  f)tn* 

terlaffen,*     ||  {desert)  t)erlaffen,* 

II  {entrust)   iiberlaffen,*     ||  intr. 

fort'gcl^cn*    (f.),    ab'reifen    (f,) 

(for,   nad^).     ||  s.   {permission) 

bic  (Srlaubnig,     ||  —  of  absence, 

ber  Urlanb,     ||  to  take  —  of, 

5lbf(^ieb  ne{)men*  t)on, 
lecture,   bic  ^orlefung,  -en;   ber 

SBortrag,  "e,  (on,  ilber  ace). 
left,  a.  lint.     \\  ad.  Unfg, 
less,  a.  fleiner,  geringer,  tDcnigcr. 

11  ad.  tDcnigcr,  minber, 
lesson,  bic  <Stunbe,  -n,     ||  {task) 

bic  Slufgabc,  -n, 
let,    {permit)   eriauben,    geftattcn, 

II  {rent)  ocrmieten. 


168 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


letter,  (communication)  bcr  ^rtcf, 
-e,  II  (of  the  alphabet)  ber 
^ud^ftabe,  -n. 

librarian,  ber  i8ibIlotl)cfar,  -c, 

library,  bte  53ibIiot!)ef,  -en,  ||  cir- 
culating — ,  bte  !^ei()bibUoti)ef. 

lie,  (recline)  Uegcn*  (f,)»  II  (^^ 
situated)  gekgenfein,  liegen*  ({.)♦ 
II  —  down,  \i(i)  j^iu'legen. 

life,  ha^  2tUn,  -.  ||  mode  of  — , 
bie  !?ebcn^h)clfc. 

light,  f)eIL     II  (of  hair)  blonb. 

like,  a.  gleld^,  a()nlid^,     ||  ad.  mic, 

like,  V.  gem  l^aben,  gefallen,  impers. 
dat.  II  tnogen,  modal  aux.: 
Gram.  19,  lie. 

linden,  bte  ^tnbe,  -n. 

line,  bte  J^inie,  -n, 

linen,  bte  i^einnjanb,    ||  a.  leinen, 

listen,  l^dren;  gu'l^oren  (dat.). 

little,  (size)  flein.  ||  (quxmtity) 
tDeniQ.  II  ad.  (rather)  etlDaS,  cin 
iDenig* 

live,  leben,  Dcrleben.  ||  (dwell) 
tool^nen. 

lock,  fd^Iiefeen,*  ^u'fd^Iiefecn.* 

long,  a.  lang. 

long,  V.  \\6)  fef)ncn  (for,  nad^). 

look;  —  at,  an'fef)en,*  betrad^ten. 
II  (appear)  au^'fel^en*;  — ing, 
ou^fel^enb.  ||  —  back,  fic^  um'= 
felien,*  priidf'bliden.  ||  —  for, 
—  up  (seek)  fuc^en;  (in  a  book) 
naiij'WaQtn*  ||— forward  to, 
cnt0egen'fef)en*  (dat.)^  fid^  freucn 
auf  (ace), 

lose,  t)erUeren.* 

love,  V.  lieben,  gent  l^aben,  ||  s.  bte 
Siebc.  II  —  story,  bic  ^icbc^* 
gefd^id^tc. 

lovely,  fd^on,  reigenb, 

low,  nicbrig.  ||  (of  price)  billig, 
miifetg. 

luck,  (good)  ha^  ©IttdC.    |1  to  have 


(the)    good    — ,    (bag) 
luggage,  ba^  ©epiidf. 


mM 


madam  (e),   (in  address)  gnttbigc 

grau,  gnabtgeg  grciulein. 
maid,  (servant)  bag  !^ienftm(ibd^en, 

mail,   (post)   bic  ?5oft.     ||  by  — , 

burd^  bic  ?oft»   II  V.  (a  letter)  cinen 

^rief  aufgeben.* 
main,    (chief)   §aupt*.     ||  the  — 

thing,  bic  ^auptfadfie. 
majority,  bit  ^ti)Xia%     ||  —  of 

votes,  bie  (©timTnenme{)rf)eit;  by 

a  large  — ,  mlt  grofeer  — . 
make,    madden.     ||  —   up    one's 

mind,  ftd^  entfd^Iiefeen.*   ||  to  — 

use  of,  beniiijcn* 
man,  ber  Warm,  ''er,     ||  (gentle- 
man) bcr  $err,  -n,  -en.  ||  (human 

being)  bcr  Tltn\i^,  -en. 
many,  t)tclc,  mand^e. 
map,  bte  ^arte,  -n;  bie  ^anbfartc. 
marble,  a.  marmom. 
mark,   (money)  bit  3)2arf  (about 

25  cts.).     II  4  -s,  4  matt 
market,  ber  Tlav%  "t,     ||  at  — , 

auf  bent  9}?arft,     ||  — place,  bcr 

ayjarftplai^. 
marry,  (give  in  marriage)  t)crf)ei* 

raten,    \)txmixi)ltn,    ||  (wed)    tr. 

Ificiratcn;  intr.  fic^  bcrld^ciratcn  mit. 
Mary,  3)^aria,  2J?aric. 
May,  ber  SD^at. 

may,  modal  aux.:  Gram.  19,  II. 
meal,  bic  Tla\)litit,  -en. 
mean,  ntcinen*     ||  (signify)  bebeu* 

ten,     II  (intend)       beobfid^tigcn, 

tDoHcn, 
meantime,  bte  3^tf(^^ngeit.     ||  in 

the  — ,  ingtoifd^cn. 
meat,  ba^  gleifd^. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


169 


mediseval,  mittelalterlid^. 

meet,  v.  (generally)  trcffcn.*  \\  (ac- 
cidentally, face  to  face,  on  the 
street)  begcgncn.  ||  (hy  appoint- 
ment) ftd^  treffen.*  ||  (assemble) 
ftd^  tjerfammeln.  ||  —  at  the 
train,  ab'f)oIcn. 

meeting,  s.  ba^  ^ufammentrcffcn. 
II  (convention)  hk  ^BerfanxTn* 
■-iunfi,  -en. 

member,  ba6  ©licb,  -er.  ||  (per- 
son) ha^  SO'^itfilicb,  -er.  ||  (par- 
liament) bcr  Slbgeorbnete,  ppl. 
as  s. 

memory,  (remembrance)  ha^  ®c= 
bftd^tni^.  II  (recollection)  hit  @r* 
innerung,  -en.  ||  in  —  of,  to 
the  —  of,  gur  ^rinncrung  an 
(ace). 

mend,  au^'beffem,  flicfen. 

merchant,  ber  ^aufmann,  blc 
^aufleutc. 

merry,  luftig,  frol^ltd^. 

middle,  s.  bie  SO^itte.  ||  in  the  — 
of,  9}iitte;  mitten  in.  ||  —  Ger- 
many, 93?tttelbeutf(^Ianb. 

mile,  bie  9}Jeite,  -n.  ||  square  — , 
bie  Ouabratmeile,  -n. 

military,  friegertfd^,  militiirifd^. 
II  —  chief,  ber  ^rieg^l^err. 

mill,  bie  mnk,  -n. 

milk,  bie  mild). 

mind,  ber  3Serftanb.  ||  make  up 
one's  — ,  fi(^  entfd^Uefeen,* 

mine,  poss.  pr. 

minute,  bie  SDitnnte,  -n, 

misfortime,  ba«  Unglllrf* 

Miss,  (bag)  graulein,  -♦ 

mistake,  ber  %t\)kx,  -. 

mistaken,  irrig.  ||  be  — ,  fid^  Ir* 
ren,  im  3rrtum  fein. 

mistrust,  mifetrauen  (dat.), 

misuse,  mifebrauc^en, 

modem,  mobern,  ncu» 


moment,  ber  Elugcnblid,  -e;  ber 

9}?oment,  -c. 
monastery,  ha^  ^(ofter,  '^. 
money,  ha^  ®elb,  -er. 
month,  ber  SD^onat,  -e. 
moniunent,  bag  ^enfntal,  %. 
moon,  ber  9D?onb,  -c.     ||  —light, 

ber  9)^onbfd^ein. 
more,    mti)v.     ||  (further)   femer, 

tDeiter,  nocft.     ||  a  few  — ,  nod^ 

einigc.     ||  no  — ,  nid^tg  mel^r,  nic 

toieber.     ||  some  — ,  nod^  tttoa^ 

or  einigc. 
morning,  ber  9??orgen,  -.    ||good  — , 

guten  SOf^orgen.     ||  — s,  in  the  — , 

ad.  morgeng. 
moss,  bag  SJ^oog.    ||  — grown,  be* 

mooft,  ntoogbelDad^fen. 
most,  a.  metft.     ||  ad.  am  mciftcn. 
mother,  bie  SD^utter,  ". 
mountain,    ber    ^erg,    -e*     ||  — 

range,  bag  ©ebirge,  -. 
Mr.,  ^err.     ||  Mrs.,  grau. 
much,  a.  Diel,  t)ie(eg.    ||  od.  fe^ir. 

II  very  — -,   \t\)X.     \\  so  —  as, 

ebenfo  tote. 
Mimich,  SO^ilnd^en,  n. 
museum,  bag  SD^ufeum,  pi  SD^ufeen. 
music,  bie  iD^ufif.     ||  —  teacher, 

ber  9}?uftfk{)rer,  -  tf.— in,  -nen). 
must,    modal   aux.:    Gram,   19, 

II. 
my,  poss.  a.  and  pr. 


name,  bcr  9lame,  -n.     ||  by  •— , 

bcm  Seamen  nad^. 
narrow,  eng. 
nation,  bag  ^olt,  "tv;  hit  Station, 

-en. 
near,  a.  naljie.    ||  prp.  (m\)t)  btu 

II  -  by,  in  ber  mi)t. 
need,  ndttg  l^aben,  braud^cn,  bcbitr* 

fen*  (gen.). 


170 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


neglect,   (carelessness)  bit  9^ad^* 

liifftgfeit,  -en. 
neighbor,  ber  5^ad^bar,  -n. 
neighborhood,    bie   9^ad&barfd^aft, 

-en. 
nest,  bo«  ^t%  -er, 
Netherlands,  bic  ^f^icbcrlanbc^  n,  pi, 
never,  ad.  nte,  nlcntal^. 
new,  ncu. 

news,  bie  SSi(x^xx^i,  -en, 
newspaper,  bic  ^citung,  -en. 
next,  o.  {nearest)  nttc^ft.     ||  {Jcilr 

lowing)  fo(genb» 
nice,  nett,  angene{)m,  l^llbfd^,  gut. 
night,  bie  "^a^i,  "t;  ber  5lbenb,  -e, 
no,  a.  fein.   ||  ad.  nein.  ||  —more, 

nid^tg  ntet)r.     ||  —  one,  niemanb, 

feiner.     ||  —   indeedy    o    nein  I 

11  —where,  nirgenb^. 

noble,  a.  {of  high  birth)  (i\>{t)* 
Ug.  II  {magnanimous)  grofenilltig, 
ebel.     II  {dignified)  toornel^nt. 

noon,  ber  a^Httag,  -e.     ||  at  — ,  um 

12  Ubr  mittag^. 

north,  s.  ber  iRorben.  1|  —  Ger- 
many, 9lorbbeutfd^lanb.  ||  North 
Sea,  bie  9^orb{ee»  ||  —ward,  nad^ 
iRorben.    ||  — ,  —em,  a.  norblic^. 

not,  ad.  nid^t.  ||  —  at  all,  gar 
nic^t,  feine«n)eg«. 

note-book,  bad  §eft,  -e. 

nothing,  nid^td.  ||  —  at  all,  gar 
nid^t«. 

notice,  bie  S^lotig,  -en;  bie  Slnmer* 
fung,  -en.  ||  {announcement) 
Slngeige,  -n. 

novel,  ber  9f?onxan,  -c. 

now,  ieljt,  nun. 


obey,  ge!)ord^en  {dat.). 

oblige,  ndtigcn,  gmingen.*    ||  to  be 

— d,  mttffen,  modal  aux.:  Gram. 

19,  II. 


observe,  beobad^tcn.  ||  {remark) 
bemerfen. 

obtain,  eriangen,  erreid^en,  erl^altcn.* 

occasion,  {cause)  bie  Urfad^e,  -n. 
II  {opportunity)  bie  ©elegenbeit, 
-en.  II  on  the  —  of,  gelegent* 
lid^  {gen.). 

occupy,  {hold)  befiijen.*  ||  {of  a 
country)  ein'nebnten.*  ||  {dwell 
in)  ben)oi)nen.  ||  {oj  time)  in 
Slnfprud^  nef)mcn.*  ||  —  one- 
self, be  occupied  in  or  with, 
fid^  befd^Sftigen  niit. 

ocean,  ber  Osean,  -e;  ba^  2)?cer,  -t, 

o'clock:  Gram.  6,  lid. 

October,  ber  Oftober. 

oculist,  ber  ^lugenargt,  "e. 

of,  prp.  t)on,  au6:  Exercise  21. 

off;  be  badly  or  well  — ,  fd^Icd^t  or 
gut  baran  fein,  ed  fdf)led^t  or  gut 
l^aben. 

offer,  an'bieten.*  ||  —  a  prayer, 
ein  ®ebet  fpred^en,*  bcten.* 

officer,  ber  Offigier,  -e. 

oft(en),  oft. 

old,  olt  ((titer,  alteft). 

on,  ad.  {place)  auf.  ||  {progress) 
fort,  toeiter.  ||  prp.  an,  auf:  Ex- 
ercise 21. 

once,  ad.  einmal.  ||  {formerly) 
einft.     II  at  — ,  foglcid^,  fofort. 

one,  indef.  pr.  and  a.  \\  the 
only  — ,  ber  (Singigc.  ||  no  — , 
niemanb.  ||  —  another,  einan* 
ber:  Gram.  176. 

only,  a.  eingig.  ||  ad.  nur,  allein. 
II  {of  time)  erft. 

open,  V.  offnen,  beginnen.*  ||  a.  offen. 
II  — ing,  s.  bie  (Sroffnung,  -en;  ber 
Slnfang,  "e. 

opera,  bk  Oper,  -n.  ||  — glass, 
ba^  Operngla«,  V. 

opinion,  bie  9Weinung,  -en;  bie  2ln* 
fid^t,  -en.     ||  in  my  — ,  nad^  mei* 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


171 


ncr  5lnft(5t  or  aWclnuttQ.     ||  to 
be  of  the  — ,  bcr  9Wctnunfi  or  ^n^ 

fid^t  fein. 
opportunity,  btc  ^clcficnl^cit,  -en. 
or,  ober, 
oral,  mUnblid^. 
orchard,  bcr  Obftfiartcn,  '. 
order,  bic  Orbnung.     1 1  in  —  that 

or  to,  um  ^u,  bamit.     ||  to  put 

in  — ,   orbncn,  auf'r(iunten,  in 

Orbnung  bringcn.* 
order,  (ask  for)  beftcttcn.     ||  (com- 

mand)  bcfet)lcn*  {dat,). 
organ,  bie  Orgcl,  -n, 
other,  a.  {different)  anbcr,  ijcrfd^ic* 

ben.     II  (additional)  nod^  etn  or 

eintQC.     II  ad.  anbcrg.     ||  on  the 

—  hand,  anbercrfclt^.     ||  each 

—,  einanber.    ||  — s,  anbcre  Scute. 

II  —wise,  ad.  anbcr«.    c.  fonft. 
ought,  follcn,  modal  aux.:  Gram, 

19,  II. 
our(s),  poss.  pr.  and  a. 
out,  ad.  (outside)  aufeer,  braugcn, 

au6er!)aib.     ||  (motion)    I)tnau^, 

t)crau^:  Gram.  29. 
outside,     prp.     t)ox,     augcrl^alb. 

II  ad.  braufecn. 
over,    prp.    (above)    liber.     ||  ad. 

(past)  tjorbct. 
overgrown,   a.   liber hjac^f en,*   be*' 

h)ac§fcn.* 
owe,  fc^ulbcn,  fd^ulbtg  fein.     ||  (be 

indebted  to)   Derbanfen.      ||  — , 

ought,  modal  aux.:  Gram.  19,  II. 
own,  a.  cigen.     ||  v.  bcfil^cn. 
owner,  bcr  (Slgcntilmer,  -,  (f.  —in, 

-nen);  bcr  ^cfiijcr,  -,  (/.  —in, 

-nen). 


pack,  ))a(!en. 

page,  (of  a  book)  bie  <©eite,  -n;  ha^ 
«Iatt,  ''er. 


pain,  ber  ©(Jmer^,  -c6,  -en.  ||  — 
in  the  eyes,  Slugenf  d^nterjen.  ||  v, 
fd^mergen,  toci)  tun/  impers.: 
Gram.  18a. 

paint,  ntalen. 

painter,  (artist)  ber  Tlaltx,  -,  (/". 
—in,  -nen). 

palace,  ber  ^aloft,  "e;  ha^  <Sd^lo6, 
cr. 

pale,  blag,  blcid^. 

paper,  ba«  papier,  -e.  ||  (news- 
paper) bie  3cttung,  -en.  ||  (pe- 
riodical) btc  B^itfc^rlft,  -en. 

parents,  btc  ©Item. 

park,  bcr  ^orf,  -t. 

parliament,  ber  9?et(i^«tag,  -e. 
II  member  of  — ,  ber  kcid^^tagS* 
obgcorbnctc,  ppl.  as  s. 

part,  bcr  Xcil,  -e.  ||  (rdle)  btc 
dloUt,  -n.  II  (country)  bic  @c* 
gcnb,  -en.  ||  for  my  — ,  meiner* 
feitS.     II  V.  fid^  trenncn  (Don). 

particular,  a.  (special)  bcfonber. 
II  ad.  bcfonber^. 

party,  (social)  bie  ©efcEfd^aft,  -en. 
II  (political)  btc  "iPartct,  -en. 

pass,  t)orbct'gc]^en*  (f.)  an  (dat.). 
II  —  over,  liber 'gcl^en*  (f.)  (to, 
an  ace). 

passage,  (on  the  ocean)  bie  tlber* 
fa{)rt,  -en. 

past,  a.  ijcrgangen,  Uorbct.  ||  prp. 
(beyond)  ilbcr  .  .  .  (ace.)  ^n^ 
auS.  II  (time)  Gram.  6,  lid, 
II  go  — ,  an  (dat.)  tiorbcigcl^cn* 
(f.).     II  s.  bie  3Scrgangcn{)ett. 

pastor,  ber  ipaftor,  -en;  bcr  ^farrcr, 
-;  bcr  ©ciftiid^c,  a.  as  s. 

path,  bcr  'iPfab,  -e;  bcr  gughjcg,  -e. 

pay,  gaf)Icn,  bcga!)lcn. 

peasant,  ber  ^auer,  -n.  ||  — 
woman,  bic  55(tuertn,  -nen. 

pen,  hk  gcbcr,  -n.  ||  foimtain  — , 
bie  giinfebcr. 


172 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


people,  (nation)  ha^  33olf,  "er, 
II  (persons)  bic  SD^cnfd^en,  bic 
Scute.  II  the  Hamburg  — ,  bie 
hamburger. 

performance,  (on  the  stage)  bic 
2luffil()runfi,  -en. 

perhaps,  ad.  tJielleid^t. 

person,  bic  ^erfon,  -en.  ||  indef. 
pr.  jcmanb. 

persuade,  ilbcrgcugen. 

photograph,  bic  ^{jotograpl^ie,  -n. 

pfennig,  ber  ^fcnniQ,  -c,  (100 
Pfennige=l  Mark). 

pick  out,  (choose)  au^'fud^en,  au«'* 

picttire,  ha^  SBilb,  -er;  baS  ^t^ 
tniilbc,  -  II  —  exhibition,  bic 
(5$em(ilbcau8ftcttung. 

picturesque,  ntalcrifd^. 

piece,  ba«  ©tiirf,  -e.  ||  a  —  of 
good  fortune,  bQ«  ®Iii(f . 

pier,  bcr  SanbungSplalj,  "t. 

place,  bcr  Ort,  -c.  ||  (seat)  bcr 
^lai?,  ''c.  II  (in  a  hook)  bic 
etcEc,  -n.  II  to  take  -,  ftatt'= 
finbcn.* 

plan,  (project)  bcr  ^lan,  "c. 

play,  s.  bag  ©pici,  -c.  ||  (drama) 
ba^  ©(^aufpiel,  -e;  bag  !Drama, 
bic  !Dranicn.      || «;.  fpielen. 

pleasant,  anficncl)in.     ||  (weather) 

please,  gcfaltcn*  impers.  (dot.); 
SBcrgniigcn  madden.  ||  if  you  — , 
bittc.  II  be  — d,  fid^  frcucn  (at, 
llbcr  acc.)y  pfricbcn  fcin. 

pleasure,  bag  SBcrfitiilgcn,  -.  ||  to 
give  — ,  S3crgniigcn  madden. 

plenty,  toicl.  ||  —  of  money,  t)icl 
^clb. 

pocket,  bic  jTafd^c,  -n. 

poem,  bag  (J^cbid^t,  -c. 

poet,  bcr  ^irfitcr,  - 

point,    bcr    ^mntt,    -c.     ||  —   of 


view,  (gtanbpunft,  -e.  ||  to  be 
on  the  —  of,  int  ^cgriff  fcin  ^u. 

policy,  bic  '^Jolitif. 

political,  polltifd^. 

politics,  bic  ?5olitif.  ||  colonial 
-— ,  bk  ^olonialpolitif. 

poor,  arm.     ||  fig.  fd^Icd^t. 

Pope,  bcr  ?apft,  "c. 

popular,  bcltebt. 

popularity,  bie  iBelicbtl^cit. 

population,  bie  ^ctjolferung. 

porter,  bcr  2)ienftmann,  ''cr;  bcr 
©cpftdftriiQcr,  - 

position,  bit  Sage,  -n.  ||  to  be  in 
a  —  to,  in  bcr  Sage  fcin  gu. 

possible,  ntoQlid^. 

post,  bie  ^oft.  II  — office,  ba^ 
^o\tamt,  "cr.  ||  — al  card,  bit 
?5oftfartc,  -n.  picture  —  — , 
bic  Slnfid^tgpoftfarte.  ||  v.  (a 
letter)  auf'geben.* 

poultry,  ba^  ©eflilgcl. 

pound,  ba^  ?^funb,  -e. 

power,  bic  SQJac^t,  "t;  bit  ©ctoalt, 
-en. 

powerful,  mftd^tiQ,  mad^tt)oII. 

practice,  (do  frequently)  iiben. 

prayer,  bag  ®thtt,  -e.  ||  offer  a 
— ,  cin  ®ebet  fpred^en.* 

prefer,  t)or'gie!)cn,*  Ueber  l^abcn. 

prepare,  fid^  t)or'beretten  (for,  auf 
ace).  II  (lessons)  Itxntn,  ma* 
d^cn. 

present,  s.  (time)  bit  ©cficntoart. 
II  for  the  — ,  borlciufig,  filr  ben 
Sluficnbltdf.  II  at  — ,  eben,  jcigt. 
II  (gift)  bag  ©cfc^cnf,  -c. 
II  birthday  — ,  ©eburtgtaggge* 
f d^cnf .  \\a.(of  time)  Qe0cnh)artt8, 
ie^ifi*  II  (of  place)  anmefenb, 
II  to  be  —  at,  bei'n)o]^ncn  (dat.), 

preserve,  (keep)  bcl^altcn.* 

president,  bcr  ^riifibent,  -en;  bcr 
^orfil^cnbc,  -n« 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


173 


pretty,  a.  Ifiilbfdf),  nett,  ntcbltd^. 

price,  bcr  ^xd^,  -c. 

prince,    {title)    bcr    "iPrtns,    -en, 

II  {sovereign)  bcr  giirft,  -en. 
princess,  bic  "iPrtngcffin,  -ncn;  bie 

giirftin,  -ncn. 
principal,  f)auptf ttc^Itd^,  crft,  ^aupt^. 
print,  bcr  i)rn(f,  -c. 
private,  pritjat.     ||  —  lesson,  bie 

^rltoatftunbc,  -n  (of,  bet). 
probable,  njaiirfd^ctnlid^. 
profession,  bcr  Scruf,  -c. 
professor,  bcr  ?5rofcffor,  -en;  ber 

Scf)rcr,  -. 
profitable,  niiigltd^,  nu^brtngcnb. 
program,     'ixxi    ^rogramm,    -c. 

II  theater  — ,  ber  ^^jieatcr^ettcl,  -. 
promise,  tjcrfprcd^cn.*     ||   s.  ba^ 

53crfpre(i^cn. 
property,  ha^  33ermoQcn. 
propose,  bor'fd^lagcn.* 
Protestant,  bcr  ?5rotcftant,  -en. 
proud,  ftols  (of,  auf  ace), 
prove,  bcnjcifcn.* 
Prussia,  ^reufeen,  n. 
Prussian,   a.   prcugtfd^.     ||  s.  bcr 

^renfee,  -n,  -n,  (/.  *iPreu6tn,  -nen) . 
pull,  gtc{)cn.*     II  to  —  out,  {navr 

tical)  l^inau^'fci^^^cn*  (f.). 
pulpit,  bte  ^an^el,  -n. 
pupil,  ber  <B(i)iikx,  -,  (/.  —in,  -ncn). 
purchase,  s.  bcr  (Sinfauf,  "t,     \\  v. 

faufcn,  ctn'fanfen. 
purse,  bic  ^drfe,  -n;  bcr  ©clbbcu* 

tel,  -. 
put,   {place)  fcfeen,  legcn,  ftcllcn, 

brtngen,*    tun.*     ||  to    —    on, 

(clothes)  an'jtcl^en*;  (a  hat)  auf* 

fefecn. 


quaint,  ntcrfn)iirbt0,  clgcnarttfi. 
quarter,  ba«  3StcrtcI,  -. 
queen,  bie  ^ontgin,  -ncn. 


question,  bic  ^^xa^t,  -n.  ||  put  a 
— ,  ask  a  — ,  cine  grage  ftctten 
(an  ace).     \\  v.  fragen. 

quick,  f(^neH. 

quiet,  ruf)tg. 

quite,  ad.  ganj,  gftngltd^,  DiJKtg. 


railroad,  bte  Stfcnbaf)n,  -ncn. 

rain,  bcr  9?egen,  -.    ||  v.  regnen. 

rare,  {unusual)  feltcn. 

rather,  ad.  jicmlid),  ettuaS. 

rattle,  raffein,  fllrrcn. 

raw,    {uncooked)  rof).     ||  {rough) 

rauf). 
reach,  {arrive  at)  crrcid^cn. 
read,  Icfen.*   ||  —  to  or  aloud,  ijor'* 

Icfcn*  {dat.  of  person). 
ready,  {prepared)  bercit.     ||  {firir 

ished)  ferttg. 
realistic,  realtftifd^. 
really,  ad.  in  bcr  Xai,  n)lr!Iid^. 
reason,     {intelligence)    bic    SSer* 

nunft.     II  {cause)  bcr  ®runb,  "c. 

II  by  —  of,  n)egen.     ||  for  that 

very    — ,    gerabe    au^    bicfcm 

©runbe.     ||  for  which  — ,  XQt^^ 

Iialb. 
receive,  {a  thing)  crf)altcn,*  befont* 

men.*  ||  {a  person)  empfangen,* 

bcgrilgcn.     ||  {into  one^ s  family) 

auf'nel^mcn.* 
recent,  a.  ncn,  frifd^.     ||  ad.  neu= 

X\6),  fiiraltd^. 
recognize,  crfenncn.*   ||  {acknowlr 

edge)  an'crfcnnen.* 
recommend,  cmpfcf)Icn.* 
recover,  \\6)  cr{)oIcn  (oon). 
red,  rot. 
refuge,  bte  3uflud^t;  bcr  Su^u^i^- 

ort,  -c.     II  take  — ,  fic^  fliid^tcn. 
refusal,     bic     SBcigcrung,     -en. 

II  {oj  an  invitation)  bic  5lbk^* 

nung,  -en. 


174 


ENGLISH-GEKMAN   VOCABULAKY 


refuse,  intr.  (with  verbs)  DcriDci* 

Qcrn,  fi(j^  njeificrn,     ||  tr.  (reject) 

gurlidt'h)eifcn.*    ||  (an  invitation) 

ob'Iciincn, 
regard,  v.  (observe)  an'fefien,*  bcob* 

ad^tcn.     II  (look  upon)  an'fcl^cn* 

(as,  aU  ace.). 
regards;  sends  — ,  Qrilgcn  laffcn*; 

\i(i)  cmpfel)lcn*  laffen.* 
region,  bit  ©cgenb,  -en, 
reign,  regieren,  ^exv\d)tn, 
relation,    (connection)   bic   ^Bcgic* 

l)un9,  -en.     ||  (relative)   ber  or 

bic  33erh3anbtc,  a.  as  s. 
remain,  bletben*  (f.)/  t)crbletbcn* 

remember,  ftcj  crtnncm  (gren.  or 
an  ace).  ||  (A;eep  in  mind) 
cingebcnf  fein  (gen.),  bcnfcn*  an 
(ace).  II  —  me  kindly  to  him, 
griifecn  ^tc  ibn  Don  mir. 

repair,  au^'beffcrn,  miebcrltier'ftcllcn, 
in  Orbnung  bringcn.* 

repeat,  n)icbcr{)oIen.  ||— edly,  tt)ie* 
bcrbolt,  oftcrg. 

report,  ber  SBcrtd^t,  -e.  ||  (in 
schools)  baS  ^eugni^,  -fc. 

represent,  bar'ftcllen.  ||  (politic- 
al) Dcrtrctcn.*   ||  (theat.)  fpielcn. 

reputation,  ber  9luf. 

reserve,  auf'()eben,*  rcfert)icren» 
II  (of  books)  Dor'merfen. 

resign,  ab'banfen.  ||— the  crown, 
bte  ^rone  nieber'Iefien. 

rest,  bie  dtui)t,  bte  (grbolung. 

rest,  V.  aug'ruben,  ftd^  au^'ruben. 

return,  tr.  guriidf'fenben,  iuxiid'* 
ficben.*  II  intr.  gnrlirf'febren  (f.), 
gurilcf'fommen*  (f.)  (to,  nad^). 

reverent,  ebrerbtettg. 

rheumatism,  ber  di^tumati^mu^. 

Rhine,  ber  di^tin. 

rich,  reid^. 

riches,  ber  OJeld^tunt,  "er. 


ride,  rctten*  (f.)*     II  (in  a  vehicle) 

fabren*  (f.). 
right,  a.  red^t.     ||  ad.  (directly)  fie* 

rabe.    ||  —  through,  mitten  burcb* 
ripe,  reif. 
rise,     (get    up)    auf'fteben*    (f.)» 

II  fig.  ftd^  crbcbcn«*  ||  (of  a  river) 

entfpringen*  (fO» 
river,  ber  glug,  "e;  ber  ©trom,  "c. 
road,  bie  (^trafee,  -n;  ber  SBeg,  -c. 

II  high—,  bie  Sanbftrafec,  -n. 
robe,  (of  state  or  office)  ber  Scalar, 

-e. 
rock,  ber  gel«,  -en. 
roof,  ha^  ^^ad),  "er. 
room,  ba6  S^^^^^^  "* 
row,  (series)  bie  ^eil^e,  -n. 
row,  V.  rnbern. 
royal,  foniglid^. 
ruin,  bte  9?utne,  -n. 
rule,  s.  bie  ^errfd^aft.  ||  v.  regteren. 
ruler,  ber  ^errfd^cr,-,  (/.  -in,-nen) 

II  chief  — ,  Oberbauj)t. 
nm,  rcnnen*  (f.),  laufen*  (f.).     II  to 

—    about,    bcrunt'Iaufen*    (f.). 

II  in  the  long  — ,  auf  bic  ^auer. 
Russia,  S^ufelanb,  n. 


safe,  ftd^er. 

sail,  tr.  fcQcIn.     ||  intr.  (in  a  boat) 

fabren*  (f.). 
sake,  for  the  —  of,  um  (gen.) 

toillen,  toegen  (gen.).    ||  for  your 

— ,  unt  3bi^cth3illen. 
salad,  ber  <Balat,  -c. 
salary,  ber  ©ebalt,  -e. 
sale,  ber  3Serfauf,     "c.  ||  for  — , 

gum  ^erfauf . 
same,   berfelbe,  dem.  pr.  and  o. 

II  at  the  —  time,  gu  gleid^er  3^tt* 

II  the  very  — ,  gang  ba^felbe. 
satisfied,   gufrieben.    ||  (of  food) 

fatt. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


175 


say,  faficn,  ||  —  good-by,  Slbf(5icb 
nci)mcn*  bon, 

scene,  (theat.)  blc  ©scne,  -n. 

school,  bit  <Bd)ult,  -n.  ||  at  — , 
auf  or  in  bcr  — .  ||  to  — ,  in  bic 
— .  II  high  — ,  (classical)  ba^ 
©ijntnafiunt,  pi.  ©tjmnaften. 
II —master,  bcr  ^Sd^ullc^rer,  - 
II  —mate,  ber  <Sd^uIfreunb. 

sea,  bic  ®cc,  -n;  bag  9)2ecr,  -c. 
II  -shore,  bic  ^tttii\tt,  -n.  ||  on 
or  at  the  —shore,  am  9[)?ccrc. 

seat,  bcr  <Biii,  -c;  bcr  6tuf)I,  "c. 
II  (</iea^.)  bcr  ^lai?,  "c. 

seat,  fc^n,  fid^  fcijcn, 

see,  fc()cn.* 

seek,  fud^cn.  ||  (aim  at)  tra(5tcn 
nad^,  ftrcbcn  nad^.  ||  (resort  to) 
fcinc  ^uflud^t  ncl^mcn*  gu,  ||  fu^^ 
d^cn  (after,  for,  nad^). 

seem,  fd^cincn,*  crfd^eincn,* 

select,  aug'h3a{)Icn. 

self,  fcrbft.     II  my-,  id^  fclbft, 

send,  fcnbcn,*  f^idfcn.  ||  —  for, 
rufcn*  laffcn,*  \)oUn  laffcn.*  ||  — 
word,  S^ad^ric^t  fcnbcn,*  fagcn  laf* 
fen.* 

sentence,  bcr  <Bai^,  "t. 

separate,  (independent)  fclbftan* 
big.     II  (disconnected)  cingcln. 

separation,  bic  Xrcnnung,  -en. 

sermon,  bic  "iPrcbigt,  -en. 

servant,  bcr  ©icncr,  -. 

serve,  bicncn  (dat.). 

service,  bcr  ^icnft,  -e.  ||  church 
— ,  bcr  ©ottcgbicnft,  -c. 

set,  fctgcn.  II  —  across,  ttbcr'= 
fci^cn.  II  —  forth,  or  out,  fid^  auf 
ben  SScg  madden,  ouf 'bred^en*  (f.), 
ab'faf)rcn*  (f.).  i|  (begin)  an'* 
fangen.* 

settle,  fcft'fet^n.  ||  —  down,  fid^ 
niebcr'Iaffen.* 

several,  ntcl^rcrc,  cintge. 


severe,  ftrcng  (toward,  QCficn). 
sew,  n(t{)en.     ||  —  on,  an'niil^en. 
shade,  ber  ©d^atten,  -. 
shake,  fd^iittcln.     ||  —  hands,  fidj 

bic  ^anb  ficben*  or  fd^littcln. 
shall,  modal  aux.:  Gram.  19,  II. 
ship,  ba^  ©d^iff,  -c.     ||  air—,  ba€ 

Suftfdfiiff. 
shoot,  fd^icfecn.*     ||  go  — ing,  auf 

bic  Sa^b  gcl)cn*  (f.). 
shop,  bcr  ?abcn,  -;  ba«  ©cfd^iift,  -e. 
short,  !urg. 

show,  gcificn.    ||  (prove)  bctocifcn.* 
sick,  (ill)  fvant 
side,  bic  <©citc,  -n.     ||  on  one  — , 

auf  eincr  ©cite. 
silk,  s.  bic  ©cibc.    ||  a.  feiben. 
silver,  a.  filbcrn,  (^ilbcr*. 
simple,  einfad^. 
since ;  ever  — ,  c.  fcit.     ||  (because) 

ba,  iDcil.   II  prp.  fcit.    ||  —  then, 

fcit!)cr,  fcit  bcr  3cit. 
sincere,  aufrid^tig.     ||  yours  — ly, 

Six  crgcbcncr. 
sing,  finficn.* 

sister,  bic  <Sd^n)cftcr,  -n.     ||  — in- 
law, bic  ©d^mttficrin,  -nen. 
sit,  ft^cn.*     II  —  down,  fid^  fci^cn, 

ll  —  up,  (in  the  evening)  auf 'bici* 

ben*  (f.). 
situate;    be   — ed,   licgcn*    (f.), 

flcIcQcn  fein. 
situation,  bic  Situation,  -en;  bic 

Sage,  -n. 
skate,  s.  bcr  <Sd^Iittfd&u]^,  -c.     ||  v. 

edfiUttfc^ui)  laufcn*  (f.). 
sled,  bcr  ^d^littcn,  -. 
sleep,  bcr  ©d^Iaf. 
sleep,  V.  fd^Iafcn.*  ||  go  to  — ,  ein'* 

fc^Iafcn*  (f.). 
slender,  fd^lanf. 
slow,  langfam. 
small,  ficin. 
snowy,  fc^necbebedft. 


176 


ENGLISH-GEKMAN   VOCABULARY 


so,  ad,  fo,  alfo.  ||  (therefore)  ba^cr. 
Ilisthat— ,  tDirm(5? 

soap,  blc  @ctfc,  -n. 

soldier,  bcr  <Bolbat,  -en. 

some,  indef,  pr.  and  a.  dtoa^, 
cinific^,  cin  hjcnig.  ||  (several) 
ctnific,  ctlic^c,  manege.  ||  —  one, 
iemanb,  ||— thing,  eth)a«.  ||  — 
times,  mand^mal.  ||  —where 
irgenbtDO. 

son,  bcr  @o{)n,  "e. 

song,  haQ  Sicb,  -tv;  ber  ©efano,  "e, 

soon,  od.  balb.  ||  as  —  as,  fobalb 
ate.  II  — er,  frii{)cr.  ||  an  an- 
swer — ,  cine  balbific  Slntmort. 

sorry;  I  am  — ,  e6  tut  mir  Ictb. 
II I  am  —  to  say,  Iciber. 

sort,  bic  Slrt,  -en.  ||  all  — s  of 
(things),  aUcrlct.  ||  what  —  of, 
h)a«  filr:  Gram.  10,  II. 

soup,  bic  (Buppe,  -n. 

source,  bic  OucKc,  -n. 

south,  s.  ber  <Silben.  ||  —ward, 
nad^  <Sitbcn.  ||  — ,  —era,  o. 
filblid^;  (in  comp.)  (Siib*. 

speak,  fprcc^cn.* 

special,  befonber.    \\ad.  befonberg. 

spectacles,  bte  grille,  -n. 

spend,  (money) au^'^thtn,*  \\(time) 
i)crn3cnben  (on,  auf  occ),  Der* 
bringen,*  au'brinflcn.* 

spite;  in  —  of,  prp.  troi^.  ||  ad. 
trojgbcnt. 

spoon,  ber  Sfiffcl,  — .  ||  — ful,  cin 
?dffcl. 

sport,  (athletics)  bcr  (Sport. 

spot,  bcr  Ort,  -e;  bcr  ^lai^,  "c. 

sprain  one's  ankle,  ftd^  ben  gu6 
Hbertrctcn.* 

spring,  ber  grtlfiling. 

square,  (in  a  town)  bcr  ^lalj,  "c. 

stable,  ber  etaK,  "t. 

stage,  (theat.)  bic  ^llf)nc,  -n. 

stand,  ftcl^cn*  (f.). 


start,  ab'fal)rcn*  (f.),  ||  (of  per- 
sons)  auf  bred^cn*  (f.).  ||  —  off, 
fid^  auf  ben  SScg  ma(^cn. 

state,  (condition)  ber  ^uftanb,  'e; 
bic  ?agc,  -n.  ||  (body  politic) 
bcr  ©taot,  -en. 

station,  (railroad)  bcr  ^di)nt}of,  ''e. 
at  the  — ,  auf  bem  ^afinl^of. 
II  (stop)  bic  station,  -en. 

statue,  bic  (Statue,  -n;  bic  ^ilb* 
fttulc,  -n. 

stay,  bcr  Slufcnt^alt,  -e. 

stay,  V.  blciben*  (f.),  bcrnjcilcn. 
II  (live)  n)o()nen  (with,  bci),  fid^ 
auf 'fatten.* 

steady,  feft,  beftitubig. 

steamer,  bcr  !Dantpfer,  -;  ha9 
^ampffd^iff,  -c. 

steep,  ftcil. 

still,  a.  ftill,  rul)tg.  ||  ad.  (even 
yet)  nod^,  nod^  immer.  ||  (all 
the  same)  bod^. 

stock;  in  — ,  ijorrfttig,  auf  Sagcr. 

stone,  ber  (©tcin,  -e. 

stop,  tr.  an'l^altcn,*  auf'Fialtcn.* 
II  intr.  f)alten,*auf 'f)altcn,*  ftct)en* 
blciben*  (f.);  fid^  auf'f)altcn.* 
II  (cease)  auf'prcn  (mit).  ||  s.  ber 
Hufcntlialt,  -e. 

store,  bcr  Saben,  -.  ||  depart- 
ment — ,  ha^  ^auff)au8. 

story,  bic  ©efd^id^tc,  -n.  ||  (narror 
live)  bic  (Srs(i()lung,  -en.  ||  (of 
a  hotise)  bcr  <Stodf,  "c;  ba^  <©todf* 
iDcrf,  -e.  II  in  the  third  — ,  im 
britten  <Btod  or  brei  J^rcppen  l^od^. 

straight,  gcrabc.  ||  (direction) 
ficrabc  au^. 

strain;  —  oneself,  fid^  itbcran'ftren* 
ficn. 

strange,  fremb,  unbefannt. 

stranger,  ber  grembc,  a.  as  s, 

stream,  v.  ftromen. 

street,  bic  ©tragc,  -n. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


177 


strong,  ftarf,  frftfttg.     ||  fig.  ttld^tig. 

II  well  and  — ,  frifd)  unb  gefunb. 
student,  ber  ©c^iiler,  — ,  (/.  —in, 

-ncn),    II   (in  universities)   ber 

©tubcnt,  -en,   (/.  —in,  -ncn), 

II  —  life,  ba^  (Stubcntenlcben, 
study,  s.  ba«  <Stubium,  pi.  (Stu* 

Men,     II  {room)  ba«  (Stubtergim- 

mcr,    II  V.  ftubiercn,  Icmen. 
subscribe,  {newspaper)  fid^  abon* 

nicrcn  (for,  auf  ace). 
substance,  {contents)  ber  Qnl^alt. 
succeed,   {he  successful)  glilden, 

gelingen*  (f.)  impers.:  Gram.  18. 

II  {personal  subject)  (Srfolg  f)aben. 
success,  ber  (Srfolg,  -c. 
such,  fold^,  ein  folc^er:  Gram.  12, 

IV. 
sudden,  ploi^Iid^.     ||  {unexpected) 

unermartet, 
suffrage,  bie  Hbftintmung,  -en. 
suit,    V.     {adapt)    paffen.     ||  {oj 

clothes)    fleiben;    fte^en*    {dat). 

II  s,  SInsuQ,  't. 
sum,  bie  ©umme,  -n. 
sixmmer,  ber  (Sommer,  -.     ||  in 

— ,  im  ^omnter. 
Sunday,  ber  <Sonnta0,  -e. 
superficial,      oberflftd^Iid^.       ||  — 

area,  ber  glad^entnl^alt. 
supper,  ha^  Slbenbeffen,  - 
support,  {provide  for)  berforgen, 

unterf)alten.* 
sure,  fic^er,  bcftimntt. 
surprise,     iiberrafd^en.     ||  to    be 

— ed  at,  fi(^  njunbern  iiber  {ace). 
surround,  umgeben.*    ||  — ings,  bie 

Umgebung. 
swarm,  ber  (Sc^tDarm,  "c.     ||  {of 

people)  bie  SD^enge,  -n. 
swim,  fc^mimmen*  (f.). 
Switzerland,  bk  ©(^meig. 
sword,  ba^  (Sc^tocrt,  -er;  ber  ©e* 

fien,  - 


table,  ber  Xlfd^,  -c.    ||  at  -,  bei 

take,  nef)men»*  ||  —  a  journey, 
eine  9?eife  madden.  ||  —  advice, 
eincnt  diat  folgen.*  ||  —  refuge, 
\ici)  flUd^ten,  ||  —  a  road,  cinen 
S33eg  ge^en,*  cin'fd^lagen.*  ||—  a 
rest,  fid^  au^'rul^en.  ||  —  a 
walk  or  drive,  fpagieren  gel^en* 
(f.)  or  fal^ren*  (f.).  ||  —  into  a 
family,  auf'nef)men.* 

talk,  fpred^en,*  reben  (of,  Don; 
about,  ilber  ace.).  \\  —  over, 
befprec^en.* 

tall,  gro6. 

teacher,  ber  Sel^rer,  -,  (f.  —in, 
-nen). 

tear,  gerreifeen.*  ||  —  off,  ab'ret* 
6en.*    II  —  away,  lo^'reifeen.* 

telegram,  ha^  jtelegramnt,  -e. 

telegraph,  telegrapfiieren. 

telephone,  teIepf)onieren. 

tell,  fagen.     ||  {narrate)  ergft{)Ien. 

tempt,  t)erfud^en.  ||  to  be  — ed, 
in  58erfud^ung  fontmen*  (f.)« 

tennis,  ba6  2;enni«. 

terrace,  bie  2:erraffc,  -n;  blc  5Sc* 
ranba,  53eranben. 

territory,  baS  ©ebiet,  -c. 

than,  aU. 

thank,  banfen  {dat.).  \\  —  you, 
banfe. 

that,  dem.  a.  and  pr.     \\  c.  bafe. 

the,  def.  art.  \\  {with  compara- 
tives) —  ...—,  Je  ..  .  befto, 

theater,  ha^  Z^taitx,  -. 

their (s),  poss.  a.  and  pr. 

then,  ad.  and  c.  bann. 

there,  ad.  ba,  bort.  ||  {indef.  sub- 
ject) e«:  Gram.  7,  V,  and  186. 

they,  pers.  pr.  \\  {indef.  subject) 
man. 

thing,  ha^  2)ing,  -c;  bie  (Sad^e,  -n. 

,   II  many    —s,    t)iele«,    aUerlei. 


178 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


II  such  — s,  bcrQlcld^cn.  ||  strange 
—,  Unficmdl^nUc^c^. 

think,  bcnfcn*  (of,  an  ace),  \\  {be- 
lieve) mctncn,  glaubcn,  ||  {con- 
sider) ()altcn*  filr.  ||  {recollect) 
fic^  crinncrn  (of,  an  ace), 
II  (judge)  urtcUcn,  f c^Itegcn,*  \)aU 
ten.*  II  {take  thought)  nad^'ben* 
fen  (of,  over,  llbcr  ace). 

third,  num.  a,     \\  s.  ba«  ^rittcl,  -. 

this,  dem.  a.  and  pr, 

though,  obfilcid^. 

through,  burd^. 

Thuringia,  npr,  Xi)iixin^tn  n. 
II  —  n,  a.  tl^iirtngtfd^,  X^iixin^tx-, 

Thursday,  bcr  ^Donncr^tag,  -e. 

ticket,  {theat.)  bit  (gintritt^fartc, 
-n.  II  {rail.)  hit  %a\)xtaxtt,  -n. 
II  —  office,  bcr  <Bi^alttx,  -;  bic 
gal^rfartcnau^gabe,  -n;  {theat.) 
hit  ^affc,  -n. 

time,  {duration)  hit  3cit,  -en. 
II  {repetition)  ha^  9JfaI,  -e,  (brei* 
mal).  II  at  the  — ,  gu  jener  3ett, 
bamaB.  ||  in  — ,  gur  rec^tcn 
3elt.  II  up  to  the  present  or 
this  — ,  bi«  iti^t  II  from  that 
—  on,  feit  ber  3cit.  ||  for  a  — , 
cine  3cttlanfi.  ||  to  have  a  good 
-,  fid^  amlifteren.  ||  — table, 
ber  gaf)rplan,  "e.  ||  what  —  is 
it?  h)ic  tjiel  llf)r  ift  eg?  ||  serve 
one's  — ,  bienen. 

tired,  milbe.     ||  fig.  ii^erbrilfrtfi. 

tiresome,  {tedious)  lanfitDetlig. 

title,  bcr  2:ttcl,  -. 

to,  prp.  see  Exercise  21. 

to-day,  l)cute. 

together,  pfammen. 

to-morrow,  morgcn. 

too,  gu,  allgu.     II  {also)  aud^. 

top,  bie  (B^i^t,  -n.  ||  {of  a  moun- 
tain) bcr  ©ipfcl,  -.  II  on  — , 
obcn.     II  from  the  — ,  Don  obcn. 


total,  {whole)  gang. 

tour,  bic  2:our,  -tn;  bcr  Slueflug, 

"c.     II  pedestrian  — ,  bic  gufe* 

tour. 
towel,  ha^  §anbtud^,  "er. 
tower,  bcr  2:urnt,  "e. 
town,  bie  (Stabt,  "t,    \\  down — ,  in 

bie  — ,  nad^  bcr  — . 
train,  {rail.)  bcr  (Sifcnbal^nO^ufi, 

"e.     II  by  — ,  mit  bcr  (Sifcnbal)n. 

II  at  the  — ,  an  ber  ^al^n. 
translate,  v.  ilberfcl^cn  (from  .  .  . 

to,  l)on  or  au«  .  .  .  in  ace.) 
translation,  bic  iibcrfc^ung,  -en. 
travel,    reifcn    (f.).     ||  — er,   bcr 

9?eifenbc,  ppl.  as  s. 
treat,  bcl^anbcln. 
tree,  bcr  iBaunt,  "c. 
tribe,  bcr  (Stamnt,  ''e. 
tributary,  bcr  ^fJcbcnflufe,  "e. 
trip,  bic  9^cife,  -n;  bcr  Hu«f(ug,  \ 

(take,  madden). 
trouble,    {care)    hit   ©orge,    -n. 

II  {effort)  hit  Tmt,  -n. 
true,    tt3df)x.      ||  {faithful)    trcu. 

II  yours  truly,  Ql^r  ergebencr. 
trunk,  bcr  Coffer,  -. 
trustworthy,  guOcrlftfftg. 
try,   oerfud^cn.     ||  {strive)   ftrcben, 

trad^ten    (for,    nad^).     ||  {make 

an  effort)  fid^  an'ftrcngcn. 
turn,  hjcnbcn,*  ftd^  n)enben. 
Turkey,  bie  Xilrfei. 


unable;  to  be  — ,  nid^t  !onnen, 
modal  aux.:  Gram.  19,  II. 

unbotmd,  {of  books)  ungebunben. 

uncle,  bcr  Onfcl,  -. 

under,  prp.  untcr. 

understand,  Ocrftct)cn.* 

unexpected,  uncrtoartet. 

unforttmate,  a.  unfiliidflid^.  ||  ad, 
Itihtv,  ungiudlid^erlocife. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


179 


uniform,  bit  Untform,  -en. 

unite,  tcrclntficn,  cintgcn.  ||  United 
States,  bie  33crctnigten  ©taatcn. 

universal,  attgemein. 

university,  bte  Unioerfitat,  -en. 
II  study  in  a  — ,  auf  eincr  UntDer* 
fitcit  ftubiercn.  ||  teach  in  a  — , 
an  ber  Unit)crfitat  lefiren. 

until,  prp,  and  c.  biS.  ||  not  — , 
crft  h)cnn,  crft  aU. 

up,  ad.  auf,  f)tnauf,  fierouf,  ||  be 
— ,  (past)  gu  (Snbc  feln, 

use,  ber  ®ebrauc§,  bic  ^nmcnbung, 
-en.  II  make  —  of,  gebraud^en, 
beniljjen.  ||  what  —  is  it,  moju 
bient  e^?   ||t;.  gebraud^cn,  benil^en. 

usoful,  niiijlid^,  braud^bar. 

usual,  getuo^nltd^. 


vacation,  bte  gerien  (pL), 
valley,  ha^  Zal,  "er. 
various,  toerfd^ieben. 
vegetables,  bag  ©emiife,  -. 
velvet,  ber  <Bamt,  -e.     ||  —  dress, 

ha^  ©amtfletb. 
very,  fef)r. 
vex,    plagen,    quciten.     ||  (annoy) 

Srgem. 
victory,  ber  <Steg,  -e. 
Vienna,  SSten,  n. 
view,  (prospect)  bte  Hu^ftd^t,  -en 

(of,  auf  ace), 
village,  ba^  ©orf,  "er. 
visit,  V.  befud^en.     ||  s.  ber  SBefud^, 

-e. 
visitor,  ber  ®aft,  "e;  ber  ^efud^,  -e. 
voice,  bic  (Stimme,  -n. 


wait,  tr.  (await)  ertnarten,  ab 'mar* 
ten.  II  intr.  toarten  (for,  auf 
ace).  II —ing-room,  bag  SSarte* 
atmmer,  -,  ber  SSartefaal,  — Jillc. 


waiter,  ber  ^eHncr,  -. 

wake,  —  up,  tr.  tocdCen,  auf'toedfcn. 

II  intr.  erlDad^en,  auf'n)a(^cn. 
walk,  geben*  (f.).   ||  go  for  or  take 

a  — ,  fpa^teren  geben*  (f.),  einen 

©pajtergang  mac^en. 
want,  (desire)  iDoUen,  modal  aux.: 

Gram.  19,   II,    iDilnfd^en,    t)cr* 

langen. 
war,  ber  ^rieg,  -c. 
warm,    toarm.     ||  (feeling)    beget* 

ftert. 
watch,  bte  jtafd^enul^r,  -en.     ||  — 

maker,  ber  Ul^nnad^er,  -. 
watch,  V.  beobad^ten. 
water,   ba^    Staffer,    -.    ||  — ing- 

place,  ber  kurort,  -c;  bag  ^ab, 

wave,  —  to,  gu'toinfen  (dat.). 

way,  (path,  road)  ber  iJBeg,  -e;  bie 
©trafee,  -n.  ||  (manner)  bte 
Slrt,  -en;  bte  SBeife,  -n;  ||  in 
this  — ,  auf  biefe  Setfe.  ||  by — 
of  (via),  liber  (ace).  ||  in  no  — , 
feinegtoegg.  ||  in  one's  — ,  (ob- 
stritcting)  jemanbent  tm  SBege. 
II  on  the  — ,  untertoegg.  ||  on  the 
—  home,  auf  bent  ^eimtueg. 

we,  pers.  pr. 

wear,  tragen.* 

weary,  (tired)  tniibc  (gen.), 

weather,  bag  SSetter,  -. 

Wednesday,  ber  Mttnjod^. 

week,  bie  ^od^e,  -n.  ||  (weekly) 
n)dd&entlid^.  ||  once  a  — :  Gram. 
20,  III. 

weight,  bag  ®en)td^t,-t.  \\(import- 
ance)  bte  ilKit^tigfeit,  bie  ©eltung. 

welcome,  a.  h)i(Ifommen. 

well,  a.  (healthy)  gefunb.  ||  ad. 
gut,  h)o{)I.  II  to  be  —  off,  gut 
baran  fein,  eg  gut  b<i^cn  (with, 
bet).  II  —  known,  tooblbefannt. 
II  to  Hke  — ,  gem  f)aben. 


180 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


west,  s.  ber  SSeftcn.     ||  —ward, 
nad^   SSeftcn.     ||  — ,   —era,    a, 

wet,  nafe. 

what,  inter,  and  rel.  a.  and  pr. 

II  —ever,  —soever:  Gram.  11, 

Ud,  and  12,  VI. 
wheel,  ba«  9?ab,  "er,     ||  {bicycle) 

ha^  ga()rrab. 
when,   ad.    (inter.)   h)ann,     ||   c. 

(posO  al^.     II  (indef.  and  fut.) 

iDcnn. 
where,  ad.  n)0,     ||  (whither)  hjo* 

Ijliti.  II  (whence)  h)oi)cr:  GVam.  29. 
whether,  c.  ob. 

which,  inte^r.  and  rel.  pr.  and  a. 
while,  s.  hit  SSeilc;  bit  3cit,  -cn» 

11  a  (little)  — ,  cine  furgc  3cit. 

11  worth  one's  — ,  bcr  2)^ii{)c  h)ert. 

II  c.  to'dl)xtnb. 
who,  reZ.  or  m/er.  pr.     \\  —ever: 

Gram.  11,  lid,  and  12,  VI. 
whole,  a.  gang.  ||  s.  baS  ®angc.  ||on 

the  — ,  im  gangen. 
why,  od.  toarunt,  n)e§]^alb,  tot^ 

totqtn. 
wicked,  fd^Icd^t,  bofc. 
widow,  bie  iBSitmc,  -n. 
wife,  bie  grau,  -en;  bie  ©attin, 

-ncn» 
wild,  h)ilb. 
will,  ber  2Biae,-n. 
wiU,  modal  aux.:  Gram.  19,  II. 
willing,  bcreit,  mittig. 
WiUiam,  aBilbcIm. 
window,  bag  genftcr,  -♦ 
winter,  ber  SKinter,  -. 


wish,  ber  ilSnnfcJ,  "t, 

wish,  njilnfd^en.  ||  (desire)  berlan* 
gen  (for,  nad^), 

with,  prp.  mit.  ||  together  — , 
nebft,  fontt.  ||  (in  the  house  of) 
bet.  II  go — (any  one),  ntitge^n.* 

without,  prp.  of)ne. 

woman,  bte  gran,  -en. 

wonderful,  prac^tDoH,  h)nnberbar. 

wood,  (forest)  ber  ^alb,  "er* 
II  (timber)  ba«  ©olg. 

word,  ha^  iEBort,  -e  or  '^tx.  \\  (in- 
formation) bie  S^ad^ric^t,  -en. 
II  to  send  — ,  fagen  laffen.* 

work,  bie  5lrbeit, -en.  ||  (the fin- 
ished product)  bag  SBerf,  -e. 

work,  arbeiten  (at,  an  dat.). 

workman,  ber  Strbeiter,  -. 

worse,  a.  fd^led^ter,  f^Iimmcr. 
II  —  and  — ,  intnter  fd^Iimmer. 

worth,  a.  totvt  (gen.). 

write,  fd^reiben.* 


year,  ha^  3ci6r,  -e.  ||  two  — s 
(old),  gtoeiia^rig,  a.  \\  for  — s, 
feit  Qal^ren,  jal^relang. 

yes,  ia. 

yesterday,  geftern.  ||  the  day  be- 
fore — ,  t)orgeftern. 

yet,  ad.  and  c.  nod^  immer, 
nod^.  II  (nevertheless)  ahtv,  bod^. 
II  (already)  fd^on.  ||  not  — ,  nod& 
nid^t. 

you,  pers.  pr. 

young,  lung. 

your(s),  poss.  a.  and  pr. 


926709 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


I  t 


